UME INGEPAC EF LD Eng PDF

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
INGEPAC EF-LD
User Manual
UME_INGEPAC_LD_eng Rev. B (02/16)
© All rights reserved. No part of

this publication may be
reproduced, by whatever means,
without the prior written
permission of Ingeteam Technology.
Ingeteam Power Technology reserves

the right to make changes without
prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................... 9

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................... 9
1.2 MODEL ENCODING ............................................................ 11
1.3 USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 12
1.4 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) ........................................ 13
1.5 Link failover redundancy .................................................. 13
1.6 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) ............................... 14
1.7 INTERCONNECTIONS .......................................................... 14
1.7.1 CPU ................................................................... 14
1.7.2 Power supply .......................................................... 14
1.7.3 Input/output cards .................................................... 15
1.7.4 Analogue inputs ....................................................... 18
2. HARDWARE ............................................................. 23
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES ..................................................... 23
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) .................................................. 23
2.1.2 19” chassis ........................................................... 23
2.2 REAR TERMINALS ............................................................ 24
2.2.1 Configuration options ................................................. 24
2.2.2 Half chassis (½ 19”) .................................................. 24
2.2.3 19” chassis ........................................................... 25
2.2.4 Closed Terminals ...................................................... 26
2.2.5 Wire section .......................................................... 26
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE ........................................................... 26
2.3.1 Half chassis (½ 19”) .................................................. 26
2.3.2 19” chassis ........................................................... 27
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................. 28
2.4.1 Power supply voltage .................................................. 28
2.4.2 Digital outputs ....................................................... 29
2.4.3 Digital inputs ........................................................ 30
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS .................................................. 30
2.4.5 Current and voltage circuits .......................................... 31
2.4.6 Front communication ................................................... 32
2.4.7 Rear communications ................................................... 32
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .................................................. 34
2.6 TESTS ..................................................................... 35
2.6.1 Climatic test ......................................................... 35
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests ................................ 35
2.6.3 Electromagnetic tests ................................................. 36
2.6.4 Mechanical tests ...................................................... 36
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ................................................. 37
3.1 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION ................................................... 37
3.1.1 Differential protection communications ................................ 39
3.1.2 Differential current calculation ...................................... 45
3.1.3 Instantaneous differential protection ................................. 52
3.1.4 Percentage differential protection .................................... 54
3.1.5 Directional supervision ............................................... 55
3.1.6 Saturation detector ................................................... 58
3.1.7 2nd Harmonic Restraint ................................................ 59
3.1.8 2nd Harmonic blocking ................................................. 61
3.1.9 Charging current compensation ......................................... 63
3.1.10 87N Restricted earth differential .................................... 63
3.1.11 Over-excitation by 5th harmonic ...................................... 66
3.1.12 Over-excitation v/f. ................................................. 67
3.1.13 Function 86 .......................................................... 69
3.2 DISTANCE UNITS (21) ....................................................... 70
3.2.1 Mho ................................................................... 77
Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

User Manual III
INDEX 
3.2.2 Quadrilateral ......................................................... 80

3.2.3 Timing Type for Tripping .............................................. 84
3.2.4 Zone 1 Extension ...................................................... 87
3.2.5 High Speed zone ....................................................... 89
3.2.6 Phase selector ........................................................ 92
3.2.7 Fault detection ....................................................... 94
3.2.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision ................................ 96
3.2.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines ........................... 106
3.3 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS ..................................................... 107
3.3.1 Signals .............................................................. 108
3.3.2 Commands ............................................................. 109
3.4 CURRENT UNITS ............................................................ 111
3.4.1 General overcurrent description ...................................... 111
3.4.2 Directional characteristics .......................................... 115
3.4.3 Polarization memory monitoring ....................................... 133
3.4.4 Series compensation .................................................. 136
3.4.5 Phase overcurrent .................................................... 137
3.4.6 Neutral overcurrent .................................................. 138
3.4.7 Grounding overcurrent ................................................ 139
3.4.8 Unbalanced overcurrent ............................................... 140
3.4.9 2nd harmonic restraint ............................................... 142
3.4.10 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking ....................................... 144
3.4.11 Broken conductor .................................................... 146
3.4.12 Thermal image ....................................................... 148
3.4.13 Undercurrent ........................................................ 153
3.4.14 Stub bus ............................................................ 154
3.5 VOLTAGE UNITS ............................................................ 156
3.5.1 General description .................................................. 156
3.5.2 Phase overvoltage .................................................... 159
3.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage ............................................ 161
3.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage ........................................ 163
3.5.5 Phase undervoltage ................................................... 164
3.6 FREQUENCY UNITS .......................................................... 166
3.6.1 Frequency ............................................................ 166
3.6.2 Frequency rate of change ............................................. 169
3.7 POWER UNITS .............................................................. 172
3.7.1 General .............................................................. 172
3.7.2 Minimum real power ................................................... 174
3.7.3 Maximum real power ................................................... 174
3.7.4 Real power inversion ................................................. 174
3.7.5 Reactive power inversion ............................................. 175
3.7.6 Minimum apparent power ............................................... 175
3.7.7 Maximum apparent power ............................................... 176
3.8 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ........................................................ 176
3.9 FUSE FAILURE ............................................................. 177
3.10 POWER SWING ............................................................. 180
3.11 SWITCH ONTO FAULT ....................................................... 186
3.12 BREAKER FAILURE ......................................................... 190
3.12.1 Single pole breaker Failure ......................................... 190
3.13 TRIP LOGICS ............................................................. 194
3.13.1 67NQ Remote Protection Schemes ...................................... 194
3.13.2 Z Remote Protection Schemes ......................................... 214
3.13.3 Direct trip ......................................................... 231
3.13.4 External trips ...................................................... 233
3.13.5 Teleprotection serial communication ................................. 234
3.13.6 Trip logic .......................................................... 234
3.14 CURRENT SUPERVISION ..................................................... 237
3.15 VT SUPERVISION .......................................................... 238

User Manual IV
INDEX 
4. BREAKER ............................................................. 240

4.1 BREAKER LOGICS ........................................................... 240
4.1.1 Breaker status ....................................................... 240
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic .................................. 244
4.1.3 Locking logic ........................................................ 245
4.1.4 Open pole detector ................................................... 247
4.1.5 Pole discordance ..................................................... 251
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION ............................................ 253
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION ...................................... 258
5. DISCONNECTOR ........................................................ 261
6. AUTOMATISMS ......................................................... 263
6.1 SYNCHRONISM .............................................................. 263
6.1.1 Undervoltage permission .............................................. 265
6.1.2 Synchronism permission ............................................... 266
6.1.3 Two breakers application ............................................. 269
6.2 COUPLER .................................................................. 271
6.2.1 Two breakers application ............................................. 274
6.3 RECLOSER ................................................................. 275
6.3.1 Settings, signals and commands ....................................... 275
6.3.2 General operation .................................................... 284
6.3.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask .................................. 287
6.3.4 Fault type selection ................................................. 291
6.3.5 Breaker open timeout ................................................. 291
6.3.6 Number of reclosures available ....................................... 291
6.3.7 Reference voltage monitoring ......................................... 292
6.3.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time ...................................... 293
6.3.9 Pausing of reclosure time ............................................ 293
6.3.10 Incomplete sequence block ........................................... 294
6.3.11 Synchronism monitoring .............................................. 294
6.3.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring ............................ 295
6.3.13 52 closure timeout .................................................. 295
6.3.14 Recloser statuses ................................................... 295
6.3.15 Application with two breakers ....................................... 304
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION .................................... 309
7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ..................................................... 309
7.1.1 Differential functions ............................................... 311
7.1.2 Distance functions ................................................... 311
7.1.3 General protection functions ......................................... 312
7.1.4 Breaker .............................................................. 312
7.1.5 Breaker and a half supervision ....................................... 313
8. FAULT LOCATOR ....................................................... 315
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION ........................................................ 317
8.1.1 Fault detection ...................................................... 318
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering ................................... 318
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type ...................................... 318
8.1.4 Distance calculation ................................................. 318
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS .............................................. 319
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE .................................................... 320
9. MONITORING .......................................................... 322
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING ......................................... 322
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING ................................................... 323
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX ............................................. 324
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING ...................................... 325
9.5 UNIT CHECKS .............................................................. 325

User Manual V
INDEX 
10. CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 328

10.1 CID ..................................................................... 328
10.1.1 Data Storage ........................................................ 328
10.1.2 Updating CID.ParamRev ............................................... 328
10.2 GENERAL ................................................................. 328
10.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS ................................. 330
10.3.1 Current ............................................................. 330
10.3.2 Frequency and voltage ............................................... 331
10.3.3 Power and energy .................................................... 331
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS .......................................................... 332
10.4.1 Inputs .............................................................. 332
10.4.2 Outputs ............................................................. 332
10.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker .................................. 333
10.5 LEDS .................................................................... 334
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node ................................................... 334
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node .................................................. 335
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF ................................................ 335
10.7 NAMES ................................................................... 336
10.8 IPRV nodes configuration ................................................ 336
10.8.1 General IPRV settings ............................................... 336
10.8.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings ..................................... 337
11. SYNCHRONIZATION ................................................... 339
11.1 GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................................ 339
11.2 IRIG-B .................................................................. 341
11.3 SNTP .................................................................... 341
11.3.1 Settings ............................................................ 341
11.4 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850 ................................................. 343
12. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ........................................ 344
12.1 STATUS REPORT ........................................................... 344
12.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT ............................................. 347
12.3 FAULT REPORT ............................................................ 348
12.4 INCIDENT REPORT ......................................................... 350
12.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT ........................................... 351
12.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT ................................................. 353
12.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT .............................................. 354
12.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ........................................................... 355
13. USB ACCESS ........................................................ 359
13.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS ..................................................... 359
13.2 LOADING CID ............................................................. 360
14. FTP ACCESS ........................................................ 361
15. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS ............... 362
15.1 SIGNALS ................................................................. 362
15.1.1 Type A signals ...................................................... 362
15.1.2 Type B signals ...................................................... 363
15.1.3 Type C signals ...................................................... 364
15.1.4 Type D signals ...................................................... 365
15.2 MEASUREMENTS ............................................................ 366
15.3 COUNTERS ................................................................ 367
16. LOGICS ............................................................ 369
16.1 CONTROL LOGICS .......................................................... 369
16.2 PROTECTION LOGICS ....................................................... 370
16.3 DATABASE SIGNALS ........................................................ 371

User Manual VI
INDEX 
17. IEC 61850 COMMANDS ................................................ 372

17.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS .............................................. 372
17.2 COMMAND BLOCKS .......................................................... 375
17.2.1 Command blocks by command hierarchies ............................... 376
17.2.2 Blocks due to invalid/unknown/reached bay ........................... 378
17.3 COMMANDs for other positions ............................................ 379
17.4 COMMAND SADDRESS ........................................................ 379
18. RIO MODULES ....................................................... 381
18.1 CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 381
18.2 OPERATION ............................................................... 381
19. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE ..................... 383
20. RECEPTION GOOSES .................................................. 384
20.1 LGOS MODEL .............................................................. 384
20.1.1 Configuration values ................................................ 384
20.1.2 Supervision values .................................................. 385
20.1.3 Checked values ...................................................... 385
21. TCP/IP NETWORK CONFIGURATION ...................................... 387
21.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 387
21.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION ...................... 387
21.3 GOOSES .................................................................. 388
22. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY ...................................... 389
22.1 GENERAL OPERATION ....................................................... 389
22.1.1 Display structure ................................................... 389
22.1.2 Organization of the pages ........................................... 389
22.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys .................................... 390
22.1.4 Graphics pages ...................................................... 390
22.1.5 I/O pages ........................................................... 393
22.1.6 Event pages ......................................................... 394
22.1.7 Protection event pages .............................................. 395
22.1.8 Alarm pages ......................................................... 396
22.1.9 Device status pages ................................................. 397
22.1.10 Fault pages ........................................................ 400
22.1.11 Measurement pages .................................................. 406
22.1.12 Menu to other screens page ......................................... 407
22.1.13 Shortcut menu page ................................................. 408
22.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES ...................................... 409
22.2.1 Operation of the menus .............................................. 409
22.2.2 Password management ................................................. 418
22.3 OTHER SCREENS ........................................................... 420
22.3.1 Contrast setting .................................................... 420
22.3.2 USB treatment ....................................................... 420
22.3.3 System Information .................................................. 421
22.3.4 CID validation ...................................................... 422
22.3.5 Security Logs ....................................................... 422
22.3.6 Network Configuration ............................................... 423
23. DNP PROTOCOL ...................................................... 424
23.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................ 424
23.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS .................................................. 424
23.3 TABLES .................................................................. 428
23.3.1 Digital status table ................................................ 429
23.3.2 Analog values table ................................................. 429
23.3.3 Counters table ...................................................... 430
23.3.4 Commands table ...................................................... 430

User Manual VII
INDEX 
23.4 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................... 431

23.5 OBJECT TABLE ............................................................ 432
24. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS .................................. 435
24.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES ................................................ 435
24.2 ANSI CURVES ............................................................. 448
24.3 USER CURVES ............................................................. 457
25. MEASUREMENT LIST .................................................. 459
26. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................ 464
26.1 ERROR DETECTION ......................................................... 465
26.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE ................................................ 466

User Manual VIII
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.

Table 1 Functions depending on model
LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

Differential functions
87: differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)    
Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)    
87N: Restricted earth    
V/f Overexcitation   
5º harmonic level Overexcitation   
Directional supervisión    
Saturation detector    
Load compensation    
86 function    
Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones)  
Mho Characteristic (5 zones)  
21 High Speed  
Zone 1 extension  
Double lines  
Lines with series compensation  
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers  
Common protection functions
SOTF Switch onto fault   
27 Undervoltage  
59 Overvoltage  
59N Zero sequence overvoltage  
47 V2 overvoltage  
Minimun voltage  
Frequency (81 M/m)  
Frequency rate of change (81R)  
3x50/51 (67)     (1)
50N/51N (67N)    
50G/51G. Earthing overcurrent   
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q)     (1)
46BC Broken conductor    
50CSC Second harmonic restraint    
50CSC Second and fifth harmonic restraint   
37 Undercurrent   
49 Thermal image    
32 Power units  
Stub bus  
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21)  
Teleprotection (67/67Q)  
Monitoring units
68LE Load encroachment  
68FF Fuse failure   
78 Power swing  
Fault locator
Fault locator   
Breaker monitoring
kI2 breaker monitoring per pole    
Closing and trip circuit monitoring    
Excessive number of trips    
Open pole/Dead line detector   

User Manual 9
Breaker status logic    

Pole discordance    
50BF Breaker failure
Breaker failure with monopolar/tripolar trip    
Breaker failure with low load    
Automatism
Synchronism   
Recloser one/three poles    
Coupling   
Data Acquisition Functions
Phase and neutral current measurements    
Phase and synchronism voltage measurements   
Real and reactive power   
Real and reactive energy   
Historical event, protection event and fault recording    
Breaker monitoring    
Oscillographs    
Historical reports    
(1) In LD3 model, these units are not directional.
LD2 model is specific for breaker and a half. The analog input 7 can be selected between
Polarization current and Parallel line Neutral current 2
Available analog inputs in models

Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
LD0 I A I B I C I neutral Ipol ---- ---- Vs1 V neutral V A V B V C
LD1 I A I B I C I neutral Ipol In2 Vs2 Vs1 V neutral V A V B V C
LD2 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 V A V B V C
LD3 I A I B I C I neutral ---- ---- ---- ---- V neutral ---- ---- ----
The LD0 and LD3 models only operate on a breaker.
The LD1 and LD2 models operate on two breakers.

User Manual 10
1.2 MODEL ENCODING
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF LD MODEL INGEPAC EF- L D A
MODEL
87, 87N, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, SOTF, 68FF, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N,
50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Fault locator
0
87, 87N, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, 21,POTT (21),POTT (67N/67Q),
SOTF, 68LE,68FF,78, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 59,
27, 59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault locator 1
87, 87N, 52 ½, 5th armonic and V/f overexcitation, 21,POTT (21),POTT (67N/67Q),
SOTF, 68LE,68FF,78, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G, 67Q, 46FA, 37, 49, 59,
27, 59N, 47, 81M/m, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault locator 2
87, 87N, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50/51Q, 46FA, 49, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF 3
EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

No A
Yes B
HOUSING
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with configurable keyboard A
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with predefined keyboard Note 1 B
Chassis 19" 4U with configurable keyboard C
Chassis 19" 4U with predefined keyboard Note 1 D
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 125 Vdc + 4DO A
Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 220 Vdc + 4DO B
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 24 Vdc + 4DO C
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 48 Vdc + 4DO D
Redundant PS 48 Vcc / 48Vcc F
Redundant PS 125 Vcc / 125Vcc G
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

A GFO COM-1
B PFO COM-2
C RS232C COM-3 (Note 9)
D RS485 COM-4 (Note 10)
E FO singlemode 60km (ST) Note 11 COM-5
F FO singlemode 60km (LC) Note 11 COM-6
I C37.94 FO multimode (ST) Note 11
M FO singlemode 20-120km (ST) Note 11
N FO singlemode 20-120km (LC) Note 11
X No port
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
G GFO (ETH with PRP redundancy) Note 6
H RJ45 (ETH with PRP redundancy) Note 6
I GFO (Link failover redundancy) Note 8
J RJ45 (Link failover redundancy) Note 8
K LC (Link failover redundancy) Note 8
L LC
M GFO (ETH with HSR redundancy) Note 6
N RJ45 (ETH with HSR redundancy) Note 6
X No port
TERMINALS
Pin type standard terminals A
Closed terminals Note 2 B
Closed terminals for analog inputs and pin type standard terminals for the rest C
I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

BOARD SELECTION (Note 3)
A No board Board 2 (Note 4)
B 11 DI (24V dc) + 9 DO Board 3
C 11 DI (48 Vdc) +9 DO Board 4 (Note 5)
D 11 DI (125 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 5 (Note 5)
E 11 DI (220 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 6 (Note 5)
F 32 DI (24 Vdc) Board 7 (Note 5)
G 32 DI (48 Vdc)
H 32 DI (125 Vdc)
I 32 DI (220 Vdc)
J 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 independent DO
K 16 DI (48 Vdc)-8 independent DO
L 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 independent DO
M 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 independent DO
N 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 16DO
O 16 DI (48Vdc)- 16 DO
P 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 16DO
Q 16 DI (220 Vdc)- 16DO
R 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 AI Note 7
S 16 DI (48Vdc)-8 AI Note 7
T 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 AI Note 7
U 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 AI Note 7
V 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 7
W 16 DI (48Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 7
X 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 7
Y 16 ED (220 Vcc)- 8 EA (4 aisladas) Nota 7
0 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
1 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
2 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
3 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
4 8DI (24Vcc) + 8DO
5 8DI (48Vcc) + 8DO
6 8DI (125Vcc) + 8DO
7 8DI (220Vcc) + 8DO
Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Note 2: The terminals for the power supply inputs are pyn type standard terminals.
Note 3:To know the order of the boards in the rack, consult the number of the terninals on the rear views of each chassis.
Note 4: In the 19" chassis, board 2 only available with pin type standard terminals.
Note 5: Only available for 19" chassis.
Note 6: For line differential protection consult Ingeteam. PRP/HSR only available for ETH-1. With this option ETH-2 can only be of the same type as the ETH-1 (GFO or RJ45).
Note 7: Standard analogue inputs configuration: +/-5mA, +/-5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-20mA, +/-20mA. Consult other configurations.
Note 8:This option requires selecting both ETH1 as ETH2 and supports any combination of options I , J and K.
Note 9: Channel 1 for line differential protection communications
Note 10: Channel 2 for line differential protection communications
Note 11: Only for communications between devices.

User Manual 11
Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis
Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”
Figure 3 Redundant power supply ½ 19” chassis Figure 4 Redundant power supply 19” chassis
1.3 USER INTERFACE
Local. The front board is equipped with:
 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

 4 scroll keys:  (Up),  (Down),  (Left),  (Right)
 3 general keys  (Enter), ESC (Escape), MENU
 Function keys depending on the model:

User Manual 12
 5 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF)

 7 function keys (I, O, F1...F5)
 12 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF, F1…F7)
 16 function keys (I, O, F1…F14)
 19 fully assignable LEDs
 1 unit operation LED
 USB 2.0 front port for downloading reports and loading CID
 Front RJ45 port for communications
1.4 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)
The PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is a redundancy communication protocol defined in

the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one of the redundancy mechanism recommended in IEC 61850
networks.
In the PRP protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based
on the simultaneous transmission and reception of data via both independent ports.
In PRP solutions two independent ethernet networks are used. Each device is attached to
both networks and sends and receives all the frames over both LANs simultaneously, consumes
the first frame and discards the duplicate. With this mechanism PRP ensures zero-packet
loss and zero recovery time upon single network failures.
The two LANs have no connection between them and are assumed to be fail-independent, both
are identical in protocol at the MAC-LLC level, but they can differ in performance and
topology.
With the PRP protocol additional information called RCT (Redundancy Control Trailer) is
added to the Ethernet frame at the link layer in order to control redundancy. This
information is transparent for devices that do not use PRP protocol and it is used by PRP
devices to discard the duplicate frames.
Devices without PRP can be connected to one of the redundant ethernet networks but in that
case they only can communicate with the devices connected to the same network. In order to
enable redundancy in non-PRP devices an external converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box)
can be used.
1.5 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY
With the link failover redundancy the device uses two ethernet ports for a redundant
communication.
In this redundancy mode the device communicates by one of the ethernet ports and if there
is a link failure in that port, switches to the redundant port if the link status of that
port is active.
If the link status of the passive port returns to normal, the communication is maintained
in the active port and the devices only change the active port in case of link failure.
In this redundancy, unlike the case of PRP redundancy, it should not be used two
independent ethernet networks. The two Ethernet ports of the equipment must be connected to
different network switches, but must belong to the same network, so that the switches
should be connected at some point in the network.
This switching is almost instantaneous, allowing even gooses redundancy without loss or
minimal loss (1 repetition). Regarding communications with IEC 61850 clients, depending on
the ring reconfiguration time communications, we even could not lose the connection or the
open session.

User Manual 13
1.6 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)
The HSR is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it
is one of the redundancy mechanism recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the HSR protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based
on the simultaneous transmission and reception of data via both independent ports.
In the HSR networks no external switches are used, instead each device has two ring ports,
and all the devices are connected in a ring topology, with one port of the device connected
to the previous device and the other connected to the following device.
For each frame to send, the device sends it duplicated over both ports. So one frame
travels in the ring in the clockwise direction and the other frame travels in counter-
clockwise direction. Each direction is treated as a separate network. So if there is a
failure in one point of the network, the frames reach the destination using the other
direction in the ring. With this mechanism HSR ensures zero-packet loss and zero recovery
time upon single network failure.
An HSR tag is placed at the beginning of each frame to allow early identification of
frames. With this tag each device can identify the HSR tagged traffic and reject the
duplicated frames coming from the both ports of a device and the frames circulating in the
ring. When a device receives a frame directed to it or that it sent, the frame is discarded
and it is not forwarded again in the ring. The frame is also discarded if it is a frame
that it already sent in the same direction (i.e. multicast frames).
Devices within the ring are restricted to be HSR-capable IEDs. In order to enable
redundancy in non-HSR devices an external converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be
used.
1.7 INTERCONNECTIONS
Interconnections depend on the modules selected. The connections associated to each of the
modules are indicated, and thus the diagram will depend on the modules installed.
1.7.1 CPU
Figure 5 3-contact relay and IRIG-B
1.7.2 Power supply

The two options are a redundant power supply and a simple power supply with
inputs/outputs.
Figure 6 Simple power supply

User Manual 14
Figure 7 Double power supply
1.7.3 Input/output cards

The I/O modules available are:
 Module 1 (Figure 8): Equipped with 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs grouped
as follows:
 Inputs: 4 independent + 3 with a common point + 4 with a common point.
 Outputs: 5 independent + 3 with a common point + 1 switched (3 contacts).
Figure 8 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs
 Module 2 (Figure 9): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 16 with a common point.
 Module 3 (Figure 10): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs
grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent.

User Manual 15
 Module 4 (Figure 11): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

 Inputs: 16 with a common point + 16 with a common point.
Figure 11 Module 32 inputs
 Module 5 (Figure 12): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs
grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent. The analogue inputs have standard configuration,
that could be changed among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V,
±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 12 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs
 Module 6 (Figure 13): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4
isolated) grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent, 4 of them are isolated and 4 have a common point.
The analogue inputs have standard configuration, that could be changed
among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
(isolated) (isolated) (isolated) (isolated)
+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 13 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

User Manual 16
 Módule 7 (Figure 14): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 high breaking capacity
outputs (hbco) and 4 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 8 independent.
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the
4 standard outputs are 5 to 8 (pins 10 a 17).
Figure 14 Módule 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) y 4 digital outputs
 Módule 8 (Figure 15): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs grouped as
follows:
 Inputs: 8 independent.
 Outputs: 8 independent.
Figure 15 Módule 8 inputs, 8 outputs

User Manual 17
1.7.4 Analogue inputs

The following diagram shows the configuration of the analogue inputs:
LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

User Manual 18
1.7.4.1 Wiring diagrams

The following figures show different interconnection options for the analogue inputs,
in accordance with the available inputs.
Figure 16 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 19
Figure 17 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 20
Figure 18 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, V0 and Vsyn

User Manual 21
Figure 19 Wiring diagram 52 ½ Iphase, Vphase and Vsyn
1.7.4.1 Topology
The following figures show different topologies of the line differential protection.
In the communication between devices phase currents and digital signals are sent along
with synchronization data.
Figure 20 single breaker
Figure 21 Breaker and a half

User Manual 22
HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)
2.1.2 19” chassis

User Manual 23
HARDWARE 
2.2 REAR TERMINALS
The rear section will vary in accordance with the options selected for the unit. The
following figures show various possible configurations.
2.2.1 Configuration options

The rear section options may vary depending on the options selected:
 Power supply unit. There are two options available:

 Simple with inputs/outputs. Equipped with a 3-contact terminal with power
supply with screw and a 17-contact terminal with screw (Figure 22).
 Redundant. Equipped with two 3-contact terminals for each of the power
supplies.
 Inputs/outputs cards. All the input/output modules have two 17-contact
terminals with screw.
 CPU. Equipped with a 6-contact terminal with screw for the digital output of 3
contacts and the IRIG-B inputs. Equipped with different Ethernet and standard
communications module options (Figure 5).
 Analogue. Equipped with two 12-contact terminals with screw.
 Communications. To choose between:
 Ethernet: RJ45 and G.F.O.
 Standard: RS232, RS485, G.F.O. and P.F.O.
Pin type or closed type terminals may be chosen for the analogue and input/output
terminals.

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to
bottom):
 Simple/redundant power supply

 1 or 2 I/O modules
 Communication ports in the CPU
 Analogue card with up to 12 transformers
Figure 22 shows rear section with the options:
 Simple power source with inputs/outputs

 2 input/output cards
 CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard RS232+RS485+GFO+PFO

User Manual 24
HARDWARE 
Figure 22 Rear section with analogue and simple source
Figure 23 Rear section without analogue and simple source
2.2.3 19” chassis

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to
bottom and left to right):
 Simple/redundant power supply

 1 or no I/O modules
 Communication ports in the CPU
 Choose between analogue card, I/O module or nothing
 Number of I/O modules
In Figure 24 the next options can be seen:
 Simple power source with inputs/outputs

 5 input/output cards
 CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard with 3 RS232 + 2 GFO + PFO

User Manual 25
HARDWARE 
Figure 24 Rear section with analogue and simple source
2.2.4 Closed Terminals

The next figures show the closed terminals used in the digital I/O boards (Figure 25)
and the transformer inputs (V/I) (Figure 26).
Figure 25 Closed Terminals I/O boards
Figure 26 Closed Terminals transformer inputs (V/I)
2.2.5 Wire section

The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 12 to 18 ( 4 mm2 to
0.8mm2) .
 Supply terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2)
 I/O terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2)
 Current and voltage terminals:

Wire section AWG 12 (4 mm2)
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE

There are two half-chassis front options (½ 19” and 5U):

User Manual 26
HARDWARE 
 Configurable functional keys (Figure 27)

 Fixed functional keys (Figure 28).
The front interfaces are equipped with:
 Graphic display
 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
 1 2-colour unit status LED
 Numeric keypad
 7 operational keys
 Ethernet communication
 Master USB communication
 Depending on the model, the following are available:
 5 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational
keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys.
Figure 27 Configurable functional keys Figure 28 Fixed functional keys
2.3.2 19” chassis

There are two 19” and 4U chassis front options:
 Configurable functional keys (Figure 29)

 Fixed functional keys (Figure 30)
The front interfaces are equipped with:
 Graphic display
 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
 1 2-colour unit status LED
 Numeric keypad
 7 operational keys
 Ethernet communication
 Master USB communication
 Depending on the model, the following are available:
 14 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2
operational keys

User Manual 27
HARDWARE 
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys + 7 functional keys with

interchangeable labels for selecting.
Figure 29 Configurable functional keys
Figure 30 Fixed functional keys
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.4.1 Power supply voltage

125/220 Vdc models: 110Vdc-20% up to 250Vac + 10%:
 Operating range:
 Direct: 85Vdc up to 300Vdc
 Alternating: 85Vac up to 265Vac
24/48 Vdc models: 24Vdc-20% up to 48Vdc + 20%:
 Operating range:
 Direct: 18Vdc up to 60Vdc
Burden. Depends on the cards connected.
 20W + 0,5W for each relay activated

Battery failure signal. Minimum voltage to activate the signal
Power supply 24Vcc 48Vcc 125Vcc 220Vcc

Activation level 16V 37V 86V 170V
The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2).

User Manual 28
HARDWARE 
2.4.2 Digital outputs

Independent standard and trip outputs:
 The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are as follows:

 Permanent current: 8 A at 25ºC
 Make: 30 A 1sec
 Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
 Open or break capacity:
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 1.0A 1.5A 2.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.7A 1.0A 1.5A
 Operating time: 5ms activation and 8ms deactivation

Signal outputs:
 The characteristics of the 3-contact switched, common point signal outputs

are:
 Make:
 30 A ½ sec.
 20 A 1 sec.
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 0.2A 0.4A 1.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.1A 0.2A 0.5A
 Operating time: 8ms activation and deactivation

The compliance of the common point outputs is the same as that of the independent
outputs. However, due to sharing a common point, only 2 relays can be activated
simultaneously.
High break contact outputs (h.b.c.o outputs):
 The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are as follows:

 Make: 30 A 1sec
 Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 10A 10A 10A
With inductive load 10A L/R=20ms 10A L/R=40ms 10A L/R=40ms
 Cyclic capacity: 4 cycles in 1 second, 2 minutes waiting for thermal

dissipation
 Operating time:
5ms activation and 5ms deactivation with resistive load
5ms activation and 14ms deactivation with L/R = 40ms
The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2
mm2).

User Manual 29
HARDWARE 
2.4.3 Digital inputs

The input burden is lower than 3mA at nominal voltage.
The inputs do not have polarity.
The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2
mm2).
They have a fixed range with 4 nominal voltage options:
Rated V Characteristics
Not activated below 9 Vdc.
24Vdc Activated above 12 Vdc.
Maximum voltage 72 Vdc
125Vdc They are activated above 87 Vdc.
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS

Equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (Figure 31)
with demodulated input (TTL levels).
Cable type: 2-wire, shielded
Insulation: 2000 V
The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an opto-isolator; for a 5 V signal,
the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on the
output current supply capacity; a typical value is 70 mA, which would enable the
connection of 6 units (although the length and the type of cable can also influence). The
cable must be shielded and twisted.
According to configuration, it synchronizes with frames B002 , B003 , B006 , B007 type .
It also synchronizes with IEE1344.
There is a pulse per second (PPS) input for synchronization:
 Demodulated input (TTL levels).

 Cable type: 2-wire, shielded
 Insulation: 2000 V

User Manual 30
HARDWARE 
Figure 31 Connection example
2.4.5 Current and voltage circuits

Phases, neutral and polarization. Single rated current 1/5 A.
 Measurement range: 0.02A to 200A.

 Thermal capacity
 Permanent 20 A
 Short duration 50 A (10 sec.)
500 A (1 sec.)
 Very short duration 1250 A (half cycle)

 Burden at In= 5 A <0.2VA
 Burden at In= 1 A <0.02VA
Voltage:
 Measurement range: 1V to 200V.

 Rated voltages: 63.5/120 Vac
 Thermal capacity
 Permanent 2 Un
 Short duration 5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min)
 Burden at 63.5 V <0.015 VA

 Burden at 100 V <0.03 VA
The wires should be copper with a section AWG 12 (4 mm2).
2.4.5.1 Accuracy
 Current
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In)
 With In = 1: class 0.5 (0.5% of FS)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0.5% of FS)
 Protection range (0 to 200 A)
 1 % over the measurement or 2 mA (greater)

User Manual 31
HARDWARE 
 Voltage
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Vn)
 Accuracy 0.5% of FS
 Protection range (0 to 200 Vac)
 1 % over the measurement or 50 mV (greater)
 Dephase angle
 Accuracy  1º
 Power
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In*1.2*Vn)
 With In = 1: class 1 (1% of Pn)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0,5% of Pn)
Time accuracy:
 Additional time = 0ms

 Measurement/start value:
 From 1 to 1,5 times: Up to 40ms (typical 35ms)
 2 times: Between 30-35ms
 From 3 times: Under 30ms
 Additional time higher than 50ms
 30ms or 3% of the theorical value (the higher of the two)
Currents must be above 100mA.
2.4.6 Front communication

Ethernet via RJ45 cable
 RJ45 connector (female)

 Cable type: Shielded
 Cable length: 100 m maximum
 Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
 Insulation 500V
USB
 USB 2.0 compatible version

 Master operating mode
 Speed: 480Mbps (high-speed), 12Mbps (full-speed) or 1.5Mbps (low-speed)
 Insulation 500V
2.4.7 Rear communications

2.4.7.1 Ethernet communication
Ethernet via RJ45 cable
 RJ45 connector (female)

 Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
 Insulation 500V

User Manual 32
HARDWARE 
Ethernet via glass optical fiber (ST and LC)
 Connector
 ST
 LC
 Wavelength: 1310nm
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation
 8 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -20dBm to -14dBm
 Receiver optical sensitivity: -31dBm
 Baud rate: 100 Mb.
 Maximum distance: 2 km
2.4.7.2 Serial communications

Glass optical fiber
 ST connector
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation
 9 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -17dBm to -11dBm
 Maximum distance: 2 km
Plastic optical fiber
 V-Pin connector (HP standard)

 Multimode optical fiber HCS (silica) with 200 µm and plastic with 1mm
 Permitted attenuation:
 24.7db with 1mm plastic cable
 22db with 200 µm silica cable
 Typical transmitter optical power
 -17dBm to -8dBm with 1mm plastic cable
 -13,5dBm to -4,5dBm with 200 µm silica cable
 Maximum distance: 115m with 1mm plastic cable and 1.9km with 200 µm silica
cable
RS232
 DTE 9 pin female D type

 Insulation 500V

User Manual 33
HARDWARE 
RS485
 DTE 9 pin female D type

 Cable type: Shielded crossed pair
 Cable length: 1.000 m maximum.
 Insulation 500V
For communications between devices can be used:
FO single-mode (60km)
 Connector LC duplex or ST
 Wavelength: 1310nm, Laser
 Singlemode: 9/125 nm
 Permitted attenuation: 30db
 Typical transmitter optical power: -5dBm a 0dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
 Maximum distance: 60km
 Minimum distance: 1km
FO single-mode (20-120km)
 Connector LC duplex or ST
 Wavelength: 1550nm, Laser
 Singlemode: 9/125 nm
 Permitted attenuation: 40db
 Typical transmitter optical power: 0dBm a 5dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
 Minimum distance: 20km. It cannot be used below 20km.
C37.94 glass optical fiber
 ST connector
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 50/125µm and 62.5/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation:
 13db with 62,5/125 µm
 9dB with 50/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -16dBm a -11dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: -32dBm
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature: -40 to +60ºC
Storage temperature: -40 to 85 ºC
Relative humidity: Up to 95% without condensation

User Manual 34
HARDWARE 
2.6 TESTS
2.6.1 Climatic test

TEST STANDARD
Cold IEC -60068-2-1
-40°C, 16 hours
Dry Heat IEC -60068-2-2
+85°C, 16 hours
Damp heat steady state IEC -60068-2-78
+40°C/93%RH, 96 hours
Damp heat cyclic IEC -60068-2-30
55ºC/95% HR 6 cyclesof 12+12 hours
rapid change of temperature IEC -60068-2-14
-20ºC/+70ºC 2 cycles of 4+4 hours
External protection level IEC60529
IP30
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests

TEST STANDARD
Dielectric test IEC 60255-5
2.5 kVac
Insulation resistance test IEC 60255-5
> 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.
Impulse voltage test IEC 60255-5
±5kV MC
±5kV MD
Protective earthing continuity test IEC 61131-2
30 A ≤ 0.1Ω
Measurements of high Leakage current IEC 60255-27

User Manual 35
HARDWARE 
2.6.3 Electromagnetic tests

TEST STANDARD
1MHz burst immunity test IEC 60255-22-1
±2.5kV MC
±2.5kV MD
Damped oscillatory waves immunity test IEC 61000-4-18
±2.5kV MC
±2.5kV MD
Electrostatic discharges immunity test IEC 61000-4-2
±8kV/±15kV
Electrical Fast transient immunity test IEC 61000-4-4:
±4kV,5kHz
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5
±4kV MC
±2kV MD
DC power supply interruptions, dips and variations immunity test IEC 61000-4-29
100% 300 ms
60% 300 ms
30% 5s
AC power supply interruptions and dips immunity test IEC 61000-4-11
100% 10 ms, 20 ms, 5 s
60% 200 ms
30% 500 ms
20% 5 s
Ripple immunity test IEC 61000-4-17
15% (50 and 100 Hz)
Measurements of Harmonics current emissions IEC 61000-4-7 / IEC 61000-3-2
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7
Class B
Measurements of Radioelectric emissions IEC 61000-6-4
Class A
Radiated radiofrequency fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-3
10V/m
Conducted disturbances induced by radiofrequency fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-6
10Vrms
50 Hz magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-8
100 A/m 1000 A/m (2 s)
Pulse magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-9
1000 A/m
Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-10
100 A/m
2.6.4 Mechanical tests

TEST STANDARD
Vibration (sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1:
Class I
Shocks and bumps: IEC 60255-21-2
Class I
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3
Class I

User Manual 36
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
The equipment has both percentage and instantaneous differential protection. The percentage
differential protection allows 2nd harmonic restraint and blocking. The instantaneous
differential function does not allow neither harmonic restraint nor blocking.
The protection function is the same for 2 or 3 ends, differing only in the calculation of
the differential current and the communication between the ends.
The differential current is calculated in each phase. If there is an intermediate

transformer, the phase - shift and transformation ratio are taken into account and the zero
sequence current can be removed with the zero sequence filter.
The settings that correspond to differential currents (indicated as xTap) are expressed in
tap steps when there is an intermediate transformer and in the local end rated current
steps (Irated) when there is not any transformer.
The generic curve of the differential protection is shown in Figure 32. The Figure 33
shows the different characteristics that can be obtained changing the restraint and slope
settings.
Figure 32 Differential protection curve with 2 slopes
Figure 33 Different configurations of the differential protection

User Manual 37
The PROT/LINPDIF node is used for the line differential settings (see Table 2). The "C
end" is not used when the scheme type is a 2 end line.
PDIF node settings:
 Scheme type: Selects the protected line type: 2 ends or 3 ends.

 Reference end: Indicates the reference end for the calculation of the
differential current when there is an intermediate transformer. If not, the
reference end is the local one.
 End A Vrated (kV): Selects the rated voltage of the End A.
 End B Vrated (kV): Selects the rated voltage of the End B.
 End C Vrated (kV): Selects the rated voltage of the End C.
 End A CT ratio: Indicates the transformer ratio for End A phase currents.
 End B CT ratio: Indicates the transformer ratio for End B phase currents.
 End C CT ratio: Indicates the transformer ratio for End C phase currents.
 Intermediate transformer: Selects if there is an intermediate transformer.
When there is not any transformer the following settings are not taken into
account:
 Reference end
 Connection type - End A, B and C
 Phase-shift code - End B and C
 Enable Zero-seq Filt End A, B and C
 Max power capacity (MVA)
 Tap - End A, B and C I (A)
 Connection type - End A: Selects the connection type of the End A.
 Connection type - End B: Selects the connection type of the End B.
 Connection type - End C: Selects the connection type of the End C.
 Phase-shift code - End B: Selects the phase shift of the End B with respect to
the End A. Allows values among 0 to 11. Each step is 30 degrees.
 Phase-shift code - End C: Selects the phase shift of the End C with respect to
the End A. Allows values among 0 to 11. Each step is 30 degrees.
 Enable Zero-seq Filt End A: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence
filter of the End A.
 Enable Zero-seq Filt End B: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence
filter of the End B.
 Enable Zero-seq Filt End C: Allows enabling or disabling the zero sequence
filter of the End C.
 Max power capacity (MVA): Selects the maximum power in MVA.
 Tap - End A: Selects the Tap value of the End A.
 Tap - End B: Selects the Tap value of the End B.
 Tap - End C: Selects the Tap value of the End C.
 End A polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End A.
 End B polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End B.
 End C polarity: Selects the current polarity of the End C.
 I0 type: measured/calculated: Selects the measurement type of the neutral
current (measured or calculated with the phase currents).
 Neutral Irated (A). Selects the rated current of the neutral.
 Neutral CT ratio. Indicates the transformation ratio for the neutral current.
 Ground Irated (A). Selects the rated current of the ground.

User Manual 38
 Ground CT ratio. Indicates the transformation ratio for the ground.

 Local end: Selects the reference of the local end (A, B or C).
 Local ID: Selects the identification of the local end in the communication
messages.
Table 2 General line differential protection settings
Data Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

Scheme type 2 Ends /
enum
Scheme 0 1 3 Ends
RefEnd Reference end 1 3 A / B / C Int32
VRtg End A Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
VRtg2 End B Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
VRtg3 End C Vrated (kV) 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat End A CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat2 End B CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsRat3 End C CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 Float
PhsInom End A Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A Int32
PhsInom2 End B Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A Int32
PhsInom3 End C Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A Int32
CTInt Intermediate transformer 0 1 NO / YES enum
ConTyp1 Connection type - End A 0 2 Y / D / Z enum
ConTyp2 Connection type - End B 0 2 Y / D / Z enum
ConTyp3 Connection type - End C 0 2 Y / D / Z Int32
PhCod2 Phase-shift code - End B 0 11 1 Int32
PhCod3 Phase-shift code - End C 0 11 1 enum
EnaZSeq1 Enable Zero-seq Filt End A 0 2 NO / YES enum
EnaZSeq2 Enable Zero-seq Filt End B 0 2 NO / YES enum
EnaZSeq3 Enable Zero-seq Filt End C 0 2 NO / YES Float
MaxPow Max power capacity (MVA) 0 5000 0,1 Float
TapPos1 Tap - End A I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 Int32
TapPos2 Tap - End B I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 Int32
TapPos3 Tap - End C I (A) 0,1 20 0,01 Float
End A polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP1 0 1 Outgoing
End B polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP2 0 1 Outgoing
End C polarity Incoming /
Float
WndP3 0 1 Outgoing
I0 type:measured/calculated Calculated /
Float
SelI0 0 1 Measured
NeuInom Neutral Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A Float
NeuRat Neutral CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 enum
GndInom Ground Irated (A) 1 2 1A / 5A enum
GndRat Ground CT ratio 1 10000 0,1 enum
LocEnd Local end 1 3 A / B / C enum
LocId Local ID 0 2 1
3.1.1 Differential protection communications

The scheme for differential line protection is based on signals and measures exchanged
between devices located at the line ends. Lines of two or three ends are allowed.
Also, lines with intermediate transformer are allowed.
The communication is done by serial channels in the protection device with two possible
speeds: 64Kbps or 128kbps and with interfaces: RS232, Optical Fiber multimode and Optical
Fiber single-mode. The available options can be:
 FOC
 FOP
 RS232C

User Manual 39
 RS485
 Optical Fiber single mode with the following options:
 Connector: ST or LC.
 Reach: from 20 to 120km.
 C37.94 with OF multimode. The connector can be ST.
The communication between terminals can be:
 Simple. Only one channel is used. Therefore, in case of fault in the channel the
communication is lost and differential protection cannot act.
 Redundant. Two channels are used. In case of fault in one channel, the other one is
used for the communication.
The operation mode is configurable:
 Master/Master. All protection devices communicate with each other's and all of them
receive measures for performing the differential protection function.
 Master/Slave. Only one of the protection devices, the master, performs the
differential protection function. The master sends trip order to the slaves to
act:
Figure 34 Master/Master Figure 35 Master/Slave
Ia TRIP
Ib Ib
A B B
A
Ic Ic
Ic
Ia
TRIP
C Ib C
For a line end device to function as a master it must be configured as a "master" and
communicate with the other devices.
The differential protection function requires for the measures of each end to be
synchronized, so that all the measures used correspond to the same instant of time. The
synchronized measures of each end device are shown in the measure status message of the
equipment (Figure 36):
 Module and argument of the fundamental component for each phase and line end.
 Module and argument of the second harmonic component for each phase and line end.

User Manual 40
Figure 36 All device Measures Status
The synchronization can be done with GPS (PPS or Irig-B signals) and is recommended when
the connection between devices is done with a telecommunication network.
For synchronizing the ends without a GPS, a communication mechanism is used which permits
calculate the propagation delay time of the messages and synchronize the measures.
The backup realized by functions 21 and 67 can be configured for being always enabled or
only when communications between ends fails.
A proprietary communications protocol is used for connecting the devices and for managing
error detection and identification of message frames.
The settings for configuring the communications are attached to the node RTPC (see Table
3):
 Connection type. It indicates if the local end device works as:

 Master. It performs the differential protection function with the measures
received form the other ends.
 Slave. It does not perform the differential protection function.
 Max. Clock jitter (us). If the variation of the propagation delay is greater than
this value, the sensitivity of percentage differential function is increased. The
maximum possible value of the setting is 500us and a variation greater than this
value implies the blocking of this function. With C37.94 and G703, this setting
must have values according with the network (generally greater than 250useg).
 Allow 21 Backup. Valid for models with distance functions. It indicates the working
mode of the distance functions (zones 1-5):
 Always: The distance function works as indicated in its enable setting
regardless of the state of communication between ends.
 On comms Fail. The distance function is operative only in case of
communications failure with some of remote devices. The function 21 must be
enabled.
 Allow 67 Backup. It indicates the working mode of the overcurrent functions:

User Manual 41
 Always: The overcurrent function works as indicated in its enable setting

regardless of the state of communication between ends.
 On comms Fail. The overcurrent function is operative only in case of
communications failure with some of remote devices. The function 67 must
be enabled.
There are independent configuration settings for each of two possible communications
port:
 Port x. As long as the port exists in the device, the following options can be
selected:
 Disabled. Communication disabled through this channel.
 COM 3. Enables channel communication through port COM3 of the device.
 COM 4. Enables channel communication through port COM4 of the device.
 Baud rate x (bauds). Speed for communication through the configured port. Possible
speeds to select: 64kbs, 128kbs.
 Remote end x. It indicates witch is the remote end connected in this channel (A, B
or C) considered in differential current calculation. The end 'A' corresponds to 1,
the 'B' to 2 and the 'C' to 3, in the differential current calculation expression.
 Remote ID x. It indicates the number of remote end (0, 1, 2) and is used to
identify the messages received from remote device. Each device includes in its
messages the ID configured in "Local ID" setting of PDIF node.
There are signals for indicating the state of communications:
 Node: PROT/ITPC1
 Settings. A settings table is available. For details see Table 4.
 Logical inputs are not available.
 Attached orders are not available.
 Outputs: In the Table 6 the output data of communication function is shown:
 Propagation delay unstable. It indicates that the propagation delay of
messages exceeds 80 ms or its variation exceeds 500 us. In this case the
percentage differential function is blocked.
 Delay fluctuation. It indicates that propagation delay variation exceed the
value configured in "Max. Clock jitter(us)" setting. In this case the
sensitivity of percentage differential characteristic is increased.
 All terminals synchronized. It indicates that all connected devices are
synchronized by PPs or Irig-B.
 Comms failure with remote A. It indicates that some communication failure
with remote end A occurs.
 Comms failure with remote B. It indicates that some communication failure
with remote end B occurs.
 Comms failure with remote C. It indicates that some communication failure
with remote end C occurs.
 Remote A master mode. It indicates that the device at end A is working as
master.
 Remote B master mode. It indicates that the device at end B is working as
master.
 Remote C master mode. It indicates that the device at end C is working as
master.
 Diff. Comms config. failure. It indicates that some incoherence is detected
in the configuration of communications node ITPC.
 Port 1 comms.OK. It indicates that the device is communicating through the
channel configured in port 1.

User Manual 42
 Port 2 comms.OK. It indicates that the device is communicating through the

channel configured in port 2.
 Slave differential block. It indicates that local device is working as
slave and the differential function does not operate.
In addition to measures, 16 signals are exchanged. 10 of them are configurable and 6
are fixed. The same signals are sent to all other devices.
 Signals 1 to 10. Can be configured in ISPC/MDIF node (see Table 4). Any signal of
the equipment can be selected.
 Signal 11: Communication failure with remote end A.
 Signal 12: Communication failure with remote end B.
 Signal 13: Communication failure with remote end C.
 Signal 14: Local device working as master.
 Signal 15: Breaker status.
 Signal 16: Reserve.
The settings for configuring digital signals to send are in the node ISPC/MDIF (see
Table 4):
 Signal 1: digital signal, selectable among all the signals of the equipment, for
being sent by serial communication in the first position. It is equivalent to
"Teleprotection Signal 1" in the receiver device.
 Signal x: digital signal, selectable among all the signals of the equipment, for
being sent by serial communication in the position x. It is equivalent to
"Teleprotection Signal x" in the receiver device. "x" from 1 to 10.
From each remote device, 16 digital signals are received. 10 of them are configured in
the remote device and 6 are fixed (common in all devices).
 Nodes:
 ISPC/MDIF1. Signals received from remote device 1 (which is connected on
the port configured in the "Port 1" setting)
 ISPC/MDIF2. Signals received from remote device 2 (which is connected on
the port configured in the "Port 2" setting)
 Signals received from each remote device (see Table 5). The signals of remote
device 1 are shown:
 Channel 1 Rx signal 1. Signal 1 received from remote device 1
 Channel 1 Rx signal 2. Signal 2 received from remote device 1
 ….Idem until 10
 Ch1 Comm failure remote A. Communication failure with remote end A received
from remote device 1
 Ch1 Comm failure remote B. Communication failure with remote end B received
 Ch1 Comm failure remote C. Communication failure with remote end C received
 Ch1 Local device master. Remote device 1 working as master
 Ch1 Breaker status. Breaker status in remote device 1
 Channel 1 Rx signal 16. Reserve
Remote device 2 signals are the same but replacing "channel 1" by "channel 2" and "remote
device 1" by "remote device 2".

User Manual 43
Table 3. Differential communication settings

ConType Connection type 0 1 Master / Slave int32
Port1 Port 1 Disabled / COM 3 / COM 4 int32
ComsBau1 Baud rate 1 (bauds) 0 1 64Kb / 128Kb int32
RemEnd1 Remote end 1 0 2 A / B / C int32
RemId1 Remote ID 1 0 2 1 int32
Port2 Port 2 0 4 Disabled / COM 3 / COM 4 int32
ComsBau2 Baud rate 2 (bauds) 0 1 64Kb / 128Kb int32
RemEnd2 Remote end 2 0 2 A / B / C int32
RemId2 Remote ID 2 0 2 1 int32
MPrTmus Max. Clock jitter (us) 0 500 10 int32
Back21 Allow 21 Backup 0 1 Allways / On coms Fail int32
Back67 Allow 67 Backup 0 1 Allways / On coms Fail int32
Table 4. Transmitted signal settings

LogInDig1 Signal 1 int32
Table 5 Received Signals
Attribut
Channel 1 Signal (ISPC/MDIF1) Channel 2 Signal (ISPC/MDIF2) Data
e
Channel 1 Rx signal 1 Channel 2 Rx signal 1 DI1 stVal
Table 6. Teleprotection communication signals
Signal Data Attribute

Propagation delay unstable DelayUns stVal
Delay fluctuation DelayFlu stVal
All terminals synchronized AllSync stVal
Comms failure with remotel A CommsFailA stVal
Comms failure with remotel B CommsFailB stVal
Comms failure with remotel C CommsFailC stVal
Remote A master mode RemAMaster stVal
Remote B master mode RemBMaster stVal
Remote C master mode RemCMaster stVal
Diff. Comms config. failure ComsCnfF stVal
Port 1 comms.OK Port1Coms stVal
Port 2 comms.OK Port2Coms stVal
Slave differential block DifBlkSlv stVal

User Manual 44
3.1.2 Differential current calculation

The differential current is calculated with the fundamental harmonic (based on DFT).
Configuration is selected with setting between 2 or 3 ends.
With setting, it is selected if there is an intermediate transformer or not. It affects

to the differential current calculation as it is showed in the following chapters.
3.1.2.1 Without intermediate transformer

The differential and restraint currents calculated depend on the scheme type (2 or 3
ends). For the calculation of the differential and restraint currents, among the
settings shown in Table 1 the following are used:
 Scheme type
 Intermediate transformer
 End A, B and C CT ratio
 End A, B and C Irated (A)
 End A, B and C polarity
The differential and restraint currents are calculated referenced to the local
end.
The differential current of the End 1 (local) used in the protection functions
for each phase corresponds to the following formula:
𝑅𝑇𝐼2 𝑅𝑇𝐼3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_1 = 𝐼1 + · 𝐼2 + ·𝐼
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 𝑅𝑇𝐼1 3
𝑅𝑇𝐼 𝑅𝑇𝐼
𝐼1 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼2 · 𝐼2 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼3 · 𝐼3
1 1
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓1 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
Where:
 I1, I2 and I3 are the currents of each end.

 RTI1, RTI2 and RTI3 are the current transformation ratio of each end.
 Ir1 is the rated currents of the local end (End 1).
3.1.2.1.1 2 ends
The differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
𝑅𝑇𝐼2
|𝐼1 + ·𝐼 |
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 2
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓12𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
𝑅𝑇𝐼2
|𝐼1 | + |
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 · 𝐼2 |
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡12𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
The reference of both currents is the end 1 (local).

User Manual 45
3.1.2.1.2 3 ends
The differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
𝑅𝑇𝐼 𝑅𝑇𝐼
|𝐼1 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼2 · 𝐼2 + 𝑅𝑇𝐼3 · 𝐼3 |
1 1
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓1_3𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) =
𝐼𝑟1
𝑅𝑇𝐼2 𝑅𝑇𝐼3
|𝐼1 | + |
𝑅𝑇𝐼1 · 𝐼2 | + |𝑅𝑇𝐼1 · 𝐼3 |
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡1_3𝑑 (𝑥𝐼𝑟1) = 2
𝐼𝑟1
The reference of both currents is the end 1 (local).
3.1.2.2 With intermediate transformer

The differential and restraint currents calculated depend on the scheme type (2 or 3
ends). The settings used are shown in Table 1.
The differential current used in the protection functions for each phase corresponds
to the following formula:
𝐼1 𝐼2 𝐼3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓 = · 𝐶1 + · 𝐶2 + ·𝐶
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3 3
Where:
 I1, I2 and I3 are the currents of each end.

 Tap1, Tap2 and Tap3 are the restraint currents of each end.
 C1, C2 and C3 indicate the phase-shift of the wiring (1 or 1/√3) for each end
(Table 8 Connections of 2 windings and Table 9 Connections of 3 windings ).
Table 10, Table 11 and Table 12 indicate the calculation of the current according to
the wiring and the phase shift code. These calculations correspond to the ABC phase
sequence; if ACB is used, C must be replaced with B and B with C in all the equations.
When entering in a table with a code such as the difference between H2 and H3, if the
subtraction is negative, add 12 before entering in the table.
Tap:
The CTs are compensated using p.u. currents referred to a current defined as tap. This
value can be entered by setting or calculated from the data of the windings.
If the setting "Max power capacity (MVA)" is zero, TAPn is the setting "Tap - End n I
(A)" setting.
If the "Max power capacity (MVA)" is other than zero, TAPn is obtained by automatic
calculation, assuming that the transformers use a wye connection. Taps are calculated
as follows:
𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋 𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋 𝑃𝑀𝐴𝑋

𝑇𝐴𝑃1 = 𝑇𝐴𝑃2 = 𝑇𝐴𝑃3 =
√3 · 𝑈1 · 𝐶𝑇1 √3 · 𝑈2 · 𝐶𝑇2 √3 · 𝑈3 · 𝐶𝑇3
Where,
PMAX: is the maximum transmission power of the transformer in MVA.
Ui: is the voltage between phases in kV.
CTi: is the CT transformation ratio of the winding i.
The tap value obtained must be between the following limits:
 0.5 to 20A for Irated=5A

User Manual 46
 0.1 to 4A for Irated=1A

Otherwise, it will be set to the maximum value if the result is higher or to the
minimum if the result is lower.
Phase-shift compensation:
Differential current calculations are carried out by previously compensating the

transformer phase-shift with matrices that numerically compensate the errors caused by
the phase-shift from the power transformer and the CTs of each end.
Table 7 Calculations according to the zero sequence filter

User Manual 47
This table applies to the ABC phase order. If the phase order is ACB, the matrices to
apply are mirror images. In other words, code 1 uses code 11.
Zero sequence filter:
This is used to eliminate the zero sequence current in the desired winding. It is used
when the transformer does not allow the zero sequence current (I0) to go through it;
an Ynd1, for example. If there is an external ground fault the zero sequence current
will appear in one of the windings, but not in the other one.
These filter is enabled by setting:
 NO. The zero sequence filter is not applied.

 YES. It is used when the zero sequence current can go through one end (wye)
but not through the other end (delta). In these cases ground faults can
provoke the differential to operate incorrectly. It can be avoid subtracting
in the differential current the zero sequence in the necessary windings (it is
not detrimental in any case). The current in each phase is as follows:
 Ia = Ia – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
 Ib = Ib – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
 Ic = Ic – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
To calculate the restraint current the zero sequence filter is not used. Only the
phase shift is taken into account.
3.1.2.2.1 2 ends
The following table shows the connections and the difference between the time codes
allowed for each connection. The time code column (1-0) shows the difference between the
time code of the modified winding and the reference winding.
Table 8 Connections of 2 windings
Winding 1 Winding 2 Phase shift code (1-0)

Y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Y z 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
D z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Z y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Z d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Z z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Differential current and restraining current:
𝐼1 𝐼2
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_2𝑑 = | ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 2
𝐼 𝐼
| 1 · 𝐶′1 | + | 2 · 𝐶′2 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡_2𝑑 =
2
To calculate the restraint current the zero sequence filter is not used. Only the
phase shift is taken into account.

User Manual 48
3.1.2.2.2 3 ends
The following table shows the connections and the difference in time codes between the
reference winding and the windings for each connection.
The time code column (1-0) shows the difference between the time code of the first
modified winding and the reference winding. The time code column (2-0) shows the
difference between the time code of the second modified winding and the reference
winding.
Table 9 Connections of 3 windings
Reference winding Modified win.(1) Modified win. (2) Phase shift code (1 – 0) Phase shift code (2-0)
Y Y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y y d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
Y d y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Y d d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
D d y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
D d d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Differential current and restraining current:

𝐼1 𝐼2 𝐼3
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓_3𝑑 = | ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 + ·𝐶 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3 3
𝐼 𝐼 𝐼
| 1 · 𝐶′1 | + | 2 · 𝐶′2 | + | 3 · 𝐶′3 |
𝑇𝑎𝑝1 𝑇𝑎𝑝2 𝑇𝑎𝑝3
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑡_3𝑑 =
2
To calculate the restraint current the zero sequence filter is not used. Only the phase
shift is taken into account.

User Manual 49
Table 10 Group Yd, Yz
Phase shift code

Reference winding Modified winding Modified winding
difference
A
A
C A’ = A-C
1 B’ = B-A
C’ = C-B
C B
A’ = B-C
3 B’ = C-A
""
A C’ = A-B
B A’ = B-A
5 B’ = C-B
""
C’ = A-C
A’ = C-A
7 B’ = A-B
""
C C’ = B-C
A A’ = C-B
9 B’ = A-C
""
C’ = B-A
A’ = A-B
11 B’ = B-C
""
B C’ = C-A

User Manual 50
Table 11 Group Yy, Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz
Phase shift code

difference
A A
A’ = A
0 B’ = B
C’ = C
C B C B
C A
A’ = -B
2 B’ = -C
""
C’ = -A
B
C
A’ = C
4 B’ = A
""
C’ = B
B A
B C
A’ = -A
6 B’ = -B
""
C’ = -C
A
B
A’ = B
8 B’ = C
""
C’ = A
A C
A B
A’ = -C
10 B’ = -A
""
C’ = -B
C

User Manual 51
Table 12 Group Dy, Zy
Phase shift code

difference
A
A
C A’ = A-B
1 B’ = B-C
C’ = C-A
C B
A’ = C-B
3 B’ = A-C
""
A C’ = B-A
B A’ = C-A
5 B’ = A-B
""
C’ = B-C
A’ = B-A
7 B’ = C-B
""
C C’ = A-C
A A’ = B-C
9 B’ = C-A
""
C’ = A-B
A’ = A-C
11 B’ = B-A
""
B C’ = C-B
3.1.3 Instantaneous differential protection

A non-restricted (instantaneous) unit per phase is included. It acts when the
differential current exceeds the set threshold, not taking into account the harmonics.
Therefore, there is not neither 2nd harmonic restraint nor blocking.
 Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

 Pickup (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the pick up of the differential
characteristic.
 Delay time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of
the function must be met.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
 General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not.
For additional details, see the section corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6).

User Manual 52
 Reclose Permission: Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in
accordance with the recloser's closing cycle (see reclosure permission mask).
 Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the
function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are not generated. If
set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 13 Instantaneous differential function settings (INSPTDF)

Ena Enabled NO / YES
StrVal Pickup (xTap) 1 20 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 60000 1 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input uint 32
GenTrip General Trip NO / YES Boolean
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
Reclose 1 (1P/3P) (3)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 7 ING
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
There are independent settings, command and outputs.
 PROT/INSTPTDF node
 Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see
Table 13.
 Command
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking the function. This only takes place if
the function is enabled.
 Outputs
 Inst. Differential Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Inst. Differential Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Inst. Differential Ph A Start: start of Phase A function.
 Inst. Differential Ph B Start: start of Phase B function.
 Inst. Differential Ph C Start: start of Phase C function.
 Inst. Differential Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
 Inst. Differential Ph A Trip: trip of Phase A function.
 Inst. Differential Ph B Trip: trip of Phase B function.
 Inst. Differential Ph C Trip: trip of Phase C function.
Table 14 Instantaneous differential function outputs (INSPTDF)

Inst. Differential Status StEna stVal
Inst. Differential Start Str general
Inst. Differential Ph A Start Str phsA
Inst. Differential Ph B Start Str phsB
Inst. Differential PhC Start Str phsC
Inst. Differential Trip Op general
Inst. Differential Ph A Trip Op phsA
Inst. Differential Ph B Trip Op phsB
Inst. Differential Ph C Trip Op phsC

User Manual 53
3.1.4 Percentage differential protection

The restriction unit (Idif vs Irestraint) is of the double slope type with second
harmonic restraint. (See Figure 32, Figure 33 and Figure 37).
The settings used are the following ones (Table 15 Percentage differential function
settings (PTDF)):

 Sensitivity (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the pick up of the differential
characteristic.
 I paso 1 (xTap): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 1 starts.
 Rest.current step 2 (xTap): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 2
starts.
 Slope 1 (%): Indicates the value of the slope 1.
 Slope 2 (%): Indicates the value of the slope 2.
 Delay time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of
 General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not.
For additional details, see the section corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6).
 Reclose Permission: Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in
Table 15 Percentage differential function settings (PTDF)

Ena Enabled NO / YES
LoSet Sensitivity (xTap) 0,15 2 0,01 Float
RstA1 Rest.current step 1 (xTap) 0 2 0,01 Float
RstA2 Rest.current step 2 (xTap) 0 20 0,01 Float
Slope1 Slope 1 (%) 5 100 1 Float
Slope2 Slope 2 (%) 5 200 1 Float
OpDlTmms Additional timing(ms) 0 60000 1 Float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Note: When there is an intermediate transformer, the sensitivity setting must fulfil the
following condition:
𝑇𝑎𝑝𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 · 𝑆𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 ≥ 0.05 · 𝐼𝑛

If each winding is of a different rated current, the following should be checked
separately:
𝑇𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑1 · 𝑆𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 ≥ 0.05 · 𝐼𝑛𝑒𝑛𝑑1

User Manual 54
Where In is the rated current (5A or 1A). Otherwise, the sensitivity setting is
automatically modified to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and restraint currents are indicated in multiples of tap when there is an
intermediate transformer and in rated current when there is not.
 PROT/PTDF node
 Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail, see
Table 15.
 Command:
 “DOrdBlk”: Restricted differential unit blocking (87T).
 Outputs: The Table 16 shows the output data of the function.
 Percentage Differential Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Percentage Differential Phase A Start: start of Phase A function.
 Percentage Differential Phase B Start: start of Phase B function.
 Percentage Differential Phase C Start: start of Phase C function.
 Percentage Differential Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Differential Start: indicates the start of the differential functions.
 Percentage Differential Phase A Trip: trip of Phase A function.
 Percentage Differential Phase B Trip: trip of Phase B function.
 Percentage Differential Phase C Trip: trip of Phase C function.
 Percentage Differential Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
 Differential Trip: indicates the trip of the differential functions.
Table 16 Percentage differential function outputs (PTDF)

Percent. Differential Status StEna stVal
Percent. Diff Ph A Start Str phsA
Percent. Diff Ph B Start Str phsB
Percent. Diff Ph C Start Str phsC
Percent. Differential Start Str general
Percent. Diff Ph A Trip Op phsA
Percent. Diff Ph B Trip Op phsB
Percent. Diff Ph C Trip Op phsC
Percent. Diff Trip Op general
3.1.5 Directional supervision

This function determines if the fault is internal or external. In the case of an external
fault, the sensitivity of the characteristics is reduced from I restraint = 3·Tap (or
3·Irated) on and the trip is delayed. On the contrary, internal faults are accelerated. A
negative sequence directional is used for ground and phase-phase faults and a positive
sequence directional for three-phase faults.
If there is an internal fault, a fault without polarization, or if the directional

supervision is disabled, the differential characteristic is the one set (See Figure 32
and Figure 33). In the case of external faults, the percentage differential
characteristic is modified as in Figure 37:
 The slope of the percentage differential characteristic is internally set to 100%

from 3 times the tap (or Irated) value on, when there is no saturation and to 150%

User Manual 55
when there is saturation. Below 3 times the tap (or Irated) value the
characteristic is not modified.
Figure 37 Differential protection with saturation and directional
Negative sequence directional:
It is used for ground and phase-phase faults.
The negative sequence of each end (module and angle) is calculated.
If there is an intermediate transformer and the phase shift is not zero, the "Angle
directional unit" setting is internally taken into account:
To consider that there is polarization the following conditions must be met:
 In the case of a 2 end line:

 There is polarization if the module of the negative sequence of at least one end
is higher than the setting "Minimum threshold (xTap)".
 It is an internal fault if:
 There is polarization on both ends, the absolute value of the angle
difference between both ends is below the setting "Angle directional unit".
 One end has polarization.
A comparison is done in each end. In this case, the negative sequence of the end is
compared with the vector sum of the negative sequence of the other 2 ends. Like the
2 end line case.
 To consider lack of polarization, the three ends must have lack of polarization.
 If at least two of three ends detect and internal fault, then an internal fault
is considered.

User Manual 56
Figure 38 Negative sequence directional
Positive sequence directional:
The current of the three phases of at least one of the ends must be greater than 3 times
the rated current in order to use the positive sequence directional. When this condition
is not met, the negative sequence directional is used.
The positive sequence of each end (module and angle) is calculated.
If there is an intermediate transformer and the phase shift is not zero, the "Angle
directional unit" setting is internally taken into account:
To consider that there is polarization the following conditions must be met:

 There is polarization if the module of the negative sequence of at least one end
is higher than the setting "Minimum threshold (xTap)".
 It is an internal fault if:
 There is polarization on both ends, the absolute value of the angle
difference between both ends is below the setting "Angle directional unit"
plus 10º.
 One end has polarization.
A comparison is done in each end. In this case, the negative sequence of the end is
compared with the vector sum of the negative sequence of the other 2 ends. Like the
2 end line case.
 To consider lack of polarization, the three ends must have lack of polarization.
 If at least two of three ends detect and internal fault, then an internal fault
is considered.
Figure 39 Positive sequence directional

User Manual 57
En caso de no cumplirse las condiciones para que actue el direccional de secuencia

directa y el de inversa (por ejemplo, en ciertas faltas trifásicas que no superen 3·In)
la característica utilizada es la ajustada.
When the conditions to use the positive or negative sequence directionals are not met,
the differential characteristic used is the one set.
The settings used in this function (see Table 17) are:
 Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When it is disabled, it

does not have effect in the percentage characteristic.
 Minimum threshold (xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the negative or positive
sequence, depending on the directional used.
 Angle directional unit: Indicates half the amplitude of the directional unit to
consider the fault as internal (See Figure 38 and Figure 39). An angle of 60
degrees is suggested.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal, which, when active, blocks the function.
Table 17 Directional supervision settings

Ena Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Vpol Minimum threshold (xTap) 0.02 3 0,01 Float
VhrAng Angle directional unit 45 90 1 Float
There settings, command and outputs are:
 PROT/DIFRDIR node
 Logics settings and inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For further detail,
see Table 17 Directional supervision settings.
 Command
 Outputs
 Dir. Supervision Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Internal fault 87: active if there is an internal fault.
 Lack of polarization 87: in the case of a 2 end line, it is active if there
is lack of polarization.

Dir. Supervision Status StEna stVal
Internal fault 87 Fw67 general
Lack of polarization 87 FailPol general
3.1.6 Saturation detector

This function detects saturation in any of the current transformers. It analyses each
phase independently to detect the instant when the saturation happens.
When a saturation happens, the current value changes suddenly to zero and after that a
slower fall, moves closer to the original signal. It can produce errors in the

User Manual 58
differential current; so, when the saturation is detected in external faults, the
differential unit sensitivity is reduced.
To detect saturation, the peak current (maximum value of the previous samples) is
compared with the present sample and the increase of the samples. Additionally, the peak
current must be greater than 3 times the rated current.
Without intermediate transformer, the saturation of one phase only affects to that phase.
However, with intermediate transformer the saturation of one phase affects all the
phases.
Figure 40 Transformer saturation
In the case of saturation in any end, the percentage differential characteristic is

modified as in Figure 33 where:
 The slope of the percentage differential characteristic is internally set to 150%

from 3 times the tap value or the rated current (depend on configuration) on.
Bellow 3 times the tap value the characteristic is not modified.
 The saturation alarm keeps active while saturation is detected and is active 2
additional cycles after saturation has finished in all the phases.
Table 18 shows the output of the function. The node is PROT/PTDF.
 End A saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end A.

 End B saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end B.
 End C saturation. Activated when saturation is detected in end C.
Table 18 Saturation detector outputs

End A saturation Asat stVal
End B saturation Bsat stVal
End C saturation Csat stVal
3.1.7 2nd Harmonic Restraint

During the energization of a transformer, a high differential current appears for a short
time and there are high harmonics also.
To prevent the differential unit from operating, these harmonic currents are used to
restrain the measurement so that the higher the amount of harmonics, the higher the
differential current needed to operate the unit.
Ex.: If the restraining setting of the 2nd harmonic is adjusted by 20% and there is a
content X of 2nd harmonic in the Idif, X/0.2 is added to the tripping limit of the
differential unit.

User Manual 59
Harmonic restraining results in adding the 2nd harmonic present in the differential
current to the limit defined by the characteristic, desensitizing the unit.
The settings of each harmonics restraining function are independent instances of the
DFPHAR node.
The settings used in these functions (Table 60 Timed overcurrent unit settings) are:

 I2nd/fund. Threshold (%): Restraint slope.
 Differential threshold (xTap): Minimum threshold to activate operation.
 Enable events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to
the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are not
generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 19 Harmonic restraint settings

PHAREna Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
StrVal I2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 Float
PhStr Diff. Threshold (xTap) 0,15 1 0,01 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input uint32
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil the following:
Tapmínimum ·Threshold  0.01·In
There are independent settings, command and outputs.
 PROT/DFPHAR node
see Table 19.
 Command:
 2nd Harmonic Rst Diff Status: indicates the function status. Active if
enabled and not blocked.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff A: indicates that Phase A of the unit is
restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff B: indicates that Phase B of the unit is
restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff C: indicates that Phase C of the unit is
restraining.
 2nd Harm Restraint Diff: indicates that it is restraining at some phase.
Table 20. Outputs of the 2nd harmonic restraint functions

2nd Harm Restraint Diff Op general
2nd Harm Restraint Diff A Op pshA
2nd Harm Restraint Diff B Op pshB
2nd Harm Restraint Diff C Op pshC
2nd Harm Rst Diff Status StEna stVal

User Manual 60
3.1.8 2nd Harmonic blocking

The operation of the differential unit can be blocked by means of the 2nd harmonic
blocking. The 2nd harmonic present in the differential current blocks the restriction
unit if the corresponding settings are exceeded.
Ex.: If the restrain setting of the 2nd harmonic is adjusted by 20% and there is a 2nd
harmonic content greater than 20% in the Idif, the tripping limit of the differential
unit is blocked.
For a unit to activate its block, the differential current must be within the tripping
range of the characteristic.
The blocking can be independent per phase or general depending on the cross blocking
setting.
The settings used in these functions (See Table 21) are:

 I 2nd/fund threshold (%): Blocking slope.
 Differential threshold (xTap): Minimum setting to activate operation.
Table 21 Harmonic blocking settings

PHAREna Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
StrVal I2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 Float
PhStr Diff. Threshold (xTap) 0,15 1 0,01 Float
There are independent settings, commands and outputs.
 PROT/DPHAR node
see Table 21 Harmonic blocking settings.
 Command:
 Outputs: The Table 22. Outputs of the harmonic blocking functions shows the
output data of the function.
 2nd Harm Block Diff Status: indicates the function status. Active if
 2nd Harm Block Diff A: indicates that Phase A of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff B: indicates that Phase B of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff C: indicates that Phase C of the unit is restraining.
 2nd Harm Block Diff: indicates that it is restraining at some phase.

User Manual 61
Table 22. Outputs of the harmonic blocking functions

2nd Harm Block Diff Op general
2nd Harm Block Diff A Op pshA
2nd Harm Block Diff B Op pshB
2nd Harm Block Diff C Op pshC
2nd Harm Block Diff Status StEna stVal
3.1.8.1 Cross blocking

Tripping of the three phases can be blocked when there is a high percentage of harmonics
in any of the phases. This general block is only permitted during a set time period.
Depending on the enabling of the function the function operates as follows:
 No: It is disabled. The blocking is independent per phase. Therefore, the 2nd
harmonic of the phase A only blocks the phase A differential.
 Any phase: If there is a 2nd harmonic block in any phase, the 3 phases are blocked
in the percentage differential function.
 Two of three: If there is a 2nd harmonic block in two phases, the 3 phases are
blocked in the percentage differential function.
The settings used in these functions (See Table 23) are:
 Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled and the type of operation.
 Maximum time (ms): Maximum cross blocking activation time.
 Enable events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the
Table 23 Cross blocking settings

NO (0) /
Ena Enabled 0 2 1 Any phase (1) / enum
Two of three (2)
OpDlTmms Maximum time (ms) 0 5000 10 Float
There are independent settings, Command and outputs.
 PROT/CBPTRC node
see Table 23 Cross blocking settings.
 Command:
 Cross blocking status: indicates the function status. Active if enabled and
not blocked.
 Cross blocking active: indicates that the differential unit is blocked by
the cross blocking.
Table 24. Outputs of the harmonics blocking functions

Cross Blocking Status StEna stVal
Cross blocking active Op general

User Manual 62
3.1.9 Charging current compensation

It allows to reduce the sensitivity of the differential characteristic depending on the
breaker status of the ends. The breaker status must be configured in all ends. The
sensitivity is reduced in the following ways:
 The trip security time is increased (1,5 cycle) when any end is open and the
differential current is less than the rated current.
 The sensitivity increases to the value "Minimum threshold(xTap)", when it fulfils
any of the following conditions:
 An end is open.
 The time "Delay time (ms)" has not finished, since the breaker of all ends
has been closed (to avoid trips during the energization).
The settings used in this function are (See Table 25):

 Minimum threshold(xTap): Indicates the minimum value of the differential current
during the charging current compensation conditions.
 Delay time (ms): Indicates the time, after all the breakers were closed, when the
charging current compensation conditions are kept.
Table 25 Charging current compensation settings

Thres Minimum threshold(xTap) 0.08 20 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 10 1000 10 Float
 Node PROT/LDPTDF
see Table 25.
 Commands
 Outputs: Table 26 shows the outputs of this function.
 Charging I Status: enabled and not blocked.
 Running Charging I: Active while the differential characteristic
sensitivity is reduced by the charging current compensation.
Table 26 Charging current compensation Outputs

Charging I status StEna stVal
Running Charging I Str general
3.1.10 87N Restricted earth differential

This is used to detect internal ground faults of an area (thus, it is called restricted).
This is normally used in grounded Yn-D transformers with an earthing resistance where the
current level in the event of a fault is not enough to activate the differential unit of
the phase. It can also be used in all grounding connections.

User Manual 63
The function is performed on the local end.
The function calculates the zero sequence differential current by using the neutral
current and ground current of the transformer. If the difference between the two, applied
corresponding ratios, exceeds the programmed threshold, a trip signal is given. Direction
is taken into account to allow the trip. Magnitude and angle are used to determine the
direction.
The following conditions must be met to trip:
 The sensitivity (A) and slope (%) setting must be exceeded.

 The directional supervision indicates that the fault is internal.
 There is a minimum current through the ground.
The unit functions as follows:
Sensitivity: The unit starts if the difference between the ground and neutral currents
exceeds the programmed threshold after their respective transformation ratios are
applied. Neutral current is obtained from the sum of the phase currents or it is measured
in the neutral transformer (See node PROT/LINPDIF.SelI0)
 If IN is obtained from the sum of the phase currents:

𝐼𝑁 = 𝐼𝑎 + 𝐼𝑏 + 𝐼𝑐
𝑅𝑇𝐹
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 = | · (𝐼𝑎 + 𝐼𝑏 + 𝐼𝑐 ) − 𝐼𝐺 |
𝑅𝑇𝐺
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 ≥ 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
Where,
RTF: Transformation ratio of the phase CTs (PDIF.PhsRat, PDIF.PhsRat2 or

PDIF.PhsRat3 Depending on the local end).
RTG: Transformation ratio of the ground CT (PDIF.GndRat).
 If IN is obtained from the transformer measurement:
𝑅𝑇𝑁
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 = | · 𝐼 − 𝐼𝐺 |
𝑅𝑇𝐺 𝑁
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 ≥ 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
Where,
RTN: Transformation ratio of the neutral CT (LINPDIF.NeuRat).

RTG: Transformation ratio of the ground CT (PDIF.GndRat).
Slope: In addition, the calculated zero sequence differential current must be greater
than a percentage of the maximum phase current (of the local end).
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑆0 · 𝑅𝑇𝐺
· 100 ≥ 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒
𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠 · 𝑅𝑇(𝐹, 𝐺, 𝑁)
Ibias takes into account the transformation ratio of the setting taken as Ibias when the
maximum is selected.
The calculation of Ibias is:
𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥{𝐼𝑎 , 𝐼𝑏 , 𝐼𝑐 , 𝐼𝐺 , 𝐼𝑁 , 𝛼}
𝛼 = 𝐼𝑏𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑛−1 · 0.998
The Ibias is selected taking into account the settings of the primary values in order to
select a maximum from all the currents.
Minimum current: The minimum grounding current level must always be exceeded
(polarization IG or I). If this current does not exceed 50% of the set sensitivity, the

User Manual 64
unit is blocked. In the event of the neutral current (IN) being below 5% of Irated, the
directional is not taken into account, as it is assumed that the failure is internal and
there is no current circulating towards the fault.
Directional: It must indicate that the fault is internal: The grounding and the neutral
currents (the sum of the two windings following the application of their transformation
ratios) must be opposed.
For the fault to be considered internal, the currents being compared must be at more than
120º.
Signalling: The trip signals are produced by restricted earth if the directional
supervision indicates an internal fault and the difference between both magnitudes is
greater than the threshold and the slope.
The settings for this unit are:

 Sensitivity (A): This indicates the sensitivity threshold of the unit.
 Slope (%). Indicates the setting of the slope (%).
 Delay time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for the
tripping of the function must be met.
 General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or
not. For additional details, see the section corresponding to the recloser
(3.13.6).
 Trip Permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in
accordance with the recloser status: standby, blocked, safety time after
reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details,
see section corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6.3).
Table 27. Restricted ground settings

PREAEna Enabled NO / YES enum
StrVal Sensitivity (A) 0,05 20 0,01 float
SlpVal Slope (%) 0% 100% 1% float
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
TripPerm Trip Permission by recloser 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
There settings, command and outputs are:
 PROT/PREA node
see Table 28.
 Command:
 Restricted ground status: is active if enabled and not blocked.
 Restricted ground Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 Restricted ground Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.

User Manual 65
Table 28. Restricted ground function outputs

Restricted Ground Status StEna stVal
Restricted Ground Start Str general
Restricted Ground Trip Op general
3.1.11 Over-excitation by 5th harmonic

This measures the percentage of 5th harmonic current compared to the fundamental current.
The trip occurs when the 5th harmonic in any phase is higher than the setting during the
time programmed.

 Minimum operating current: indicates the minimum current required to run the
unit
 Starting threshold (%): indicates the value of the 5th harmonic compared to
the fundamental current in order to activate the unit.
 Fixed Time (ms). This indicates the time during which the conditions for
function tripping must be met.
Table 29. Over-excitation settings for 5th harmonic

Ena Enabled NO / YES enum
BlkValA Minimum operating current 0,1 10 0,01 Float
StrVal Starting threshold (%) 5 100 1 Float
OpDlTmms Fixed Time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
 PROT/H5PFRC node
see Table 29. Over-excitation settings for 5th harmonic
 Command:
 Outputs: The Table 30. Over-excitation outputs for 5th harmonic shows the
output data of the function.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Status: is active if enabled and not blocked.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 5th Harm. Overexcit. Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.
Table 30. Over-excitation outputs for 5th harmonic

5th Harm. Overexcit. Status StEna stVal
5th Harm. Overexcit. Status Str general
5th Harm. Overexcit. Status Op general

User Manual 66
3.1.12 Over-excitation v/f.

This function measures the ratio between the voltage measurement and the frequency; trips
when this value is higher than the setting, during the programmed time. It can work with
set time or a timed curve.
There are two separate units; each one can trip at set times or with a reverse curve.
These are two instances of the same node, with their independent settings, outputs, etc.
It is active in the 40 to 60Hz frequency range for a 50Hz grid and 50 to 70Hz in a 60Hz
grid.
The settings used in these functions are:

 Operation type: See in each unit.
 Start value (v/f): Set in v/f units. This indicates the value of v/f at which
the function is activated.
 Drop Out (%): indicates the percentage of the start setting that v/f has to
fall under to drop the unit.
 Minimum operating voltage: the minimum voltage for the function to run.
 Operating curve type: Indicates the type of curve selected from the following
options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse (3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 User curves 1 (33)
 Set time (49)
 Time dial. Indicates the time curve in the selected characteristic.
 Delay\minimum time (ms). This functionality differs depending on the type of
curve selected:
 When the set time curve is selected, this indicates the time during which
the conditions for the function to trip must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time; in other
words, the time selected for tripping will be the greater between this
setting and that associated with the curve.
 Reset type. Used to emulate induction. The following can be selected:
 "Instantaneous". If the current falls below the return level, both trip and
start relapse instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the v/f falls below the return level, trip relapses
instantaneously and start relapse time will depend on the curve selected
(family and index) and on v/f. If the curve selected is set time, start

User Manual 67
will relapse when the time programmed for start after falling below the
start current elapses, regardless of the v/f setting.
 General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or
not. For additional details, see the section corresponding to the recloser
(3.13.6).
Table 31. Over-excitation v/f settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Remarks Type

Vfase-tierra FUND (6)
Vfase-fase FUND (7)
OpType Operation type Vfase-tierra RMS (8) enum
Vfase-fase RMS (9)
Standard (10)
StrVal Start value (V/Hz) 0,8 40 0,01 Float
Rep Drop Out (%) 50 99 1 Float
BlkValV Minimun operating voltage 50 150 1 Float
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
TmVCrv Operating Curve Type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30 0,01 Float
OpDlTmms Operate\minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Timed (1)
 PROT/PVPH1 and PROT/PVPH2 node

see Table 31.
 Inputs:
 Outputs:
 V/f Overexcitation status: active if enabled and not blocked.
 V/f Overexcitation Start: indicates that the unit is started.
 V/f Overexcitation Trip: indicates that the unit is tripped.

User Manual 68
Table 32 Over-excitation v/f function outputs
Signal Node Data Attribute

V/f Overexcitation status U1 PVPH1 StEna stVal
V/f Overexcitation Start f U1 PVPH1 Str general
V/f Overexcitation Trip U1 PVPH1 Op general
V/f Overexcitation status U2 PVPH2 StEna stVal
V/f Overexcitation Start f U2 PVPH2 Str general
V/f Overexcitation Trip U2 PVPH2 Op general
3.1.13 Function 86
This consists in activating the programmed relays when a differential trip occurs
(instantaneous or percentage) or in activating a signal to be used to block the circuit
breaker closing circuits. This function can be enabled or not by settings.
The signal is deactivated by a programmed signal, such as "Desactivate Lock Trip 86",
pressing the "R" key or by the "Deact.block by trip (86)" command of the F86PTRC datum
DO86Ult node.
This signal is memorised so that, even if the relay switches off, it is activated again
when the relay switches on.

 Deactivate Lock Trip (86): Selects the signal which, when active, resets the
activation.
 Activate Trip 86: activates this signal.
Table 33. Function 86 settings

LogInDe Desactivate Lock Trip 86 uint 32
LogIn86 Activate Trip 86 uint 32
 PROT/F86PTRC node
see Table 33. Function 86 settings
 Commands
 “DO86Ult”: Deactivation of block signal by 86 trip
 Outputs
 Function 86 status: active if enabled and not blocked.
 Function 86: indicates function activation.
Table 34 Function 86 outputs

Fucntion 86 Status StEna stVal
Function 86 Op general

User Manual 69
3.2 DISTANCE UNITS (21)
Protections have measurement units per phase combination (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, and CA), per
characteristic (quadrilateral and Mho) and per zone of operation (5 zones).
A distance protection measurement unit compares the voltage and current to calculate the
impedance and the distance from the relay to the fault to determine whether the fault is
inside or outside the protected zone.
The protection has 5 zones of operation that can be configured independently with different
characteristics. The overreaching zones are useful as backup protection of the adjacent
lines. The typical configuration uses three forward zones and one backwards.
 The first zone typically covers up to 80% of the protected line, causing instantaneous
trips for faults in this zone.
 The second zone covers the rest of the line and part of the following one, usually up to
120% of the line. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The
trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time for giving another
protection time to clear the fault if it is outside of its line.
 The third zone covers the rest of the overreach line and part of the next one. It
provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are not
instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
 The fourth zone covers the reverse line. It provides trips or signalling, depending on
how it is programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional
programmable time available.
 The fifth zone is used as backup and covers all the zones. It provides trips or
signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is
an additional programmable time available.
The distance unit is supervised by the following functions:
 A directional function which provides the direction of the fault.

 A phase identifier which discriminates the phases involved in the fault, to prevent
certain units from overreaching.
 Current supervision. This allows fixing the minimum value so that there are distance
trips.
The Mho and/or quadrilateral characteristic can be used for both the single phase to ground
faults and for phase - phase faults, depending on which setting is selected.
The distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in each phase with the
zero sequence using different compensation factors for each zone.
In parallel lines, the distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in
each phase with the neutral current using a mutual compensation factor for each zone.
There are independent settings for each of the five zones (Table 35 and Table 36). Zone 1
has inductive tilting settings which do not exist in the other zones (Table 35).
The reach of zone 1 can vary depending on the "Zone 1 extension" function.
 Nodes:
 Zone 1: PROT/PDIS1
 Zone 2: PROT/ZPDIS2
There are 6 settings tables.
The settings used in these functions (Table 35 for zone 1 and Table 36 for the other zones)
are as follows:

User Manual 70
 Directional Mode. Indicates the direction of the characteristics. The directional

supervision indicates the direction.
 Non directional (0). The unit acts as non-directional, in other words,
directional supervision is disabled. In the quadrilateral characteristic it
operates forward and backwards, and in the Mho characteristic it operates
forward without being limited by directional supervision.
 Forward trip (1). It only operates with forward faults.
 Reverse trip (2). It only operates with backwards faults.
 Reverse start (3). It only operates with backwards faults. It does not generate
trips, only startups.
 Forward start (4). It only operates with forward faults. It does not generate
trips, only startups. This option is not found in settings for zone 1.
 Characteristic angle (º). Indicates the characteristic angle.
 General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional
details, see the section corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6).
 Reclose Permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in
 Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the
 Phase Enabled (Ph). Indicates whether or not the phase-phase characteristic is
enabled.
 Phase Characteristic (Ph). Selects the phase-phase characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.
 Phase Time (ms) (Ph). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the
tripping must be met.
 Mho Reach (Ph). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-phase characteristic.
 Resistive Reach (Ph). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-
phase characteristic.
 X Reach Forward (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach forward of the quadrilateral
phase-phase characteristic.If the "Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the setting
“X Reach Reverse (Ph)”is used.
 X Reach Reverse (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach backwards of the quadrilateral
phase-phase characteristic. If the "Directional Mode" is set to forward, the
setting “X Reach Forward (Ph)”is used.
 R Blinder Angle (Ph). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the
quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic.
 Block phase units (Ph). Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-
phase units.
 Enabled (Gnd). Indicates whether the phase-ground characteristic is enabled or not.
 Gnd Characteristic (Gnd). Selects the phase-ground characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.
 Phase-ground time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the
 Kn Module. Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor module.

User Manual 71
 Kn Angle (º). Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor angle.

 Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
 Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
 Mho Reach (Gnd). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-ground characteristic.
 Resistive Reach (Gnd). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-
ground characteristic.
 X Reach Forward (Gnd). Indicates the inductive forward reach of the quadrilateral
phase-ground characteristic. If the "Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the
setting “X Reach Reverse (Gnd)”is used.
 X Reach Reverse (Gnd). Indicates the inductive backwards reach of the quadrilateral
phase-ground characteristic. . If the "Directional Mode" is set to forward, the
setting “X Reach Forward (Gnd)”is used.
 R Blinder Angle (Gnd). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the
quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
 Tilt Angle Gnd (º). Indicates the tilting angle of the resistive reach of the
quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. This setting is only available for zone
1.
 Tilt Type (Gnd). Indicates the tilting type selected for the quadrilateral phase-
ground characteristic. This setting is available for zone 1.
 Disabled (0). Tilting is disabled.
 Time delayed (1). Enabled for the time selected, after fault detected.
 Continuous (2). Continuously enabled.
 Tilt Time Gnd (ms). Indicates the time during which inductive tilting of the phase-
ground quadrilateral characteristic is applied. This setting is available for zone
1.
 Quad. Type (Gnd). Indicates the quadrilateral unit polarization of the
quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
 I0 (0). Zero sequence polarization.
 I2 (1). Negative sequence polarization.
 Max (I0, I2) (2). Polarization by the greater of the two (zero sequence and
negative sequence).
 Block Gnd units. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-ground
units.
 Block zone. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone, in other words,
the phase-ground and phase-phase units.
 Timing type. Allows you to select how each zone's trip is delayed after startup
(only zones 2, 3, 4 and 5). The various modes are described in the section entitled
"Timing Type".

User Manual 72
Table 35 Zone 1 Settings

Non Directional (0)
Forward Trip (1)
DirMod Directional Mode enum
Reverse Trip (2)
Reverse Start (3)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 Int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward(Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) uint32
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0,5 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0,5 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
GndBaArg Tilt Angle Gnd (º) -10 10 1 float
Disabled (0)
GndTmType Tilt Type (Gnd) Time delayed (1) enum
Continuous (2)
GndBalTmms Tilt Time Gnd (ms) 0 500 10 Int32
I0 (0)
GndPolType Quad. Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units uint 32
LogInBlk Block zone uint 32

User Manual 73
Table 36 Zones 2, 3, 4, and 5 Settings

Non Directional (0)
Forward Trip (1)
DirMod Directional Mode Reverse Trip (2) enum
Reverse Start (3)
Forward Start (4)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 Int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) uint32
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0,5 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0,5 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
I0 (0)
GndPolType Quad. Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units uint 32
LogInBlk Block zone uint 32
Independent (0)
TimTyp Timing Type enum
Not Delayed (1)
 Commands There are 3 commands per zone:

 “DOrdBlk”: Block and unblock zone. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 “DOrdGBlk”: Block and unblock phase-ground units. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 “DOrdPhBlk”: Block and unblock phase-phase units. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 Outputs: Table 37 shows the function's output data (x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5).
 Start Zx. Startup by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the
distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has started up. It is independent
for each zone.
 Trip Zx. Trip by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the distance
unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has tripped. It is independent for each
zone.
 Start Mho Zx Y. Startup by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance
unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has started up It is independent for each
zone.

User Manual 74
 Trip Mho Zx Y. Trip by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit
(AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Quad Zx Y. Startup by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance
unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has started up It is independent for each
zone.
 Trip Quad Zx Y. Trip by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit
(AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA) which has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Zx single-phase. Single phase startup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the
zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Zx Phase-phase. Two phase startup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone.
It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx single-phase. Single phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone.
It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx Phase-phase. Two phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It
is independent for each zone.
 Zx start. Startup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for
each zone.
 Zx trip. Trip by QUAD and/or Mho trip, where x is the zone. It is independent
for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Mho phase-ground function’s status,
where x is the zone. It is active when enabled and not blocked. It is
independent for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Mho phase-phase function’s status, where
x is the zone. It is active when enabled and not blocked. It is independent for
each zone.
 Quad zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Quad phase-ground function’s status,
 Quad zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Quad phase-phase function’s status,

User Manual 75
Table 37 Mho and Quad Function Outputs

Start Zx AN Str phsA
Start Zx BN Str phsB
Start Zx CN Str phsC
Start Zx AB Str phsAB
Start Zx BC Str phsBC
Start Zx CA Str phsCA
Trip Zx AN Op phsA
Trip Zx BN Op phsB
Trip Zx CN Op phsC
Trip Zx AB Op phsAB
Trip Zx BC Op phsBC
Trip Zx CA Op phsCA
Start Mho Zx AN MStr phsA
Start Mho Zx BN MStr phsB
Start Mho Zx CN MStr phsC
Start Mho Zx AB MStr phsAB
Start Mho Zx BC MStr phsBC
Start Mho Zx CA MStr phsCA
Trip Mho Zx AN MOp phsA
Trip Mho Zx BN MOp phsB
Trip Mho Zx CN MOp phsC
Trip Mho Zx AB MOp phsAB
Trip Mho Zx BC MOp phsBC
Trip Mho Zx CA MOp phsCA
Start Quad Zx AN QStr phsA
Start Quad Zx BN QStr phsB
Start Quad Zx CN QStr phsC
Start Quad Zx AB QStr phsAB
Start Quad Zx BC QStr phsBC
Start Quad Zx CA QStr phsCA
Trip Quad Zx AN QOp phsA
Trip Quad Zx BN QOp phsB
Trip Quad Zx CN QOp phsC
Trip Quad Zx AB QOp phsAB
Trip Quad Zx BC QOp phsBC
Trip Quad Zx CA QOp phsCA
Start Zx single-phase GndStr general
Start Zx Phase-phase PhStr general
Trip Zx single-phase GndOp general
Trip Zx Phase-phase PhOp general
Start Zx Str general
Trip Zx Op general
Mho zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general
Mho zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general
Quad zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general
Quad zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general

User Manual 76
3.2.1 Mho
The Mho characteristic is used with a cosine type phase comparator with Sop and Spol
input phasors.
Hence, the signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are shown in Table 38.
The operation zone must fulfil
−90º ≤ angle (Sop/Spol) ≤ 90º

Table 38 Mho Characteristic Signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized
Where:
 ZxGF: Phase-ground reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set
in ohms.
 ZxF: Phase-phase reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set
in ohms.
 ZxAº: Line characteristic angle, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in
degrees.
 Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone).
1 zl0
K n = ( − 1)
3 zl1
 Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines) where x is the zone (one setting
per zone).
𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1
 Ia, Ib, Ic: Phase currents.

 Iab, Ibc, Ica: Phase - phase currents (Iab = Ia - Ib, Ibc = Ib - Ic, Ica = Ic -
Ia).
 3 I0: Calculated neutral current.
 IN2: Measured neutral current of the parallel line. Only for double lines.
 Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
 Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase voltages.
 Va1, Vb1, Vc1: Positive sequence voltages referred to each of the phases. The value
will be determined by the supervision of the memorization voltage (see section
3.4.3).
Equation 1
Va1 1
π
(Vb1) = (e1j·240180 ) · V1
π
Vc1 e1j·120180
 Vab1, Vbc1, Vca1: Positive sequence voltages referred to phase - phase voltages.
The value will be determined by the supervision of the memorization voltage (see
section 3.4.3).

User Manual 77
Equation 2
𝜋
𝑉𝑎𝑏1 𝑒1𝑗·30180
𝜋
( 𝑉𝑏𝑐1 ) = √3 (𝑒1𝑗·270180 ) 𝑉1
𝑉𝑐𝑎1 𝜋
𝑒1𝑗·150180
The voltages and currents used correspond to the type of fault being analysed; for
example, for an A phase to ground fault, the corresponding phasors will be Ia and Va, for
an A and B phase - phase fault, they will be Iab and Vab.
The phase current used for single phase faults correspond to the current measured in each
phase compensated with the zero sequence. Double lines are also compensated with neutral
current (mutual compensation factor).
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed must be greater than 10% of the rated
current.
All of the Mho units are supervised by a reactance unit (Inductive X limit). In this way,
the tendency for the Mho units to overreach is prevented due to the influence of the load
beforehand.
Zero compensation for double lines (km) is only applicable if the neutral current in the
parallel line (IN2) is less than 1.35 times the neutral current of the protected line
(3I0).
If a pole is opened (from the trip), the positive sequence voltage will be calculated
without taking into account the open pole's phase voltage to avoid the distortion from
discharging the line capacitors on this open phase. In other words, normally (with 3
poles closed) V1=1/3·(Va+a·Vb+a²·Vc)
If pole A is opened, V1 is calculated as V1=1/2·(0+a·Vb+a²·Vc) even if there is voltage

in Va.
Memory is used according to polarization memory supervision. See section 3.4.3.
Figure 41 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional Mho characteristics.
Figure 42 shows the logic diagram of the Mho characteristic for units AN and AB forward.
 The other units function in a similar way.

 If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.
 If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards"
permissions are used.
The input signals of this scheme are:
 Pole A open, Pole B open, Pole C open: Activated when the pole "x" is open. They
are outputs of the function open pole detector.
 Phase A open (I<), Phase B open (I<), Phase C open (I<): Indicates that the phase
current is below the open pole detector level. They are outputs of the function
open pole detector.
 Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as
forward. It is output of the “MHO and QUAD unit supervision”.
 Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Fuse failure start. Blocked by the fuse failure start signal.
 Power swing blocking. Blocked by the Power swing detector.
 Open Pole. Indicates, there´s any pole open. It is output of the function open pole
detector.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 78
Figure 41 Mho Characteristics

User Manual 79
Figure 42 Mho Logic Diagram
3.2.2 Quadrilateral
The Quadrilateral characteristic is used by making two comparisons for each zone and for
each single phase component:
 The resistive component of each impedance with the corresponding "Resistive Reach"
setting.
 The inductive component of each impedance with the corresponding "X Reach forward"
or "X Reach reverse" (depending on the sign and on the "Directional Mode" setting).
The resistive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:

User Manual 80
Vpol
R = Re ( )
Ieq
The inductive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:
Im[Vpol · ̅̅̅̅̅
Ipol]
X = Im(ZL1) ·
̅̅̅̅̅)]
Im[ZL1 · (Ieq · Ipol
For single phase units in zone 1, the inductive component is calculated as follows:
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im[Vpol · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚)]
X = Im(ZL1)Ÿ ·
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im [ZL1 · (Ieq · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚))]
Where:
 Vpol: Unit's voltage.

 Ieq: Unit's current in the case of single phases corresponding to the compensated
current.
 ZL1: Line impedance characterised by the "Characteristic angle (º)" (setting).
 Z1BASCAº : "Tilt Angle Gnd (º)" (setting). Only for zone 1 and single-phase units.
 Ipol: Polarization current.
The intervention of the tilt angle is regulated by two settings (only zone 1 and single
phase units):
 Tilt type (Gnd): If defined as "Disabled", this angle's value is always 0. If

defined as "Time delayed", this angle maintains its setting value during the time
indicated in the setting "Tilt time Gnd (ms)". If defined as "Continuous" it always
keeps its setting value.
 Tilt time Gnd (ms): Time, in ms, for applying the tilt angle after the fault
detection, only if the setting "Tilt type (Gnd)" is set as "Time delayed".
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed must be greater than 10% of the rated
current.
Figure 43 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional quadrilateral characteristics.
The signals used in each phase of the Quadrilateral characteristic are shown in Table 39.
The operation zone must be such that these two components are less than the set reach.
Table 39 Quadrilateral Characteristic Signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] Vc 3I0, 3I2· a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2· a2 or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2 or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2· a or Ica
Where:
 Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Same
setting as for Mho.
 Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines), where x is the zone (one setting
per zone). Same setting as for Mho.

User Manual 81
Ia).
 Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
 Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase Voltages.
 I2: Negative sequence of the current calculated using the phase currents.
In the case of single phases faults, the polarization current (Ipol) for each phase is
chosen according to the "Quad. type (Gnd)" setting. There are three possible options:
zero sequence, negative sequence, and the maximum of both.
In the case of the phase - phase ones, the polarization current applied is always the
negative sequence current, unless the value of the negative sequence is less than the 10%
of the positive sequence or less than the 5% of the rated current. In that case, the
current between the two phases is used.
The zero compensation and the memory are applied following the same conditions as for the
Mho characteristic.
The Figure 44 shows the logic diagram of the quadrilateral characteristic for units AN
and AB forward.
The other units function in a similar way.
 If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.

 If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards"
permissions are used.
open pole detector.
 Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as
forward. It is output of the “MHO and QUAD unit supervision”.
 Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Perm. dir IA Forward. Forward directional permission for phase A. Function
"Directional supervision".
 Perm. dir IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
detector.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 82
Figure 43 Quad Characteristics
Forward Reverse
Non directional

User Manual 83
Figure 44 Logic Diagram for the Quad Characteristic
3.2.3 Timing Type for Tripping

The timing type for tripping indicates how the timing takes place from the startup to the
trip. This setting can only be selected in the timed zones: 2, 3, 4 and 5.
There are two ways of tripping the distance units:
 Not delayed. This means that different startups in different phases do not delay
the trip. For example, if a startup takes place in phase A and the startup
condition disappears in this phase, but phase B starts up, timing continues. Hence,
the trip is not delayed.

User Manual 84
 Independent. Each phase has an independent timer. For example, if a startup takes
place in phase A and the startup condition disappears in this phase, but phase B
starts up, timing for tripping starts again.
In zone 1 (not timed), the "Independent" mode is always applied.
The condition for activating a unit (prior to the trip) is activated if there is a
startup in any of the units (this is the case in "Not delayed" mode) or in the specific
unit (this is the case in the "Independent" mode) and the corresponding timing is
fulfilled.
In the case of the "Independent" mode, once the corresponding condition for activating
the unit has been activated, a seal is applied so that the condition is not deactivated
while there is an overcurrent (only in zones 2, 3, 4 and 5).
In order for a unit to trip, besides the unit having to be activated, there must be a
closed phase or V1>80%Vrated for 1/4 cycle.
Figure 45 shows the logic diagram for trip mode without a delay between phases.
open pole detector.
 Selector AN/BCN. Enables AN and BC units and blocks the other units. It is the
signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector BN/CAN. Enables BN and CA units and blocks the other units. It is the
signal “BN/CAN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector CN/ABN. Enables CN and AB units and blocks the other units. It is the
signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Zone n start AN. Indicated that the AN unit of the zone has started.
 Zone n start BN. The same as precious for phase BN.
 Zone n start CN. The same as precious for phase CN.
 Zone n start AB. The same as precious for phaseS AB.
 Zone n start BC. The same as precious for phase BC.
 Zone n start CA. The same as precious for phase CA.
 IA>IA Forward. It is the signal "Perm. IA Forward" of the function Overcurrent
supervision.
 IB>IB Forward. The same as precious for phaseB.
 IC>IC Forward. The same as precious for phase C.
 IAB>IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 IBC>IBC Forward. The same as precious for phase BC.
 ICA>ICA Forward. The same as precious for phases CA.
Figure 47 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in single
phase units.
Figure 46 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in two phase
units.

User Manual 85
Figure 45 Logic Diagram for Tripping without a Delay between Phases.
Figure 46 Logic Diagram for Two Phase Independent Trip

User Manual 86
Figure 47 Logic Diagram for Single Phase Independent Trip
3.2.4 Zone 1 Extension

The zone 1 extension makes possible to vary the reach of the zone 1 in the first trip,
returning to the set reach for the successive trips. The zone 1 extension is applied when
it is enabled and the recloser is in standby and it is not extended after the first
reclose.
Zone 1 cannot be extended when the recloser is disabled or blocked.
It is applied to the mho and quadrilateral characteristics, there is an independent

compensation factor for ground faults and for phase - phase faults.
The settings are as follows:
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function.

 Gnd extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-ground reach setting of zone 1's Mho
and Quad characteristics are multiplied.
 Ph - ph extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-phase reach setting of zone 1's
Mho and Quad characteristics are multiplied.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone extension.

User Manual 87
There are settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/RZEX1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 40.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocks and unblocks the function. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 Outputs: Table 41 shows the function's output data.
 Zone 1 Extension: Indicates that the zone extension is activated.
 Zone 1 Extension Status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 40 Zone 1 Extension Settings

Z1GVal Gnd extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
Z1Gval Ph-Ph extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
LoghBlk Blocking input uint32
Table 41 Zone 1 Extension Outputs

Zone 1 Extension Z1Ext general
Zone 1 Extension Status StEna general
Figure 48 shows the logic diagram corresponding to the zone 1 extension.
The recloser signals used in this function are:
 Recloser in standby. Indicates the recloser is in standby status.

 Reclosing 1 in progress. Indicates the recloser´s cycle 1 is ongoing.
 Safety time 1st reclosing. Indicates the recloser is in safety time after the first
reclose.
 Recloser Blocked. Indicates the recloser is blocked.
Figure 48 Zone 1 Extension Logic Diagram
Setting
ENABLED = YES
DIGITAL INPUT
Blocking input
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser in standby WORKING SETTING
Working Z1GF=Z1GF·Gnd extension ratio
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1F =Z1F·Ph-Ph extension ratio
Reclosing 1 in progress
WORKING SETTING
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1GF=Z1GF
Safety time 1st reclosing Working Z1F =Z1F
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser Blocked

User Manual 88
3.2.5 High Speed zone

There is a high speed operation unit for zone 1 (only forward) and another one for zone 4
(only backwards), based on the half cycle DFT, for both characteristics (Mho and Quad).
The high speed zone 1 can only be active if zone 1 is programmed forward and enabled.
The high speed zone 4 will only be active if zone 4 is programmed backwards and enabled.
The high speed zone is made by including an internal zone in zone 1 and zone 4 such as
that |X|<80%ZxF, |R|<20%ZxF, where ZxF is the reach of the corresponding zone.
 Zone 1 enabled: Indicates whether the high speed zone 1 is enabled or not.
 Zone 4 enabled: indicates whether the high speed zone 4 is enabled or not.
 Zone 1 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed
zone 1.
 Zone 4 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed
zone 4.
There are settings and outputs.
 Node: PROT/PHSZ1
 High speed zone 1: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 1 is enabled and
not blocked.
 High speed zone 4: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 4 is enabled and
not blocked.
Table 42 High Speed Operation Zone Settings

Z1QEna Zone 1 enabled NO / YES enum
Z4QEna Zone 4 enabled NO / YES enum
LogInZ1Bl Zone 1 Blocking input uint32
LogInZ4Bl Zone 4 Blocking input uint32
Table 43 High Speed Zone Outputs

High speed zone 1 StEna1 general
High speed zone 4 StEna4 general
Figure 49 shows the Mho and Quad characteristics of the high speed zone 1.

User Manual 89
Figure 49 High speed zone Mho and Quad Characteristics
Figure 50 shows the functional logic diagram of the high speed operation Mho
characteristic.
The input signals of this function are the indicated in the mho and quadrilateral units.

User Manual 90
Figure 50 Logic Diagram for the High Speed Mho Characteristic

User Manual 91
3.2.6 Phase selector

The phase selector determines the fault type, allowing the trip as a result of this and
blocking the others. The phases involved in the fault are selected as follows:
Two conditions are defined:
Condition 1 (3 · I0 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(3 · 𝐼0 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (1)

Zero sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for
Irated=1A) and the percentage must be greater than the 10% of the maximum phase current.
Condition 2 (3 · I2 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(𝐼2 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (2)

Negative sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for
Irated=1A) and the percentage must be greater than the 10% of the positive sequence.
THREE PHASE FAULTS
If neither (1) nor (2) are fulfilled, it means that there is a three-phase fault. The
fault is indicated as ABC and the two-phase units are enabled.
The three zones Zxab, Zxbc, Zxca must be simultaneously failing for a three-phase fault
to be signalled (even if the three two-phase units are enabled, it will not be signalled
unless this condition is fulfilled).
TWO PHASE FAULTS
If only (2) is fulfilled, the fault is phase-phase.
When the fault detector is disabled, all the two-phase units are enabled.
When the fault detector is enabled, the angle is analysed to determinate the faulted
phases:
𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼2 ) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(∆𝐼1 )

Where:
 I1 is the real fault positive sequence current. Fault current minus prefault
current.
 I2 in the negative sequence current.
The prefault value is captured from the fault detector. When the fault is detected, the
previous 2 cycles of the current are captured. This value is subtracted to the fault
positive sequence.
Figure 51 Two phases fault identifier
SINGLE PHASE OR TWO PHASE TO GROUND FAULTS
If (1) and (2) are fulfilled, the fault is to ground (single phase or phase - phase). In
this case, the angular selector becomes involved.
If the angles are not involved, the detection is made by voltages.
If a single phase / two phase fault to ground is detected, only the units involved will
be enabled. If it is a CN/ABN, units CN and AB are enabled and the others are blocked.

User Manual 92
Figure 52 Phase Identifier
UNDETERMINED IDENTIFICATION
If (1) is fulfilled but (2) is not, all of the units will be enabled, since the relay
cannot determine what type of fault is processed.
All of the units will be enabled if there is an open pole, in other words, if a single-
pole opening has occurred.
Outputs are available.
 Node: PROT/DISPTRC1
 Outputs: Table 44 shows the output data.
 AN/BCN Selector: Enables the AN and BC units and blocks the others.
 BN/CAN Selector: Enables the BN and CA units and blocks the others.
 CN/ABN Selector: Enables the CN and AB units and blocks the others.
 Unknown Fault: Enables all of the units.
 ABC Fault: Enables units AB, BC and CA. This is only indicated if there has been
a simultaneous fault in AB, BC and CA.
 Phase - Phase Fault: Enables the two-phase units.
 Ground fault: It is activated when there is a ground fault.
Table 44 Phase Identifier Outputs

AN/BCN Selector PhId PhANBCN
BN/CAN Selector PhId PhBNCAN
CN/ABN Selector PhId PhCNABN
Unknown Fault UnFa general
ABC Fault ABCFaDet general
Phase - Phase Fault PhFaDet general
Ground Fault GndFaDet general
Figure 53 shows the phase identifier’s logic diagram.
If any of the poles is open, the phase selector is not taken into account. In this case,
the loops containing the open pole are blocked. E.g.: If the open pole is A, loops AB, CA
and AN are blocked. The trip will be three-pole.
In the case of a three-phase opening, if only the breaker status generic input is
programmed (not by pole); the phase selector continues being used. In other words, only

User Manual 93
the phase selector is disabled in the case of a single-phase opening. In this case, the
fault type is defined by the active distance units. If any of the two-phase distance
units is activated, a two-phase fault will be indicated.
Figure 53 Phase Identifier's Logic Diagram
3.2.7 Fault detection

This function detects the start of the fault by checking the differences in the actual
zero sequence, positive sequence and negative sequence currents, with those in two cycles
before.
It is activated when:
 The difference between the actual measurement of the current's positive sequence
(I1) and the measurement two cycles beforehand exceeds the 10% of the rated current
and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The difference between the current measurement of the negative sequence of
the current (I2) and the measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the
rated current.
 The difference between the current measurement of the zero sequence of the
current (I0) and the measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the rated
current.
 The positive sequence of the current (I1) increases by more than 25%
compared to two cycles before.
When one of these thresholds is exceeded or if the phase selector identifies a fault
which is not three-phase, the fault detector is activated. The fault detector stays
active for 30ms after the previous situation disappears. If a distance unit or an
overcurrent startup occurs while the fault detector is active, the fault detector will
stay active for 30 ms after the trip disappears.
Table 45 shows the output data.

User Manual 94
 Outputs. Table 45 shows the output data.
 Fault detection: Indicates a fault has been detected.
Table 45 Fault Detector Outputs.

Fault detection FaDet general
The following figure shows the functional logic diagram of the fault detector.
 2 Phase Fault. It is the signal "Phase - Phase Fault" of the Phase selector.
 Ground fault. It is the signal "Ground fault" of the Phase selector.
 Start signals. Indicates that any of the started units generate the general start
signal.
Figure 54 Fault Detector's Logic Diagram

User Manual 95
3.2.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision

The supervision unit disables the startup of the MHO and QUAD units, differentiating
between single-phase and two-phase units.
Figure 55 shows the supervision logic diagram for single-phase units.
Single-Phase Units. The blocking conditions for phase-ground units are as follows:
 If the phase identifier does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.
 If ((3·I0>5%·Irated phase) AND (3·I0>10%·I1)) is not fulfilled. Phase identifier
condition 1.
 No current can be seen in the single-phase unit's phase ("detection logic of the
open pole by current").
 Ia, Ib, Ic (as corresponds) must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for
In=5A, even if the supervision by means of overcurrent is not been used.
 If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
 If the fuse failure function is activated.
 If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional
supervision mode.
 If the overcurrent supervision (only single phase units) is enabled, when the phase
current or the neutral current (3·I0), are less than the phase threshold and
neutral threshold of the selected direction for that zone.
 If there is no directional permission. The phase-ground units are supervised by the
polarised directional units by phase currents, by negative sequence and by zero
sequence. In the case of an open pole, only phase current polarizations are used.
The input signals of these schemes are:
open pole detector.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 96
Figure 55 Logic Diagram from Single-Phase Unit Supervision
Figure 56 shows the supervision logic diagram for two-phase units.
Two-phase units. The blocking conditions for phase-phase units are as follows:
 If the phase selector does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.
 No current is detected in one of the unit phases. If there is no current in A,
neither unit AB nor CA unit are activated ("detection logic for open pole by
current").
 Iab, Ibc, Ica must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for In=5A, even if
the overcurrent supervision is not been used.
 If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
 If the fuse failure function is activated.
 If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional
supervision mode.
 If two-phase unit overcurrent supervision has been enabled. If the phase-phase
overcurrent of the direction corresponding to the zone is not exceeded. The

User Manual 97
threshold must be exceeded in each phase of the ones involved in the unit (e.g. in
unit AB, currents of phases A and B and AB.
 If the "load encroachment" unit is activated.
 If there is no directional permission.
Figure 56 Logic Diagram from Two-Phase Unit Supervision

User Manual 98
There are settings and outputs.
 Outputs: Table 47 shows the output data.
 Permission I>ZA Forward. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to
operate for zones programmed forward.
 I>ZB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to
 I>ZC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to
 I>ZAB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to
 I>ZBC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to
 I>ZCA Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to
 I>ZA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to
operate for zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to act.
For zones programmed backwards.
 I>ZC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to
 I>ZAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to
 I>ZBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to
 I>ZCA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to
Table 46 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Settings

Table 47 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Outputs

Perm. I> ZA Forward ZFw phsA
Perm. I> ZB Forward ZFw phsB
Perm. I> ZC Forward ZFw phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Forward ZFw phsAB
Perm. I> ZBC Forward ZFw phsBC
Perm. I> ZCA Forward ZFw phsCA
Perm. I> ZA Reverse ZRv phsA
Perm. I> ZB Reverse ZRv phsB
Perm. I> ZC Reverse ZRv phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Reverse ZRv phsAB
Perm. I> ZBC Reverse ZRv phsBC
Perm. I> ZCA Reverse ZRv phsCA

User Manual 99
3.2.8.1 Overcurrent Supervision

This unit supervises the startup of the MHO and QUAD units. If a series of conditions,
which depend on the settings, are not fulfilled, it disables the startup of the
corresponding units. The settings are independent for phase-ground, phase-phase,
forward and backwards.
Single-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-ground units of the distance characteristics (mho and

quadrilateral).
It is used to measure each phase measurement and neutral measurement (3I0).
It compares the current of each phase with the threshold established as the setting,
activating when it is exceed and deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis
is made for each phase independently, generating an output per phase, which allows the
distance units of each phase to operate if the current measured is greater than the
threshold and disables it otherwise.
To have permission in a phase, both the measurements of the phase and of the neutral
(3I0) must exceed their corresponding thresholds.
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

 Phase Forward threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow
the corresponding phase-gnd unit of the distance zones selected as forward.
 Phase Reverse threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow
the corresponding phase-gnd unit of the distance zones selected as backwards.
 3I0 Forward threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to
allow the phase-gnd distance zones selected as forward.
 3I0 Reverse threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to
allow the phase-gnd distance zones selected as backwards.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks single-phase
overcurrent supervision.
 Node: PROT/GRZOS1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of single-phase overcurrent supervision. Only
acts when the function is enabled.
 IA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN
distance unit to act (for zones programmed forward).
 IB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN
 IC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN
 IA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN
distance unit to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 IB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN

User Manual 100
 IC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN

 Gnd supervision status. Indicates that phase-ground overcurrent supervision is
activated and not blocked.
Table 48 Single-Phase Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Phase Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Phase Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
FwNVal 3I0 Forward threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32
RvNVal 3I0 Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32
Table 49 Single-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IA Forward IFw phsA
Perm. IB Forward IFw phsB
Perm. IC Forward IFw phsC
Perm. IA Reverse IRv phsA
Perm. IB Reverse IRv phsB
Perm. IC Reverse IRv phsC
Gnd Supervision Status StEna general
Phase-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-phase units of the distance characteristics (mho and

quadrilateral).
It compares the phase - phase current of each two phases and the current of each phase
with the threshold established as the setting, activating when it exceeds it and
deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis is made for each phase
combination independently, generating an output per combination, which allows the
distance units of each combination to act if the current measured is greater than the
threshold and disables it otherwise.
The threshold must be exceeded for the phase - phase current and for each phase
involved in the phase - phase current.
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

 Forward threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to
allow the corresponding two-phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
 Reverse threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to
allow the corresponding two-phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks two-phase overcurrent
supervision.
 Node: PROT/PHRZOS1

User Manual 101
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of two-phase overcurrent supervision. Only
acts when the function is enabled.
 IAB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the
AB distance unit to act (for zones programmed forward).
 IBC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the
BC distance unit to act (for zones programmed forward).
 ICA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the
CA distance unit to act (for zones programmed forward).
 IAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AB
 IBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BC
 ICA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CA
 Ph-Ph supervision status. Indicates that phase-phase overcurrent supervision is
activated and not blocked.
Table 50 Two-Phase Unit Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
Table 51 Two-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IAB Forward IFw phsAB
Perm. IBC Forward IFw phsBC
Perm. ICA Forward IFw phsCA
Perm. IAB Reverse IRv phsAB
Perm. IBC Reverse IRv phsBC
Perm. ICA Reverse IRv phsCA
Ph-Ph Supervision Status StEna general
3.2.8.2 Directional supervision

It supervises the direction of the fault such that it only allows faults that occur in
the direction programmed in each zone. This is applicable to all distance units (Mho
and Quad).
Functioning is conditioned by polarization memory supervision. Hence, if the logic

indicates that the memorised voltage must be used, this is used during the set time.
See section 3.3.3.
Table 52 shows the comparisons for determining the direction of the different types of
faults:

User Manual 102
Table 52 Directional Supervision Comparisons.
Unit S1 S2 Calculus
Ia  ZGDIRA set |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| <
AN Va1 mem
& I2_A  ZGDIRA set ZGAMPA/2
Ib  ZGDIRA set |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| <
BN Vb1 mem
& I2_B  ZGDIRA set ZGAMPA/2
Ic  ZGDIRA set |Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| <
CN Vc1 mem
& I2_C  ZGDIRA set ZGAMPA/2
|Angle(S1)- Angle(S2)| <
AB Iab  ZDIRA set Vab1 mem
ZAMPA/2
BC Ibc  ZDIRA set Vbc1 mem
ZAMPA/2
CA Ica  ZDIRA set Vca1 mem
ZAMPA/2
Where:
 ZGDIRA set: Phase-ground angle. Set in degrees.

 ZGAMPA: Phase-ground amplitude. Set in degrees.
 ZDIRA set: Phase-phase angle. Set in degrees.
 ZAMPA: Phase-phase amplitude. Set in degrees.
 Vx1 mem: Positive sequence of the phase or combination of corresponding phases. The
value is conditioned by polarization memory supervision (see section 3.4.3). Where
x indicates the corresponding unit.
In order for the directional to function, the voltage must be greater than 2V and the
currents must be greater than 5% of the rated current.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage
and current (see Figure 57).
It is indicated as forward if:
|angle(S1) − angle(S2)| < 𝐴𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒/2
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current
directional status is maintained.
The torque angle is the directional setting angle with the setting amplitude.
This directional is used in all zones and fault types.

Figure 57 Directional Supervision
In the case of an open pole, only phase current polarizations are used, not by I2.

User Manual 103
The maximum torque angle will correspond to the directional angle set with an
adjustable margin.
This directional is applied to all zones and types of phases.
 Ph-Ph angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for two-phase supervision.
 Ph-Ph amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for two-phase
supervision.
 Gnd angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for single-phase supervision.
 Gnd amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for single-phase
supervision.
Figure 58 shows the supervision logic diagrams for single-phase and two-phase
directional supervision.
The input signal of this scheme is:
detector.
Figure 58 Single-Phase and Two-Phase Zone Supervision

User Manual 104
There are settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/RDIR1
 Permission dir IA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows
distance unit AN to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir IB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit BN to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir IC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit CN to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir IAB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit AB to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir IBC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit BC to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir ICA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit CA to act (for zones programmed forward).
 Permission dir IA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit AN to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 Permission dir IB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit BN to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 Permission dir IC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit CN to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 Permission dir IAB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit AB to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 Permission dir IBC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit BC to act (for zones programmed backwards).
 Permission dir ICA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the
distance unit CA to act (for zones programmed backwards).
Table 53 Directional Supervision Settings

PhDirArg Ph-Ph angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
PhAmp Ph-Ph amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
GndDirArg Gnd angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
GndAmp Gnd amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
Table 54 Directional Supervision Outputs

Permission dir IA Forward DirFw phsA
Permission dir IB Forward DirFw phsB
Permission dir IC Forward DirFw phsC
Permission dir IAB Forward DirFw phsAB
Permission dir IBC Forward DirFw phsBC
Permission dir ICA Forward DirFw phsCA
Permission dir IA Reverse DirRv phsA
Permission dir IB Reverse DirRv phsB
Permission dir IC Reverse DirRv phsC
Permission dir IAB Reverse DirRv phsAB
Permission dir IBC Reverse DirRv phsBC
Permission dir ICA Reverse DirRv phsCA

User Manual 105
3.2.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines

With the use of capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs), in the event of a very sharp
voltage drop, faults very close to the relay or with high SIR (Source Impedance Ratio),
give rise to very serious transients in the voltage, which tend to cause overreaches in
the distance units. In conditions in which the current is very small, generally when the
value of the SIR is very high with respect to the line impedance, this problem will
arise. To avoid it, the voltages are filtered when the seriousness of the transients is
very acute.
3.2.9.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Logic

If capacitive voltage transformers are being used, this function will be enabled by
the settings.
In order to determine when the voltages must be filtered, two conditions must be
fulfilled: A fault has occurred and there is a risk of overreaching (for which the SIR
estimation will be used).
To estimate the SIR, the lowest value obtained from amongst all the units indicated by
the phase identifier will be used. They are compared with a threshold which will
depend on the CVT type (which can be selected through the settings). If the SIR value
calculated is greater than the threshold specified and a fault is detected using the
fault detector, then the filtered voltages will be used. Otherwise, the voltages will
be calculated as usual.
The filtered voltages are only used in zone 1 of the distance functions (unit 21). A
digital bandpass filter is used.

 CVT type: Selects the type of supervision and with it, the threshold used to
compare the SIR calculated to determine whether or not filtered voltages should be
used.
 Passive: SIR 10 threshold.
 Active: SIR 1 threshold.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the CVT function.
 Node: PROT/RCVT1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 Outputs: See Table 56.
 “CVT enabled”: Indicates that the CVTs are active and not blocked.
 "Voltages filtered": This is activated while filtered voltages are being used.
Table 55 CVT Settings

CVTType CVT Type Passive / Active enum

User Manual 106
Table 56 CVT Output

CVT Enabled StEna general
Voltages filtered FilterV general
3.2.9.2 SIR Calculation

SIR is understood as the source impedance ratio with respect to the line impedance.
It is calculated with the half cycle dft. The calculation is performed on the units
indicated by the phase identifier. The SIR value to bear in mind will always be the
one corresponding to the one with lowest value amongst the units indicated by the
phase identifier.
The SIR and the option to use or not to use filtered voltages is assessed when the
fault detector is activated. Depending on the CVT supervision type ("Passive" or
"Active"), different thresholds will be used to determine whether or not to used
filtered voltages.
If the SIR is greater than 1 for the actives or 10 for the passive ones, the high
speed tripping is blocked and filtered voltages are used in Zone 1, for both MHO and
QUAD characteristics.
The formulation for calculating the SIR is shown in Table 57:

Table 57 Calculating the SIR for Different Units.
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vrated/((Ia+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Iab·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ib+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ibc·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ic+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ica·Z1))-1
Where:
 Urated: Rated phase-phase voltage (3·Vrat).

 Vrated: Rated phase-ground voltage.
 Z1: The module of the positive sequence impedance of the line.
 Kn1: Zero-sequence compensation for zone 1.
1 zl0
K n = ( − 1)
3 zl1
 Km1: Mutual compensation constant for zone 1 (double lines).

𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1

Ia).
3.3 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS
In this section all the protection functions are shown, the ones included in each model are
indicated in the functional description.

User Manual 107
3.3.1 Signals
There are available general signals that group data from several functions (see Table
58). These signals are in the node PROT/PTRC1. In every model will be only the signals of
the available functions.
 General Start. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is
started.
 General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is
activated.
 Pole A General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of
pole A is activated.
 Pole B General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of
pole B is activated.
 Pole C General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of
pole C is activated.
 OC General Start. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is started.
 OC General Trip. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is activated.
 51 Start. Indicates that any of the time delay phase overcurrent unit is started.
 51N Start. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is
started.
 51ES Start. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is
started.
 51UN Start. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is
started.
 51 Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay phase overcurrent units is activated.
 51N Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is
activated.
 51ES Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is
activated.
 51UN Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is
activated.
 50 Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is
started.
 50N Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is
started.
 50ES Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units
is started.
 50UN Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is
started.
 50 Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is
activated.
 50N Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is
activated.
 50ES Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units
is activated.
 50UN Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is
activated.
 Voltage Start. Indicates that one of the voltage units is started.
 IOV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is started.

User Manual 108
 IUV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is started.
 Minimum F Start. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is started.
 Maximum F Start. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is started.
 dfdt Start. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is started.
 Voltage Trip. Indicates that one of the voltage units is activated.
 IOV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is activated.
 IUV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is activated.
 Minimum F Trip. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is activated.
 Maximum F Trip. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is activated.
 dfdt Trip. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is activated.
Table 58 General signals

General Start Str general
General Trip Op general
Pole A General Trip Op phsA
Pole B General Trip Op phsB
Pole C General Trip Op phsC
OC General Start StrOC stVal
OC General Trip OpOC stVal
51 Start Str51 stVal
51N Start Str51N stVal
51ES Start Str51ES stVal
51UN Start Str51UN stVal
51 Trip Op51 stVal
51N Trip Op51N stVal
51ES Trip Op51ES stVal
51UN Trip Op51UN stVal
50 Start Str50 stVal
50N Start Str50N stVal
50ES Start Str50ES stVal
50UN Start Str50UN stVal
50 Trip Op50 stVal
50N Trip Op50N stVal
50ES Trip Op50ES stVal
50UN Trip Op50UN stVal
Voltage Start StrV stVal
IOV Start StrIOV stVal
IUV Start StrIUV stVal
Minimum F Start StrFmin stVal
Maximum F Start StrFmax stVal
dfdt Start StrDfDt stVal
Voltage Trip OpV stVal
IOV Trip OpIOV stVal
IUV Trip OpIUV stVal
Minimum F Trip OpFmin stVal
Maximum F Trip OpFmax stVal
dfdt Trip OpDfDt stVal
3.3.2 Commands
Certain commands enable actions to be taken on the protection functions. Each function
specific characteristics are listed in the corresponding section. This section lists the
general functions. Table 59 shows the functions affected by the general commands.
The blocking/ unblocking commands are stored so that they are maintained when the device is
switched off. If a function is enabled by the settings and blocked by a command, the status
shows that is deactivated. All the functions blocked by a command are unblocked with the

User Manual 109
command associated to the function, each time an ICD is sent or by the general unblocking
command (DOrdRstBlk node PROT/LLN0). Available from version 5.19.5.12 on.
Table 59 Command by functions
DOrdPrBl DOrdPhBl DOrdInsBl DOrdInsPhBl DOrdTmPhBl DOrdINBl DOrdVBl

Distance units
Zone 1 Gnd 
Zone 1 Phase-Phase 
Zone 2 Gnd 
Zone 3 Gnd 
Zone 4 Gnd 
Zone 5 Gnd 
Current units
Phase instantaneous (50)    
Phase timed (51)   
Neutral instantaneous (50)   
Neutral timed (51) 
Ground instantaneous (50)   
Ground timed (51) 
Unbalance instantaneous  
Unbalance block 
46FA Open phase  
37 Undercurrent  
50CSC Second harmonic restraint 
49 Thermal image 
Voltage/ Frequency / Power units
Phase overvoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous overvoltage     
Zero sequence overvoltage timed  
Zero sequence instantaneous
overvoltage    
V2 overvoltage timed  
V2 instantaneous overvoltage   
Phase undervoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous undervoltage     
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
Minimum real power 
Maximum real power 
Real power inversion 
Reactive power inversion 
Minimum apparent power 
Maximum apparent power 
Remaining protection functions
Load encroachment 
Fuse failure 
SOFT Switch onto fault 
Line fault 
Breaker
50BF Single-pole/Three-pole breaker
failure 
The general protection commands are in the PROT/PTRC1 node, allowing the
blocking/unblocking of the associated functions:
 DOrdPrBl. Protection block. Affects all the protection functions.

 DOrdPhBl. Phase block. Affects all the phase functions.
 DOrdInsBl. Instantaneous block. Affects all the instantaneous functions.

User Manual 110
 DOrdInsPhBl. Instantaneous phase block. Affects all the phase instantaneous functions.
 DOrdTmPhBl. Timed phase block. Affects all the timed phase functions.
 DOrdINBl. Instantaneous neutral block. Affects all the neutral instantaneous functions.
 DOrdVBl. Voltage block. Affects all the voltage functions.
 DOrdDirBl. Directional block. Affects all the directional functions. Equivalent to giving
directional permission.
3.4 CURRENT UNITS
3.4.1 General overcurrent description

3.4.1.1 Timed characteristics
When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceeded during
the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum response time, that is, a limit that
prevents any unit from tripping below a minimum time when the trip time corresponding
to the curve in use is met. This is done to prevent timed trips from being faster than
instantaneous trips. It is configured with an additional time setting, so that if it
is set to zero, there is no such limit.
The settings used in these functions (Table 60) are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

 Operation type. To be selected between:
 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pick up but no trips.
 “Block by IOC1”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1
has picked up. The timed pick up is not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1
or 2 has picked up. The timed pick up is not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2, 3”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous
unit 1, 2 or 3 has picked up. The timed pick up is not deactivated.
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which
 Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)

User Manual 111

 Definite time (49)
 Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
 Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of
the curve selected:
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which
the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order
for a trip to be produced, the time used will be the greater between this
setting and the time associated to the curve.
 Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
 Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
 Reset type. Allows the emulation of the induction operation. The following options
are available:
 "Instantaneous". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, both the
trip and the pick up reset instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, the trip drops out
instantaneously, while the pick up reset time will depend on the selected curve
(family and index) and the current. If a definite time curve is selected, the
pick up will reset upon the completion of the time programmed for the pick up as
of the moment in which it falls below the pick up current, regardless of the
current value.
 Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function (52 ½ models
only allow "Phasor"):
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
 Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an
instantaneous trip regardless of the set time.
 Trip Permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance
with the recloser status: standby, blocked, safety time after reclosing, after
closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section
corresponding to the recloser (3.13.6.3).

User Manual 112
 Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4). Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or
not, in accordance with the recloser's closing cycle (see reclosure permission
mask).
function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are not generate. If set
to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 60 Timed overcurrent unit settings

PTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Start (2)
Optype Operation type Block by IOC1 (3) enum
Block by IOC1,2(4)
Block by IOC1,2,3(5)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
TmACrv Operating Curve Type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
ANSI: 0,5 - 30 step 0,1
TmMult Time dial 0,025 30 0,005 float32
IEC: 0,025-1,5 step 0,005
OpDlTmms Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000* 10 Int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Timed (1)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint 32
LogInCaTm Time delay cancel Input uint 32
GenTrip General trip NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
ReclPerm Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 enum
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
MaskEna Enable Events record NO / YES Boolean

User Manual 113
3.4.1.2 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit actuates when the setting value is exceed during
the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The settings used in these functions (see Table 61) are:

 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pick up but no trips.
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which
 Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of
 Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
 Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is
detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
 Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function:
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
 Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an
instantaneous trip regardless of the setting time.
mask).

User Manual 114
Table 61 Instantaneous overcurrent unit settings

PIOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Optype Operation type enum
Start (2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000* 10 Int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional
Behaviour with Fuse
FFailBeh (1) enum
fail
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint 32
Time delay cancel
LogInTIn uint 32
input
Trip Permission by
TripPerm 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
recloser
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose perm.
ReclPerm 0 15 Reclose 4 (8) enum
(R1,R2,R3,R4)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4
(15)
3.4.2 Directional characteristics

The overcurrent units have a setting (torque control) for selecting the unit’s
directionality:
 No: the unit acts as non-directional.

 Forward: the unit acts as directional in a forward direction.
 Reverse: the unit acts as directional in a reverse direction.
There are logical trip direction inversion inputs that allow the different units' trip
direction to be inverted.
There are logical “function X directional inhibition” inputs that allow the directional
units to which they are applied to be converted into non-directional. These inputs allow
for a unit's conversion into non-directional in the case of a fuse failure, for example.
The negative sequence unit can be used in phases and in neutral.
3.4.2.1 Phase directional

The operation can be selected among: quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3, positive
sequence (S1) and positive + negative sequences (S1+S2). The S2 directional has its
own settings.

User Manual 115
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature, quadrature 2 out
of 3 and positive sequence criteria are in the PROT/RDIR1 node:
 Directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Quadrature”. Analyses each phase independently.
 “Quad. 2 out of 3”. Analyses each phase independently. However, in order to
grant permission it must see the direction in at least two phases.
 “Positive sequence”. Analyses the positive sequence.
 “S2 and S1 sequence”. Analyses the negative and positive sequences. The positive
sequence is analysed only when the negative sequence indicates polarization
failure.
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle. Applies to quadrature,
quadrature 2 out of 3 and positive sequence.
 Minimum V polarization (V). Indicates the minimum voltage for polarization; the
direction cannot be reliably determined below this value.
 Zone amplitude (º). Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
 Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the
polarization voltage is below the threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an
overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the minimum
polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under
those conditions.
 67 directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip
direction.
 Phase directional blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the
function. When the directional is blocked, it is issues permission for the trip.
Table 62 Phase directional settings (Quadrature and positive sequence)

Quadrature
PolQty Quad. 2 out of 3
Directional method enum
Positive sequence
S2 and S1 sequence
ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 360359 1 float32
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Amp Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
EnaOpn Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
LogInInvDir 67 directional Inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Phase directional blocking Int32
The minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the minimum setting of the
three timed and instantaneous phase units (50/51) that are enabled. When all units are
disabled, the minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the phase rated
current.
The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs.
 Node: PROT/RDIR1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking.
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
 Outputs: Table 63 shows the function’s output data.

User Manual 116
 67 Forward X. The detected direction indicates forward. It is independent for

each phase.
 67 Reverse X. The detected direction indicates reverse. It is independent for
each phase.
 Polarization Failure X. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due
to a polarization failure. It is independent for each phase.
 Phase directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Phase direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the
setting.
Table 63 Phase directional outputs (quadrature and positive sequence)

67-Forward A Fw67 phsA
67-Forward B Fw67 phsB
67-Forward C Fw67 phsC
67-Reverse A Rv67 phsA
67-Reverse B Rv67 phsB
67-Reverse C Rv67 phsC
Polarization Failure A FailPol phsA
Polarization Failure B FailPol phsB
Polarization Failure C FailPol phsC
Phase Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
Phase Direction Inversion InvDir general
3.4.2.1.1 Quadrature
For the detection of directionality in phases, the polarization voltage corresponds
to the quadrature connection (90º), in which each phase’s current is compared with
the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases (see Figure 59).
π π
−j∙( −MTA_FASES)∙
Phase Ia: Spol = Vbc Sop = Ia ∙ e 2 180
π π
Phase Ib: Spol = Vca Sop = Ib ∙ e 2 180
π π
Phase Ic: Spol = Vab Sop = Ic ∙ e 2 180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Signals forward when
Amplitude º
|angle(Spol) − angle(Sop)| < ( )
2
Where, Amplitude is the setting "Zone amplitude (º)"
The “Quad. 2 out of 3” means that the unit only signals forward if this direction
is seen in 2 phases. Avoids cases in which, with a reverse fault, certain of the
phases detect a forward fault (e.g., weak infeed). In the case of weak infeed due
to the breaking of a transformer, there is only zero sequence current and therefore
the three phases detect the same current. In this case, one of the 3 phases will
detect the fault in the opposite direction to the other two.
It operates as three single phase units in which polarization voltages are the
phase to phase voltages of the healthy phases.
In the case of an ABC phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vab, Vbc and
Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib. In the case of a CBA phase sequence, polarization is
effected with Vba, Vcb and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib.

User Manual 117
This unit’s signals are independent for each of the phases (See Table 63).
Memory
The polarization voltage is the voltage of the previous 3 cycles. If the voltage
falls below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)", the value memorized in
accordance with the memory management explained in the polarization memory
monitoring is used (see 3.4.3). It is also affected by the series compensation
logic in so far that if it is set to “YES” the memorized voltage is used as of the
moment in which a fault or a voltage inversion is detected.
Trip permission with low polarization voltage
When the polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or
the operating current is below the minimum polarization current “Polarization
Failure X” is indicated. In this situation, if the trip permission without
polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is
blocked.
Figure 59 Phase directional (Quadrature)
3.4.2.1.2 Positive sequence

The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage
and current (see Figure 60).
S1pol = V1
π
S1op = I1 ∙ ej∙MTA_FASES∙180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
|angle(S1pol) − angle(S1op)| < ( )
2
This unit’s signals are the same as those of the quadrature, with the difference
that the three phases are always given simultaneously (See Table 63).

User Manual 118
Memory
The polarization voltage is the positive sequence voltage of the previous 3 cycles.
If it falls below the setting "Minimum V1 (V)", the value memorized in accordance
with the memory management explained in the polarization memory monitoring is used
(See 3.4.3). It is also affected by the series compensation logic in so far that if
it is set to “YES” the memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault
or a voltage inversion is detected.
Trip permission with low Vpol
When the V1 polarization voltage is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)”
or the operating current is below the minimum polarization current “Polarization
Failure X” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the operating current is below the minimum
polarization current.
If V1 is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)” but the operating current
is above the minimum polarization current, if the trip permission without
polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is
blocked.
Figure 60 Phase directional (Positive sequence)
3.4.2.1.3 Negative and positive sequence

Both methods are used to determine the direction, first by analysing the negative
sequence:
 If the negative sequence indicates the direction, the positive sequence is not
consulted.
 If the negative sequence indicates a polarization failure, the positive
sequence is consulted.
3.4.2.2 Negative sequence

It is used both in phase and neutral directional.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the negative sequence voltage
and current, with V2 greater than the threshold "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2
greater than the two thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" and "Minimum 3I2 / Irated
(%)" (See Figure 61).
In the case of lines with series compensation, a Z2offset setting, which modifies the
polarization voltage, is included.
𝜋
S2pol = −3 ∙ V2 + 3 ∙ I2 ∙ Z2Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180

User Manual 119
π
S2op = 3 ∙ I2 ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180
Where, MTA_S2 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
2
If Z2offset is not being used:
S2pol is -3·V2
If Z2offset is being used:
 With series compensation:

 S2pol is calculated with Z2Offset.
 Without series compensation:
 S2pol depends on the relation between S2pol and the setting "Minimum V
polarization (V)". If S2pol calculated with Z2Offset is greater than "Minimum V
polarization (V)", the calculated S2pol is used. On the other hand, if "-3·V2"
is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S2pol = -3·V2 is used.
When the S2pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)"
or the negative sequence current (I2) is below any of the two thresholds "Minimum I2 /
I1 Ph (%)" or "Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", “Polarization Failure S2” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the negative sequence current (I2) is below any of
the two thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 (%)" or "Minimum I2 / Irated (%)".
If S2pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2 is greater than the
two thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" and "Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", if the trip
permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set
to “NO”, it is blocked.
The setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" used is the one of the node PROT/RDIR1 (Phase
directional).
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature and positive
sequence criteria are in the PROT/S2RDIR1 node:
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.

 Z2 offset. Impedance offset for the negative sequence directional unit. In
multifunction, it must be set to 0.
 Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%).Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to the
percentage of I1.
 Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%). Percentage of rated I. Indicates the minimum value of I2
in relation to rated I.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When
the directional is blocked, it is issues permission for the trip.

User Manual 120
 S2 Directional inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip
direction.
Table 64 Negative sequence directional settings

ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Ofs Z2 offset 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
LogInInvDir S2 Directional inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Blocking input Int32
The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/S2RDIR1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 64.
 Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction
 67-S2 Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67-S2 Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure S2. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due
to a polarization failure.
 S2 Directional Inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 S2 Direction Inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 65 Negative sequence directional outputs

67-S2 Forward Fw67S2 general
67-S2 Reverse Rv67S2 general
Polarization Failure S2 FailS2 general
S2 Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
S2 Direction Inversion InvDir general

User Manual 121
Figure 61 Negative sequence directional
Figure 62 Negative sequence directional scheme
3.4.2.3 Ground directional

Affects neutral units, allowing or blocking the trip in accordance with the
configuration.
The operation can be selected from among: angular, cosine, sine and watt-metric.
Various options can be selected from within the angular criteria.
This unit’s settings are in the PROT/GRDIR node. In accordance with the selected mode,
they affect:
General settings.
 Ground directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Angular criteria”.
 “I·cos phi”
 “I·sin phi”
 “Wattmetric”

User Manual 122
 Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%). Percentage of rated neutral current. Indicates the
minimum value of 3 I0 in relation to rated I. It is used in zero sequence “I·cos”
and “I·sin” mode.
 Ground directional block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the
function. When the directional is blocked, it is issues permission for the trip.
 67N directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip
direction.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Angular:
 Polarization method. Selected the polarization type from the options:

 V. By voltage.
 IPOL. By current
 IPOL  V. By current and, in the event of uncertainty, by voltage.
 IPOL or V. By current or by voltage.
 IPOL and V. By current and by voltage.
 Voltage directional Type. Only applied if the polarization voltage has been
selected.
 S0. Zero sequence.
 S2. Negative sequence.
 S2 and S0. Negative and zero sequence.
 S2 or S0. Negative or zero sequence.
 S2  S0. Negative sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, zero sequence.
 S0  S2. Zero sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, negative sequence.
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.
 Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the
polarization voltage is below the threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an
overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the minimum
polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under
those conditions.
 Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%). Indicates the minimum current for polarization; the
 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%). Percentage of I1. Indicates the minimum value of I0 in relation
to I1.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Watt-metric, I·cos, I·sin
 Minimum power: Isin, Icos, W: Power value P=Vn·In·cos(-c), in which =Angle

between Vn and In. If the power negative and higher than this value, a forward
fault is registered. If it is positive and higher than this value, a reverse fault
is registered.
 Icos/Isin method switch. If a signal is assigned to this input, it indicates the
directional type used (independent of the setting) I·cos if the input is 0
(deactivated) and I·sin if the input is 1 (activated). If no signal has been
assigned, the criterion selected for the setting is used.
The neutral units have settings, commands and outputs:

User Manual 123
 Node: PROT/GRDIR1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 66 for details.
 Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
 67N-Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67N-Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure In. It indicates that the direction has not been detected
due to a polarization failure.
 Gnd directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Ground direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the
setting.
Table 66 Neutral directional settings

“Angular criteria”
DirTyp “Icos phi”
Ground Directional method enum
“Isin phi”
“Wattmetric”
ChrAng Torque angle(º) 0 359 1 float32
BlkValV Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
LogInInvDir 67N directional Inversion Int32
LogInBlDir Ground directional block Int32
LogInChSC Icos/Isin method switch Int32
V
IPOL
PolTyp
Polarization method IPOL  V enum
IPOL or V
IPOL and V
S0
S2
PolQty S2 and S0
Voltage directional Type S2 or S0 enum
S2 S0
S0 S2
Ofs Offset Z0 (Ohm) 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
EnaOpn Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
BlkValIpol Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValW Minimum power: Isin,Icos,W 0 100 0,01 float32
Table 67 Neutral directional outputs

67N-Forward Fw67G neut
67N-Reverse Rv67G neut
Polarization Failure In FailIn neut
Gnd Directional Inhibition BlkDir neut
Ground Direction Inversion InvDir neut

User Manual 124
3.4.2.3.1 Combinations with angular criteria

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents or as
the measurement of the neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type:
measured/calculated" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
Polarizations
The various combinations according to the setting "Polarization method" are:
If Ineutral is less than "Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%)" of the neutral rated current
or less than "Minimum 3I0/I1 (%)" of the positive sequence current (I1), a
“Polarization Failure In” is issued and no other actions are taken.
It is polarized by voltage. Depending on the setting "Voltage directional Type",

the polarization voltage can be the zero sequence, negative sequence or both.
Ipol
It is polarized by the ground current (Ipol). See 3.4.2.3.3.
I  V
If the I unit does not determine the polarization fault direction, the voltage
signal combination is analysed.
If the result is “Without VPOL”, that is, the polarization voltage is below the
setting "Minimum V polarization (V)", the trip permission depends on the setting
"Permission with low Vpol".
I and V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or
reverse indication is made. It the result is different, there is no permission.
If any of them does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In”
message is indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission
with low Vpol” setting.
This combination is applicable to autotransformer when there is a malfunction of

Ipol.
I or V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse,
the corresponding signal is activated. If one indicates forward and the other
reverse, both directions are activated.
If they do not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” message is

indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol”
setting.
Voltage directional Type

User Manual 125
Furthermore, with this setting it can be selected among the following options:
S0
The direction is determined with the neutral current and the neutral voltage as
polarization (see 3.4.2.3.2).
S2
The direction is determined with the negative sequence current and the negative
sequence voltage as polarization (see 3.4.2.2).
S0 and S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or
reverse indication is made. It the result is different, there is no permission.
If any of them (S0 or S2) does not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure
In” or "Polarization Failure S2" message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward.
No output is given.
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R Nothing
R R R
R F Nothing
F Without Vpol Without Vpol
R Without Vpol Without Vpol
Without Vpol F Without Vpol
Without Vpol R Without Vpol
Without Vpol Without Vpol Without Vpol
S0 or S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse,
the corresponding signal is activated. If one indicated forward and the other
reverse, both directions are activated.
If both of them (S0 or S2) do not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure
In” or "Polarization Failure S2" message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R F & R
R R R
R F F & R
F Without Vpol F
R Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S2  S0
If the S2 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure S2” signal
is activated and S0 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a
“Polarization Failure In” signal is activated and a decision is taken in accordance
with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:

User Manual 126
Only reverse would be signalled (due to S2).
S2 S0 Result
F or R or
F F
Without Vpol
F or R or
R R
Without Vpol
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S0  S2
If the S2 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” signal
is activated and S2 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a
“Polarization Failure S2” signal is activated and a decision is taken in accordance
with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:
Only reverse would be signalled (due to S0).
S0 S2 Result
F or R or
F F
Without Vpol
F or R or
R R
Without Vpol
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
3.4.2.3.2 S0 polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the neutral current with the neutral
voltage as polarization. The angle determines the range in which the fault is
considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault. A Z0offset setting, which
modifies the polarization voltage, is included.
π
S0pol = −VN + IN ∙ Z0Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180
π
S0op = IN ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180
Where, MTA_S0 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
2
The VN=3·V0 voltage can be calculated using the phase to earth voltages of the
phases or it can be measured by a transformer, in accordance with the “3V0
Operating quantity” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
If Z0offset is not being used:
S0pol is -3·V0
If Z0offset is being used:

User Manual 127
 With series compensation:

 S0pol is calculated with Z0Offset
 Without series compensation:
 S0pol depends on the relation between S0pol and the setting "Minimum V
polarization". If S0pol calculated with Z0Offset is greater than "Minimum V
polarization (V)", the calculated S0pol is used. On the other hand, if "-3·V0"
is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S0pol = "-3·V0 is used.
Figure 63 Zero sequence directional
When the S0pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)"
or the neutral current is below to any of the two thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated
(%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", “Polarization Failure In” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the neutral current is below to any of the two
thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)".
If S0pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and the operation current
is greater than the two thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1
(%)", if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is
permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.

User Manual 128
Figure 64 Zero sequence directional scheme
3.4.2.3.3 I polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the ground current (Ipol) with the neutral
current. To be able to verify the direction, Ipol must be greater than the percent
of neutral rated current indicated in the setting "Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%)".
Figure 65 Directional with current polarization
directional status is maintained, both for voltage and for current polarization.
When the neutral current is below any of the two thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated
(%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", “Polarization Failure In” is indicated.

User Manual 129
When the Ipol is below to the percent of neutral rated current indicated in the
setting "Minimum Ipol/Irated (%)", “Polarization Failure In” is indicated. In this
case, there is “NO” trip permission.
3.4.2.3.4 Watt-metric directional

This is for lines with Petersen coil compensation.
The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the
measurement of the neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the
node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
phases or it can be measured by a transformer, in accordance with the “V0
measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
In order to allow the directional unit to pick up, the following must be met:
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

 For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage,
the maximum torque angle must be between 95 and 265.
95º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
 For reverse faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage,
275º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
 The power P=Vn·In·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum power "Minimum power:
Isin, Icos, W" by the absolute value. If the sign of P is negative, the fault
is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
The equation to be implemented for calculating P is as follows:
P = [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)
Figure 66 Directional with watt-metric polarization
Trip permission without V polarization
If the voltage VN is lower than "Minimum V polarization (V)", "Polarization Failure

In" is indicated. If "Permission with low Vpol" is set to "YES", the trip is
allowed, if it is set to "NO", it is blocked.

User Manual 130
3.4.2.3.5 I*cos() / I*sin() directional

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the
measurement of the neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the
node "PROT/LINPDIF1".
phases or it can be measured by a transformer, in accordance with the “V0
measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
An input can be programmed (“Icos/Isin method switch”) such that when activated the
operating mode of I*cos() changes to I*sin(). If programmed, this input cancels
the setting: if deactivated, it runs the I*cos() algorithm. If activated, the
I*sin() algorithm is run, independently of the setting. It does not affect either
the angular of the watt-metric directional.
I*cos() directional
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

 For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage,
95º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
275º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
 The minimum current "I minimum= In·cos(-c)" must exceed the minimum
threshold "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" by the absolute value. If the sign is
negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
[Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ cos( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = angle(V0) − angle(I0)
Figure 67 Directional with cosine polarization

User Manual 131
As the neutral units allow trip permission to be issued with forward and with
reverse faults, in reality the characteristics will be as follows.
Figure 68 Forward/Reverse with cosine polarization

67N I*sin() directional
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)". For forward faults, the
angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle
must be between 185 and 355.
185º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 355º
5º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 175º
 The minimum current "I minimum=In·sin(-c)" must exceed the minimum threshold
"Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" by the absolute value. If the sign is negative, the
fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
[Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) − [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ sin( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)

User Manual 132
Figure 69 Directional with sine polarization

3.4.3 Polarization memory monitoring

It is used in the polarization of the phase directional (positive sequence and
quadrature) and in the distance units (mho characteristics).
Allows the memorized voltage to be used during the configured time when the current
voltage is not apt.
This unit’s operating scheme for the distance unit is:
 If V1> Minimum V1 is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is

captured once again.
 V1mem is then update to the V1 value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the
moment in which the conditions for using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles
previously will be taken.
 Mho units are polarized with the V1 of the previous 3 cycles (Vpol = V1). V1mem is
captured in the moment the voltage is above the setting Minimum V1 and is used
during the time set in "V1 maintenance time".
 If the breaker is open (open pole logic) with the V1 above the setting "Minimum
V1", the voltage V1 without memory is used.
 If the series compensation logic is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage
is used when the fault detection is activated.
 If the "Blocking by power swinging" signal is activated, the actual V1 is used (not
memorized)
 The logic input "Force V1 with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the
positive sequence polarization.
 The logic input "Force V1 without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage
in the positive sequence polarization.

User Manual 133
This unit’s operating scheme for the overcurrent directional units is:
 If Vx> Minimum Vx is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is

captured once again.
 Vxmen is then update to the Vx value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the
moment in which the conditions for using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles
previously will be taken.
 The 67-50/51 units are normally polarized without memory. The memorized voltage is
used in the moment in which the actual Vx voltage drops below Minimum Vx. The
memory time is indicated in the maintenance time setting.
 If the series compensation is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage is
used when the fault detection is activated.
 The logic input "Force Vx with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the
positive sequence polarization.
 The logic input "Force Vx without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage
in the positive sequence polarization.
The positive sequence voltage (V1) and the quadrature voltages are analysed separately
(Vab, Vbc and Vac).
The function’s logic diagram is shown in Figure 70 (distance units), Figure 71

(overcurrent units, positive sequence) and Figure 72 (overcurrent units, quadrature).
This unit’s settings are:
 Minimum V1 (V). Indicates the minimum V1 value for employing the memorized voltage.
 V1 Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used
in the polarization by positive sequence.
 Minimum Ph-ph voltage (V). Indicates the minimum quadrature voltage for employing
the memorized voltage.
 Vc Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used
in the polarization by quadrature.
 Force V1 with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
 Force V1 without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive
sequence polarization.
 Force Vc with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the quadrature
polarization.
 Force Vc without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the quadrature
polarization.
Table 68 Directional memory monitoring settings

ValV1 Minimum V1 (V) float
MemV1Tmms V1 Memory Time (ms) Int32
Minimum Ph-ph voltage
ValVc float
(V)
MemVcTmms VC Memory Time (ms) Int32
LogInFV1M Force V1 without memory. Int32
LogInFV1NM Force V1 with memory Int32
LogInFVcM Force Vc without memory. Int32
LogInFVcNM Force Vc with memory Int32

User Manual 134
The memory monitoring units have settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/MSUPPTRC1
 Outputs:
 Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage. It is activated while the memorized phase-phase voltage
is being used.
 V1 memorized. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used.
 V1 memorized distance. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used in
the distance units.
The input signals of these schemes are:
 Fault detection. It´s the output of the Fault detection unit.

 The digital inputs are the settings of the function:
 Force V1 with memory
 Force V1 without memory
 Force VAB with memory. It is the setting "Force Vc with memory".
 Force VAB without memory. It is the setting "Force Vc without memory"
Table 69 Memorized voltage monitoring outputs

Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage Vcomp general
V1 memorized V1mem general
V1 memorized distance V1dist general
Figure 70 Distance units. Positive sequence memorized monitoring

User Manual 135
Figure 71 Positive sequence memorized monitoring
Figure 72 Memorized quadrature monitoring
3.4.4 Series compensation

It affects the polarization signal of the distance and overcurrent units.
If it is enabled, the memorized voltage is used when the voltage is below the
threshold set or when the fault detection is activated. This unit applies to the
distance and the phase overcurrent units.
 Enabled: Enables the function.

There are settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/PSEC1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 70
 Outputs: Table 71 shows the function's output data

User Manual 136
 Series compensation status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when

Table 70 Series Compensation settings

SeCoEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Table 71 Series compensation Outputs

Series compensation status StEna general
3.4.5 Phase overcurrent

3.4.5.1 Instantaneous
There are 3 independent units for each of the phases.
Each of the three units has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOC1
 Commands:
enabled.
 IOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
independent for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 IOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is
independent for each phase. . Where X is the phase.
 IOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
and not blocked. This is general for all three phases.
 IOC1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOC1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 72 Instantaneous phase function outputs
Signal PIOC1 Signal PIOC2 Signal PIOC3 Data Attribute

IOC1 Start phase A IOC2 Start phase A IOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
IOC1 Start phase B IOC2 Start phase B IOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
IOC1 Start phase C IOC2 Start phase C IOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
IOC1 Trip phase A IOC2 Trip phase A IOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOC1 Trip phase B IOC2 Trip phase B IOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOC1 Trip phase C IOC2 Trip phase C IOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOC1 Phase Status IOC2 Phase Status IOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOC1 Phase Start IOC2 Phase Start IOC3 Phase Start Str general
IOC1 Phase Trip IOC2 Phase Trip IOC3 Phase Trip Op general

User Manual 137
3.4.5.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTOC1
 Commands:
enabled.
 TOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
 TOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is
 TOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
 TOC1 Phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOC1 Phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 73 Timed phase function outputs
Signal PTOC1 Signal PTOC2 Signal PTOC3 Data Attribute

TOC1 Start phase A TOC2 Start phase A TOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
TOC1 Start phase B TOC2 Start phase B TOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
TOC1 Start phase C TOC2 Start phase C TOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
TOC1 Trip phase A TOC2 Trip phase A TOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
TOC1 Trip phase B TOC2 Trip phase B TOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
TOC1 Trip phase C TOC2 Trip phase C TOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
TOC1 Phase Status TOC2 Phase Status TOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
TOC1 Phase Start TOC2 Phase Start TOC3 Phase Start Str general
TOC1 Phase Trip TOC2 Phase Trip TOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.6 Neutral overcurrent

Uses the neutral transformer input or 3·I0, depending on the setting "I0 type:
measured/calculated" in the node "PROT/LINPDIF1". In the 52 ½ models only 3·I0 is
allowed.
There are 3 independent units.Each of the three units has independent settings,
commands and outputs.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPIOC1
 Commands:

User Manual 138
enabled.
 GIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
and not blocked.
Table 74 Neutral instantaneous function outputs
Signal GIOC1 Signal GIOC2 Signal GIOC3 Data Attribute

GIOC1 Start GIOC2 Start GIOC3 Start Str neut
GIOC1 Trip GIOC2 Trip GIOC3 Trip Op neut
IOC1 Ground Status IOC2 Ground Status IOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.4.6.2 Timed
There are 3 independent units.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPTOC1
 Commands:
enabled.
 GTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
and not blocked.
Table 75 Timed neutral function outputs
Signal GTOC1 Signal GTOC2 Signal GTOC3 Data Attribute

GTOC1 Start GTOC2 Start GTOC3 Start Str neut
GTOC1 Trip GTOC2 Trip GTOC3 Trip Op neut
TOC1 Ground Status TOC2 Ground Status TOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.4.7 Grounding overcurrent

Not available on all models (see model functions).
Employs the polarization current transformer input as a measurement.
This unit is not directional.
 Nodes:

User Manual 139
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPIOC1
 Commands:
enabled.
 ESIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 76 Instantaneous grounding function outputs
Signal ESIOC1 Signal ESIOC2 Signal ESIOC3 Data Attribute

ESIOC1 Start ESIOC2 Start ESIOC3 Start Str general
ESIOC1 Trip ESIOC2 Trip ESIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Earthing System Status IOC2 Earthing System Status IOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.4.7.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPTOC1
 Commands:
enabled.
 ESTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 77 Timed grounding function outputs
Signal ESTOC1 Signal ESTOC2 Signal ESTOC3 Data Attribute

ESTOC1 Start ESTOC2 Start ESTOC3 Start Str general
ESTOC1 Trip ESTOC2 Trip ESTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Earthing System Status TOC2 Earthing System Status TOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.4.8 Unbalanced overcurrent

Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3·I2 = (Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic) In which a = 1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The negative sequence directional is used by this unit.

User Manual 140
The measurement type setting is not used, as the fundamental is always used.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPIOC1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. It employs the settings
in Table 61, with the exception of the measurement type.
 Commands:
enabled.
 UNIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 78 Instantaneous unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNIOC1 Signal UNIOC2 Signal UNIOC3 Data Attribute

UNIOC1 Start UNIOC2 Start UNIOC3 Start Str general
UNIOC1 Trip UNIOC2 Trip UNIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Unbalanced Status IOC2 Unbalanced Status IOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.4.8.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPTOC1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. Employs the settings in
Table 60, with the exception of the measurement type.
 Commands:
enabled.
 UNTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when

User Manual 141
Table 79 Timed unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNTOC1 Signal UNTOC2 Signal UNTOC3 Data Attribute

UNTOC1 Start UNTOC2 Start UNTOC3 Start Str general
UNTOC1 Trip UNTOC2 Trip UNTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Unbalanced Status TOC2 Unbalanced Status TOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.4.9 2nd harmonic restraint

It permits the instantaneous and timed phase, neutral and unbalanced overcurrent units to
be blocked (51, 50, 51N, 50N and 67Q).
Restraint by phase or for all the phases is available for the 50/51 units. The units to
be blocked are selected by settings.
To activate the restraint, the following must be met simultaneously:
 The fundamental current must exceed the minimum inrush value.

 The relationship between the 2nd harmonic value and the fundamental must exceed a
set threshold.
 The 2nd harmonic current must exceed 1% of In (50mA with In=5A and 10ma with
In=1A).
To deactivate the restraint, the following must be met:
 The current must be less than 95% of the minimum current threshold, or
 The current must be below 95% of the restraint percentage threshold.
The restraint is calculated independently for each phase and neutral.
The phase units’ restraint can act per phase (the restraint in any one phase only blocks
the phase in question) or it can be general (the restraint in any one phase blocks all
the phases).
For the unbalanced unit restraint, it is sufficient that the conditions are given in a
phase or in the neutral.
The units’ restraint settings are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. The options available
are:
 YES. It is enabled
 NO. It is disabled
 Only in close. It is enabled for a second after closing.
 I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%). Indicates the percentage of the 2nd harmonic in relation
to the fundamental above which the restraint is produced.
 Minimum current (A). Minimum value of the fundamental current in order for the
restraint to be produced. No restraint is indicated below this value, even when the
% I 2nd/Ifund is above the setting.
 Restraint. Enables the units on which the restraint is to act to be indicated.
There are separate settings for each unit. In general, the setting is "NO / YES",
except in those phases that can be:
 NO. Restraint is not permitted
 Phase. The restraint in one phase only blocks the phase in question.
 General. The restraint in one phase blocks all the phases.
 Harm.Restraint Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the
function.

User Manual 142
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each restraint unit.
Phases
 Node: PROT/PHAR1
There is restraint setting for each timed and instantaneous phase overcurrent unit
(NO / Phase / General) and unbalanced (NO / YES)
 Commands:
enabled.
 Outputs:
 2nd harmonic restraint Ix. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in
this phase. It is independent for each phase.
 2nd harmonic restraint ph. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in
one of the phases.
 Harm. Ph. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three phases.
Table 80 Phase 2nd harmonic restraint settings
Data Setting Min. Max Step Remarks Type

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
NO (0)
Restr51U1 Restraint 51 Unit 1 Phase (1) enum
General (2)
Restr51U2 Restraint 51 Unit 2 NO/Phase/General enum
Restr67QT1 Restraint 67QT Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
Restr67QI1 Restraint 67QI Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking Int32
Table 81 Phase restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint Ia Op phsA
2nd harmonic restraint Ib Op phsB
2nd harmonic restraint Ic Op phsC
2nd harmonic restraint ph Op general
Harm. Ph. restraint Status StEna stVal
Neutral
 Node: PROT/GPHAR1

User Manual 143
There is restraint setting for each timed and instantaneous neutral overcurrent
unit (NO / YES).
 Commands:
enabled.
 2nd harmonic restraint In. It indicates that the neutral restraint has been
activated.
 Harm. Gr. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 82 Neutral restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint In Op neut
Harm. Gr. restraint Status StEna stVal
Table 83 Neutral 2nd harmonic restraint settings

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
Restr51N1 Restraint 51N Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking Int32
3.4.10 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking

This unit allows the instantaneous and timed grounding overcurrent units to be blocked
(51ES and 50ES).
To activate the blocking must be simultaneously satisfied:
The fundamental current value must exceed the minimum current.
And one or both of the following:
 The ratio between the value of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental exceeds
the threshold.
 The 2nd harmonic current should be greater than 1% of In (50mA with In=5A
and 10mA with In=1A).
 The ratio between the value of the 5th harmonic and the fundamental exceeds
the threshold.
 The 5nd harmonic current should be greater than 1% of In (50mA with In=5A
and 10mA with In=1A).
To disable the blocking the following must be satisfied:
 Intensity is below the 95% minimum current threshold, or

User Manual 144
 Intensity is below the 95% threshold blocking percentage for the 2nd and 5th
harmonic
The settings of the blocking units are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. The options

available are:
 YES. It is enabled
 NO. It is disabled
 Threshold I2 º harm / I fundam. (%). Indicates the 2nd harmonic percentage
respect to the above fundamental that the blocking is produced
 Threshold I5 º harm / I fundam. (%). Indicates the 5nd harmonic percentage
respect to the above fundamental that the blocking is produced
 Min. Current (A). Minimum value of the fundamental current which blocks the
units. Below this value no blocking is allowed, despite the value of the
I2/If% adjustment.
 Blocking. It indicates that units acting on restraint. There are separate
settings for each unit, the setting is YES / NO
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function
 Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to
Settings, orders and outputs:
 PROT/IGPHAR1 node
 Settings and logical inputs. There is a settings table. For details see Table
85. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic blocking settings. Are available blocking
adjustment for each unit timed and instantaneous overcurrent ground (No / Yes)
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 Outputs: In the Table 84. , shows the function’s output data.
 Blocking 2 and 5 th harmonic status. Indicates the function’s status. It is
active when enabled and not blocked.
 Blocking 2 and 5 th harmonic. Indicates that the blocking is activated on
that ground.
Table 84. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic outputs
Señal Dato Atributo

2nd and 5th Har Bloq Sts StEna stVal
2nd and 5th Har Bloq Op neut
Table 85. 2nd and 5nd grounding harmonic blocking settings

PHAREna Enabled NO/YES Boolean
StrVal2 I2nd / Ifund. Threshold (%) 5 100 1 5 float32
StrVal5 I5th / Ifund. Threshold (%) 5 100 1 5 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150 0,01 0,1 float32
Restr51U1 Blocking 51ES Unit 1 NO/YES Booleano
Restr51U2 Blocking 51ES Unit 2 NO/YES Booleano
Restr51U3 Blocking 51ES Unit 3 NO/ YES Booleano
LogInBlk Blocking Input Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Booleano

User Manual 145
3.4.11 Broken conductor

This is a definite time protection unit.
The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, and it depends on the setting
"Operation type".
There are two modes of operation, selectable by setting. The relay trips once the
programmed time has elapsed if the following conditions are met:
 “Always”:
 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/I1 ratio exceeds the setting value.
𝐼2 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑐
 Current value of one phase is greater than the setting "Minimum Phase I
(%Irated)".
 “Yes with 52”:

 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/Irated exceeds the setting value.
𝐼2 1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= ( ) 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 3 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 I0/Irated: I0/Irated is bellow than the setting value. If set to 0, this setting
will not be taken into account.
 If breaker is closed, the current value of one or two phases is lower than the
setting "Minimum Phase I (%Irated)".
Figure 73 shows the logic scheme of the function.

 “Always”
 “Yes with 52”
 Start value (%). If "Operation Type" is "Always", indicates the ratio I2/I1. In
case of "Yes with 52", it indicates I2/Irated.
 Minimum Phase I (%Irated). Minimum phase current value.
 Maxi. Threshold I0/Irated (%). Maximum I0/Irated value (%) necessary to act.

User Manual 146
mask).
 Node: PROT/OPPTOC
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table
86.
 Commands:
enabled.
 Broken conductor Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Broken conductor Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Broken conductor Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 86 Broken conductor settings
Data Setting Min Max Step Remarks Type

OPPTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Always (1)
Yes with 52 (2)
StrVal Start value (%) 5 100 0,1 float32
BlkIph Minimum Phase I (%Irated) 5 200 0,1 float32
Max. Threshold I0/Irated
BLkI0I1 0 20 0,1 float32
(%)
Trip Permission by
recloser
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose perm. Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
ReclPerm 0 15 enum
(R1,R2,R3,R4) Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
Table 87 Broken conductor function outputs

Broken conductor Start Str general
Broken conductor Trip Op general
Broken conductor Status StEna stVal

User Manual 147
Figure 73 Broken conductor logic
3.4.12 Thermal image

There are independent units for phase and neutral.
This function calculates a thermal capacity in accordance with the protected unit’s
recent and current load conditions. The thermal capacity is displayed as a % of the trip
value. If the function is enabled, a warning signal is activated when the programmed
value is reached. When 100% is reached, the thermal image trip signal is activated. Once
tripped as a result, it does not drop-out while the calculated thermal capacity remains
above the reset threshold setting and the rest of the locking conditions are fulfilled.
The calculated thermal capacity can be reset by logic input or by command.
The time which elapses before the trip is determined by the following curves, which
establish the time in accordance with the ratio between the current and the programmed
rated current, and the programmed heating constant. According to the following formula
(starting from thermal capacity 0):

User Manual 148
In which:
t: trip time
ζ1: heating constant
I: measured current
I0: programmed rated current
Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.
The heating curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which:
Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ1: heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced to
As
The heating curve is
The cooling curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which:
Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ2: cooling time constant
Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), which is the thermal capacity at which the trip is
produced, the formula used to obtain a thermal capacity of Tf = 0 (i.e., current I = 0)
is as follows
The current measurements used in the units are:
 Phases

User Manual 149
Ieq2=Imax2
Where:
Imax is the maximum current of the three phases.
 Neutral. The transformer grounding current is used. If this transformer does not
exist, the neutral current is used.
The settings of each of these units are:

 Heating constant (s). Heating constant in seconds.
 Cooling constant (s). Cooling constant in seconds.
 Alarm threshold (%). Value at which a thermal image warning is issued.
 Trip threshold (%): Value at which a thermal image trip is issued. It should be
greater than the “Alarm threshold (%)”. If it is smaller it is fixed to 100.
 Reset threshold (%). Thermal image reset value.
 Start current (A). Rated current for the calculation of the thermal image.
 Init input. Resets the thermal image value.
 Calculus store. Allows the value calculated for the thermal image to be stored in
the non-volatile memory. If set to “YES”, the stored value will be the initial
thermal image value used when the unit is booted; if set to “NO”, the initial
thermal image value is zero.
 Nodes:
 Phases: PROT/PTTR
 Neutral: PROT/GPTTR
88.
 Commands:
enabled.
 “DOrdIn”: Resetting to zero of thermal image value.
 Outputs: Table 89 shows the phase function’s output data and Table 90 shows ground
function’s output data.
 Thermal Image X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up. Where X is phase
or ground.
 Thermal Image X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped. Where X is phase or
ground.
 Thermal Image X Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
enabled and not blocked. Where X is phase or ground.

User Manual 150
Table 88 Thermal image settings

PTTREna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
ConsTms1 Heating constant (s) 30 18000 5 Int32
ConsTms2 Cooling constant (s) 30 18000 5 Int32
AlmVal Alarm threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
TripVal Trip threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
RepVal Reset threshold (%) 50 95 1 float32
Artg Start current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
LogInIn Init input uint 32
PTTREna General trip NO / YES Boolean
ValStore Calculus Store NO / YES Boolean
Table 89 Phase Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Phase Start Str general
Thermal Image Phase Trip Op general
Thermal Image Phase Status StEna stVal
Table 90 Neutral Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Ground Start Str general
Thermal Image Ground Trip Op general
Thermal Image Ground Status StEna stVal
3.4.12.1 Calculation Example

Figure 74 shows the trip times according to different heating constants.
Figure 75 shows an example of heating curves with a 3 minute time constant for I/I0 =
1 and for I/I0 = 2
Figure 74 Trip times

User Manual 151
Figure 75 Heating curve example
Figure 76 shows an example of a cooling curve with 3-minute constant.

Figure 76 Cooling curve example
Examples: Combined examples of cooling and heating

Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =1 for 200sec, I/I0 =2 for the next 200 sec
(without tripping) and, as of that point, it returns indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both
with 3 minute time constants):
2. Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =0.5 for 200sec, I/I0 =1.5 until reaching
100%, at which point the trip is produced, as of that point, it cools with I/I0 = 0
(both with 3 minute time constants):

User Manual 152
3.4.13 Undercurrent
There are two independent undercurrent units.
They employ the phases’ fundamental measurements. The unit picks up when the current
falls below the setting and drops out when the current rises above 105% of the setting.
The pick up is generated for each phase, regardless of the setting “Operation type”.
However, the unit’s trip takes the operation type into account.
The settings of each of these units are:

 “All (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when all the phases meet the undercurrent conditions
 “Any (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when at least one of the phases meets the
undercurrent conditions
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amps. It indicates the current value for which
Table 91 Undercurrent settings

PTUCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
All (A,B,C) (1)
Any (A,B,C)(2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 10 0,01 float32
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each unit.
 Nodes:

User Manual 153
 Unit 1: PROT/PTUC1
 Unit 2: PROT/PTUC2
91.
 Commands:
enabled.
 TUC1 phase X Start. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
independent for each phase and does not consider the setting “Operation type”.
 TUC1 phase Start. Pick up of at least one phase. Indicates that at least one of
the unit's phases has picked up. It does not take into account the setting
“Operation type”.
 TUC1 Start. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that
the unit has picked up.
 TUC1 Trip. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that
the unit has tripped.
 Undercurrent Unit 1 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
enabled and not blocked. This is general for all three phases.
Table 92 Phase undercurrent function outputs

TUC1 phase A Start Str phsA
TUC1 phase B Start Str phsB
TUC1 phase C Start Str phsC
TUC1 Start StrUC general
TUC1 Trip OpUC general
Undercurrent Unit 1 Status StEna stVal
TUC1 phase Start Str general
3.4.14 Stub bus

Stub bus protection is an instantaneous overcurrent unit, but it order for it to be
activated, the switch needs to be open. This function is useful in breaker and a half
configurations. It can be used as a fixed time overcurrent unit with its own settings or
any of the units available can be used with a logic which ensures that they are
continuously blocked until the line switch is opened.
The settings used are as follows:

 Phase threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the phase current
value for which the function is activated.
 Phase Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for tripping
the phase function must be met.
 Neutral threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the neutral
current value for which the function is activated.
 Neutral Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for

User Manual 154
Table 93 Stub Bus function settings

PhStrVal Phase threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.01 float32
PhOpTmms Phase Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint32
NStrVal Neutral threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.001 float32
NOpTmms Neutral Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint 32
There are independent settings, inputs, commands and outputs in each unit:
 Node: PROT/PSTB
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 93.
 Logic inputs:
 89 Open/closed input. It indicates the disconnector status
 Commands:
enabled.
 Stub Bus phase x Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a
phase. It is independent for each phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by the
neutral.
 Stub Bus phase X Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase.
It is independent for each phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by the
neutral.
 Stub Bus Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a phase or
by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase or by
the neutral.
 Stub Bus Status. Indicates whether the stub protection is enabled or not.
 "Disconnector 1 Status (DI) = OPEN". It is the general status of the disconnector

(SXWI)

User Manual 155
Table 94 Stub Bus function outputs.

Stub Bus phase A Start Str phsA
Stub Bus phase B Start Str phsB
Stub Bus phase C Start Str phsC
Stub Bus neutral Start Str neutral
Stub Bus phase A Trip Op phsA
Stub Bus phase B Trip Op phsB
Stub Bus phase C Trip Op phsC
Stub Bus neutral Trip Op neutral
Stub Bus Start Str general
Stub Bus Trip Op general
Stub Bus Status StEna general
Figure 77 Stub Bus function diagram
3.5 VOLTAGE UNITS
3.5.1 General description

When enabled and unblocked, the overvoltage units act when the setting value is exceed
during the programmed time. In order to reset, the voltage must fall below the pick up
value return percentage. For example, if the pick up threshold is 50V and the reset
percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage above 50V in order to pick up and
voltage below 45V in order to reset (50-0.1 50).
When enabled and unblocked, the undervoltage units act when the voltage is inferior to
the setting value during the programmed time. In order to reset, the voltage must exceed
the pick up value return percentage. For example, if the pick up threshold is 50V and the
reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage below 50V in order to pick up and
voltage above 55V in order to reset (50+0.1 50).
The voltage units are not directional.

User Manual 156
The voltage unit’s general settings are available in the PROT/PVGE1 node (return
percentages and VO measurement type):
 Phase overV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the
voltage must fall in order that the instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
 Phase underV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage above which the
voltage must rise in order that the instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
 3V2 drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage
must fall in order that the instantaneous and timed V2 units reset.
 3VO drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage
must fall in order that the instantaneous and timed VO units reset.
 3VO Operating quantity. Indicates the measurement used for the VO overvoltage:
 Calculated: The 3 V0 measurement is used, i.e., the vector sum of the 3 ground
to earth phases. 3V0=Va+Vb+Vc
 Measured: The measurement from the transformer configured as Vn is used.
Table 95 General voltage settings

RepValOVp Phase overV drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValUVp Phase underV drop out (%) 101 110 1 float32
RepValOV2 3V2 drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValOV0 3VO drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
Calculated (0)
SelV0 3VO Operating quantity enum
Measured (1)
3.5.1.1 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceed during the
programmed time.

 Operation type. Consult in each unit.
 Start value (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) at which the
function is activated.

User Manual 157
Table 96 Instantaneous voltage unit settings

PIOVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND(1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND(2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
Trip Permission by
recloser
3.5.1.2 Timed characteristics

The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum of response time, that is, a limit
that prevents any unit from tripping below a minimum time when the trip time
corresponding to the curve in use is met. This avoids timed trips which are quicker
than the instantaneous trips. It is configured with additional time setting, so that
if it set to zero, there is no such limit.

 Start value (V). Set in secondary volts. Indicates the voltage value at which the
function is activated.
 Operation type. Consult in each unit.
 Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
 Definite time (49)
 Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
 Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of
curve selected:

User Manual 158
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the
conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order
for a trip to be produced, the time used will be greater between this setting and
the time associated to the curve.
Table 97 Timed voltage unit settings

PTVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND (1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND (2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
TmVCrv Operating curve type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
Trip Permission by
recloser
3.5.2 Phase overvoltage

The phase overvoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured
with ground to phase voltages, the protection is wired with ground to phase measurements
(Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the protection
is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The return percentage can be configured by the user in the PROT/PVGE1 node.

User Manual 159
The setting “Operation type” allows for a selection to be made from among the
following:
 “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

 “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value
without harmonics
 “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value
without harmonics
 “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with
harmonics
 “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase
voltage options, the operation type can only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-
phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIOV2
96.
 Commands:
enabled.
 Outputs: Table 98 shows the function’s output data
 IOV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
 IOV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is
 IOV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
 IOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 98 Instantaneous phase overvoltage function outputs

IOV1 Start phase A Str phsA
IOV1 Start phase B Str phsB
IOV1 Start phase C Str phsC
IOV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOV1 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOV1 Phase Start Str general
IOV1 Phase Trip Op general
3.5.2.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.

User Manual 160
following:

without harmonics
without harmonics
harmonics
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase
voltage options, the operation type can only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-
phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will correct itself internally.
There are settings, commands and outputs.
 Nodes: PROT/PTOV1
 Commands:
enabled.
 TOV Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
 TOV Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent
for each phase. Where X is the phase.
 TOV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked. This is general for all three phases.
 TOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 99 Timed phase overvoltage function outputs

TOV Start phase A Str phsA
TOV Start phase B Str phsB
TOV Start phase C Str phsC
TOV Trip phase A Op phsA
TOV Trip phase B Op phsB
TOV Trip phase C Op phsC
TOV Phase Status StEna stVal
TOV Phase Start Str general
TOV Phase Trip Op general
3.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
The following can be configured in the PROT/PVGE1 node:
 The measurement used between Vn transformer measurement or the vector sum of the
three voltage phases (3 V0).
 The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).

User Manual 161
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is
always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 PROT/GPIOV1 node
and Table 96.
 Commands:
enabled.
 GIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V0 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked.
Table 100 Instantaneous zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GIOV1 Start Str neut
GIOV1 Trip Op neut
IOV V0 Status StEna stVal
3.5.3.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
 Nodes: PROT/GPTOV1
and Table 92.
 Commands:
enabled.
 GTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV V0 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked.
Table 101 Timed zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GTOV1 Start Str neut
GTOV1 Trip Op neut
TOV V0 Status StEna stVal

User Manual 162
3.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3 · V2 = (Va + a2 · Vb + a · Vc) In which a = 1|120º

The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is
always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Node: PROT/UNPIOV1
and Table 96.
 Commands:
enabled.
 UNIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked.
Table 102 Instantaneous V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNIOV1 Start Str general
UNIOV1 Trip Op general
IOV V2 Status StEna stVal
3.5.4.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
 Nodes: PROT/UNPTOV1
and Table 95.
 Commands:
enabled.
 UNTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked.

User Manual 163
Table 103 Timed V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNTOV1 Start Str general
UNTOV1 Trip Op general
TOV V2 Status StEna stVal
3.5.5 Phase undervoltage

The phase undervoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured
with ground to phase voltages, the protection is wired with ground to phase measurements
(Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase voltages, the protection
is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The setting “Operation type”allows for a selection to be made from among the
following:

without harmonics
without harmonics
harmonics
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIUV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIUV2
and Table 95.
 Commands:
enabled.
 IUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
 IUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is
 IUV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
 IUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 164
Table 104 Instantaneous phase undervoltage function outputs

IUV1 Start phase A Str phsA
IUV1 Start phase B Str phsB
IUV1 Start phase C Str phsC
IUV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
IUV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
IUV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
IUV1 Phase Status StEna stVal
IUV1 Phase Start Str general
IUV1 Phase Trip Op general
3.5.5.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.
following:

without harmonics
without harmonics
harmonics
 Nodes: PROT/PTUV1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table
96and Table 92.
 Commands:
enabled.
 TUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is
 TUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is
 TUV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked. This is general for all three phases.
 TUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 165
Table 105 Timed phase undervoltage function outputs

TUV1 Start phase A Str phsA
TUV1 Start phase B Str phsB
TUV1 Start phase C Str phsC
TUV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
TUV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
TUV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
TUV Phase Status StEna stVal
TUV1 Phase Start Str general
TUV1 Phase Trip Op general
3.6 FREQUENCY UNITS
The frequency is measured each cycle and refreshed each half cycle, as shown in Figure 78.
Figure 78 Frequency Calculation
The voltage used in the frequency measurement is calculated as "2·Va-Vb-Vc". The algorithm
is executed in the event of the voltage registering zero. The frequency is calculated if
the voltage measurement is greater than 5V.
Both the positive and negative registers are measured, although the frequency measurement
is carried out for complete cycles.
3.6.1 Frequency
This function is composed of 8 steps, which are programmable as maximum or minimum
frequencies.
The function’s node, PROT/PTGF1, has independent settings for each step and common
settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
 Minimum voltage (V). Indicates the minimum voltage value below which the frequency
protection does no act, the unit is not permitted to pick up.
 Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the frequency
conditions necessary for the unit to pick up must be met.
 Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop
conditions necessary for the unit to reset must be met in the event of the unit's
not having tripped.
 OverFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by overfrequency, this is the time during
which the reset conditions must be met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It
is applied to all the steps configured as overfrequency.
 UnderFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by underfrequency, this is the time during
which the reset conditions must be met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It
is applied to all the steps configured as underfrequency.

User Manual 166
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the step is enabled or not.

 Start value (Hz). Indicates the frequency value at which the function is activated.
 Function type. Indicates whether its acts on overfrequency or underfrequency.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
The form in which it acts varies in accordance with type of step selected.
 Minimum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency falls below the set value
during a number of cycles equal or higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting.
Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be
produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during
the underfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not tripped, it drops
out if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.
 Maximum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency exceeds the set value
during a number of cycles equal or higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting.
Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in order for a trip to be
produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during
the overfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not tripped, it drops out
if the frequency is correct during reset cycles.
 Nodes: PROT/PTGF1
106.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps.
If acts on the 8 steps
 “DOrdFminB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as minimum
frequency. It only acts on the enabled steps.
 “DOrdFmaxB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as maximum
frequency. It only acts on the enabled steps.
 “DOrdFL1Bl”. Blocking and unblocking of step 1. It only acts if the step is
enabled
 “DOrdFL2Bl”… “DOrdFL8Bl”. As above, but acts on steps 2 to 8.
 Outputs: Table 107 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each
step
 Level X Frequency Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is
independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent
for each step.
 Level X Frequency Status. Indicates the step’s status. Active when enabled and
not blocked. Independent for each step.

User Manual 167
Table 106 General frequency protection settings
Data Parameter Min Max Step Remarks Type

BlkValV Minimum voltage (V) 15 200 1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 Int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 Int32
OFRsDlTmms OverFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
UFRsDlTmms UnderFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
PTGFEna1 Step 1 enabled NO / YES Boolean
StrVal1 Step 1. Start value (Hz) 45 65 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1. Delay time(ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
StTyp1 Step 1. Function type Maximum/Minimum enum
LogInBlk1 Step 1. Blocking input uint 32
PTGFEna2 Step 2. Enabled NO / YES Boolean
PTGFEna6 Step 6. enabled NO / YES Boolean
Table 107 Frequency function outputs

Level 1 Frequency Start Str1 general
Level 1 Frequency Trip Op1 general
Level 1 Frequency Status StEna1 stVal
Same for the rest of the steps
Level 8 Frequency Start Str8 general
Level 8 Frequency Trip OP8 general
Level 8 Frequency Status StEna8 stVal

User Manual 168
3.6.2 Frequency rate of change

This unit has 8 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation
per time unit is higher than the set value. The variation can represent a reduction
and/or an increase in the frequency, depending on the setting “Operation type”.
The function’s node, PROT/PFRC1, has independent settings for each step and common
settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the unit is enabled or not.

 Operation type. Indicates the whether the frequency variation is a reduction
(Negative), and increase (Positive) or both (Negative and positive).
 Minimum current level (A). Indicates the minimum current value below which it does
no act, the unit is not permitted to pick up.
 Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the
conditions necessary for the unit to pick up must be met.
 Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop
conditions necessary for the unit to reset must be met in the event of the unit's
not having tripped.
 Reset delay time (ms). Once tripped, this is the time during which the reset
conditions must be met in order to clear the trip from the unit.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the unit.
 Minimum allowed voltage (V). The setting as used in the frequency protection
(PTGF1). Indicates the minimum voltage value.
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
 Supervision f max. Indicates the maximum frequency above with the frequency rate of
change is not measured.
 f start value (Hz/s). Indicates the frequency variation value at which the function
is activated.
 Trip lock. Selects the signal which, when active, locks the activation of the
function; so, once activated, the signal is kept until the lock signal and the rate
of change signal are deactivated.
 Nodes: PROT/PFRC1
108.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps.
If acts on the 8 steps

User Manual 169
 Outputs: Table 109 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each
step
 ROCOF df/dt Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Common for all
steps.
 Level X df/dt Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent
for each step.
 Level X df/dt Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for
each step.
Table 108 Frequency rate of change settings
Data Parameter Min. Max Step Remarks Type

PFRCEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Negative(0)
Positive (1)
Optype Operation type uint 32
Negative and
Positive (2)
BlkValA Minimum current level (A) 0 100,0 0,1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 Int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 Int32
RsDlTmms Reset delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 Int32
BlkValHz1 Step 1: Supervision f max 40 70 0,01 float32
StrVal1 Step 1: f start value (Hz/s) 0,20 10 0,05 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1:Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck1 Step 1: Trip Lock uint 32
OpDlTmms2 Step 2: Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck2 Step 2:Trip Lock uint 32

OpDlTmms8 Step 8: Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 Int32
LogInTrLck8 Step 8: Trip Lock uint 32
Table 109 Frequency rate of change function outputs

ROCOF df/dt Status StEna stVal
Level 1 df/dt Start Str1 general
Level 1 df/dt Trip Op1 general
Level 8 df/dt Start Str8 general
Level 8 df/dt Trip OP8 general
General operation.
The function is only effective for frequencies inferior to a threshold called “maximum
monitoring frequency”, currents greater than the threshold called “minimum current” and
voltages greater than the minimum monitoring threshold:
 Minimum monitoring current. The maximum phase current is compared to this

setting. If the minimum current circulating in all the phases is inferior to
the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pick up. When
a current is greater than the set threshold appears in at least one of the
phases, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the frequency rate of
change function.

User Manual 170
 Minimum monitoring voltage. If the phase B voltage is inferior to the setting,

the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pick up. When the voltage
exceeds the set threshold, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running the
frequency rate of change function.
The frequency is measured each cycle and reloaded every half cycle, as shown in Figure
78.
The algorithm stores the periods of the signal’s last 4 cycles and calculates the
frequency rate of change by comparing the current cycle’s frequency measurement with the
measurement taken from 4 cycles previously, taking into account the time lapse between
both (Figure 79).
df/dt = (f1 − f5)/(T1 + T2 + T3 + T4)

In which:
f5 =frequency measurement taken 4 cycles

previously
f4 =frequency measurement taken 3 cycles T4 period of the 4th cycle starting

previously from the end
f3 =frequency measurement taken 2 cycles T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting

f2 =frequency measurement taken 1 cycle T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting

f1 =Last frequency measurement T1 period of the last cycle
This calculation is repeated, taking into account the measurements separated by two
cycles in order to ensure that the frequency has fallen during the entire period, i.e.,
to ensure that an incorrect measurement does not lead to a trip. Two checks are carried
out:
 the measurement of the current cycle against that of the cycle minus two cycles
df/dt2 = (fn − fn − 4)/(tn − tn − 4)
 the measurement of the cycle minus two cycles against that of the cycle minus four
cycles
df/dt3 = (fn − 4 − fn − 8)/(tn − 4 − tn − 8)
Figure 79 Frequency rate of change calculation
For the unit to pick up, the frequency rate of change must be exceeded by an absolute
value during the set number of cycles. The pick up is only produced if the frequency rate
of change/voltage rate of change value meets the criterion selected in the setting
“Operation type”:
 Negative. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is negative, i.e., when the
current frequency is inferior to that measured 4 cycles previously.
 Positive. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is positive, i.e., when the
current frequency is greater than that measured 4 cycles previously.

User Manual 171
 Negative and Positive. Acts on frequency rate of change/voltage rate in both

directions.
During the pickup process, one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range
without restarting the process. For example, if 3 cycles are required to cause a pickup,
the threshold need only be exceeded 3 times from a total of 4 consecutive measurements.
In order for a trip to occur once the unit has picked up, the frequency rate of change
measurement must remain between the set frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change
value and a reset value to the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change minus
0.05Hz/s during the set time.
In order for the unit to reset once it has picked up, the frequency rate of
change/voltage rate of change measurement must be detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the
set value during the number of cycles programmes as reset cycles.
In order for the unit to reset once it has tripped, the frequency rate of change/voltage
rate of change measurement must be detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during
the reset time. Any sealing signals that have been configured must register a value of
zero in order for the trip to be deactivated.
Figure 80 Frequency rate of change trip diagram
3.7 POWER UNITS
3.7.1 General
Using the voltage and current measurements, the real and reactive powers and the power
factor are calculated. The values obtained are used for the power protection functions.
The trip thresholds are programmed as a percentage of the rated apparent power, S = 3 · V
· I, in which:
 Vn: rated phase to ground voltage (phase-ground). It is calculated from the phase
to phase primary voltage of the local end (node PROT/LINPDIF) and the voltage
transformation ratio (node PROT/TVTR)

User Manual 172
 In: The rated phase current of the local end, the PROT/ LIINPDIF node.
The units’ reset threshold is configured in the PROT/PDOP1 node, ranging from 0.1% to 5%:
 P reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the real power units.
 Q reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the reactive power units.
 S reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the apparent power units.
Table 110 Power units reset settings

RepValP P reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValQ Q reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValS S reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
The power units’ settings are similar to each other. Each unit has independent settings:

 Start value (%). Indicates the percentage in relation to the rated power necessary
for the unit to pick up.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
Table 111 Power unit settings

PDUPEna (minimum) Boolean
Enabled NO / YES
PDOPEna(maximum) Boolean
PcStrVal Start value (%) 1,0 200,0 0,1 float32
The settings, commands and outputs available are similar in all the units, with the
exception of the node:
 Node: Indicated in each specific unit.

and Table 111.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 X Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 173
Where X indicates the Power protection unit.

Table 112 Power function outputs

X Status StEna stVal
X Start Str general
X Trip Op general
3.7.2 Minimum real power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP1.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the generated power. It compares

the real power with the minimum power given by the setting. In the event of the generated
power being inferior to the power established in the setting during the programmed time,
the protection trips the corresponding relay. Any reverse power will be considered as
below the minimum power threshold and will thus activate the function.
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pick up threshold plus the reset percentage.
For example, if the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power
exceeds the 102% of the pick up threshold.
The settings, commands and outputs available are indicated in section 3.7.1.
Table 113 Minimum real power function outputs
PDUP1 Signals Data Attribute

Minimum P Start Str stVal
Minimum P Trip Op stVal
Minimum P Status StEna stVal
3.7.3 Maximum real power

There are two independent units, whose nodes are PROT/PDOP1 and PROT/PDOP2.
It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares

the real power with the maximum power given by the setting. In the event of the generated
power being greater than the power established in the setting during the programmed time,
the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pick up threshold less the reset
percentage. For example, if the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the
power is inferior to 98% of the pick up threshold.
Table 114 Maximum real power function outputs
PDOP1 Signals PDOP2 Signals Data Attribute

High Maximum P Start Low Maximum P Start Str stVal
High Maximum P Trip Low Maximum P Trip Op stVal
Maximum P Level 1 Status Maximum P Level 2 Status StEna stVal
3.7.4 Real power inversion

The protection is activated when the real power flow is inverted (motorization of
generators).

User Manual 174
In order to act, the real power must be negative; in the event of the real power
exceeding the set value during the programmed time, the protection trips the
corresponding relay.
percentage.
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pick up as of a measured
power of -100w. If the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset when the power
is below -98W (98% of set value).
Table 115 Real power inversion function outputs

High P Inversion Start Low P Inversion Start Str stVal
High P Inversion Trip Low P Inversion Trip Op stVal
P Inversion Level 1 Status P Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal
3.7.5 Reactive power inversion

The protection is activated when the reactive power flow is inverted (field loss in
generators).
In order to act, the reactive power must be negative; in the event of the real power
exceeding the set value during the programmed time, the protection trips the
corresponding relay.
percentage.
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pick up as of a measured
power of -100w. If the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset when the power
is below -98W (98% of set value).
Table 116 Reactive power inversion function outputs

High Q Inversion Start Low Q Inversion Start Str stVal
High Q Inversion Trip Low Q Inversion Trip Op stVal
Q Inversion Level 1 Status Q Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal
3.7.6 Minimum apparent power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP2.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the power generated. It compares

the apparent power with the minimum power given by the setting. In the event of the
generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pick up threshold plus the reset percentage.
For example, if the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power
exceeds the 102% of the pick up threshold.

User Manual 175
Table 117 Minimum apparent power function outputs

Minimum S Start Str stVal
Minimum S Trip Op stVal
Minimum S Status StEna stVal
3.7.7 Maximum apparent power

It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares

the apparent power with the maximum power given by the setting. In the event of the
generated power being greater than the power established in the setting during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
percentage. For example, if the reset percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the
power is inferior to 98% of the pick up threshold.
Table 118 Maximum apparent power function outputs

High Maximum S Start Low Maximum S Start Str stVal
High Maximum S Trip Low Maximum S Trip Op stVal
Maximum S Level 1 Status Maximum S Level 2 Status StEna stVal
3.8 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
This unit specifies a functioning zone in which the phase-phase units of the distance
functions are blocked (mho and quadrilateral). Figure 81 shows this unit's diagram.
For the operation of the load encroachment, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 The positive sequence impedance is between impedance margins (see Figure 81).
 The positive sequence current exceeds the threshold (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

 Minimum I1 threshold (A). Indicates the minimum current positive sequence value
necessary to activate the unit.
 Z forward (Ohm). Indicates the forward load zone impedance module.
 Positive angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle forward.
 Negative angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle forward.
 Z reverse (Ohm). Indicates the reverse load zone impedance module.
 Positive angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle
backwards.
 Negative angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle
backwards.
 Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.

User Manual 176
It has independent settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/PLEC1
119.
 Commands:
enabled.
 Load Encroachment. Indicates that the unit is active.
 Load Encroachment Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 119 Load zone settings

LoEnEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkValI1 Minimum I1 threshold (A) 0,05 25 0,01 float32
FwRisLod Z forward (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
FwAngLod Positive angle forward (º) 0 90 1 float32
FwNAngLod Negative angle forward (º) 270 359 1 float32
RvRisLod Z reverse (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
RvAngLod Positive angle reverse (º) 90 180 1 float32
RvNAngLod Negative angle reverse (º) 180 270 1 float32
Table 120 Load zone function outputs

Load Encroachment Op general
Load Encroachment Status StEna stVal
Figure 81 Load Zone Diagram
3.9 FUSE FAILURE
The measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT is used to obtain results before the
protection units are activated.
The fuse failure conditions are as follows:

User Manual 177
 The three breakers are closed. (Open pole detector). Signals "Open pole (1 or 2)" and "3
open poles" of the scheme.
 I1 positive sequence current is greater than 5% of the rated current.
 The increase in I1 positive sequence and the IN neutral current in relation to the
current measured 1 cycle previously must be less than 0.1A for 5A rated current or 0.02A
for rated current 1A.
 The fault detection unit must be deactivated (Fault detection signal of the scheme).
 Distance units (mho or quadrilateral) and/or overcurrent units (phase, ground, earth
system and unbalanced) have not picked up.
 The angle difference between currents I1 and I0 and those of 1 cycle previous are less
than 5º.
 The V1 positive sequence voltage, memorized 1 cycle previously, must exceed VFF and drop
below 95% of VFF,
VFF = VN · 80% (V)
With VN as the rated phase to ground voltage. It is calculated from the phase to phase
primary voltage of the local end (node PROT/LINPDIF) and the voltage transformation ratio
(node PROT/TVTR)
If the function detects all the above conditions, or if the “Fuse Fail input” is activated,
a fuse failure pick up signal is produced and used to block the units in question
(configurable).
These conditions must be met during a programmable time in order for the fuse failure trip
to be activated. Once tripped, the fuse fault is maintained until the V1 voltage rises
above VFF.
If any of the overcurrent functions (phase, ground, earth system and unbalanced) or
distance units have picked up or if during the timeout the relay picks up at least one of
these units, the fuse failure output is not activated as the situation is considered a
fault, not a fuse failure.
The fuse failure pick up and trip are also activated when the digital “Fuse Fail input” is
activated independently of the programmed time. The fuse failure is only deactivated when
the input is deactivated.
If the “Fuse Fail input” input is activated, the synchrocheck unit is deactivated.
The fuse failure pick up can be used as a blocking signal for other functions by means of
each function’s logic signals.
The overcurrent units have settings that configure their functioning in the event of a fuse
failure, allowing the enabling of the function, the inhibition of directional, etc.

 Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions must be met in order for
the trip to take place.
 Fuse Fail input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates a fuse failure.
 FF input (B side-sinc1). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse
failure on breaker 1’s side B synchronism.
 FF input (B side-sinc2). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse
failure on breaker 2’s side B synchronism.
function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are not generated. If set to
“YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.

User Manual 178
Table 121 Fuse failure settings

RFUFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFF Fuse Fail input uint 32
LogInFFB1 FF input (B side-sinc1) uint 32
LogInFFB2 FF input (B side-sinc2) uint 32
Figure 82 Fuse failure scheme
 Node: PROT/RFUF1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 Fuse Failure Start. Indicates that the fuse failure has picked up.
 Fuse Failure Trip. Indicates that the fuse failure has tripped, that is, the
additional time has elapsed with the unit picked up.
 Fuse Failure B1 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 1’s
synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure B2 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 2’s
synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and
not blocked.

User Manual 179
Table 122 Fuse failure function outputs

Fuse Failure Start Str general
Fuse Failure Trip Op general
Fuse Failure B1 Activation FFB1 general
Fuse Failure B2 Activation FFB2 general
Fuse Failure Status StEna stVal
3.10 POWER SWING
This unit determines the function conditions according to which distance function trips is
disabled for single-phase and/or two-phase units and for each zone, depending on the
settings.
Differentiation is made between stable and unstable power swing.
 Stable swing: when distance functions can be blocked by generating the "Power Swing
Blocked" signal.
 Unstable swing: when some system elements can be tripping to prevent the
disturbance extending. To do this, this function generates the "OST- Out of Step
Tripping" signal.
To determine swinging conditions, the complete positive sequence impedance is used (for 3
closed poles) or the minimum impedance of phase (A, B, C) or phase combination (AB, BC or
CA) of the closed poles (if there is 1 open pole). By calculating the position of this
impedance in the R/X diagram, it is possible to measure how and at what speed it is moving.
To do this, on the one hand, some zones are defined in the diagram, and on the other some
transfer times from one zone to another are defined. These zones and times are
parameterised by settings.
Figure 83 shows the power swinging characteristic diagram.
Figure 83 Power Swing Characteristic
Figure 85 shows this unit's logic diagram. On the one hand, it shows the "PSB" signal's
activation conditions and on the other, the "OST" signal's activation conditions.
"Power Swing Blocking" (PSB) is activated when any of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
 The positive sequence impedance takes a time longer than the "Blocking Time (ms)"
(setting) to pass from the outside zone to the middle zone and the unblocking
signal is not activated (see Figure 83).

User Manual 180
 The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between
going from the outside zone to the middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)"
(setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting) and the unblocking
signal is not activated. In this case the trip must be enabled and not blocked (see
Figure 83).
If the 3 poles are closed, blocking only affect the two-phase units. With 1 pole open,
blocking affects all single- and two-phase units.The breaker status is determined by
digital inputs.
Once activated, the "PSB" signal is maintained for 2 seconds as long as no unblocking
conditions are fulfilled and that it is inside the outer zone. If the "Memory Enabled"
setting is "YES", blocking will last 1 second once outside the outer zone. If it is "NO",
there is no blocking once outside the outer zone.
Each of the zones, for both the Mho and Quadrilateral characteristics can be blocked or
unblocked by this function depending on the setting selection: "Zone 1 Blocking"…"Zone 5
Blocking".
It is also possible to block remote protection using the setting "Teleprotection Blocking"
so that TPR reception and TPT transmission is ignored.
The activation of "Trip by Power Swing" (OST) is determined depending on the "Trip Enabled"
setting. If this setting is "NO", the trip is never activated.
If the setting is IN_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
 The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between
going from the outside zone to the middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)"
(setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting).See Figure 83.
 The unblocking signal is not activated.
If the setting is OUT_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
 If the case is as above (the positive sequence impedance enters the middle zone and
the time it takes to go from the outer zone to the middle zone is greater than
"Trip Time (ms)" and less than "Blocking Time (ms)", the impedance leaves the
middle zone through the opposite side to where it entered. See Figure 83.
 When the previous condition is fulfilled, once the set time "Trip delay" has
elapsed, since the impedance leaves the middle zone and if it does not enter again.
 The unblocking signal is not activated.
The unblocking signal is activated if any of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The positive sequence threshold is less than "I1 Minimum threshold (A)" (setting).
 There is more than one pole open.
 The fuse fault function is active.
 The impedance stays in the internal zone for a time longer than the one indicated
in the "Internal Zone unblock T (ms)".
 If there are 3 poles closed and the following conditions are fulfilled during
"After fault Reset time (ms)" (setting):
 The phase selector detects a two or single-phase fault using the negative
sequence percentage (I2>0.05xIrated & I2/I1>10%).
 The negative sequence current exceeds "I2 Threshold (A)" (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

 Memory Enabled. Indicates whether or not the swing blocking signal will be
maintained for 1 second, after leaving the outer zone.
 Zone X Blocking. Enables or disables blocking each zone of the unit.

User Manual 181
 Teleprotection Blocking. Enables or disables remote protection blocking.

 Middle zone Right R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 83).
 Middle zone Left R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 83).
 Middle zone Top Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X>=0 (See Figure 83).
 Middle zone Bottom Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X<0 (See Figure 83).
 Internal zone Right R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R>=0 (See Figure 83).
 Internal zone Left R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R<0 (See Figure 83).
 I1 Minimum threshold (A).This is the minimum I1 required to activate the swing
function.
 Slope angle. Indicates the slope angle of the resistive limits (See Figure 83).
 Distance between zones. Indicates the width of the outer zone (See Figure 83).
 Blocking time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for
activating blocking.
 Trip Enabled. Indicates the way of determining whether there is a trip condition.
 Trip Time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for
activating the trip.
 Internal Zone unblock T (ms). Minimum time in milliseconds for which the impedance
must remain in the "inner zone" to unblock operating in all zones.
 I2 threshold (A). With 3 poles closed, if I2 exceeds this threshold and the fault
selector is activated, unblocking occurs.
 After fault Reset time (ms). This is the time that elapses before disabling swing
blocking as soon as a two-phase or single-phase fault is detected (based on the I2
threshold in the phase selector).
 Trip delay. It is only used, when the power swing trip is enabled with the option
“OUT_ZMED”. It is the time since the impedance leaves the middle zone, without
returning into it, until the trip signal occurs.
 Repetitions for trip. (Not applicable)
 Interval time for trip (ms). (Not applicable)
 Trip Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the trip by
swinging.

User Manual 182
Table 123 Power swing settings

OOSEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkMemEna Memory Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Z1Blk Zone 1 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
: The same for zones 2, 3 , 4
Z5Blk Zone 5 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
TpBlk Teleprotection Blocking NO / YES Boolean
RisMedRi Middle zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RisMedLe Middle zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedHi Middlezone Top X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedLo Middle zone Bottom X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntRi Internal zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntLe Internal zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
I1Val I1 Minimum threshold (A) 0,05 500 0,01 float32
BlArg Slope angle 45 90 0,01 float32
ZDisOhm Distance between zones 0,1 100 0,1 float32
SwgTmms Blocking time (ms) 5 100 5 Int32
NO (0)
TrEna Trip Enabled IN_ZMED (1) uint32
OUT_ZMED (2)
TrTmms Trip Time (ms) 5 100 5 Int32
UnBlTmms Internal Zone unblock T (ms) 60 10000 5 Int32
I2Val I2 threshold (A) 0 100 0,01 Float32
RstTmms After fault Reset time (ms) 0 1000 5 Int32
TrDelay Trip delay 0 1000 5 Int32
TrRepNu Repetitions for trip 1 3 1 Int32
TrIntTmms Interval time for trip (ms) 0 1000 5 Int32
LogInTrBlk Trip Blocking input uint32
 Node PROT/RPSB1
123.
 Commands:
enabled.
 "DOrdOpBlk": Blocking and unblocking of the trip by power swing. Only applicable
if the "Trip Enabled" setting is not set to "NO".
 Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the two-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the single-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Teleprotection blocked PSB. Indicates that remote protection is blocked by the
power swing.
 Power swing blocked. Time conditions are fulfilled when passing from the outer
zone to the middle zone without detecting a fault.
 Power swing Trip. Trip signal by power swing.
 Power swing unblocked. Blocking reset by power swing.
 PSB unblocked internal zone. The impedance has stayed in the inner zone for the
time indicated in the "Inner zone unblocking time" and no other unblocking
conditions have been fulfilled.

User Manual 183
 Z in ZMED+. The impedance seen is in the middle zone positive. The impedance has
a positive resistive component.
 Z in ZMED-. The impedance seen is in the middle zone negative. The impedance has
a negative resistive component.
 Z in Middle zone. The impedance seen is in the middle zone.
 Z in External zone. The impedance seen is in the external zone.
 Z in Internal zone. The impedance seen is in the internal zone.
 Power swing status. Indicates whether or not the power swing function is
enabled.
 Power swing trip status. Indicates whether or not the trip power swing function
is enabled.

 Breaker status. The breaker status signals are determined by the digital inputs:
 3 poles closed. Indicates the 3 poles are closed.
 52 2 poles open. Indicates 2 poles are open.
 52 3 poles open. Indicates the 3 poles are open.
Table 124 Power Swing Function Outputs

Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB Z1PhBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB Z1GndBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Teleprotection blocked PSB TPBl general
Power swing blocked Blk general
Power swing Trip Op general
Power swing unblocked UnBlk general
PSB unblocked internal zone ZMUnBl general
Z in ZMED+ ZMPIn general
Z in ZMED- ZMNIn general
Z in Middle Zone Zmed general
Z in External Zone ZEXT general
Z in Internal Zone Zint general
Power swing Status StEna general
Power swing trip status TrPt general

User Manual 184
Figure 84 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Trip).
Figure 85 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Blocking).

User Manual 185
3.11 SWITCH ONTO FAULT
This unit provides an instantaneous three-phase trip when a fault occurs upon the
generation of a breaker closure command (manual or by input).
The function is enabled during a programmable time "Activation time (ms)" in the following
situations:
 Upon the closure of the 3-poles, or

 Following the closure command.
Depending on the “Operation type” setting, the action of the switch onto fault is produced
when:
 Programmed as “V and I" or "(V and I) or Z2”: The phase voltage is below a threshold (set
in the open pole detector) and the phase current is above a threshold for ½ cycle.
 Programmed as “Z2” or “(V and I) or Z2”: The zone 2 of the distance units (mho or
quadrilateral) is started.
During the period of time that the function is enabled "Activation time (ms)", an offset of
0.1 ohms is applied to the mho characteristic in zone 2. On the other hand, the X reach
contrary to the programmed direction is set to 0.05 ohms in the quadrilateral
characteristic in zone 2. Therefore, the three - phase faults are protected in the origin.
Depending on the configuration set the switch onto fault can be active with any closing.1
 To enable it after a manual closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing
allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Only "Recloser lockout" and "Trip permission after
manual closing" have to be selected.
 To enable it after any closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Select "Recloser lockout" and the desired trip
permissions.
 To allow reclosings:
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): Select the desired option.
 Trip permission by recloser: Do not select "Recloser lockout" and select the desired
trip permissions.
The function’s settings are:

 Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 V and I. The V and I measurements are checked in order to determine the switch onto
fault.
 Z2 or (V and I). The V and I measurements or the zone 2 start signals are checked in
order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Z2. The zone 2 start signals are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Operation delay start input. When it is enabled and dead line is detected, it allows
switch onto fault function.
 Normalized voltage Reset. Indicates if resetting due to voltage above the threshold is
enabled or not. It only works, if the "Operation type" is "Z2" or "Z2 or (V and I)".
 I phase threshold (A). Indicates the current value for indicating a switch onto fault.
1
Available form firmware version 5.17.15.2 and ICD version 6.1.13.27 on. Until that version only acts with manual closings.

User Manual 186
 Activation time (ms). Indicates the time during which the unit is enabled once the start
conditions have been met.
 Trip Permission by recloser1. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with
the recloser status: standby, blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is
configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section corresponding to the recloser
(3.13.6.3).
 Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4) 1. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not,
in accordance with the recloser's closing cycle (see reclose permission mask).
The voltage threshold set in the open pole detector is used.
 Node: PROT/PSOF1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 Switch onto Fault Activation. Indicates that the switch onto fault has been
activated.
 Switch onto Fault Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled
and not blocked.
Table 125 Switch onto fault settings

PSOFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
V and I (2)
Optype Operation type Z2 or (V and I) (3) uint32
Z2 (4)
TimAutEna Operation delay start input NO / YES
VNorRst Normalized voltage reset NO / YES
IThr I phase threshold (A) 0,01 200,0 0,01 float32
OpTmms Activation time (ms) 100 1000 10 Int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
ReclPerm Reclose perm. (R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 enum
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)

User Manual 187
Table 126 Switch onto fault function outputs

Switch onto Fault Trip Op general
Switch onto Fault Status StEna stVal
Figure 86 shows the complete switch onto fault unit scheme.

 Z2G Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-ground units have started.
 Z2F Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-phase units have started.
 52_1 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 1
 52_1 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 1 have been
closed without reclose command.
 52_2 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 2
 52_2 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 2 have been
closed without reclose command.
 Deenergized line in phases A, B and C. It´s the signal "DeadLine Phase ABC" of the dead
line function.

User Manual 188
Figure 86 Switch onto fault scheme

User Manual 189
3.12 BREAKER FAILURE
If a fault is detected, it is important to act quickly and for the switch to work
correctly. However, it may be that an error occurs and it is not able to interrupt the
fault current.
The breaker failure function checks that there is no current via the switch, for a given
time after the trip situation. If it is detected that the current continues to be above a
value established by the setting, a signal is activated so that secondary switches can act.
3.12.1 Single pole breaker Failure

The protection device has a complete breaker fault functional feature, with single-pole or
three-pole functioning.
If the unit is enabled, functioning is as follows (see Figure 87 y Figure 88):
 If the equipment indicates a trip signal or an external protection signal is

received via a logic input, depending on the value of the "Start type" setting, it
will heed to one or the other to start up a timer.
 If the trip situation disappears or the function is tripping or starting
externally, to verify this, the "Time signal relapse (ms)" must elapse.
 If, following the period programmed as “Retrip time delay (ms)”, the current of one
of the phases exceeds the programmed "phase current threshold", the retrip signal
is activated.
 If, following the period programmed as “Trip time delay (ms)”, the current of one
of the phases exceeds the programmed "Phase current threshold (A)", the trip signal
is activated.
 Regardless of the “Trip time delay (ms)”, if a blocked switch logic input is
activated, the trip signal is activated.
 The signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents fall below
their drop out values.
In this unit, functioning does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather
the current values. The measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT of the full-cycle DFT
is used (the lesser of the two).
Each of the phases and neutral is analysed independently.
It has independent settings and outputs.
 Nodes:
 PROT/FRBRF1. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 1, 2 and
3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 PROT/FRBRF2. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 4, 5 and
6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2).Only
127.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocks and unblocks the function. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
The settings used by this unit are as follows:

 Start type. The following options are available:
 External trips: the function's start logic inputs are taken into consideration.

User Manual 190
 Internal trips: the equipment's internal trip activations are taken into
consideration.
 Both: both the external activations (depending on the initial inputs) and the
equipment's internal trip activations are taken into account.
 Operation type. The following options are available:
 Three-pole: functioning according to the Figure 88 diagram.
 Single-pole: functioning according to the Figure 87 diagram.
 Sealed by current. Indicates whether or not the disappearance of the trigger signal
causes the function to relapse. In other words, if the trip signal has to be
permanent or simply a pulse.
 Time signal relapse (ms). Indicates the time for which the start situation is to be
maintained, after the disappearance of the internal trip or input start.
 Supervision by current. Indicates whether or not current is simultaneously needed
with the trip order, in order for the timers to start.
 Phase current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the phase is
considered as open.
 Gnd current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is
considered as open.
 Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip
signal if the current does not drop below the drop out level.
 Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip
signal if the current does not drop below the drop out level.
 Pole A BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the
start of breaker failure timing for phase A.
 Pole B BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the
start of breaker failure timing for phase B.
 Pole C BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the
start of breaker failure timing for phase C.
 3 pole BF start input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the start
of the breaker fault timing.
Table 127 Breaker failure Settings

RBRFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
External Trips (1)
InitType Start type Internal Trips (2) enum
Both (3)
Three-pole (0)
OpType Operation type enum
Single-pole (1)
CurLoc Sealed by current NO / YES Boolean
InRsTmms Time signal relapse (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
CurSpv Supervision by current NO / YES Boolean
DetValAPhs Phase current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
DetValAGnd Gnd current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
RfailTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
FailTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input Int32
LogInBFInA Pole A BF start input Int32
LogInBFInB Pole B BF start input Int32
LogInBFInC Pole C BF start input Int32
LogInBFI3P 3 pole BF start input Int32

User Manual 191
The breaker failure function's output signals are as follows:
 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a
breaker failure in phase A.
 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a
breaker failure in phase B.
 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a
breaker failure in phase C.
 Retrigger 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker
failure in one of the poles.
 Time BF completed (Br1). Indicates that the trip signalling timer has finished.
 Trip 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a trip due to a switch fault. This
means that besides complying with the timing indicated by "BF time finished", the
current that circulates through the switch exceeds the function's activation
threshold.
 Start 50BF pole A (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the
pole A are met during the set time.
 Start 50BF pole B (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the
pole B are met during the set time.
 Start 50BF pole C (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the
pole C are met during the set time.
 50BF Ia exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole A, the current exceeds
the programmed fault detection threshold.
 50BF Ib exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole B, the current exceeds
 50BF Ic exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole C, the current exceeds
 50BF In exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the neutral, the current exceeds the
programmed fault detection threshold.
 Breaker failure status (Br1). Indicates the function’s status. It is active when
Table 128 Breaker failure function outputs
Signal RBRF1 Signal RBRF2 Data Attribute

50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br2) ReOp phsA
50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br2) ReOp phsB
50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br2) ReOp phsC
Retrigger 50BF (Br1) Retrigger 50BF (Br2) ReOp general
Time BF completed (Br1) Time BF completed (Br2) TmBF general
Trip 50BF (Br1) Trip 50BF (Br2) Op general
50BF Start pole A (Br1) 50BF Start pole A (Br2) StrF phsA
50BF Start pole B (Br1) 50BF Start pole B (Br2) StrF phsB
50BF Start pole C (Br1) 50BF Start pole C (Br2) StrF phsC
50BF Ia exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ia exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsA
50BF Ib exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ib exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsB
50BF Ic exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ic exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsC
50BF In exceeded (Br1) 50BF In exceeded (Br2) StrThr Neut
The input signals to this function are:
 Pole A General Trip. Indicates that pole A general trip is operating.

 Pole B General Trip. Indicates that pole B general trip is operating.
 Pole C General Trip. Indicates that pole C general trip is operating.

User Manual 192
 Tripolar Trip. Indicates that a 3 poles trip is activated.

 IA measurement. It is the fundamental phase A measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IB measurement. It is the fundamental phase B measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IC measurement. It is the fundamental phase C measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IN measurement. It is the fundamental neutral measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 52_x Locked. Indicates that the breaker is locked, where "x" is the breaker number.
Figure 87 Single-pole Complete breaker Fault Diagram

User Manual 193
Figure 88 Three-pole Complete breaker Fault Diagram
3.13 TRIP LOGICS
3.13.1 67NQ Remote Protection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast,
selective and reliable with the aim of not jeopardising the stability of the electrical
system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use remote protection systems
associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection
device is equipped with a remote protection system for completely protecting the line
with high-speed protections.
They are based upon the use of remote protection signals between both end terminals of
the line. The effect upon the output relays’ operation is determined according to the
signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other terminal.
The signals used in the schemes are:
 TPTx: remote protection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx: remote protection signal received by a terminal.
 SGL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
 GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).

User Manual 194
Figure 89 Basic Remote Protection Diagram
3.13.1.1 Introduction
3.13.1.1.1 Fault Detection Units
 67NQ schemes are affected on the instantaneous directional unit No. 1 (forward), 2
(forward) and 3 (backwards).Zone 1 (forward): Unit 1 with instantaneous, unbalanced
and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC1 and GPIOC1).
 Zone 2 (forward): Unit 2 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent
(UNPIOC2 and GPIOC2).
 Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 3 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent
(UNPIOC3 and GPIOC3).
Therefore, unit 1 can be assimilated to zone 1, unit 2 to zone 2, and unit 3 to zone 4.
Unit 3 must be programmed backwards.
3.13.1.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
 Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault occurs outside the
zone to be protected. A relay can trip on an overreach zone if, after a definite
time, the blocking signal has not been received.
 Permissive schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the
overreach zone. The additional ECHO, weak infeed and Current Reversal
Blockingschemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following
characteristics for each of them: In the case of an internal fault in the protected line
and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled for
tripping, whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes,
if there is an external fault and a communication channel fault, the device can trip.
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in
the case of carrier waves, it is best to use Current Reversal Blockingscheme, since
internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it is best to use
blocking schemes in weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to
permissive schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes,
given that the latter involve slightly longer fault clear times, due to the security
waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
 Step trip (none)

 Permissive overreach (Overreaching POTT)
 Permissive underreach (Underreaching PUTT)
 Directional comparison blocking scheme

User Manual 195
 Directional comparison unblocking scheme

Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:
 Direct transfer trip

 Echo
 Weak infeed
 Current Reversal Blocking
3.13.1.1.3 Flexible Units
The signals that activate the dispatch of the remote protection between the different
overcurrent units can be configured for all the schemes. Two settings are included -
"67NQ Permissive Units" and "67NQ Block Units" which enable both logic inputs to be
carried with the startups of the desired units. In this way, the signals carried to the
schemes can be made flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to
connect any logic input to them:
 Faults forward ("67NQ Permissive Units").

 Faults backwards ("67NQ Block Units").
3.13.1.1.4 Input / output signals

The following signals are used in the schemes:
 TPTx 67NQ remote protection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx_67NQ. Differentiation is made between both. TPRIxis the remote protection
input received by a terminal.
 TPRx_67NQFollows the TPRIxinput to become activated, but memorises the input for
time "TPRx Drop out time (ms)" (RsRTPTmms) to deactivate itself. If TPRx Drop out
time (ms)" is equal to zero, then TPRxcoincides with input TPRIx. TPRxis used in
the remote protection schemes.
Figure 90 Remote Protection Reception
 GSLRx_67NQ Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established
between the two remote protection devices is inactive.
3.13.1.1.5 Double Lines

In the case of double lines, the signals take into consideration is the one received by
each of the lines.

User Manual 196
Figure 91 Reception of Remote Protection in Double Lines
Permissive Schemes
Blocking Schemes
The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
 Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
 TPRx Drop out time (ms). The time during which the remote protection receipt input
is memorised (TPRx).
 Block delay time (ms). Blocking time (ms). Additional blocking signal timeout.
 GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to permit trips.
 GSL Maximum time(ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of
security signal is enabled.
 GSL Drop out time(ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security
channel.
 ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.
 ECHO pulse time(ms). The duration of the ECHO output signal pulse.
 ECHO Blocking time(ms). Time after the deactivation of signal 67NQ_FW during which
it is considered as being active.
 ECHO delay time(ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the
ECHO signal must be met.
 Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change
in the fault's direction. (Reversal direction memorisation).
 Current rev pickup t. (ms). Reversal direction memorization time.
 Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.
 Weak infeed threshold (V). Threshold for the consideration of weak infeed.
 TPRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt of the
line 1's remote protection.

User Manual 197
 GSLRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt of
the line 1 security signal loss signal.
 TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the remote protection
trip.
 TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking
of the TPTX signal transmission.
Figure 92 TPTx Block Scheme
 ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO startup for
remote protection schemes.
 Block ECHO. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO blocking for
 67NQ Permissive Units. Permits the selection of an alternative startup signal for
unit 2: selects the signal which when active, indicates the activation of the 67Q
startup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is configured, 67NQ
functions are not taken into consideration.
 67NQ Block Units. Permits the selection of an alternative startup signal for unit
backwards: selects the signal which when active, indicates the activation of the
67NQ startup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is configured, 67NQ
functions are not taken into consideration.
 Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking
of the weak infeed scheme.
 Trip permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance
 Reclose permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in

User Manual 198
Table 129 Remote protection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 400 10 Int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 Int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop off time (ms) 0 400 10 Int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 200 10 Int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev. pickup T (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0,1 200 0,01 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _67 line 1 1 Int32
LogInRTP2 TPRx _67 line 2 1 Int32
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_67 line 1 1 Int32
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_67 line 2 1 Int32
LogInBl TP Trip Block 1 Int32
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input 1 Int32
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value 1 Int32
LogInECOBl Block ECHO 1 Int32
LogInAlU 67NQ Permissive Units 1 Int32
LogInBlU 67NQ Block Units 1 Int32
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking 1 Int32
GenTrip General Trip 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
TripPerm Trip permission by recloser 0 254 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 1 enum
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
 Node PROT/OCPSCH1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details seeTable 129.
 There are no associated commands.
 Outputs: Table 130 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx 67NQ L1. Line 1 remote protection receipt. Indicates that the line 1 remote
protection signal has been received.
 TPRx 67NQ L2. Line 2 remote protection receipt. Indicates that the line 2 remote

User Manual 199
 GSR 67NQ L1. Line 1 security signal loss reception. Indicates that the line 1
security signal loss has been received.
 GSR 67NQ L2. Line 2 security signal loss reception. Indicates that the line 2
 TPTx 67NQ. Dispatch of remote protection. Indicates that the transmission of the
remote protection signal has been activated.
 ECHO 67NQ. Dispatch of ECHO. Indicates that the dispatch of the ECHO signal has
been activated.
 STOP 67NQ. Activating of stop signal. The directional blocking scheme indicates
that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to indicate that
TPTxis not being sent.
 WI 67NQ Trip. Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have
been met during the configured time. There are independent signals for each
phase and a general signal for certain phases.
 Teleprotection 67NQ Trip. Remote protection trip. Indicates that a remote
protection trip has been produced.
 Weak infeed phase 67NQ. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met
in at least one phase.
 Permissive 67NQ Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been
activated.
 Block Inverted Current 67NQ. Indicates that current inversion block has been
activated.
 Memory Inverted Current 67NQ: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that
current inversion block memorization has been activated.
 85_L1_END_perm_GSL_67NQ. End of permission due to security signal loss in line
1.
 85_L2_END_perm_GSL_67NQ. End of permission due to security signal loss in line
2.
 Teleprotection 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the remote protection
function is enabled. If the "Scheme type" setting is selected as "Step Trip", it
means that remote protection is disabled. Any other option means that it is
enabled.
 ECHO 67NQ Status. Indicates whether or not the ECHO function is enabled.
 Weak infeed 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is
enabled.

User Manual 200
Table 130 Remote protection scheme outputs.

TPRx 67NQ L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx 67NQ L2 ProRx2 stVal
GSR 67NQ L1 GSL1Rx stVal
GSR 67NQ L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx 67NQ ProTx stVal
ECHO 67NQ Echo stVal
STOP 67NQ STOPTx stVal
27WI 67NQ Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI 67NQ Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI 67NQ Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI 67NQ Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ Trip Op stVal
Weak Infeed Phase 67NQ StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive 67NQ Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current 67NQ RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current 67NQ MBlkInvDir stVal
85_L1_END_perm_GSL_67NQ GSL1End stVal
85_L2_END_perm_GSL_67NQ GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ status TpSt stVal
ECHO 67NQ Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed 67NQ status WeiOpSt stVal
3.13.1.2 Permissive underreach

It causes an instantaneous remote protection trip upon the receipt of the remote
protection signal (TPRIx), together with the pick up of overcurrent unit 2, as long as
the reverse memorization of unit 3 is not activated (Memory Inverted Current). It is
used to accelerate the trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one
end of the line will see the fault in zone 1. If a terminal sees the fault in zone 1
and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being inside the
line between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees
it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in zone 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip,
send the trip permission signal (TPTx) to the other end while zone 1 is activated. The
terminal which detects the fault in zone 2 generates an instantaneous trip with the
receipt of the remote protection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of a unit
in zone 2 as long as zone 4 is not activated.

User Manual 201
Figure 93 Permissive Underreach Logic Diagram
Figure 93 shows the permissive underreach protection scheme. This scheme is used to
analyse how the protection devices will act in the event of three faults: F1, F2 and
F3:
Figure 94 Fault Types
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and
sending a permission signal to protection B. Protection B sees the fault in zone 2
and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in zone 2 and will
receive protection A's permission command.
 Fault F2: The two protection devices see the fault in zone 1, causing a high-speed
trip. Furthermore, redundant commands are given by the communication channels.
 Fault F3: None of the protection devices will set off a fast trip. Protection A
sees the fault in zone 2 but B does not see the fault in the line to protect, not
sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action in zone 2 will
take place in zone 2 time.
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the
logic by disabling this function. In this case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set
permanently to 0.

User Manual 202
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, checks must be made to
ensure that in the event on any fault in any point in the line, at least the
protection of one of the ends is detect in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of

them from the TPRxof the other two ends. See Figure 91 Reception of Remote Protection
in Double Lines.
3.13.1.3 Permissive overreach

It produces an instantaneous remote protection trip upon the reception of the remote
protection signal (TPRx), together with the pick up of overcurrent unit 2, as long as
the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both

terminals see the fault in zone 2. An instantaneous trip is caused if the remote
protection signal is received, together with activation of a unit in zone 2 as long as
memorised zone 4 is not activated. The remote protection signal is dispatched upon the
activation of the zone 2 units, without detection of a reverse fault (Memory Inverted
Current).
Figure 95 Permissive Overreach Logic Diagram
Figure 95 shows the permissive overreach protection scheme. This scheme is used to
F3:
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1(PIOC1 or GPIOC1), causing an
instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to protection B, given that it
sees the fault in zone 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B
sets off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a
permission order from protection A. Protection B will also sent a permission signal
to protection A but it has already instantaneously tripped in zone 1.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to
B, which sees the fault backwards. When A does not receive the permission signal
from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2 time. Protection B receives the
permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in unit 3 (PIOC3 or GPIOC3) it will normally be eliminated in zone 4 time.

User Manual 203
3.13.1.4 Directional unblock

Boosted remote protection trip with the activation of the overcurrent unit 2 if the
unblock signal (TPRx) is received or if the channel loss signal (GSLRx) is received
during the security signal loss time ("GSL Minimum time (ms)" or LoGMinTmms). As of
the activation of the security channel loss signal, a "GSL Maximum time (ms)"
(LoGMaxTmms) milliseconds window is opened. During this period, a trip may be produced
if the GSLRxsignal remains active during the set time "GSL Maximum time (ms)" without
the reception of TPRx.
Following the elapse of the "GSL Maximum time (ms)" the, security channel loss signal
will cease to have an effect on the remote protection trip.
Once the security signal has been recovered, a "GSL Drop out time (ms)" (LoGRepTmms)
repositioning time must elapse before restarting the previous logic in the event of
the security channel being lost once more.
Directional unblocking is used in overreach schemes. A security signal is permanently

sent. If overreach unit 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) acts, the security signal is substituting
for an unblocking signal.
An instantaneously trip will by caused by remote protection trip with the activation
of unit 2 if the unblock signal (TPRx) is received or if the communication channel
(GSLRx) is lost, the channel loss signal (GSLRx) channel lost signal will only be
received during the security signal loss time (LoGMinTmms).
As of the activation of the security channel loss signal, a "Maximum time SGL(ms)"
window is opened. During this period, a trip may be produced if the GSLRxsignal
remains active during the set time (LoGMinTmms) without the reception of TPRx.
Following the elapse of the SGL(LoGMaxTmms) time, the security channel loss signal
will cease to have an effect on the remote protection trip. It is therefore imperative
that LoGMinTmms time be programmed with a value inferior to the "Maximum time SGL
(ms)" (LoGMaxTmms) in order that the loss of the security signal activates the trip.
Once the security signal has been recovered, "Reposition time SGL(ms)"(LoGRepTmms)
must elapse before restarting the previous logic in the event of the security channel
being lost once more.
Figure 96 Treatment of Line 1 channel loss signals

User Manual 204
Figure 98 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This scheme is used to
F3:
Figure 99 Directional Unblocking Protection

User Manual 205
N.B.: The signals received in GSLRx and TPRx directional blocking can only be received
with values (active, active), (active, inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can
never be (inactive, active) because the transmitter/receiver that sends the signals,
when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals SGR and TPR and when
there is no communication, gives SGR but not TPR.
The GSLRxsignal is active in 2 cases:
 When the security signal is lost or

 When TPRxis received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It
behaves in the same way as in the case of overreaching.
The GSLRxsignal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.
Table 131 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
1 1 1 Guard channel is not lost and there is fault. GSLRx signal
becomes a non-blocking signal (GSLRx = 1).
1 0 Time Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is
window fault.
When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a
time window during which it can produce GSLRx shot if the
signal remains active for the programmed time (TPSG) without
receipt of TPRIx
0 1 It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because
there is communication
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of three faults:
F1, F2 and F3:
changing the security signal to an unblocking signal given that it sees the fault
in zone 2 (zone 2 encompasses zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and
when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the
security channel is lost, when protection B's zone 2 is activated, it will speed up
its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time programmed for
"security signal loss".
trip.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip
given that protection B sees the fault in zone 4 and therefore will not change the
security signal for an unblocking signal.
3.13.1.5 Directional block

An instantaneous remote protection trip with the activation of the overcurrent unit 2
if the TPRIx signal is not received following the elapse of the block time (BlkTmms)
and no fault is detected backwards (in zone 3 (Memory Inverted Current).
The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a reverse fault is detected (Memory Inverted
Current).
A channel interruption signal (STOP 67NQ) is activated is a forward fault is detected

(overcurrent units 1 and 2) without the detection of a fault in the overcurrent unit 3
(Memory Inverted Current).
The TPTx stops being sent when the "TPTx Blocking input" is activated.
The “TP Trip Block” input blocks the "Teleprotection Trip 67NQ" output signal.

User Manual 206
In order to add functions to the overreach or blocking units, the “67NQ permissive
units" and/or "67NQ blocking units" can be programmed and a logic can be sent to the
corresponding logic signal with the startups of the desired units.
This scheme is based on providing the distance protection with a reverse unit and
sending a blocking signal to the other end if this unit acts. In this way, a fast trip
is caused by unit 1 if PIOC1 or GPIOC1 are activated, a blocking command is not
received (signal TPRIx) once blocking time (BlkTmms) has elapsed and the fault in unit
3 is not seen (PIOC3 o GPIOC3) (Memory Inverted Current).
Figure 100 Directional Block Scheme
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to
be received and is programmable by the user. The transmission time must be as low as
possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
A stop channel signal (STOP 67NQ) is detected if a forward fault is detected (unit 1
or unit 2) without the detection of a fault in unit 3 (Memory Inverted Current).
The Figure 100 shows the directional blocking protection scheme. This scheme is used
to analyse how the protection devices will act in the event of three faults: F1, F2
and F3:

User Manual 207
Figure 101 Directional Blocking Protection
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip.
Protection B detects the fault in zone 2 and once the blocking time has elapsed, a
trip will be caused given that a blocking command is not received from A since A
does not detect the fault in zone 4.
trip.
 Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does cause a fast trip given
that protection B sees the fault in zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking
signal to A.
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit forward (for example,
B's zone 4) of each end with the overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 4),
these being adjusted so that the reach of the reverse unit is always greater than the
underreach's.
Figure 102 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit.
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication
channel and has the disadvantage of possibly causing untimely trips if the
communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the remote protection signal is
transmitted via the line protected by the carried wave and the diminishing of the
signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that receipt at the other
end of the line cannot always be ensured.
3.13.1.6 ECHO
It is used together with overreach permissive schemes by acting on the remote
protection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO 67NQ signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the
remote protection (TPTx) signal with any of the following conditions:

User Manual 208
 The ones corresponding to the overreach permissive scheme.

 If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time
to elapse).
It is used together wish overreaching permissive schemes in cases in which one end of
the line is not fed (Figure 104 end B) or is weakly fed (Figure 105 end B). In the
event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or unfed end, the distance unit of
this end of the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be caused,
nor will the permission signal be sent to the other end of the line. Hence, since the
permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed end of the line will not
speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite
end, the Echo function returns the TPRIx signal received to the remote terminal if it
does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO 67NQ) will be instantaneous if the circuit
breaker is open and will suffer a delay (EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply.
This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there is a higher fault
detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the
fault current. This delay is usually set to approximately 40ms.
ECHO 67NQ is a pulse during time EcTmms, which is normally set at approximately 50 ms,
thus assuring that the signal received is even recognised with different action times
of the protection equipment at ends of the lines and with different response times of
the transmission equipment.

User Manual 209
Figure 103 Echo Scheme and Weak Infeed
Figure 104 Protection in the Echo Logic, with Circuit breaker in B Open

User Manual 210
Figure 104 shows ECHO Logic Sample, with Circuit breaker in B Open This scheme will be
used to analyse how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with
the basic permissive overreach scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously
trips and sends a permission signal to B. End B is open so the fault is cleared.
 Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to
B. When the protection device in B detects that the circuit breaker is open, it
will resend the permission signal to protection A without delay. When protection A
detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will
speed up its trip.
Figure 105 Protection in the Echo Logic and Weak Infeed
Figure 105 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse
how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic
permissive overreach scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip
instantaneously and send a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being
weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it
will send back to A with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit
breaker at end B will remain closed.
 Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in unit 2 and sends a permission signal to
B. The protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it
receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the programmed delay.
When protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal,
it will speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.
3.13.1.7 Weak infeed (27WI)

This is a complement to ECHO 67NQ, where if ECHO 67NQ conditions are met, with the
circuit breaker closed and undervoltage in at least one of the phases, a trip is
produced.
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and
is not dependent on the undervoltage units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & SGL.
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 105 end B) with the echo logic, as seen
in the previous section, the trip at the strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the
weakly fed end remains closed. This logic permits the opening of this end of the line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the
ECHO function).
 The circuit breaker is closed.

User Manual 211
 Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The
settings recommended are 70%Vn for the voltage.
Figure 106 Protection in the Weakly infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 106 shows the weakly-fed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used
to analyse how the protection devices act in the event of F1 faults with the basic
B. The protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault and when it
receives the permission signal, it will send it to A with the setting time. When
protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it
will speed up its trip. When protection B detects the fulfilment of the ECHO
conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it will
give the trip command.
3.13.1.8 Inverse directional block

It delays the remote protection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the
remote terminal time to clear the permission signal (TPTx) following a change in the
flow direction due to the breaking of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current
flow which is caused when the circuit breaker is opened at one end of the faulty line
when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the reversal of the
protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent
distance to the fault. The time between the repositioning of the distance elements and
the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is blocking type, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block
delay time(ms)", the trip blocking for a time after detecting a change in the fault's
direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and the emission of the
permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault
(backwards to forward).
The overcurrent unit 2 signal is used with a memorization time "Current Reversal
Blocking(ms)" (RvATmms), which enables the "Memory Inverted Current"signal to be used
in the rest of the schemes.
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and
when circuit breaker K is opened to clear this fault:
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
 When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 107.1, protection K will detect the
fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. In this
situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the permission
signal to J and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
 When K opens, the current's flow is inverted as can be seen in Figure 107.2. In
this new situation, G will detect the fault backwards and H will detect it in zone
2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous. Hence, H could trip
before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the remote protection

User Manual 212
trip is delayed for a number of cycles, to give the remote terminal time to remove
the permission signal.
Figure 107 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
 When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 106, protection K will detect the
fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. When H detects
the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it does not send the
TPRIx signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone
2.
2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To prevent this, H
will continue to detect the fault backwards for a period of time, allowing time to
receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of
the line (typically 3 cycles) + the reset time of the communication channel (1 cycle)
+ the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1 cycle) = 5
cycles.
Figure 108 Inverse Directional Block Scheme

User Manual 213
3.13.2 Z Remote Protection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast,
selective and reliable with the aim of not jeopardising the stability of the electrical
system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use remote protection systems
associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection
device is equipped with a remote protection system for completely protecting the line
with high-speed protection.
They are based upon the use of remote protection signals between both end terminals of
the line. The effect upon the output relays’ operation is determined according to the
signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other terminal.
ETP->
Protección Protección
x1 PSG-> u1
x2 u1 x1 u2
x3 u3
RTP->
A B
RPSG
RTP
f(x1...xn)
x1 f(x1...xn)
u1
u1
x1
x2
u2
Desacoplador Desacoplador
 TPTx: remote protection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx: remote protection signal received by a terminal.
 SGL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
 GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).
3.13.2.1 Introduction
3.13.2.1.1 Fault Detection Units
Teleprotection Z scheme will operate on the distance unit 21 Zone 1 and Zone 2 (forward),
and zone 4 (backwards). Mho and quad are both affected.
 Zone 1 (forward): Unit 21 zone 1. (PDIS1)

 Zone 2 (forward): Unit 21 zone 2. (PDIS2)
 Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 21 zone 4. (PDIS4)
3.13.2.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
 Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault bay is outside the
zone to be protected. A relay can trip on an overreach zone if, following a waiting
time, the blocking signal has not been received.
 Permission schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the
overreach zone. The additional ECHO, weak infeed and Current Reversal
Blockingschemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following

characteristics for each of them: In the case of an internal fault in the protected line
and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled for
tripping, whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes,
if there is an external fault and a communication channel fault, relay can to trip.

User Manual 214
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in
the case of carrier waves, it is best to use Current Reversal Blocking scheme, since
internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it is best to use
blocking schemes in weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to
permissive schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes,
given that the latter involve slightly longer fault clear times, due to the security
waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
 Step trip (none)

 Permissive overreach (Overreaching POTT)
 Permissive underreach (Underreaching PUTT)
 Directional blocking scheme
 Directional comparison unblocking scheme
Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:
 Direct transfer trip

 Echo
 Weak infeed
 Current Reversal Blocking
3.13.2.1.3 Flexible Units
The signals that activate the dispatch of the remote protection between the different
overcurrent units can be configured for all the schemes. Two settings are included - "Z
Permissive Units "and "Z Block Units" which enable both logic inputs to be carried with
the startups of the desired units. In this way, the signals carried to the schemes can be
made flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to
connect any logic input to them:
 Faults forward ("Z Permissive Units").

 Faults backward ("Z Block Units").
3.13.2.1.4 Input Signals
The following signals are used in the schemes:
 TPTx_21 remote protection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx_21. Differentiation is made between both. TPRIxis the remote protection input
received by a terminal.
 TPRx_21Follows the TPRIx21 input to become activated, but memorises the input for
time RsRTPTmms to deactivate itself. If RsRTPTmms is equal to zero, then TPRx21
coincides with input TPRIx 21. TPRxis used in the remote protection schemes.
Figure 109 Remote Protection Reception
 GSLRx_21. Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established
between the two remote protection devices is inactive

User Manual 215
3.13.2.1.5 Double Lines

In the case of double lines, the signals take into consideration the one received by each
of the lines.
Figure 110 Reception of Remote Protection in Double Lines
Esquemas permisivos
Blocking Schemes
3.13.2.1.6 Settings
The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
 Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
 TPRx Drop out time(ms). The time during which the remote protection receipt input
is memorised (TPRx).
 Block delay time (ms). Additional blocking signal timeout.
 GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to permit trips.
 GSL Maximum time(ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of
security signal is enabled.
 GSL Drop out time(ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security
channel.
 ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.
 ECHO pulse time(ms). The duration of the ECHO output signal pulse.
 ECHO Blocking time(ms). Time after the deactivation of signal Z_FW during which it
is considered as being active.
 ECHO delay time(ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the
ECHO signal must be met.
 Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change
in the fault's direction. (Inverse direction memorisation).
 Current rev pickup t. (ms) Inverse direction memorization time.
 Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.

User Manual 216
 Weak infeed threshold (V). Voltage threshold for the consideration of weak infeed.
 TPRx_21 line 2. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt of
the line 2's remote protection.
 TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the remote protection
trip.
 TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking
of the TPTX signal transmission.
Figure 111 TPTx Block Scheme
 ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO startup for
 Block ECHO(logic input). Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO
blocking for remote protection schemes.
 Z Permissive Units. Permits the selection of an alternative startup signal for
zone 2: selects the signal which when active, indicates the activation of the Z
startup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is configured, Z functions
are not taken into consideration.
 Z Block Units. Permits the selection of an alternative startup signal for backwards
zone: selects the signal which when active, indicates the activation of the Z
startup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is configured, Z functions
are not taken into consideration.
 Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking
of the weak infeed scheme.

User Manual 217
Table 132 Remote protection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 4 1 Int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 Int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop out time (ms) 0 400 10 Int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 400 10 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1 1 Int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 10000 10 Int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 200 10 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev pickup t. (ms) 0 1 1 Int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 10000 10 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0 1 1 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _21 line 1 0,1 200 0,01 Int32
LogInRTP2 TPRx _21 line 2 Int32
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_21 line 1 Int32
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_21 line 2 Int32
LogInBl TP Trip Block Int32
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input Int32
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value Int32
LogInECOBl Block ECHO Int32
LogInAlU Z Permissive Units Int32
LogInBlU Z Block Units Int32
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking Int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 1 1 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
It has independent settings and outputs:
 Node PROT/ZOCPSCH1
132.
 There are no commands
 Outputs: Table 133 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx Z L1. Line 1 remote protection receipt. Indicates that the line 1 remote
 TPRx Z L2. Line 2 remote protection receipt. Indicates that the line 2 remote
 GSR Z L1. Line 1 security signal loss reception. Indicates that the line 1
 GSR Z L2 Line 2 security signal loss reception. Indicates that the line 2
 TPTx Z. Dispatch of remote protection. Indicates that the transmission of the
remote protection signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z. Dispatch of ECHO. Indicates that the dispatch of the ECHO signal has
been activated.

User Manual 218
 STOP Z. Activating of stop signal. The directional blocking scheme indicates

that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used to indicate that
TPTxis not being sent.
 27WI Z Trip Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have
been met during the configured time.
 27WI Z Phase X. Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have
been met during the configured time. There are independent signals for each
phase.
 Teleprotection Z Trip. Remote protection trip. Indicates that a remote
protection trip has been produced.
 Weak Infeed Phase Z. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met in
at least one phase.
 Permissive Z Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been
activated.
 Block Inverted Current Z. Indicates that current inversion block has been
activated.
 Memory Inverted Current Z: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that
current inversion block memorization has been activated.
 85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 1.
 85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 2.
 Teleprotection Z status. Indicates whether or not the remote protection function
is enabled. If the "Scheme type" setting is selected as "Step Trip", it means
that remote protection is disabled. Any other option means that it is enabled.
 ECHO Z Status Indicates whether or not the ECHO Z function is enabled.
 Weak infeed Z status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is
enabled.
Table 133 Teleprotection schemes signals

TPRx Z L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx Z L2 ProRx2 stVal
GSR Z L1 GSL1Rx stVal
GSR Z L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx Z ProTx stVal
ECHO Z Echo stVal
STOP Z STOPTx stVal
27WI Z Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI Z Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI Z Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI Z Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection Z Trip Op stVal
Weak Infeed Phase Z StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive Z Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current Z RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current Z MBlkInvDir stVal
85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL1End stVal
85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection Z status TpSt stVal
ECHO Z Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed Z status WeiOpSt stVal

User Manual 219
3.13.2.2 Permissive underreach

It causes an instantaneous remote protection trip upon the receipt of the remote
protection signal (TPRIx), together with the pick up of zone 2, as long as the reverse
memorization of zone 4 is not activated (21 memory inverted current). It is used to
accelerate the trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one
end of the line will see the fault in zone 1. If a terminal sees the fault in zone 1
and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being inside the
line between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees
it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in zone 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip,
sends the trip permission signal (TPTx) to the other end while zone 1 is activated.
The terminal which detects the fault in zone 2 generates an instantaneous trip with
the receipt of the remote protection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of a
unit in zone 2 as long as zone 4 is not activated.
Figure 112 Permissive Underreach Logic Diagram
Figure 113 shows the permissive underreach protection scheme. This scheme is used to
F3:
Figure 113 Fault examples
III
II
Protección Protección
x1 u1
x2 u1 x1 u2
x3 u3
A B
F1 F2 I F3
II
III

User Manual 220
sending a permission signal to protection B. Protection B sees the fault in zone 2
and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in zone 2 and will
receive protection A's permission command.
 Fault F3: None of the protection devices will set off a fast trip. Protection A
sees the fault in zone 2 but B does not see the fault in the line to protect, not
sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action in zone 2 will
take place in zone 2 time.
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the
logic by disabling this function. In this case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set
permanently to 0.
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, checks must be made to
ensure that in the event on any fault in any point in the line, at least the
protection of one of the ends is detect in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of

them from the TPRxof the other two ends. (See Figure 91 Reception of Remote Protection
in Double Lines)
3.13.2.3 Permissive overreach

It produces an instantaneous remote protection trip upon the reception of the remote
protection signal (TPRx), together with the pick up of overcurrent in zone 2, as long
as the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both

terminals see the fault in zone 2. An instantaneous trip is caused if the remote
protection signal is received, together with activation of a unit in zone 2 as long as
memorised zone 4 is not activated.
The remote protection signal is dispatched upon the activation of the zone 2 units,
without detection of a reverse fault (Memory Inverted Current).
Figure 114 Permissive Overreach Logic Diagram
Figure 114 shows the permissive overreach protection scheme. This scheme is used to
F3:

User Manual 221
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1(PDIS1), causing an instantaneous
trip and sending a permission signal to protection B, given that it sees the fault
in zone 2 (PDIS2) (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B sets off a high-speed trip
when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a permission order from protection A.
Protection B will also send a permission signal to protection A but it has already
instantaneously tripped in zone 1.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to
B, which sees the fault backwards. When A does not receive the permission signal
from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2 time. Protection B receives the
permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in zone 3 (PDIS3) it will normally be eliminated in zone 3 time.
3.13.2.4 Directional unblock

Boosted remote protection trip with the activation of the overcurrent unit 2 if the
unblock signal (TPRx) is received or if the channel loss signal (GSLRx) is received
during the security signal loss time (LoGMinTmms). As of the activation of the
security channel loss signal, a LoGMaxTmms milliseconds window is opened. During this
period, a trip may be produced if the GSLRxsignal remains active during the set time
(TPSG) without the reception of TPRx.
Following the elapse of the LoGMaxTmms time, security channel loss signal will cease
to have an effect on the remote protection trip.
Once the security signal has been recovered, a LoGRepTmms repositioning time must
elapse before restarting the previous logic in the event of the security channel being
lost once more.
Directional unblocking is used in overreach schemes. A security signal is permanently

sent. If overreach zone 2 (PDIS2) acts, the security signal is substituting for an
unblocking signal
An instantaneously trip will by caused by remote protection trip with the activation
of overcurrent zone 2 if the unblock signal (TPRx) is received or if the communication
channel (GSLRx) is lost, the channel loss signal (GSLRx) channel lost signal will only
be received during the security signal loss time (LoGMinTmms)
As of the activation of the security channel loss signal, a "Maximum time SGL(ms)"
window is opened. During this period, a trip may be produced if the GSLRxsignal
remains active during the set time (LoGMinTmms) without the reception of TPRx.
Following the elapse of the SGL(LoGMaxTmms) time, the security channel loss signal
will cease to have an effect on the remote protection trip. It is therefore imperative
that LoGMinTmms time be programmed with a value inferior to the "Maximum time SGL
(ms)" (LoGMaxTmms) in order that the loss of the security signal activates the trip.
Once the security signal has been recovered, "Reposition time SGL(ms)"(LoGRepTmms)
must elapse before restarting the previous logic in the event of the security channel
being lost once more.

User Manual 222
Figure 117 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme

User Manual 223
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This scheme is used to
F3:
Figure 118 Directional Unblocking Protection
N.B.: The signals received in GSLRx and TPRx directional blocking can only be received
with values (active, active), (active, inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can
never be (inactive, active) because the transmiter/receiver that sends the signals,
when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals SGR and TPR and when
there is no communication, gives SGR but not TPR.
The GSLRxsignal is active in 2 cases:
 When the security signal is lost or

 When TPRxis received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It
behaves in the same way as in the case of overreaching.
The GSLRxsignal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.
Table 134 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
Guard channel is not lost and there is fault. GSLRx signal becomes a non-
1 1 1
blocking signal (GSLRx = 1).
Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is fault.
Time When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a time window during
1 0
window which it can produce GSLRx shot if the signal remains active for the
programmed time (TPSG) without receipt of TPRIx
It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because there is
0 1
communication
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of three faults:
F1, F2 and F3:
changing the security signal to an unblocking signal given that it sees the fault
in zone 2 (zone 2 encompasses zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and
when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the
security channel is lost, when protection B's zone 2 is activated, it will speed up
its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time programmed for
"security signal loss".
trip.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip
given that protection B sees the fault in zone 4 and therefore will not change the
security signal for an unblocking signal.

User Manual 224
3.13.2.5 Directional block

An instantaneous remote protection trip with the activation of the overcurrent zone 2
if the TPRIx signal is not received following the elapse of "Block delay time
(ms)"(BlkTmms) and no fault is detected backwards in zone 3 (Memory Inverted Current).
The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a reverse fault is detected (Memory Inverted
Current).
A channel interruption signal (STOP Z) is activated is a forward fault is detected

(distance zones 1 and 2) without the detection of a fault in the overcurrent zone 3
(Memory Inverted Current).
The TPTx stops being sent when the "TPTx Blocking input" is activated.
The “TPTx Blocking input” input blocks the "Teleprotection Z Trip" output signal.
In order to add functions to the overreach or blocking units, the “Z Permissive Units"
and/or " Z Block Units" can be programmed and a logic signal can be sent to the
corresponding logic signal with the startups of the desired units.
This scheme is based on providing the distance protection with a reverse unit and
sending a blocking signal to the other end if this unit acts. In this way, a fast trip
is caused by zone 1 if PDIS1 are activated, a blocking command is not received (signal
TPRIx) once the "Block delay time (ms)"(BlkTmms) has elapsed and the fault in zone 3
is not seen (PDIS3) (Memory Inverted Current).
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to
be received and is programmable by the user. The transmission time must be as low as
possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
A stop channel signal (STOP Z) is detected if a forward fault is detected (zone 1 or

zone 2) without the detection of a fault in unit 3 (Memory Inverted Current).
The Figure 121 shows the directional blocking protection scheme. This scheme is used
to analyse how the protection devices will act in the event of three faults: F1, F2
and F3:
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip.
Protection B detects the fault in zone 2 and once the blocking time has elapsed, a
trip will be caused given that a blocking command is not received from A since A
does not detect the fault in zone 4.
trip.
 Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does cause a fast trip given
that protection B sees the fault in zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking
signal to A.
Figure 119 Directional blocking example
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit forward (for example,
B's zone 4) of each end with the overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 4),

User Manual 225
these being adjusted so that the reach of the reverse unit is always greater than the
underreach's.
Figure 120 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication
channel and has the disadvantage of possibly causing untimely trips if the
communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the remote protection signal is
transmitted via the line protected by the carried wave and the diminishing of the
signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that receipt at the other
end of the line cannot always be ensured.
Figure 121Directional Block Scheme

User Manual 226
3.13.2.6 ECHO
It is used together with overreach permissive schemes by acting on the remote
protection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO Z signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the
remote protection (TPTx) signal with any of the following conditions:
 The ones corresponding to the overreach permissive scheme.

 If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time
to elapse).
Figure 122 Echo and weak infeed scheme

User Manual 227
It is used together wish overreaching permissive schemes in cases in which one end of
the line is not fed (Figure 104 end B) or is weakly fed (Figure 105 end B). In the
event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or unfed end, the distance unit of
this end of the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be caused,
nor will the permission signal be sent to the other end of the line. Hence, since the
permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed end of the line will not
speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite
end, the Echo function returns the TPRIx signal received to the remote terminal if it
does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO Z) will be instantaneous if the circuit
breaker is open and will suffer a delay (EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply.
This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there is a higher fault
detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the
fault current. This delay is usually set to approximately 40ms.
"ECHO Z" is a pulse that during "ECHO pulse time (ms)" (EcTmms), which is normally set
at approximately 50 ms, thus assuring that the signal received is even recognised with
different action times of the protection equipment at ends of the lines and with
different response times of the transmission equipment.
Figure 123 Echo logic protection with breaker open in B
Figure 122 ECHO Logic Sample, with Circuit Breaker in B Open This scheme will be used
to analyse how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the
basic permissive overreach scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously
trips and sends a permission signal to B. End B is open so the fault is cleared.
B. When the protection device in B detects that the circuit breaker is open, it
will resend the permission signal to protection A without delay. When protection A
detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will
speed up its trip.
Figure 124 Echo and weak infeed example

User Manual 228
Figure 122 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse
how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip
instantaneously and send a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being
weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it
will send back to A with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit
breaker at end B will remain closed.
B. The protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it
receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the programmed delay.
When protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal,
it will speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.
This is a complement to ECHO Z, where if ECHO Z conditions are met, with the circuit
breaker closed and undervoltage in at least one of the phases, a trip is produced
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and
is not dependent on the undervoltage units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & SGL.
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 105 end B) with the echo logic, as seen
in the previous section, the trip at the strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the
weakly fed end remains closed. This logic permits the opening of this end of the line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the
ECHO function).
 The circuit breaker is closed
 Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The
settings recommended are 70%Vn for the voltage.
Figure 125 Protection in the Weak Infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 106 shows the weakly-fed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used
to analyse how the protection devices act in the event of F1 faults with the basic
B. The protection in B, being Weak Infeed, will not detect the fault and when it
receives the permission signal, it will send it to A with the setting time. When
protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and has received the permission signal, it
will speed up its trip. When protection B detects the fulfilment of the ECHO
conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it will
give the trip command.

User Manual 229
3.13.2.7 Inverse directional block

It delays the remote protection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the
remote terminal time to clear the permission signal (TPTx) following a change in the
flow direction due to the breaking of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current
flow which is caused when the circuit breaker is opened at one end of the faulty line
when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the reversal of the
protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent
distance to the fault. The time between the repositioning of the distance elements and
the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is blocking type, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block
delay time(ms"), the trip blocking for a time after detecting a change in the fault's
direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and the emission of the
permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault
(backwards to forward).
The overcurrent zone 4 signal is used with a memorization time "Current Reversal
Blocking(ms)" (RvATmms), which enables the "Memory Inverted Current" signal to be used
in the rest of the schemes.
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and
when circuit breaker K is opened to clear this fault:
Figure 126 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
 When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 107.1, protection K will detect the
fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. In this
situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the permission
signal to J and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous. Hence, H could trip
before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the remote protection
trip is delayed for a number of cycles, to give the remote terminal time to remove
the permission signal.
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
 When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 106, protection K will detect the
fault in zone 1, J will either detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. When H detects
the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it does not send the

User Manual 230
TPRIx signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone
2.
2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To prevent this, H
will continue to detect the fault backwards for a period of time, allowing time to
receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of
the line (typically 3 cycles) + the reset time of the communication channel (1 cycle)
+ the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1 cycle) = 5
cycles.
Figure 127 Inverse Directional Block Scheme
3.13.3 Direct trip

This additional remote protection scheme causes a single-pole or three-pole trip upon
the receipt of the remote protection signal, regardless of the status of the
protection functions.
In order to operate correctly, it must be enabled. Furthermore, a digital input must

be programmed as a direct trip, otherwise it will effectively be disabled
The reception signals associated to the direct trip are:
 Direct trip pole A, B or C: Causes an external single-pole trip in the

corresponding pole.
 Direct trip pole ABC: Causes the command to open as well as an external three-pole
trip.
These transferred trips provoke the start of the reclosing cycle when the remote
protection closure is permitted, i.e., they are considered the same as the rest of the
remote protection trips.
Any digital signal can be used as an output signal for signalling a direct trip to the
other extreme, either via the programming of the digital outputs or via the
programmable logics.
If a trip is received by two or more poles, it is considered to be a three-pole trip.
A particular feature of the scheme is the direct underreach trip, in which the input
signals are generic but unit 1's signals zone used as the output signals.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 137.
 Enabled: Enables the direct trip function:

 Direct trip - Pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt
of the pole A direct trip.
 Direct trip - Pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt
of the pole B direct trip.

User Manual 231
 Direct trip - Pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the receipt
of the pole C direct trip.
 Direct trip - 3 Pole ABC. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the
receipt of the pole ABC direct trip.
This unit's settings and outputs are as follows:
 PROT/ZPDTS1 logical node

137.
 No commands are available.
 Direct Trip Signal A. Indicates that the pole A direct trip signal has been
received.
 Direct Trip Signal B. Indicates that the pole B direct trip signal has been
received.
 Direct Trip Signal C. Indicates that the pole C direct trip signal has been
received.
 Direct Trip Signal ABC. Indicates that the pole ABC direct trip signal has
been received.
Table 135 Direct trips settings

DTEna Enabled NO / YES
LogInDTA Direct trip - pole A Int32
LogInDTB Direct trip - pole B Int32
LogInDTC Direct trip - pole C Int32
LogInDT Direct trip - 3 pole ABC Int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 136 Direct trips outputs

Direct Trip Signal A DTTRx phsA
Direct Trip Signal B DTTRx phsB
Direct Trip Signal C DTTRx phsC
Direct Trip Signal ABC DTTRx general

User Manual 232
Figure 128 Direct Trip Scheme
3.13.4 External trips

This function allows you to program any signal as an external trip. It can be one pole
or three poles trip. It doesn´t have enabled setting, it is enough the configuration
of any of the logical inputs.
It also provides a setting that performs a mask that allows it to produce a general
trip. In the case the general trip is not allowed, it can be used to start the
recloser or the breaker failure (50BF) by external cause. There is another setting for
this unit to indicate if it can be reclosed, if it is allowed, that is, it works as
the rest of the trips.
Receiving two poles trips it generates three pole trip.
 External trip - pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there
is an external A pole trip.
 External trip - pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there
is an external B pole trip.
 External trip - pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there
is an external C pole trip.
 External trip - 3 pole. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there
is an external three-pole trip.
 External trip - 1 pole. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there
is an external single-pole trip.
This unit's settings and outputs are in the PROT/ZPEXT1 logical node:
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables (see Table 137).
 No commands are available.
 External trip pole A. Indicates the activation of an external A pole trip.
 External trip pole B. Indicates the activation of an external B pole trip.
 External trip pole C. Indicates the activation of an external C pole trip.
 External trip 3 pole. Indicates the activation of an external three-pole
trip.

User Manual 233
 External trip 1 pole. Indicates the activation of an external single-pole

trip.
Table 137 External trips settings

LogInExTA External trip - pole A Int32
LogInExTB External trip - pole B Int32
LogInExTC External trip - pole C Int32
LogInExABC External trip - 3 pole Int32
LogInExTMP External trip - 1 pole Int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 138 External trips outputs

External trip pole A ExtOp phsA
External trip pole B ExtOp phsB
External trip pole C ExtOp phsC
External trip 3 pole ExtOp general
External trip 1 pole ExtMOp general
3.13.5 Teleprotection serial communication

The signals used by the teleprotection unit can be sent in the differential
communication message (see the chapter 3.1.1 Differential protection communications).
3.13.6 Trip logic

Each protection unit has a mask that allows it to produce a general trip:
 If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.)

and the corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the trip is sent to the general trip
output.
 If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the "direct trip" signal is
not received. In this way, the recloser is independent of any trips used for
signalling.
 If the recloser is out of service, all the units programmed to produce a general
trip will issue a trip.
In the event of a specific trip failing to activate the “general trip”, the fault
report is not generated.
If a trip is produced at the same time as another trip which activates the general
trip, all the trips are reflected in the fault report: those which go to GT and those
which do not.
The picks ups are affected in the same way as with each unit's trips. Each of the
relay’s pick ups generates a signal. This signal passes through the trip mask filter
and is included in an OR in order to generate a "General pick up" signal.

User Manual 234
3.13.6.1 One pole Trip

Depending on the fault, it allows one pole trips, that is, the open command is given
to one pole.
ZPMPT node allows the enabled of the monopolar trip. The available settings are:
 Enabled. It allows one pole trips. If it is disabled, all trips will be 3 poles
trips.
 Force three pole. Selects the signal which, when active, forces all the trip to be
three poles.
Table 139. Single Pole Trip settings

MPTEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFoTP Force three pole Int32
The output signals are:
 Single-phase tripping Status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip is activated.
 Force 3 Pole trip. It indicates that the Force three pole input is activated.
Table 140. Single Pole Trip outputs

Single-phase tripping Status StEna general
Force 3 Pole trip FoTP general
Single Pole Trip is generated when the conditions are fulfilled:
 Single Pole Trip must be enabled.

 Force three pole input must not be deactivated.
 A single pole trip must happen. It can be:
 Zone 1 Single pole trip.
 Zone 2 Single pole trip and accelerated by teleprotection. The zone 2 time
delay trips are always three poles.
 Single pole external trip.
 When the recloser is enabled, it must be in standby and the Reclose mode must be
one of the single pole recloser (1 pole, 1P/3P o Dependent).
When the recloser is disabled by setting, it doesn´t affect and single Pole Trip is
generated when the other conditions are fulfilled. In that case, a reclose of an
external device is allowed.
The three poles trip is generated with all the trips that are not single pole.
3.13.6.2 General trip mask

It is independent for each of the protection units.
Indicates if this unit produces a general trip or not. The protection functions can be
enabled or disabled and can trigger a trip and/or a pick up independently of which

User Manual 235
units are to open the breaker. The general trip signal is sent to the breaker and is
configured by means of this mask.
In order, upon tripping, for a unit to activate the general trip, it must meet (see
Figure 129):
 Be enabled.
 Have its general trip mask set to YES.
 If the recloser is enabled, the unit must not be blocked by the trip
permission mask.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable its
general trip. Its reference is "GenTrip" and allows the options “NO / YES”.
Figure 129 General trip scheme
DIGITAL SIGNAL
79 in service
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 blocked
79 blocked
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 in standby
79 in stand-by
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t
DIGITAL SIGNAL Following manual closure
79 in time following Manual
Closure
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in recalim t 1
79 in TIME t 1
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 2
79 in TIME t 2
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 3
79 in TIME t 3
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in time t 4
79 in TIME t 4
DIGITAL INPUT
51-1 Trip
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT
General trip
DIGITAL INPUT
51-2 Trip
AJ 51-2->D.G.
………………………….
DIGITAL INPUT
Unit X Trip
AJ X->D.G.
Table 141 General trip (in each protection node)

GenTrip General trip YES/NO
3.13.6.3 Trip permission masks

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the
protection nodes.
This mask is used to select which trips are associated to the “general trip” (with the
recloser in service), depending on the status of the recloser.

User Manual 236
Independently of these settings, the protection units pick up and trip, activating their
corresponding signals.
The unit that is to produce the trip (activate the general trip signal) can be selected
by programming 4 trip masks peer unit and which are active in the following moments:
 Standby (supervising or reset).

 Reclaim time following manual closure.
 Reclaim time following reclosure 1, 2, 3 or 4.
 Recloser blocked (external or internal block).
If the recloser is out of service, these masks have no effect, and thus all the units
programmed to produce a general trip will issue a trip.
Each protection unit has independent masks. If a unit trips during a specific recloser
status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the
trip is sent to the general trip output. If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced
but the "direct trip" signal is not received.
Reclosure block. When selected, the trip of this unit blocks the recloser. Detailed
description in the chapter “Post-trip reclosure permission mask”.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable the
unit’s permissions. The reference is “TripPerm”. The setting is configured as a bit field
where each bit corresponds to a selection, indicating the integer value:
Bit meaning (1) Bit Value

Reclosure block 0 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 standby 1 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 blocked 2 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following reclosure 1 3 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following manual closure 7 NO / YES
An example of use with trip permissions in standby and following reclosures would be the
decimal value 122 (01111010 in binary), broken down into:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
The maximum permitted value with all permissions enabled is 255 (11111111 in binary).
Table 142 Trip permission after reclosing (each protection node)

TripPerm Trip Permission by reeng. 0 8191 1 Int32
3.14 CURRENT SUPERVISION
If the event of neutral current in the 4th transformer, a fault may be detected in at least
one of the relay input channels (adaptation transformer + internal circuitry). The absolute
value of three times the zero sequence current (calculated using the phase currents) is
compared with the current measured at the transformer, taking the phase (RTF) and neutral
(RTN) transformation ratios into account. None of the phases must exceed 1.5 times the
rated current.
The unit activates a “CT monitoring alarm signal” when the following conditions are met.
 The measurements are outside the range:

User Manual 237
|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF
0.8 < < 1.3
|IN | ∙ RTN
 The measurement ratios meet:
|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF − |IN | ∙ RTN
> 0.2
RTF
 |Ia+Ib+Ic-IN|/3>>10%·max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)+5%·Irated

 The measurement of 3 current phases is less than 1.5 times the rated current.
The settings for the configuration of the current transformer monitoring are shown in Table
143.
 Enabled: Enables the CT monitoring function.

Table 143 CT monitoring settings

CTSpvEna Enabled NO / YES enum
 PROT/CCTS1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables.
 There are no logical inputs or commands.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 CT monitoring. Indicates that the CT monitoring conditions have been met.
Table 144 CT monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
CT monitoring CTSpv general
3.15 VT SUPERVISION
The negative and zero sequence voltages are compared with the rated voltage, generating
alarm signals.
 Vn>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V0 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated
voltage.
 V2>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V2 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated
voltage.
It has no settings nor commands:
 Node GEN/LLN0

User Manual 238
Table 145 VT supervision outputs

Vn>10%Vn Supervision VnSpv stVal
V2>10%Vn Supervision V2Spv stVal

User Manual 239
BREAKER
4. BREAKER
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS
4.1.1 Breaker status

The breaker unit uses the PROT/XCBR1 and PROT/XCBR2 logical nodes (if there is more than
one breaker). The settings used for each breaker are:
 Configuration type: Indicates the breaker configuration scheme. It can be set

to “Single” or "Breaker and a Half". Available only in the XCBR1.
 Breaker type: Indicates the type of breaker employed:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the
three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of
the three poles.
 Pole failure time (ms): Indicates the time (ms) during which the difference
between the type a and type b inputs must be detected in the breaker status in
order for the failure to be registered. Although the setting is unique, it
affects the three poles.
 52a input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the
breaker status.
 52a-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the
phase A breaker status.
 52a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 52a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 52b input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the
breaker status.
 52b-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the
phase A breaker status.
 52b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 52b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 Open blocking: When active, it blocks the manual breaker open commands. The
trips are not blocked.
 Close blocking: When active, it blocks the breaker closure commands.
 Breaker open command input: When active, it generates a breaker open command.
 Close command input: When active, it generates a breaker closure command.
 52 Blocking input: When active, it indicates the breaker is blocked. It is
used in 50BF, open pole detector and recloser.
 Trip sealed: Allows the open commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the
open command is maintained after the cause of the trip has disappeared and
until the breaker is detected as open.
 Close sealed: Allows the closure commands to be enabled. When it is enabled,
the closure command is maintained after the cause of the closure has
disappeared and until the breaker is detected as closed.
 Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to
 52 Supervision: Allows breaker state supervision function.

User Manual 240
BREAKER
Table 146 Breaker status settings

BrNum Configuration type Single / Breaker and a Half enum
1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp 52 Status detection enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
FaBrTmms Pole failure time (ms) 0 10000 10 Int32
LogIn52a1 52a input Int32
LogIn52a1A 52a-Pole A Int32
LogIn52a1B 52a-Pole B Int32
LogIn52a1C 52a-Pole C Int32
LogIn52b1 52b input Int32
LogIn52b1A 52b-Pole A Int32
LogIn52b1B 52b-Pole B Int32
LogIn52b1C 52b-Pole C Int32
LogInOpBl Open blocking Int32
LogInClBl Close blocking Int32
LogIn52Op Breaker open command input Int32
LogIn52Cl Close command input Int32
LogInBlBr 52 Blocking input Int32
TrLck Trip sealed NO / YES Boolean
ClLck Close sealed NO / YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO / YES Boolean
Breaker status via digital input
The status of the general breaker and by pole is determined with the status of digital
inputs and breaker type setting. Used to determine the status of the breaker without
uncertainty and employed in functions that require the breaker’s status to be known, such
as the breaking and closure sealing logic, the recloser, etc.
The 52b status inputs take precedence over the 52a status inputs, i.e., if 52b status
inputs have been configured, the breaker status is determined by means of these inputs,
independently of the status of the 52a inputs.
Depending on the breaker type setting, the functioning is:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The general 52b Status input is used for the breaker
status. If it is not configured, the general 52a Status input is used. The phase
breaker status matches the general.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent phases 52b Status inputs are used for the
breaker status. If they are not configured, the independent phases 52a Status
inputs are used. The general breaker status is generated from the phases, taking
into account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 147 shows this function’s outputs.
 52_1 Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the breaker's general status, in accordance
with the status of the digital inputs.
 52_1 X Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the status of each of the breaker's phases,
in accordance with the status of the digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole
(A, B or C).
Breaking monitoring status
The status of each pole (open, closed) is determined in accordance with a combination of
N/O and N/C inputs. If inconsistencies are detected between the N/O and the N/C inputs
after the failure time (”Pole failure time (ms)”), a failure is signalled and no other
action is taken (relative to the discrepancy) until the anomaly is corrected. The
functioning of this unit is shown in Figure 130.

User Manual 241
BREAKER
52 Supervision setting allows breaker state supervision function
 PROT/XCBR1 node
 PROT/XCBR2 node. Applies only in configurations with 2 switches
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table .
The setting "Configuration type" is only available in XCBR1, while the rest are on
both nodes.
 There are associated commands:
 Pos. Switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdLc52Op. Local mode switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdMaBl. Locking or unlocking operations command for switch in local mode.
 BlkCls. Locking or unlocking switch operations command.
 52_1 Open: Indicates that the 52 is open. There are independent general and
phase signals.
 52_1 Closed: Indicates that the 52 is closed. There are independent general
and phase signals.
 52_1 Undetermined: Indicates that the 52 is undetermined. There are
independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Failure: Indicates that the 52 has a failure. There are independent
general and phase signals.
 Close Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that a closure command has been
generated.
 Open Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that an opening command has been
generated.
 Ph. X Open Command - Br1: Indicates that a Phase X opening command has been
generated. X can be A, B or C.
 Close Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some closing
switch pole because maximum closing time has exceeded.
 Ph. X Close Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in closing
switch X pole because maximum closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or
C.
 Open Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some opening
switch pole because maximum closing time has exceeded.
 Ph. X Open Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred opening
switch X pole because maximum closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or
C.
 Breaker settings error: Indicates that breakers are not properly defined
and it is activated in the following situations:
 No consistency between the breakers and recloser setting: "Select 2
breakers"
 No consistency between the breakers and breaker setting:
"Configuration type".
In Figure 42 the state switch logic diagram is displayed. Input signals to this scheme
are:
 Enab, Logic 52_1: This input indicates the state 52 detection mode. Corresponds to
XCBR "52 Status detection" setting and allows the following values:
 "1 or 2 DI.General Status": There is only one digital input to indicate the
switch status.

User Manual 242
BREAKER
 "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole". There are three digital inputs to indicate the status
of each phase.
 52a input: Indicates the switch a logic input. Applies to "52a input" setting.
Active if the switch is closed.
 52b input: Indicates the switch b logic input. Applies to "52b input" setting.
Active if the switch is open.
 52a Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole A" Active
if the pole is closed.
 52b Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole A" Active
if the pole is open.
 52a Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole B" Active
 52b Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole B" Active
 52a Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole C" Active
 52b Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole C" Active
Figure 130 Breaker status.
SETTING
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 1 POLE / 4 STATUSES
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 3 POLES / 4 STATUSES
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T
52a input
0
DIGITAL INPUT
52b input
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE DIGITAL SIGNAL
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Undetermined
52a-Pole A
52_1 phase A Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole A
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole B
52_1 phase B Undetermined
0 DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Open
52_1 phase B Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole B
SETTING DIGITAL SIGNAL

DIGITAL INPUT POLE 52_1 closed
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole C
52_1 phase C Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 failure
DIGITAL INPUT 52_1 phase C Failure
52b-Pole C

User Manual 243
BREAKER
Table 147 Breaker status outputs
XCBR1 Signal XCBR2 Signal Data Attribute

52_1 Open 52_2 Open OpenBr general
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed CloseBr general
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined UndetBr general
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure FailureBr general
52_1 Phase A Open 52_2 Phase A Open OpenBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Closed 52_2 Phase A Closed CloseBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Undetermined 52_2 Phase A Undetermined UndetBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Failure 52_2 Phase A Failure FailureBr phsA
52_1 Phase B Open 52_2 Phase B Open OpenBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Closed 52_2 Phase B Closed CloseBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Undetermined 52_2 Phase B Undetermined UndetBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Failure 52_2 Phase B Failure FailureBr phsB
52_1 Phase C Open 52_2 Phase C Open OpenBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Closed 52_2 Phase C Closed CloseBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Undetermined 52_2 Phase C Undetermined UndetBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Failure 52_2 Phase C Failure FailureBr phsC
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined Pos stVal
52_1 Open 52_2 Open Pos OpenBr
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed Pos CloseBr
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure Pos FailureBr
52_1 Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt general
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 A Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsA
52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 B Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsB
52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 C Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsC
Close Command - Breaker 1 Close Command - Breaker 2 OpCls general
Open Command - Breaker 1 Open Command - Breaker 2 OpOpn general
Ph. A Open Command - Br1 Ph. A Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsA
Ph. B Open Command - Br1 Ph. B Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsB
Ph. C Open Command - Br1 Ph. C Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsC
Close Failure - Br1 Close Failure - Br2 ClsFailBr general
Ph. A Close Failure- Br1 Ph. A Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsA
Ph. B Close Failure- Br1 Ph. B Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsB
Ph. C Close Failure- Br1 Ph. C Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsC
Open Failure - Br1 Open Failure - Br2 OpenFailBr general
Ph. A Open Failure- Br1 Ph. A Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsA
Ph. B Open Failure- Br1 Ph. B Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsB
Ph. C Open Failure- Br1 Ph. C Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsC
Open Blocked - Br1 Open Blocked - Br1 BrBlk general
Closing Blocked - Br1 Closing Blocked - Br1 BrClBlk general
Breaker settings error Error general
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic

The opening and closure failure time settings determine the time lapse between the issue
of the corresponding command and the reception of the breaker’s activity signal, on the
understanding that the breaker has acted correctly. To the contrary, the open failure and
closure failure signals are generated and failure and general indications are issued.
This unit’s settings are grouped in PROT/RBFS1 (breaker 1) and (PROT/RBFS2) logical
nodes:
 Open failure time (ms): If an open command is given, the breaker should be open
before this time.
 Close failure time (ms): If a close command is given, the breaker should be closed
before this time.
Table 147 shows the operating logic’s output Data, which are available in the PROT/XCBR
nodes.

User Manual 244
BREAKER
Table 148 Breaker status monitoring settings

OpTmms Open failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
ClTmms Close failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
4.1.3 Locking logic

The trip and close commands can be locked with the breaker status, depending on the
configuration of the trip sealing and closure sealing settings. Figure 131 and Figure 132
show the sealed trip and closure schemes.
Figure 131 Trip logic scheme shows Trip logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme
are:
 Trip Sealed 52-1: Setting that indicates whether trip will be sealed after
completing trip conditions and manual opening. Corresponds to XCBR setting "Trip
sealed".
 General Trip: Corresponds to the signal "General trip" generated with any trip.
 Pole A (B,C) General Trip: Corresponds to the signals "Pole A General Trip", (B, C)
generated with any phase trip.
 Manual open command input**: Indicates that open command has been generated by the
logic input "Open Command - Breaker 1" or by user command.
 Manual Open blocking: Indicates that blocking command has been generated by the
logic input "Open blocking" or by user command.
 52a pole A: Enabled indicates that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the signal
"52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)".
 52a pole B: Enabled indicates that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the signal
"52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)".
 52a pole C: Enabled indicates that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the signal
"52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)".

User Manual 245
BREAKER
Figure 131 Trip logic scheme
Figure 132 shows Closure logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
 General trip: Indicates the signal generated with any trip. It is shown in "General
trip".
 Manual open command: Internal signal indicating that open command has been
generated by the logic input "Breaker open command input" or by user command, and
is not blocked by the logic input "Open blocking" neither by user command.
 Close sealed: Setting that indicates whether will be sealed after completing the
close order. Corresponds to the XCBR "Close sealed" setting.
 RECLOSURE Command**: Internal signal indicating an OR of the reclosure commands.
They are displayed on signals "52_1 Reclose Command" (switch reclosure) and
"Reclosing Command F_RREC" (frequency reclosure). It should not be blocked by the
logic input "Close Blocked" neither by user command.
 Close command: Indicates the logic input "Close Command - Breaker" is enabled, a
closure order has been launched by user command or a close order coupling. Formerly
sincrocheck's "Perm. Manual Close" must be enabled and must not be blocked by the
logic input "Close blocking" neither by user command.
 52_1 closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1
Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_1A closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A

User Manual 246
BREAKER
 52_1B closed: Signal indicating that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B
 52_1C closed: Signal indicating that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C
Figure 132 Closure logic scheme
4.1.4 Open pole detector

It determines the open pole or poles using the digital inputs, current and/or voltage
measurement.
In order for a pole to be considered open, a combination of the following conditions must
be met (depending on the operation type setting):
 A phase’s breakers indicate that the phase is open (in the case of 1 ½ breaker, two
are employed)
 The current is below the threshold set in the open pole due to current detection
logic.
 The current and the voltage are below the threshold (according to the setting). In
this case, if there is a fuse failure the open pole due to voltage signal is not
activated.
To determine the breaker’s status by digital input, the 52b (normally closed) of each
phase is employed, when configured. If the 52b is not configured, the 52a is used
(normally open).
If a single pole break is detected, the following functions can be blocked, if they are
selected by settings:
 Neutral overcurrent, sensitive neutral and unbalance.

 Overvoltage V0 and V2.
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 3PO output (three open pole).
Therefore, there is also a one-cycle delay in the change from 3PO to 1PO (1 open pole).
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 1PO output (when the breaker
closes).

User Manual 247
BREAKER
Figure 133 Open pole detector scheme shows Open pole detector scheme. The input signals
of this scheme are:
 52_1A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A
 52_1 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1
 52_1 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 1
logical input "Close blocking" or by a blocking user command.
 52_2A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2 A
 52_2 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2
 52_2 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 2
logical input "Close blocking" or by a blocking user command.
 Configuration type = Breaker and a Half: Setting that allows to select switches
configuration schemes. Corresponds to the setting "Configuration type".
 Phase A Open ( I < ): Signal "Phase A Open ( I < )".
 DeadLine Phase A: Signal indicating that phase A is de-energized. Corresponds to
"Deadline Phase A" signal.
And their equivalents for phases B and C.
Figure 133 Open pole detector scheme
The settings for the configuration of the open pole detector are shown in Table 149 Open
pole detector settings
 Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

User Manual 248
BREAKER
 Operation type. Indicates the manner in which the open pole is detected:
 V and I. The voltage and current conditions must be met.
 I and 52. The current and 52 status input conditions must be met.
 V and I and 52. The voltage and current and 52 status input conditions must
be met.
 V and I or 52. The voltage and current or the 52 status input conditions
must be met.
 Only 52. The 52 status input conditions must be met.
 Voltage threshold. Indicates the voltage value below which the phase is considered
as broken.
 Current threshold. Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered
as open.
 Neutral and Unbalance Units Block. Indicates whether the unbalance and neutral
units are to be blocked upon the detection of an open pole.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the open pole
detector function.
Table 149 Open pole detector settings
Name IEC 61850 Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

OPDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
V and I (1)
I and 52 (2)
Optype Operation type V and I and 52 (3) enum
V and I or 52 (4)
Only 52 (5)
OpValV Voltage threshold (V) 10,0 165,0 0,1 floating
OpValI Current threshold (A) 0,01 0,5 0,01 floating
Neutral and Unbalance
UnbUnBl NO / YES Boolean
Units Block
 PROT/POPD1 node
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 Open Pole Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Pole A Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase
A.
 Pole B Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase
B.
 Pole C Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase
C.
 1PO- One Pole Open. Indicates that there is only one pole open (A, B or C).
 2PO- Two Pole Open. Indicates that there are two poles open.
 3PO- Three Pole Open. Indicates that there are three poles open.

User Manual 249
BREAKER
 PO-Some Pole Open. Indicates that at least one pole is open, but not all
three.
 Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the
threshold.
 Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the
threshold.
 Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the
threshold.
 Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.
Table 150 Open pole detector outputs

Open Pole Status StEna stVal
Pole A Open OpenPole phsA
Pole B Open OpenPole phsB
Pole C Open OpenPole phsC
1PO- One Pole Open OneOpenPole general
2PO- Two Pole Open TwoOpenPole general
3PO- Three Pole Open ThreeOpenPole general
PO-Some Pole Open OpenPole general
Phase A Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsA
Phase B Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsB
Phase C Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsC
Deadline Phase A DeadLine phsA
Deadline Phase B DeadLine phsB
Deadline Phase C DeadLine phsC
Deadline Phase ABC DeadLine general
4.1.4.1 Open pole due to current

This is used to detect the breaker status with the current measurement. Using the
half- and full-cycle DFT measurements (the lower of the two), it is determined whether
the current is below a minimum noise threshold in at least one of the phases (see
Figure 134)
If the open pole detection is activated in at least one of the phases, the phases
overcurrent instantaneous units are reset.
The current threshold is indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 150):
 Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the threshold.
 Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the threshold.
 Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the threshold.

User Manual 250
BREAKER
Figure 134 Open pole due to current scheme
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IA (min (dft,dft ½)) +
< Phase A Open ( I < )
SETTING -
Current threshold (A)
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IB (min (dft,dft ½)) +
-
< Phase B Open ( I < )
DIGITAL SIGNAL
ANALOGUE INPUT +
< Phase C Open ( I < )
IC (min (dft,dft ½)) -
4.1.4.2 Dead or de-energized line

It detects a line’s disconnected phases. If a phase’s voltage and current levels
simultaneously drop below the voltage and current thresholds, this phase is considered
dead. In such cases, the following signal is generated for each phase: "Deadline Phase
x", in which x is A, B or C. Figure 135 shows a diagram of the dead line. The voltage
and current thresholds are as indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 150):
 Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.

 Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.
Figure 135 Dead line scheme
4.1.5 Pole discordance

If any of the poles are detected as having a status different to that of the other poles
during a configurable period of time, the pole discordance signal is generated. A
differentiation is made between single open pole discordance and two open pole
discordance. A trip can be generated or the action can be limited to signalling. It
allows a selection to be made between two modes of operation (see Figure 136 and Figure
137).

User Manual 251
BREAKER
Input signals of this scheme are:
 52_1 failure: Indicates that 52 is in fault because "Pole failure time (ms)" time
has been exceeded. Corresponds to "52_1 Failure" signal.
 52_1 phase A open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the
"52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal deactivated.
 52_1 phase B open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the
"52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)" signal deactivated.
 52_1 phase C open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the
"52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)" signal deactivated.
Equivalent signals are used in switch 2.
Figure 136 Mode 1 pole discordance
Figure 137 Mode 2 pole discordance
 Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

 Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 M1: Signaling
 M1: Signal and Trip
 M2: Signaling
 M2: Signal and Trip
 1 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 1 open pole.
 2 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 2 open poles.

User Manual 252
BREAKER
Table 151 Pole discordance settings

PDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
M1: Signaling
M1: Signal and Trip
M2: Signaling
M2: Signal and Trip
PTmms1 1 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32
PTmms2 2 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32
 Node:
 PROT/RPLD1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/RPLD2 for Breaker 2 in breaker and a half configurations.
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 Outputs: Table 152 Pole discordance outputs shows the function’s output data.
 Pole Discordance Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 52_1 Start Discordance. Indicates that the function has started.
 52_1 Trip Discordance. Indicates that the function has tripped.
 52_1 Discordance open 1P. Indicates that there is discordance with only one
open pole.
 52_1 Discordance open 2P. Indicates that there is discordance with two open
poles.
Table 152 Pole discordance outputs

Pole Discordance Status StEna stVal
52_1 Start Discordance StrPDBr1 general
52_1 Trip Discordance OpPDBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 1P OneOpenBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 2P TwoOpenBr1 general
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION
It monitors the breaker’s operations after the trip and closure commands. In addition to
signals, the counters generated by these functions are shown in the statistical data.
In configurations breaker and a half configurations two switches are supervised. Because
there is only one current input, ki2 and electrical supervisions are only performed on
breaker 1. In breaker 2 only mechanical operations are supervised.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 153 (breaker 1) and
Tabla 154 (breaker 2):
 ki2 calculation type. Indicates the calculation type between kI2*t, kI2 and kI.

User Manual 253
BREAKER
 ki2 time (ms). Indicates the timeout following the trip for the measurement of the
ki1 calculation current.
 Alarm value ki2. Indicates the ki2 summation threshold which, when exceeded,
generates a “ki2 exceeded” signal.
 Initial value ki2. Indicates the initial value of the ki2 summation when a reset
command is received.
 Trips exceeded window (min). Time window in minutes for the excessive number of
trips counter.
 Maximum number of trips. Maximum number of trips permitted in the set time window.
 Mechanical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command
until the detection of the open pole by the digital input status.
 Mechanical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command
until the detection of the closed pole by the digital input status.
 Electrical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command
until the detection of the absence of current in the phase.
 Electrical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command
until the detection of the presence of current in the phase.
 Inactivity time (days). Indicates the maximum number of days without breaker
activity.
 Opening dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles
upon opening.
 Closing dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles
upon closing.
There are independent settings and outputs:
 Node
 PROT/CBOU1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/CBOU2 for Breaker 2 in breaker and a half configurations.
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 153 (breaker 1) and Tabla 154
(breaker 2).
 Outputs: Table 153 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 1 shows the function’s
output data. The meaning of each signal is detailed in the function explanation.
 Table 153 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 1 shows the output of
Breaker 1.
 Tabla 154 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 2 for breaker and a half
configurations.

User Manual 254
BREAKER
Table 153 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 1

Ki2 (0)
KIType ki2 calculation type 0 2 1 KI (1) enum
KI2t (2)
KITmms ki2 time (ms) 0 100 10 Int32
KIAlarm Alarm value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
KIInit Initial value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
OpElTmms Electrical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClElTmms Electrical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
Tabla 154 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 2

ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
Table 155 Breaker monitoring signals

Phase A ki2 exceeded KI2 phsA
Phase B ki2 exceeded KI2 phsB
Phase C ki2 exceeded KI2 phsC
ki2 exceeded KI2 general
Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole B mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole C mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsA
Pole B electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsB
Pole C electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
AB dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc phsAB
BC dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc phsBC
CA dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc phsCA
Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips PolTrExc general

User Manual 255
BREAKER
kI2 sum:
After a trip, the kI2 counter increases in accordance with the selected setting. The value
of each phase’s current is calculated in primary (VT ratio), as kA primary. There are a
total of 3 counters (one for each phase).
If it exceeds the set threshold (the treatment is pole to pole), a “Phase X Ki2 exceeded”
signal is generated. While in this situation, the corresponding signal is sent to control.
The signals are:
 Phase X ki2 exceeded. Where X is the phase. It is independent for each phase.
 ki2 exceeded. One for all the phases.
In order to calculate the pole wear, the type of calculation wanted can be programmed from
among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
 If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated with I as the current measured after exceeding
the set timeout following the trip.
 If kI is chosen, only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, with I as the current
measured after exceeding the set timeout following the trip.
 If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms, with I as the current
measured after exceeding the set timeout following the trip. The accumulation terminates
when I<0.05 A.
Excessive number of trips:
It counts the trips produced in the time, generating a signal when the number of trips is
higher than the programmed number during the programmed time and changes to a definite
trip. The time period is reset upon a manual closure. The counter may be reset to the
initial value at any moment by means of a command. The signals are:
 Pole X excessive nbr trips. Independent for each phase

 Excessive nbr trips. One for all the phases.
Open counter:
There are independent open and trip counters for each phase:
 The trip commands generated by the protection are considered trips.

 A breaker's changes from closed to open (including manual and trip breaks) are considered
openings.
There are 6 counters: 3 trip counters and 3 open counters. There is a reset command for
each counter.
Closure counters:
There are independent closure counters for each phase. A breaker's changes from open to
close are considered closures.
There is a reset command for each counter.
Operating time for electric opening and closure by pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its electric
operation, measured with the current:
 Trip time: The time elapsed from the open command until the detection of the absence of
power.
 Closure time: The time elapsed from the closure command until the detection of the
presence of power.
The open pole detector current threshold is used.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when
the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X electric time exceeded”:
 If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Electrical opening T (ms)”

User Manual 256
BREAKER
 If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Electrical closing T
(ms)”
Mechanical breaking and closure operating time per pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its mechanical
operation, detected in the digital inputs status:
 Trip time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the opening command until the detection of
the open pole by the digital input status.
 Closure time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the closure command until the detection of
the closed pole by the digital input status.
the thresholds are exceeded “Pole X mechan.time exceeded”:
 If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Mechanical opening T (ms)”
 If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Mechanical closing T
(ms)”
Breaking and closure dispersion time for each pole pair:
They count the difference between the opening and closure times for every two poles. There
are opening/closure counters for pole pairs AB, BC and CA. The breaker status is determined
by means of the digital input status.
the thresholds are exceeded “XY dispersion time exceeded”:
 During the opening, a comparison is made with the "Opening dispersion T (ms)" setting.
 During the closure, a comparison is made with the "Closing dispersion T (ms)" setting.
Days of breaker inactivity without status change:
The days elapsed, since the last opening or closure of the breaker, are counted for each
pole. Complete fractions of 24 hours since the last action are considered. Partial periods
of 24 hours are not accumulated, i.e., if 2 days and 20 hours have passed since the last
action, the counter will indicate 2 days. If at this point the time count is reset to zero,
the 20 hours would be lost.
These counters are compared with the “Inactivity Time (days)” setting and an event is
generated per pole in the event of it being exceeded "Pole X inactivity time exceeded".
Last interrupted current:
The current value upon the trip is indicated per pole.
Maximum interrupted current:
The maximum current value measured at the moment of the trip is indicated per pole. The
three poles can be reset to zero using the reset command.
Overcurrent levels:
Indicates the time in seconds during which each phase's current is within each of the
following ranges (with In as the set rated current):
 Seconds with the current between 2 and 5 times In

 Seconds with the current between 5 and 12.5 times In
 Seconds with the current between 12.5 and 20 times In
 Seconds with the current greater than 20 In
There are 12 counters (4 for each phase).

User Manual 257
BREAKER
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION
It monitors the circuits by pole, detecting any discontinuity with the breaker open and
closed. It requires the assignment of the monitoring inputs (the breaker circuit with open
and closed breaker, the closure circuit with open and closed breaker). It is activated 20
seconds after the detection of the fault and remains active while the fault persists.
Up to six trip circuits and three closure circuits can be monitored, using the number of
digital inputs required.
Figure 138 Closure circuit monitoring Figure 138 shows an example of the wiring for the
monitoring of the closure circuit. The wiring for the trip circuit is similar.
When the breaker is closed, the contact “52a” contact is also closed. If there is
continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as “Close circuit 52 closed” is detected as
closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
When the breaker is open, the contact “52b” contact is also closed. If there is continuity
in the circuit, the input programmed as “Close circuit 52 open” is detected as closed. If
there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
The “closing coil failure” or “trip coil failure” signals are activated 20 seconds after
the fault is detected, in the event of the fault persisting upon the conclusion of this
period.
Figure 138 Closure circuit monitoring
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 156:
 Trip circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the trip circuits.
 Close circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the closure circuits.
 Close circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit
with the breaker open.
 Close circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure
circuit with the breaker closed.
 Open circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit
with the breaker open.
 Open circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit
with the breaker closed.

User Manual 258
BREAKER
 Node.
 PROT/RBCS1: breaker1's circuit supervision.
 PROT/RBCS2: breaker 2's circuit supervision.
 X trip coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X trip
coil.
 X closing coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X
closure coil.
 1 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil
of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil
of pole A2, B2 or C2.
 1 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure
coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure
coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.
Table 156 Circuit supervision settings

TCEna Trip circuit enabled Boolean
CCEna Close circuit enabled Boolean
LogInCCOA1 Close circuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInCCOB1 Close circuit 52 open - B1 Int32
LogInCCOC1 Close circuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInCCOA2 Close circuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInCCOB2 Close circuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInCCOC2 Close circuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInCCCA1 Close circuit 52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInCCCB1 Close circuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInCCCC1 Close circuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInCCCA2 Close circuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInCCCB2 Close circuit 52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInCCCC2 Close circuit 52 closed - C2 Int32
LogInTCOA1 Open circuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInTCOB1 Open circuit 52 open - B1 Int32
LogInTCOC1 Open circuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInTCOA2 Open circuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInTCOB2 Open circuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInTCOC2 Open circuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInTCCA1 Open circuit 52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInTCCB1 Open circuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInTCCC1 Open circuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInTCCA2 Open circuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInTCCB2 Open circuit 52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInTCCC2 Open circuit 52 closed - C2 Int32

User Manual 259
BREAKER
Table 157 Coil monitoring outputs
RBCS1 Signals RBCS2 Signals Data Attribute

A1 trip coil failure A1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsA
B1 trip coil failure B1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsB
C1 trip coil failure C1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsC
A2 trip coil failure A2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsA
B2 trip coil failure B2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsB
C2 trip coil failure C2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsC
A1 closing coil failure A1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsA
B1 closing coil failure B1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsB
C1 closing coil failure C1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsC
A2 closing coil failure A2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsA
B2 closing coil failure B2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsB
C2 closing coil failure C2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsC
1 trip circuit failure 1 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC1 general
2 trip circuit failure 2 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC2 general
1 closing circuit failure 1 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC1 general
2 closing circuit failure 2 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC2 general

User Manual 260
DISCONNECTOR 
5. DISCONNECTOR
The disconnector unit uses the PROT/XSWI1 logical node. The settings used are:
 Disconnector type: Indicates the type of disconnector employed:

 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the
three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of
the three poles.
 89a input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it
indicates the disconnector status.
 89a-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the
phase A disconnector status.
 89a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 89a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 89b input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it
indicates the disconnector status.
 89b-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the
phase A disconnector status.
 89b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 89b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to
Table 158 Disconnector status settings

1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp Disconnector type enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
LogIn89a1 89a general status Int32
LogIn89a1A 89a Pole A status Int32
LogIn89a1B 89a Pole B status Int32
LogIn89a1C 89a Pole C status Int32
LogIn89b1 89b general status Int32
LogIn89b1A 89b Pole A status Int32
LogIn89b1B 89b Pole B status Int32
LogIn89b1C 89b Pole C status Int32
Disconnector status
The status of the general disconnector and by pole is determined with the status of
digital inputs and disconnector type setting. Used to determine the status of the
disconnector without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the
disconnector’s status to be known, such as the stub bus protection, etc.
The 89b status inputs take precedence over the 89a status inputs, i.e., if 89b status
inputs have been configured, the disconnector status is determined by means of these
inputs, independently of the status of the 89a inputs.
Depending on the disconnector type setting, the functioning is:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The "89b general status" input is used for the
disconnector status. If it is not configured, the "89a general status" input is
used. The phase disconnector status matches the general.

User Manual 261
DISCONNECTOR 
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent "89b Pole X status" inputs are used for the
disconnector status. If they are not configured, the "89a Pole X status" inputs are
used, where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C). The general disconnector status is
generated from the phases, taking into account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 159 shows this function’s outputs.
 Disconnector 1 Status (DI). Indicates the disconnector's general status, in

accordance with the status of the digital inputs.
 Disconnector 1 X Status (DI). Indicates the status of each of the disconnector's
phases, in accordance with the status of the digital inputs. Where "X" indicates
the pole (A, B or C).
Table 159 Disconnector status outputs
XSWI1 Signal Data Attribute

Disconnector 1 Status (DI) StEna general
Disconnector 1 A Status (DI) StEna phsA
Disconnector 1 B Status (DI) StEna phsB
Disconnector 1 C Status (DI) StEna phsC

User Manual 262
AUTOMATISMS 
6. AUTOMATISMS
The close command of the breaker can be manual close command or automatic (recloser):
 Three poles close command can be monitored by synchronism; while one pole close commands
are not monitored by synchronism
 Manual close command can be monitored by synchronism
Receiving a manual close command , the status of the coupler is checked:
 If the coupler is selected, it is generated if the coupling conditions are met in the set
time
 If the coupler is not selected, it is monitored by the synchronism function
6.1 SYNCHRONISM
The synchronism function or “Synchrocheck” waits for the appropriate conditions established
in the settings, to determine breaker closure, both manual and automatic.
Two voltage signals from the two sides of the breaker, which we will call side A and side
B, are compared.
Side A corresponds to the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”.
This setting selects the analogue input used. The selection between ground to phase and
phase to phase voltages is made with the setting “Operating Voltages” of the node TVTR.
With this setting a compensation factor is applied to equalize the module and the angle of
the two voltages compared (side A and side B).
Side B corresponds to the analogue voltage input connected to the synchronism voltage
terminals.
Table 160 shows the settings of this function for undervoltage and synchronism:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When enabled, the function
tests the synchronism conditions. When disabled, manual closure permission is granted,
but automatic permission is refused.
 Side A phase Select: selectable between A/AB, B/BC or C/CA, corresponding to the
measurement of the selected voltage transformer. A/AB for transformer 10, B/BC for
transformer 11 and C/CA for transformer 12.
 Compensation factor (Vs1): the factor by which the module is multiplied in order to
equalize the voltages.
 Compensation angle (Vs1): the factor to be added to the angle in order to equalize the
voltages.
 A-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side A must exceed this value in
order to consider that there is voltage on that side of the breaker.
 A-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side A must be lower than this value
in order to consider that there is an absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It
must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
 B-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side B must exceed this value in
order to consider that there is voltage on that side of the breaker.
 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side B must be lower than this value
in order to consider that there is an absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It
must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
 Autoreclose condition. Indicates the conditions for granting reclosing permission with
undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage
permission

User Manual 263
AUTOMATISMS 
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of
voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of
voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in
order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the
breaker in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on
the other in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to
grant undervoltage permission.
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to
 Manual closing condition. Indicates the conditions for granting manual closing permission
with undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage
permission
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of
voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of
voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in
order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the
breaker in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on
the other in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to
 Enabling of synchrocheck with reclosure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into
account to grant permission if the set conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker close
time is taken into account. See Figure 139.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into
account that closure permission will be granted when the angle difference is 0°. See
Figure 139.
 Enabling of synchrocheck with manual closure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into
account to grant permission if the set conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker
closure time is taken into account. See Figure 139.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into
account that closure permission will be granted when the argument difference is 0°.
See Figure 139.

User Manual 264
AUTOMATISMS 
 Breaker close time (s): taken into account when calculating the angle difference and
providing that the enabling "with compensation" has been programmed. In this case, the
frequency slip is taken into account to compensate for this time.
 Voltage difference (V): the difference between the voltage modules on side A and side B
must be less than this value in order for permission to be granted.
 Frequency difference (Hz): the difference between the frequencies on side A and side B
must be less than this value in order for permission to be granted.
 Angle difference (º): the difference between the voltage angles on side A and side B must
be less than this value in order for permission to be granted.
 Slip threshold (Hz): if the difference between the frequencies in side A and side B is
greater than this value there is frequency slip. Otherwise, it is not considered
frequency slip.2
 Manual closure condition compliance time (s): the time during which the conditions for
the granting of permission for closure must be met.
 Reclosure condition compliance time (s): the time during which the conditions for the
granting of permission for reclosure must be met.
 Blocking input: logic input which, when active, blocks the function. When blocked, manual
closure permission is granted, but automatic permission is refused.
 Close blocking: logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker close permission
(manual and automatic).
 Fuse failure signal: fuse failure logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker
close permission (manual and automatic).
The synchronism function can be disabled by means of a setting (“NO”). By means of a “fuse
failure” or a “breaker closure permission block” digital input both manual and automatic
permission are refused.
When disabled, manual closure permission is granted but not automatic closure permission.
In order to give closure permission when enabled, the function contemplates the conditions
that grant undervoltage permission or synchronism permission. If any of them grants
permission, closure permission is granted. Manual and automatic closure permissions are
analysed independently.
 Undervoltage:
 When disabled undervoltage permission is refused.
 When enabled, undervoltage conditions are analysed. If undervoltage permission is
granted, closure permission is granted, independently of synchronism conditions.
 Synchronism: when undervoltage permission is not granted, synchronism conditions are
analysed.
 When disabled synchronism permission is refused.
 When enabled, synchronism conditions are analysed. .
6.1.1 Undervoltage permission

Permission is granted if there is voltage on one or on both sides of the breaker. In
order to verify whether there is no voltage present on one side of the breaker, the
voltage measured is checked to see whether it is lower than the programmed value (see
Table 160).
The detection of the presence or the absence of voltage is always done in all the phases.
However, the analysis of the conditions for granting or refusing breaker close permission
is only carried out if the function is enabled.
2
Available since firmware version 5.17.15.2 and ICD 6.1.13.27

User Manual 265
AUTOMATISMS 
6.1.2 Synchronism permission

Synchronism permission is given when following conditions indicated by the corresponding
setting are simultaneously fulfilled during a programmable time. These conditions are
based on the comparison of voltage modules, phases and frequency on both sides of the
breaker. The analysis is performed whenever there is voltage on both sides of the
breaker.
Figure 139 Synchronism check with compensation
If “Sync. Enabled” is selected “with compensation”, the frequency slip is used to

compensate the breaker closing time:
ϕUB (with compensation) =ϕUB + ωslip·TCB
∆ϕ with compensation =ϕUB (with compensation) -ϕUA
In which:
Frequency slip ∆f=fB-fA (Hz)
Slip speed ωslip=∆f·360º (º/s)
Breaker closure time TCB (s)
To consider the slip frequency difference must exceed the "Slip threshold (Hz)" setting.
If this angle difference decreases when the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation and
closure in 0º, the condition for granting permission will be:
|∆ϕ with compensation|=0
If the angle difference is increasing, the following must be met:
|∆ϕ with compensation|<angle difference setting
When the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation, in order for permission to be granted
the difference must be around 0º, the following must be met:
Synchronism function measurements available in the unit status:
 Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A.

 Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side B.
 The difference between the module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A and
side B. They are only available when the voltage presence conditions are met on
both sides.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs:

User Manual 266
AUTOMATISMS 
 Node: PROT/RSYN1
 Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables. See Table 160.
 Commands:
 DOrdSyBlk1: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 DOrdPeBlk1: Close permission block and unblock. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
Table 160 Synchronism settings

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
SiASel Side A Phase Select A/AB, B/BC, C/CA enum
CoModVs1 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs1 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
PrVSiA A-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiA A-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 float
None
No compensation
SyWReEna1 Sync. Enabled (AR) enum
Zero compensation
With compensation
None
No compensation
SyWMaClEna1 Sync. Enabled (Close) enum
Zero compensation
With compensation
SyDifV1 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF1 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
SyDifA1 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
SlThr Slip threshold (Hz) 0.01 0.1 0.01
ReTmms1 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 100000 10 float
MaClTmms1 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 100000 10 float
PrVSiB1 B-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB1 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond1 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond1 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy1 Blocking input Int32
LogInBlCl1 Close blocking Int32
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Boolean
Synchrocheck function signals (see Table 161).
 Enable Synchro Breaker 1: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

 V presence Va/Vab side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is
greater than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 V presence Vb/Vbc side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is

User Manual 267
AUTOMATISMS 
 V presence Vc/Vca side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is
 V presence ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is
 V presence side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is greater than the
setting “B-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 No Voltage Va/Vab side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is
less than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 No Voltage Vb/Vbc side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is
 No Voltage Vc/Vca side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is
 No Voltage ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is
less than the setting “A-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 No Voltage side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is less than the
setting “B-Side Voltage presence (V)”.
For the following signals, it is necessary that voltage presence is detected on both
sides of the breaker:
 Positive slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side B is also

greater than that on side A by more than the setting.
 Negative slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side A is also
greater than that on side B by more than the setting.
 Underfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides
exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side A is greater than that on side
B.
 Overfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides
exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side B is greater than that on side
A.
 Delay without comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the
setting value and is greater on side A than on side B.
 Adv. without comp.side B B1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the
setting value and is greater on side B than on side A.
 Delay with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by
taking into account breaker closure time, exceeds the setting value and is greater
on side A than on side B.
 Advance with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by
taking into account breaker closure time, exceeds the setting value and is greater
on side B than on side A.
 Over Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed
setting and the voltage in B is greater than in A.
 Under Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed
setting and the voltage in A is greater than in B.
 Perm. without comp. B1: indicates that differences in voltage, angle and
frequencies are lower than the corresponding settings.
 Perm. with comp. B1: when the necessary conditions related to the voltage, angle
argument and frequencies differences are given, taking into account the breaker
closure time for calculating the angle argument difference.
 Perm. Manual Close V B1: Manual closure permission for voltage checks. It´s active
when the undervoltage conditions are met.
 Permission Recloser V B1: Reclosure permission for voltage checks. It´s active
when the undervoltage conditions are met.

User Manual 268
AUTOMATISMS 
 Perm. Manual Close B1: closure permission for undervoltage or for synchronism. It
is active, due to compliance with the undervoltage conditions or the synchronism
conditions. If the function is disabled, manual closure permission will also be
signalled.
 Perm. Reclose Br 1: reclosure permission for undervoltage or synchronism, so that
the recloser decides on the automatic closure of the breaker. It is actived, due
to compliance with the undervoltage conditions or the synchronism conditions.
Table 161 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 1
Signal Data Atribute

Positive Slip Breaker 1 PosSlipBr1 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 1 NegSlipBr1 stVal
Underfrequency side B B1 UFSideBBr1 stVal
Overfrequency side B B1 OFSideBBr1 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 1 DBNSlipBr1 stVal
Adv. without comp.side B B1 ABNSlipBr1 stVal
Delay with comp. side B B1 DBSlipBr1 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 1 ABSlipBr1 stVal
Over Module side B B1 OAbsBBr1 stVal
Under Module side B B1 UAbsBBr1 stVal
Perm. without comp. B1 PNoSlipBr1 stVal
Perm. with comp. B1 PSlip0Br1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B1 PMCBr1 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser Br 1 PRecBr1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B1 PMClVChBr1 stVal
Permission Recloser V B1 PRecVChBr1 stVal
Permission with compens. 1 PSlipBr1 stVal
Enable Synchro Breaker 1 EnaBr1 stVal
V presence Va/Vab side A SAVPres phsA
V presence Vb/Vbc side A SAVPres phsB
V presence Vc/Vca side A SAVPres phsC
V presence ABC side A SAVPres general
No Voltage Va/Vab side A SAVAbs phsA
No Voltage Vb/Vbc side A SAVAbs phsB
No Voltage Vc/Vca side A SAVAbs phsC
No Voltage ABC side A SAVAbs general
Voltage presence side A SAPres stVal
No Voltage side A SAAbs stVal
V presence side B B1 SBVPresBr1 stVal
No Voltage side B B1 SBVAbsBr1 stVal
6.1.3 Two breakers application

It is available an independent synchronism function for a second breaker.
As in the first breaker, this unit has function to check the presence of voltage on both
sides of the breaker, and the test of the synchronism conditions to give close
permission.
The side A voltage is the same for both synchronisms, so the same voltage and settings
are used (“Side A phase Select”, “Compensation factor (Vs1)” and “Compensation angle
(Vs1)”).
The side B voltage is the Vs2 (V synchronism 2)
For breaker and a half applications, with closing sequence reclosing "Brk1 then Brk2" or
" Brk2 then Brk1" the setting "Autoreclose condition" depends on the state of the
breaker, so that if the first breaker of the sequence is blocked, the second breaker
uses the first breaker´s setting . For example, with "Brk1 then Brk2" if breaker 1 is
blocked , it will not be close command of that breaker, so the "Autoreclose condition" of
the second breaker ( RSYN2 ) will use the setting of the first breaker ( RSYN1 ).
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs for the second breaker. The
meaning of these data is the same as the first breaker.

User Manual 269
AUTOMATISMS 
 Node: PROT/SECRSYN1
 Outputs: Table 163 shows the function’s output data. They are similar to the first
breaker, but for the second one.
Table 162 Synchronism settings for breaker 2

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
CoModVs2 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs2 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
BrClTmms2 Closing time (ms) 0 10000 10 float
No, Without compensation,
SyWReEna2 Sync. Enabled (AR) With compensation (0º), enum
With compensation
No, Without compensation,
WMaClEna2 Sync. Enabled (Close) With compensation (0º), enum
With compensation
SyDifV2 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF2 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 2 0.01 float
SyDifA2 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
MaClTmms2 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 10000 10 float
ReTmms2 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 10000 10 float
PrVSiB2 B-Side Voltage presence(V) 0 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB2 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 0 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond2 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond2 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy2 Blocking input Int32
LogInBlCl2 Close blocking Int32
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal Int32
Table 163 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 2

Positive Slip Breaker 2 PosSlipBr2 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 2 NegSlipBr2 stVal
Underfrequency side B B2 UFSideBBr2 stVal
Overfrequency side B B2 OFSideBBr2 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 2 DBNSlipBr2 stVal
Adv. without comp. side B B2 ABNSlipBr2 stVal
Delay with comp. side B B2 DBSlipBr2 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 2 ABSlipBr2 stVal
Over Module side B B 2 OAbsBBr2 stVal
Under Module side B B2 UAbsBBr2 stVal
Perm. without comp. B2 PNoSlipBr2 stVal
Perm. with comp.B2 PSlip0Br2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B2 PMCBr2 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser B2 PRecBr2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B 2 PMClVChBr2 stVal
Perm. Recloser V B2 PRecVChBr2 stVal
Permission with compens. 2 PSlipBr2 general
Enable Synchro Breaker 2 EnaBr2 general
Voltage presence side B B2 SBVPresBr2 general
No Voltage side B B2 SBVAbsBr2 general

User Manual 270
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2 COUPLER
The function generates a close command, to allow coupling of two net sections separated by
a breaker.
The coupler function starts when the conditions are fulfilled:
 There is a manual close commnand. (Not recloser).

 There is voltage presence on both sides of breaker.
When the coupler starts, it tries to order close breaker if conditions are confirmed. If
close breaker order is set or time is finished, then coupler goes to not selected state.
If close breaker order is set or setting time “Coupling Max.Time (s)” is over then coupler
goes to not selected state.
The voltage used is Vs1 and the voltage set in “Side A Phase Select” setting in
synchronism.
There are two running modes: loop mode and coupler mode.
LOOP MODE
This mode is set if frequency gap is less than 0.01 Hz.
In this case the breaker closure order is set if coupler conditions are fulfilled:
 Voltage gap is less than “Voltage difference (V)” setting.

 Frequency gap is less than “Frequency difference (Hz)” setting.
 Angle gap is less than “Angle difference (º)” setting.
Once close breaker order is set, the coupler goes to not selected state.
COUPLER MODE
This mode is set if frequency gap is more than 0.01 Hz. In this case the angle difference
is calculated by frequency slip and breaker closing time.
In this case the breaker closure order is set if coupler conditions are confirmed:
 Voltage gap is less than “Voltage difference (V)” setting.

 Frequency gap is less than “Frequency difference (Hz)” setting.
 Angle gap is calculated based on frequency slip and “Breaker close time (s)”
setting.
The angle closing condition depends on frequency slip:
 In loop mode (frequency gap is less than 0.01 Hz.), the angle gap must be less than
“Angle difference (º)” setting.
 In coupler mode the frequency slip and the breaker closing time are used to calculate
the angle condition:
ϕUB =ϕUB + ωslip·TCB
∆ϕ =ϕUB -ϕUA
In which:
Frequency slip ∆f=fB-fA (Hz)
Slip speed ωslip=∆f·360º (º/s)
Breaker closure time TCB (s)

User Manual 271
AUTOMATISMS 
If this angle difference decreases, the condition for order breaker closure will be:
|∆ϕ with compensation|=0
If the angle difference is increasing, the following must be met:
The difference must be around 0º, the following must be met:
Figure 141 Coupler angle calculation.
Table 154 shows settings:
 Enabled
 YES: coupler function is activated.
 NO: coupler function is deactivated.
 Voltage difference (V): the difference between the voltage modules on side A and
side B must be less than this value in order for breaker closure order is set.
 Frequency difference (Hz): the difference between the frequencies on side A and
side B must be less than this value in order breaker closure order is set
 Angle difference (º): the difference between the voltage angles on side A and side
B must be less than this value in order for breaker closure order is set
 Coupling Max.Time (s): maximum time during which the conditions must be met.
 Breaker close time (s): taken into account when calculating the angle difference,
the frequency slip is taken into account to compensate for this time.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/RCOU1
 Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables.
 Commands:
 Coupler selection Order: if this signal is set then the coupler change to
selected state to start evaluating coupler conditions.

User Manual 272
AUTOMATISMS 
 Coupler deselecting: if this signal is set then the coupler change to

unselected state, it stops evaluating coupler conditions.
 Coupler cancelation: if this signal is set then the breaker closure order is
blocked, the coupler remains in selected state.
 Outputs: Table 161 Synchronism function outputs shows function outputs.
 Enable coupling B1: If it is set coupler is enabled.
 Acting Coupling B1. If it is set coupler is selected and acting.
 Coupling not selected B1: If it is set coupler is not selected.
 Coupling cancelled time B1: If it is set coupler is not acting due to override
maximum elapsed time.
 Underfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides
exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side A is greater than that on
side B.
 Overfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides
exceeds the setting value and the frequency on side B is greater than that on
side A.
 Delay without comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the
setting value and is greater on side A than on side B.
 Advance with comp.side B B1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the
setting value and is greater on side B than on side A.
 Over Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the
programmed setting and the voltage in B is greater than in A.
 Under Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the
programmed setting and the voltage in A is greater than in B.
 Perm. Coup. without comp. B1: indicates that differences in voltage, angle and
frequencies are lower than the corresponding settings.
 Perm. Coup. with comp. B1: when the necessary conditions related to the voltage,
angle argument and frequencies differences are given, taking into account the
breaker closure time for calculating the angle argument difference.
 Close order Coupling B1: It´s active when the coupler conditions are met.
Table 164 Coupler settings.

CoEna Enabled 0 1 1 YES/NO enum
CoDifV Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
CoDifF Frequency difference (Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
CoDifA Angle difference (º) 0 180 1 float
CoTms Coupling Max.Time (s) 0 20 1 float
LogInSeCo Coupler selection Order int32
LogInNoSe Coupler deselection int32
LogInCaCo Coupler cancelation int32
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 YES/NO enum

User Manual 273
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 165 Coupler Outputs

Enable coupling B1 StEna stVal
Acting Coupling B1 Work stVal
Coupling not selected B1 NoSelect stVal
Coupling cancelled time B1 TmExcCancl stVal
Underfrequency side B B1 UFSideB stVal
Overfrequency side B B1 OFSideB stVal
Delay with comp. side B B1 DelayBSlip stVal
Advance with comp.side B B1 AdvBSlip stVal
Over Module side B B1 OAbsB stVal
Under Module side B B1 UAbsB stVal
Perm. Coup. without comp. B1 PermNoSlip stVal
Perm. Coup. with comp. B1 PermSlip stVal
Close order Coupling B1 CloseOrd stVal
6.2.1 Two breakers application

It is available an independent coupler function for a second breaker.
As in the first breaker, this unit has function to check the presence of voltage on both
sides of the breaker, and the test of the coupler conditions.
The voltage used is Vs2 and the voltage set in “Side A Phase Select” setting.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs for the second breaker. The
meaning of these data is the same as the first breaker.
 Node: PROT/RCOU2
 Outputs: Table 163 shows the function’s output data. They are similar to the first
breaker, but for the second one.
Table 166 Coupler settings breaker 2

CoEna Enabled 0 1 1 YES/NO enum
CoDifV Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
CoDifF Frequency difference (Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
CoDifA Angle difference (º) 0 180 1 float
CoTms Coupling Max.Time (s) 0 20 1 float
LogInSeCo Coupler selection Order int32
LogInNoSe Coupler deselection int32
LogInCaCo Coupler cancelation int32
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 YES/NO enum
Table 167 Coupler Outputs Breaker 2

Enable coupling B2 StEna stVal
Acting Coupling B2 Work stVal
Coupling not selected B2 NoSelect stVal
Coupling cancelled time B2 TmExcCancl stVal
Underfrequency side B B2 UFSideB stVal
Overfrequency side B B2 OFSideB stVal
Delay with comp. side B B2 DelayBSlip stVal
Advance with comp. side B2 AdvBSlip stVal
Over Module side B B2 OAbsB stVal
Under Module side B B2 UAbsB stVal
Perm. Coup. without comp. B2 PermNoSlip stVal
Perm. Coup. with comp. B2 PermSlip stVal
Close order Coupling B2 CloseOrd stVal

User Manual 274
AUTOMATISMS 
6.3 RECLOSER
The unit allows up to 4 reclosures to be effected. The first one can be single-pole or
three-pole, but the next 3 must be three-pole. In order to make the recloser as useful as
possible, the number of reclosures allowed is programmable (0 is not permitted).
There are different close times for each of the closures and for the first single-pole or
three-pole.
The recloser is put into service – out of service by means of a setting. Only when enabled
by setting can it be put into service-out of service by means of a command via
communications or the keyboard.
Programmable reclaim time following manual closure and following automatic closure.
The 4 closure counters (total, first, second and third closures) are stored in non-volatile
memory and can be viewed in the console and on the display. These counters can be set to 0
by command or by the keyboard.
The closure cycle can be started either by the unit's own protection trips or by external
trips from other protections.
The main recloser statuses are:
 Supervising status.
This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any
trips. If any trip occurs, the recloser is activated.
 Ongoing cycle status.

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip up to the closure of the
breaker and the elapse of the reclaim time (successful reclosure), or until all the
programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first case, the recloser
switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”.
 Definitive trip status.

The recloser’s final situation once it has run all the programmed attempts and the
breaker remains open due to the existence of a permanent fault. It only leaves this
status when the breaker is closed manually.
 Internal block status.

The status is reached as a result of different causes. The reclosure cycle cannot be
started nor can the termination of the cycle be provoked if the cycle is running. It is
cancelled by a breaker closure.
Definitions:
 Reclosable units.
These units are capable of initiating the reclosure process. By default, they are
overcurrent or distance units. The non-reclosable units are those whose trips do not
initiate the reclosure cycle (voltage, frequency, power units, etc). There is an input
“External trip” that can be one pole or three poles.
 Trips permitted following reclosure.

Each of the units that are blocked during the reclaim time following each reclosure are
programmed by means of "YES" or "NO".
6.3.1 Settings, signals and commands

The general settings used in the recloser (PROT/ZRREC node) are (see Table 168):

 Reclose mode. Indicates the reclose mode between:

User Manual 275
AUTOMATISMS 
 1 Pole. It allows a single closure only if the first trip is single-pole. In any
other case, it gives a definitive trip.
 3 Pole. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of
closures before giving the final trip. It forces all trips to be three-pole.
 1P/3P. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of
closures before giving the final trip. The first closure will be single-pole if
the first trip was single-pole and three-pole if it was three-pole. All other
closures of the cycle will be three-pole.
 Dependent. If the first trip is single-pole, it allows as many closures as there
are programmed in the number of closures before giving the final trip; while if
the first trip is three-pole, it only allows one closure.
 Configurable:3 The Reclose mode is selected with the logical inputs or commands:
“Enable/Disable 1P mode” and “Enable/Disable 3P mode”. When no option is
selected, the recloser is blocked.
 Reclose number. Indicates the maximum number allowed before the issue of the
definitive trip.
 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first three-pole trip
until the recloser issues a closure command
 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first single-pole
trip until the recloser issues a closure command
 Reclose 2 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the
recloser issues the second closure command
recloser issues the third closure command
recloser issues the fourth closure command
 Time after man. closing(s). Reclaim time following manual closure. The time
following the manual closure of the breaker, during which the existence of a
protection trip is monitored. In such a case, a definitive trip is triggered
instead of a change to supervising status.
 Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following three-
pole trip. This is the time following the automatic closure of the breaker due to
a three-pole trip, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored.
In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
 Reclaim time ground (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following
single-pole trip. This is the time following the automatic closure of the breaker
due to a single-pole trip, during which the existence of a protection trip is
monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to
supervising status.
 Incomplete sequence. Indicates whether the incomplete sequence function is enabled
or not.
 Incomplete sequence T (s). Indicates the maximum time for the completion of the
reclosure process.
 79 Blocking level input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the
recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is
not available.
 79 Blocking pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change
from deactivated to activated, blocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled
by setting; on the other hand this input is not available. Since firmware version
5.18.15.5, if recloser is blocked by pulse, when the input is set “Not assigned”,
the recloser is unblocked.
3
Available since firmware version 5.17.15.4 and ICD 6.1.13.30

User Manual 276
AUTOMATISMS 
 79 Unblock pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change
from deactivated to activated, unblocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled
by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
 Pause+Reset AR time input. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the
closure time.
 Pause input. Selects the signal which, when active, stops the closure time.
 Autoreclose sequence reset. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the
closure process. If the breaker is open, “Recloser Lock 52 open” is activated and
waits for it to be closed. If it is close, “Recloser Lock manual closing” is
activated. In any case, once closed, it waits for the reclaim time following
manual closure to return to supervising status.
 On line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from
deactivated to activated, the recloser goes to “On service”. The recloser must be
enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
 Out of line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change
from deactivated to activated, the recloser goes to “Out of service”. The recloser
must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available. Since
firmware version 5.18.15.5, if recloser is Out of line by pulse, when the input is
set “Not assigned”, the recloser is On line.
 Enable 1P mode3. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from
deactivated to activated, enables the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
"Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
 "1 Pole" when the 3P mode is not selected
 "1P/3P" when the 3P mode is not selected
 Disable 1P mode 3. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from
deactivated to activated, disable the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
 "3 Pole" when the 3P mode is selected
 "Blocked" when the 3P mode is not selected
 Enable 3P mode 3. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from
deactivated to activated, enables the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
 "3 Pole" when the 1P mode is not selected
 "1P/3P " when the 1P mode is selected
 Disable 3P mode 3. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from
deactivated to activated, disable the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
 "1 Pole" when the 1P mode is selected
 "Blocked" when the 1P mode is not selected

User Manual 277
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 168 General recloser settings

RecEna Enabled 0 1 1 NO/YES Enum
1 Pole
3 Pole
RecTyp Reclose mode 0 3 1 1P/3P Enum
Dependent
Configurable
UseCyc Reclose number 1 4 1 Int32
Rec1PhTms 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
Rec2PhTms Reclose 2 time (s) 1 600 1 float
Rec1GTms 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
PReSe3Tms Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s) 0 600 1 float
PReSe1Tms Reclaim time ground (s) 1 600 1 float
MaClSeTms Time after man. closing(s) 1 600 1 float
BlInSecEna Incomplete sequence 0 1 1 NO/YES enum
BlInSecTms Incomplete sequence T (s) 1 600 1 float
LogInReLB 79 Blocking level input Int32
LogInRePB 79 Blocking pulse input Int32
LogInRePUb 79 Unblock pulse input Int32
LogInTmRst Pause+Reset AR time input Int32
LogInTmPau Pause input Int32
LogInRst Autoreclose sequence reset Int32
LogInRPOn On line pulse input Int32
LogInRPOff Out of line pulse input Int32
LogIn1POn Enable 1P mode Int32
LogIn1POff Disable 1P mode Int32
LogIn3POn Enable 3P mode Int32
LogIn3POff Disable 3P mode Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO/YES Boolean
The general settings used for the supervising for synchronism (PROT/RLSS1 node) are (see
Table 169):
 Synchrocheck type. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.

 Check 3 pole first reclose. Three-phase closure 1 monitoring. Indicates whether
the first closure is to be monitored with synchronism.
 Check rest of autorecloses. Monitoring remaining closures. Indicates whether the
closures other than the first are to be monitored with synchronism.
 Sync. Delay Time (s). Synchronism timeout. This is the maximum time waited before
the synchronism grants permission before a three-phase closure. If closure
permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a closure command is
issued. On the other hand, if this time elapsed without permission being granted,
a definitive trip is triggered.
 External syncro. Permission. Logical external synchronism permission logic.
Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the existence of permission for
synchronism.
Table 169 Monitoring by synchronism settings

SynTyp Synchrocheck type Internal/External enum
Rec1SyEna Check 3pole first reclose NO/YES Boolean
RecSyEna Check rest of autorecloses NO/YES Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInExSy External syncro. Permission Int32

User Manual 278
AUTOMATISMS 
The settings used for the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node) are (see
Table 170):

 Delay time (s). This is the time, following the opening of the breaker that is
waited for the activation of the reference voltage signal to allow the reclosure.
It is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a
reclosure. E.g., to wait for the line voltage to disappear following a trip (e.g.,
if there were motors or batteries connected) before reconnecting the line.
 Minimum time (s). This is the minimum time during which the vref signal must be
seen to be active in order to consider the existence of reference voltage.
 Reference Voltage input. Logical Vref input. Selects the signal which, when
active, indicates the existence of reference voltage (Vref).
Table 170 Monitoring by Vref settings

VrefEna Enabled NO/YES enum
VrefWaTms Delay time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
VrefMinTms Minimum time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInVref Reference Voltage input Int32
Table 171 shows the output signal of the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1
node):
 Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.

 Blocked without Vref. Indicates blocking by absence of reference voltage.
Table 171 Monitoring by Vref outputs

Presence of Vref PresVref general
Blocked without Vref BlkVref general
The setting used for blocking a closure due to a failure in the breaker’s coils
(PROT/RTCS1 node) is (see Table 172):
 Block by Coil failure. Indicates whether the recloser blocking by failure in the
breaker’s coils is enabled or not.
Table 172 Closure block settings

ClBlTCF Block by Coil failure NO/YES Boolean
Signals
The recloser’s output signals are in the PROT/ZRREC1 node and are shown in Table 173
and Table 174.
The general recloser signals are:
 Recloser in service. Indicates whether it is enabled and not locked by an external

blocking input. Internal blocking signals don´t affect this signal. When the
recloser is disabled by setting, the recloser´s signals don´t activate.
 Recloser in standby. Indicates that it is in standby or supervising.

User Manual 279
AUTOMATISMS 
 Recloser Blocked. Indicates that it is locked. If the recloser is out of service,

this signal is activated. If the recloser is on line, this signal is activated by
internal and external block.
 Definitive trip. Indicates that it is in the definitive trip. It´s activated by
maximum reclose number or a trip with the recloser blocked.
 Definitive Trip+Ext blocked. Indicates that it is in definitive trip and external
block. It includes trips with the recloser out of service or blocked.
 Reclose command. Automatic breaker closure command.
 79 in progress. Active from the moment the breaker is opened by a trip until the
monitoring or definitive trip status is reached.
 Reclosing 1 in progress. During the closure cycle 1. As of the opening of the
breaker by the first trip or until supervising is reached following the reclaim
time or trip which leads to it being blocked (by Definitive T.) or a new cycle is
produced.
 Reclosing 1 1P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, if only one pole is open
by a single-pole trip.
 Reclosing 1 3P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, the three poles are open
by a three-pole trip.
breaker by a three-pole trip during the reclaim time following the first reclosure
until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
breaker by a three-pole trip during the reclaim time following the second
reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
breaker by a three-pole trip during the reclaim time following the second
reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
 Safety time. Following the closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted
until supervising is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
 Safety time manual closing. Following the automatic closure of the breaker, the
reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered or a new closure cycle is
initiated.
 Safety time reclosing. Following the manual closure of the breaker, the reclaim
time is counted until supervising is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
 Safety time 1st reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the first
closure, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered, a new closure
cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 2nd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the second
closure, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered, a new closure
cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 3rd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the third
closure, the reclaim time is counted under supervising is entered or the
definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 4th reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the fourth
closure, the reclaim time is counted under supervising is entered or the
definitive trip is triggered.
 Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.
 Recloser paused. Indicates that the recloser is in pause in the closure time
counter.
 Reclosing Started. Indicates that the reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 1 Started. Indicates that the first reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 2 Started. Indicates that the second reclosure process has started.

User Manual 280
AUTOMATISMS 
 Reclosing 3 Started. Indicates that the third reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 4 Started. Indicates that the fourth reclosure process has started.
 Successful Reclosing. Indicates that the reclosure process was completed
successfully.
 Breaker Reclosing ongoing. Indicates that the breaker is reclosing.
 Prepare 3 pole trip. Indicates that the following trips will be three-pole.
 If the recloser is enabled by setting, it happens when:
 The Autoreclose mode is 3 Poles
 The Autoreclose mode is 1P/3P or Dependent 3 Poles and the first
trip has happened.
 The recloser is blocked
 The recloser is paused by absence of Vref
 The fault has changed from single-pole to three-pole.
 If the recloser is disabled by setting, it happens when:
 The “Single Pole Trip” is disabled by setting (node ZPMPT)
 The input “Force three pole” is activated
 Pole trip allowed. Indicates that single-pole trip is allowed. It happens if the
Autoreclose mode is 1 Pole, 1P/3P or Dependent and the recloser is “in standby”.
 Last pole trip. Indicates the last trip has been single-pole.
 Evolving fault. Indicates the fault has evolved from single-pole to three-pole
 Mode 1P Enabled.3 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 1P reclose.
 Mode 3P Enabled.3 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 3P reclose.

User Manual 281
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 173 General recloser outputs

Recloser in service Auto general
Recloser in standby RestST general
79 in progress RecCyc general
Successful Reclosing RecOK general
Definitive Trip DefTrip general
Reclose Command OpCls general
Recloser Blocked Blk general
Reclosing 1 in progress RecCyc1 general
Reclosing 1 1P in progress RecCycMon1 general
Reclosing 1 3P in progress RecCycTr1 general
Safety time SecTime general
Safety time manual closing ManClSecT general
Safety time reclosing RecSecT general
Safety time 1st reclosing Rec1SecT general
Safety time 2nd reclosing Rec2SecT general
Safety time 3rd reclosing Rec3SecT general
Safety time 4th reclosing Rec4SecT general
Recloser paused Pause general
Reclosing Started RecPrIn general
Reclosing 1 Started RecPrIn1 general
Definitive Trip+Ext blocked DefTripBlk general
Breaker Reclosing ongoing BrRec general
Prepare 3 pole trip Op3pol general
Pole trip allowed EnaPol general
Last pole trip OpPol general
Evolving fault EvOp general
Mode 1P Enabled Rec1PEn general
Mode 3P Enabled Rec3PEn general
The recloser blocking signals are:
 79 Internal Block. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to any
cause.
 79 Block Definitive Trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to
a definitive trip.
 79 Block 52 open. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a manual
break.
 79 Block Trip Exceeded. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to an
excessive number of trips.
 79 Block switch on fault. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to
a switch onto fault, i.e., a trip is produced during the reclaim time following a
manual closure.
 79 Block 3P trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a three-
pole trip, in the single-pole modes. Recloser Lock No Syncrocheck. Indicates that
the recloser is in internal block due to the absence of syncrcheck.
 79 Block without Vref. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the
absence of vref.
 79 Block Pole discordance. If the discordance function acts, the reclosure cycle
is blocked.
 79 Block Close Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to
the close failure. Related to the breaker monitoring.

User Manual 282
AUTOMATISMS 
 79 Block opening Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to
the open failure. Related to the breaker monitoring.
 79 External Block. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to any
cause.
 79 External Block Comms. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to
command.
 79 External Block Input. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to
logical input.
 79 Block Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to reclosing
start failure.
 79 Block A Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole A
reclosing start failure.
 79 Block B Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole B
 79 Block C Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole C
 79 Block End of cycle. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to the end of
the reclosing cycle.
 79 Block manual closing. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual
reclosing.
 79 Block manual opening. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual
opening.
 79 Block Trip In Safety time. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to a trip
in safety time.
 79 Block Incomplete sequence. Indicates that the recloser is blocked because the
sequence time is exceeded.
 79 Block TC Failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to breaker circuit
supervision failure.
Table 174 Recloser block outputs

79 Internal Block BlkInt general
79 Block Definitive Trip BlkIntDeTr general
79 Block 52 open BlkIntOpBr general
79 Block Trip Exceeded BlkInExcTr general
79 Block switch on fault BlkIntSOF general
79 Block 3P trip BlkInt3PTr general
79 Block No Syncronism BlkINoSync general
79 Block without Vref BlkINoVref general
79 Block Pole discordance BlkIPoleD general
79 Block Close failure BlkIClFail general
79 Block opening failure BlkIOpFail general
79 External Block BlkExt general
79 External Block Comms BlkExtComs general
79 External Block Input BlkExtDI general
79 Block Start failure BlkIntInFa general
79 Block A Start failure BlkIAInFa general
79 Block B Start failure BlkIBInFa general
79 Block C Start failure BlkICInFa general
79 Block End of cycle BlkICyEnd general
79 Block manual closing BlkIManCl general
79 Block manual opening BlkIManOp general
79 Block Trip In Safety time BlkITrMaSe general
79 Block Incomplete sequence BlkInSec general
79 Block TC Failure BlkClsTrip general

User Manual 283
AUTOMATISMS 
Commands
The recloser commands are in the node PROT/ZRREC1:
 "DOrdReEn" . It enables/Disables the recloser. This command only operates, when

the recloser is enabled by setting. It is maintained at shutdown.
 "DOrdReclEn" It enables/Disables the recloser in local mode. This command only
operates, when the recloser is enabled by setting and in local mode. It is
maintained at shutdown.
 BlkRec. It blocks/unblocks the recloser. It is not maintained at shutdown.
 "DOrdRecIni". It resets the recloser counters.
 "1P mode".3 It enables/disables the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
"Configurable". With these commands the recloser mode can be 1 P, 1P/3P or
blocked.
 "3P mode".3 It enables/disables the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is
"Configurable". With these commands the recloser mode can be 3 P, 1P/3P or
blocked.
6.3.1.1 Reclosure counters

There are independent reclosure counters for the first (single-pole and three-pole),
second, third, fourth reclosures and for the totals.
They are stored in a non-volatile memory and displayed in the statistical data
(communications and display).
These counters can be set to 0 by command.
6.3.1.2 Excessive number of trips

It allows the number of trips within the time to be limited.
A signal is generated the trip limit is exceeded (“Reclose number” setting) within a
set time (“Trips exceeded window (min)” setting in the CBOU node).
It sets recloser to “Internal block”, signalling “Excessive nbr trips” and “Definitive
trip”.
6.3.2 General operation

After a certain period following the introduction of voltage (or after resetting), the
recloser enters in one of the states:
 If the recloser is enabled:

 Supervising status when the breaker is closed (passing through manual closure)
or
 Manual Opening (manual opening block) if the breaker is open.
 If the recloser is disabled or there is a block signal, the reclosure cycle is not
launched and it remains in the blocked status
Figure 140 Recloser initialization

User Manual 284
AUTOMATISMS 
It remains in the Manual Opening and Definitive Trip statuses until the breaker is closed
manually.
Following the closure:
 If the breaker does not open during the block (or reclaim) time, it goes to
Supervising status.
 If there is a manual opening, it enters Manual Opening Block.
 If there is an opening by a protection, it enters Definitive Trip Block.
If the protection acts but the breaker does not open (or the trip remains active) during
the programmed time, it enters internal block due to opening failure and the
corresponding signal is activated. It leaves this status following a manual opening, a
breaker closure command or a reset.
The Supervising (or standby) status is maintained until:
 There is a manual opening.

 The protection acts and opens the breaker, initiating the cycle when applicable.
The cycle consists of 1 to 3 reclosures.
During each cycle a programmed time is observed and the breaker closes. If the breaker
does not trip due to a protection within the reclaim time, the Supervising (standby)
status is entered. If it does, the following closure is initiated. If this was the last,
the Definitive Trip is initiated.
If, following the action of the protection, the breaker does not open in the preset time
or the relay continues to trip, the internal block begins to operate. If, following a
closure and while the safety time is being counted, there is a manual opening. In this
case, it enters Manual Opening Block and exits the cycle.
If, while the reclosure time is being counted, a manual closure is produced, the recloser
aborts the reclosure cycle and enters “Manual closure”. Following the corresponding
reclaim time, it returns to standby.
If, once closed, a reset is received, it also enters manual closure.
The action of the external block prevents the cycle from being entered, or the exit from
any ongoing cycle. If the breaker opens while the block is in effect, it enters
Definitive Trip block.
If the synchrocheck function is enabled and the synchrocheck monitoring setting is set to
“YES”, this function must issue closure permission in order for the closure relay to be
activated.
The figures below show the sequence of events for a reclosure which has been programmed
for three reclosure attempts (TR1, TR2 and TR3, respectively), with a reclaim time of
Tsec, for different situations:
a.- Successful first reclosure.

User Manual 285
AUTOMATISMS 
Once the Supervising status has been reached, a new trip causes a new cycle to begin and
reclosure 1 is started once more, as shown below:
b.- Successful second reclosure.
c.- Successful third reclosure.
d.- Changes to definitive trip after exhausting the number of programmed reclosures.

User Manual 286
AUTOMATISMS 
e.- Changes to definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time following a manual
closure.
6.3.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the
protection nodes.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2 and R3 post-trip reclosure permission mask is
checked with each trip. If they are not enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of the breaker), the units with
reclosure permission are taken into account in order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped
units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as correspond to the minimum number allowed
for the units involved.
That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3, reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are
allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to
enter “Definitive trip block”.
Reclosable trips
These are trips that are capable of initiating the reclosure cycle is programmed
accordingly. In general, they are trips corresponding to the overcurrent and distance
units, as well as the external trip inputs.
Each trip’s programming options are:
 Reclosure following a trip set to “YES”

In order to allow reclosure following a specific trip type, the reclosure permission
settings must be set to “YES”.
If various units issue a trip order during a fault and at least one of the tripped units
has reclosure permission, the reclosure cycle is initiated, unless one of the units is
set to produce a 79 block.
 Reclosure following a trip set to “NO”

If, in the event of simultaneous trips, reclosure is not to be produced by a specific
unit but rather the units with permission are to have precedence, i.e., the reclosure
cycle is to be initiated.
Likewise, there are various unit block inputs (for status and for pulses), thus making it
possible to transfer any signal that is to be used to avoid the reclosure to this input.
Non-reclosable trips

User Manual 287
AUTOMATISMS 
If a non-reclosable trip is produced (27, 59, 59N, 81, 81R), the reclosure unit will not
launch the reclosure sequence for this cause and, depending on whether the reclosure
block mask has been set to “YES”, it will force the recloser to enter the definitive trip
status.
If the trip does not open the breaker (because it has not given rise to the general
trip), the recloser will remain in its current status.
Non-reclosable unit’s can be made to produce a reclosure by means of the connection to

the trip output corresponding to the “Configurable autoreclose” input.
Recloser block due to trip
This is used when a specific unit is not to produce a reclosure following a trip and when
this unit is to prevail over those with permissions in the event of simultaneous trips.
If this mask is not used, two units may trip simultaneously and the recloser may reclose
due to one of the units being reclosable.
In the event of the non-reclosable unit tripping on its own, the breaker will open and
remain in a blocked status.
In addition to these masks, the relay has logic inputs that allow the recloser to be
blocked. Through the logical assignment of internal signals to these inputs, the user can
modify the operation of the recloser.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable this
unit’s reclosure due to trip permissions. The reference is “ReC1Perm”. The setting is
configured as a menu of options.
The PacFactory has a drop-down menu showing the possible combinations. These options are
different between the distance units that generates single-pole trip and the units that
only produces three-pole trip:
Table 175 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (tripolar units)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed
1 Reclose 1 Only the first reclose is allowed.
2 Reclose 2 Only the second reclose is allowed.
3 Reclose 1-2 The first and second recloses are allowed.
4 Reclose 3 Only the thrird reclose is allowed.
5 Reclose 1-3 The first and thrird recloses are allowed.
6 Reclose 2-3 The second and thrird recloses are allowed.
7 Reclose 1-2-3 All recloses are allowed
8 Reclose 4 Only the fourth reclose is allowed.
9 Reclose 1-4 The first and fourth recloses are allowed.
10 Reclose 2-4 The second and fourth recloses are allowed.
11 Reclose 1-2-4 The first, second and fourth recloses are allowed.
12 Reclose 3-4 The thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
13 Reclose 1-3-4 The first, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
14 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
15 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 176 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with one pole trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
1 Reclose 1 (1P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a one pole trip of that unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a three poles trip of that unit
3 Reclose 1 (1P/3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
5 Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 The first (if it is one pole),the second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
The first (if it is three poles), the second, third and fourth recloses are
6 Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4
allowed
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed

User Manual 288
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 177 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with three poles trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
Table 178 Reclosure permissions following trip (in each protection node)

ReclPerm Reclosure permission 0 255 1 Int32
Figure 141 Recloser start

User Manual 289
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 142 Example of trip and reclosure permission operation

User Manual 290
AUTOMATISMS 
6.3.4 Fault type selection

Depending on which unit has provoked the initiation of the reclosure process, the
reclosure time to elapse before the generation of the reclosure signal, as well as the
reclaim time following the reclosure, is selected.
Internal Trips
Depending on the type of trip produced, there are 2 types of reclosure:
 Reclosure following a single-pole trip. This trip is produced by distance zone 1

and teleprotection unit.
 Reclosure following a three-pole trip (the rest).
If a single-pole trip evolves to a three-pole trip before the reclosing, the times are
restarted in accordance with the three-pole trip.
External trips
Includes the following signals:
 DPE - External protection trip: Can be single-pole or three-pole.

 DPR-Reclosable programmable trip. An internal signal which is wired for logics and
whose activation allows the reclosure cycle to be initiated.
Upon the opening of the breaker and once it has been determined whether the fault is
single-pole or three-pole, a reclosure time that is programmed in accordance with the
chosen setting is launched.
6.3.5 Breaker open timeout

Once the relay has tripped (activation of the general trip), the recloser waits during
the opening failure time, till the breaker opens (by contact) and the trip disappears. If
the breaker does not open upon the conclusion of this time, “opening failure block” is
entered.
If during this programmed period of time the breaker opens, the ongoing cycle is
initiated and the “79CC-Ongoing cycle” signal is activated.
This signal will remain active until the cycle terminates upon its completion and a
standby or block status is entered.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration
to detect the opening. If only the 52a (NO) input is programmed, this signal at zero will
be used as an open status.
6.3.6 Number of reclosures available

The total number of reclosures can be selected by settings.
The reclosures which are to be possible following the tripping of a specific unit can
also be selected.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2, R3 and R4 permission mask is checked with each
trip. If they are not enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of 52), the units with reclosure
permission are taken into account in order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped
units’ masks and allows as many reclosures as correspond to the minimum number allowed
for the units involved. That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3,
reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.

User Manual 291
AUTOMATISMS 
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to
enter “Definitive trip block”.
All the trips (reclosable, non-reclosable and block) are checked up to the moment in
which the breaker opens.
Any block trips which appear are sent directly to a blocked recloser.
If there are only reclosable trips, the reclosure cycle is begun with the time of the
first reclosable produced by the trip.
Examples of operation.
The total number of reclosure cycles is set to 2 and Autoreclose mode to Dependent.
Example 1:
 Unit 50 trips (three-pole trip with reclosure available in all except the first
one). Recloser does not reclose as the reclosure permission is not allowed in CC1.
Recloser would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 2:
 52 is closed and reclaim time following manual closure is initiated.

 Unit 51N trips (with R1, R2 and R3 reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79
recloses with “Three-pole Reclose 1 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s)” is running, unit 50 trips (with
R2 and R3 reclosure permission) Reclosure R2 is not performed because the first
trips has been three-pole. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 3:
 In standby, Zone 1 single-pole trips (with R1 reclosure permission for single-pole

trips). 79 recloses with “single-pole Reclose 1 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip
happens (with R2 and R3 reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses
with “Reclose 2 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip
happens (with R2 and R3 reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses
with “Reclose 3 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip.
79 recloses with “Reclose 3 time (s)”. Recloser does not reclose because the
maximum reclosure number is exceeded. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-
Definitive Trip”
Example 4:
 While in standby, a 50 trio with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens,

another 50N with R2 permission, programmed without blocking, trip is produced.
 In this case, the 50 trip would take precedence, provoking the reclosure cycle.
Example 5:
 While in standby, a 50 trio with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens,

another 50N programmed with blocking trip is produced.
 In this case, when the 50N trip is produced and the breaker opens, the reclosure
cycle would be interrupted and “Internal Block-Definitive Trip” would be entered.
6.3.7 Reference voltage monitoring

This is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a
reclosure. For example, to wait for the disappearance of the line voltage following a

User Manual 292
AUTOMATISMS 
trip (if there were motors or batteries connected to the line) or for a specific network
condition (power fluctuations, etc).
This monitoring is equivalent to a pause signal that halts the reclosure cycle during the
VREF timeout.
It operates as follows:
 Once the breaker has opened and the trip has dropped out, the reclosure cycle is
initiated and the reclosure time is launched.
 In the absence of VREF, “VREF timeout” is launched, during which the VREF signal
should be activated to allow the continuation of the reclosure process.
 If the VREF signal does not appear prior to the elapse of this time, the internal
79 block due to absence of VREF” status is entered.
 This status is cancelled by means of a closure or following the activation of the
recloser reset input.
Figure 143 Reference voltage monitoring scheme
6.3.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time

The digital “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is used to reset the reclosure time
counter to zero.
When the “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is activated, the recloser time
counter (dead time) is reset to zero and the 79 is halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count is restarted.
6.3.9 Pausing of reclosure time

The digital “Pause input” input is used to pause the reclosure time counter.
When this input is activated, the reclosure time counter (dead time) is halted until this
input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count continues.

User Manual 293
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 144 Reclosure time with pause and restart scheme
6.3.10 Incomplete sequence block

The two pause inputs can be used to wait for a certain signal, although the cycle can be
extended indefinitely. It is thus important to prevent the recloser from remaining
permanently in the current cycle.
This timed is used to check that the recloser has exceeded a defined time without issuing
a closure command nor becoming blocked or resetting, thus causing the recloser to enter a
block by incomplete sequence status.
Figure 145 Block by incomplete sequence scheme
6.3.11 Synchronism monitoring

It only applies to three-pole trips. If the trip is single-pole, the synchronism is not
checked before reclosure command.
After a three-pole trip, if a specific reclosure is set to “monitored by synchronism” and

once the reclosure time has elapsed, there is a maximum timeout equivalent to the “Sync.
Delay Time (s)” setting in which the “synchronism permission” signal is to activate. Upon
the issue of the synchronism permission the reclosure command is activated.

User Manual 294
AUTOMATISMS 
If synchronism permission is not activated, the “Block due to lack of synchronism” status
is entered.
The first and the rest of the reclosures can be set to monitoring by synchronism by means
of a setting. This allows the first reclosures to be carried out quickly and without the
need to check for synchronism, in the case of specific faults, and normal reclosures for
the rest.
Settings can be used to establish whether the synchronism is to check the relay’s
functioning or that or an external input.
There is a setting within the synchronism unit to enable monitoring by synchronism for
the recloser and for manual closing. As they are independent settings, by disabling
function 25 it is possible to monitor the reclosure with the external synchronism input.
If the setting “Synchrocheck type” is internal, the recloser waits the permission signal
is activated. If the setting is external, the recloser waits the activation of the
“External syncro. Permission” input.
6.3.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring

If the closure block by trip circuit monitoring is set to “YES”, when the reclosure
command is activated while the trip circuit monitoring logic’s “trip circuit failure”
signal, the closure command is not received and "Internal block due to failure in the SPV
trip circuit" is signalled.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the
reclaim time.
6.3.13 52 closure timeout

Once the relay has issued a reclosure command (Activation of the 79 output-reclosure
command), the breaker should close during the closure failure timeout (by contact), If
the breaker has not closed upon the conclusion of the timeout, "79 block due to closure
failure" s entered and the reclosure command is deactivated. If there is a trip during
that time, the reclose command is cancelled and a definitive trip is generated.
This status is cancelled by means of a manual closure.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration
to detect the closure.
If only the 52b (NC) is programmed, this denied signal will be used.
6.3.14 Recloser statuses

During its operation, the recloser enters through various statuses that are grouped
together as stables and transitory.
6.3.14.1 Stable statuses

The "Recloser" function has 5 stable statuses, i.e., statuses in which it can remain
indefinitely until something occurs to cancel the status. They are:
 Out of service.
 Supervising, standby or reset.
 Manual opening.
 Internal block. Includes the Definitive trip.
 External block.
 Reclosure successful

User Manual 295
AUTOMATISMS 
6.3.14.1.1 Out of service

It will be placed out of service by settings (Enabled “NO”).
If it is in service, it can be placed out of service by pressing the R key on the

keyboard or by means of a command or logical input.
This status is exited when the function is enabled by a setting or command (R key or
command or logical input). The transitory manual closure setting is entered if the
breaker is closed at this time. If the breaker is open, internal block (due to manual
opening) is entered.
The functioning is similar when the relay lights and the reclosure setting is set to
“YES”.
6.3.14.1.2 Supervising or standby

This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence
of any trips. If any trips occur, the recloser is activated.
This status is entered:
 Whenever the breaker is closed for a period that exceeds the reclaim time
(following a manual closure or following a trip).
 If the breaker is closed and in the external block status, when the block
signal is cleared.
This status is exited:
 By the action of the protection and the subsequent opening of the breaker. If
reclosure is to follow, the cycle is initiated. If not, Definitive trip is
entered.
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. Manual Opening is entered.
6.3.14.1.3 Manual opening

This status is entered by a manual opening command (by command, contact or other
causes, but not by a trip).
This status is cancelled when the 52 is closed manually (by command, contact, etc.,
by not by reclosure).
Figure 146 Manual opening
6.3.14.1.4 Internal block

There is a general internal block status with different signalling, in accordance
with the cause. This status is entered as result of different causes:
 Opening failure
 Closure failure
 Manual opening

User Manual 296
AUTOMATISMS 
 Three-phase Trip
 Definitive trip
 Incomplete sequence
The reclosure cycle is not started in this status. The cycle is abandoned if it has
already been started and Definitive Trip is signalled if the breaker has opened as
a result of a protection trip.
This status is cancelled by the closure of the breaker following the elapse of the
reclaim time.
In all cases, a generic “internal block” signal is activated, in addition to a

specific signal identifying the cause of the block. In those cases where the block
status occurs after a trip and the opening of the 52, “definitive trip block” is
also indicated.
Figure 147 Block scheme

User Manual 297
AUTOMATISMS 
Internal block as a result of an opening fault
This status is entered if, following the elapse of the breaker fault time after a
trip, the breaker remains closed.
This status is cancelled when the breaker opens. The opening failure time is the
same as that of the opening fault with contact function.
Figure 148 Opening failure block scheme
DGITAL SIGNAL
General trip Time
DIGITAL SIGNAL S RECLAIM T

OPENING
52 DIGITAL SIGNAL
Phase A open command Recloser Lock opening failure
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL R
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)
Internal block as a result of a closure failure
This status is entered of any of the following conditions are met:
 If the breaker remains open following the elapse of the breaker closure
failure time after a closure command. “Definitive trip” is also signalled.
 If the trip circuit failure block is enabled. If, when activating the closure
command, the command activates the trip and closure circuits’ monitoring
logic’s "trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not issued and
“closure command blocked" is signalled. Following the elapse of the closure
failure time, the block by closure failure status is entered.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse
of the reclaim time.
Internal block by open breaker (manual opening)
This status is entered by a manual opening or by means of a breaker command when

the 79 is in standby or in a current cycle.
It is cancelled by a manual breaker closure. The transitory Manual Closure status

is entered.
Definitive trip
This status is activated following a trip that fails to produce a reclosure due to
a 79 block or for having reached the end of the cycle with the fault intact:
 A trip is produced within a period that is shorter than the reclaim time
following a manual breaker closure.
 A trip is produced in a period that is shorter than the reclaim time following
the last reclosure.
 A protection trip is produced while the block status is active.
 A protection trip is produced while the recloser is out of service.
 An excessive number of trips are produced within a defined time.
 The recloser does not issue a closure command due a voltage monitoring failure
(synchronism).
 The recloser issues a closure command and the recloser does not close in the
closure failure time.
 The recloser does not issue a closure command due to an interlock (for
example, a trip circuit failure) and the recloser does not close in the
closure failure time.
 The voltage presence conditions are not met during a current cycle.
 If a trip does not produce a reclosure due the programming of a block (with
the block taking precedence over other functions with permissions) or the
absence of the programming of a reclosure (unless there is another function
with reclosure permission trips simultaneously).

User Manual 298
AUTOMATISMS 
 A switch onto fault function trip following a manual closure.

 By incomplete sequence.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes.
 Manual breaker closure, following which the transitory MC (Manual Closure)

status is activated.
 Reception of recloser’s reset input.
Figure 149 Internal block statuses diagram
Incomplete sequence block.
See the “Incomplete sequence block” section.
6.3.14.1.5 External block

This status is activated by:
 Activation of the recloser’s logical block input.

 Reception of a block command. There are block and unblock commands.
No cycles are started while the block is active and any cycles which had already
been started are terminated. “internal 79 block”, “external 79 block by
communication” or “external 79 block by input” is signalled. “Definitive trip +
Trip & extern.block” is also signalled if the breaker has been opened by a
protection trip (general trip) or by an external protection.

User Manual 299
AUTOMATISMS 
6.3.14.1.6 Successful reclosure

Successful reclosure is signalled when, following the issue of a closure command
and the closure of the three 52 poles, the reclaim time elapses without a new trip
being produced.
The “successful reclosure” signal is activated and remains so until the relay trips
once again.
6.3.14.2 Transitory statuses

Transitory statues are those statuses in which the system cannot remain for longer
than a specific time.
6.3.14.2.1 Manual closure

This status is activated as a result of a manual breaker closure or by means of a
command (not be reclosure), independently of whether a cycle is in progress. It
maximum duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following manual closure.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes:
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. An internal block due to manual
opening is activated.
 Due to the action of the protection. An internal block due to definitive trip
is activated.
 Following the elapse of the safety time. Standby is activated.
 Due to the activation of the external block input or block command. An
external block is activated.
 Due to the action of the protection following an opening failure (52 does not
open or the unit remains tripped). An internal block due to an opening fault
is activated.
Figure 150 Reclaim time following manual closure
6.3.14.2.2 First closure. Phase 1: Timed.

This is reached at the start of the cycle. Its maximum duration is equivalent to
the first closure time. If monitoring by synchronism is activated, the synchronism
timeout is added, if there is no synchronism upon the termination of the reclosure
time count. There are different settings for the first single-pole and three-pole
reclosing.
At the same time as the closure time count, the monitoring by VREF (during a
maximum “VREF timeout” period) and by synchronism.
This is cancelled by:
 Manual breaker closure. “Internal block” is activated and “Temporary block by

manual closure” is signalled.

User Manual 300
AUTOMATISMS 
 Following the elapse of the reclosure time. Phase 2 of the closure is entered.
 Activation of the external block input. “External block” is activated.
 Failure to meet the reference voltage (VREF) monitoring conditions. An
internal block is activated and Internal block due to absence of VREF and
Definitive trip is signalled.
 Failure to meet the synchronism monitoring conditions. An internal block is
activated and Internal block due to synchronism fault and Definitive trip is
signalled.
Figure 151 Reclosure line scheme
Figure 152 Opening timeout scheme

User Manual 301
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 153 Reclosure timeout scheme
6.3.14.2.3 First closure. Phase 2: closure command.

This is reached once the first closure timed is complied with. It activates the
closure command and increments the closures meter.
It is cancelled:
 Because the breaker has closed in the permitted time. Phase 3 entered.
 Because the permitted time has elapsed without the closure of the breaker. An
internal block is activated and “Internal block due to closure failure” and
“Definitive trip” is signalled. The relay’s Breaker failure due to contact
signal is also activated.
6.3.14.2.4 First closure. Phase 3: breaker closure.

This is reached following the closure command issued in phase 2 when the breaker
has closed. It maximum duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following
automatic closure. It deactivates the closure signal.
It is cancelled:
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. “Internal block” is activated and
“Internal block by manual opening” is signalled.
 Due to a protection trip. The second reclosure process is entered, phase 1.
 Because the block time has elapsed without the opening of the breaker. Standby
is activated.
A low current permanent fault may cause tripping following the elapse of the safety
period. To avoid, in the event of all the reclosures being first reclosures and no
definitive trip is produced, the automatic extension of the timeout due the pick up
of a unit capable of producing a reclosable general trip in standby (“Trip
permission with 79 in standby” set to “YES”) until reset or a trip is produced.

User Manual 302
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 154 Closure scheme
Figure 155 Timeout following closure scheme
6.3.14.2.5 Second closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure
originated by the first closure. Its functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.)
is the same as that of the first closure.
6.3.14.2.6 Third closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure
originated by the second closure. Its functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.)
is the same as that of the first closure.
6.3.14.2.7 Ongoing cycle

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip and the opening of
the breaker up to the closure of the breaker and the elapse of the safety period
(successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been
unsuccessfully executed. In the first case, the recloser switches to “supervising”
and, in the second, to “definitive trip”
If, during the operating cycle, a manual order (or command) is given to the circuit
breaker, the recloser suspends the cycle and switches "internal block due to manual
opening" or "manual closure".
These same applies if a reset signal is received.

User Manual 303
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 156 Ongoing cycle scheme
6.3.15 Application with two breakers

When having a double breaker configuration, both breakers trip at the same time. With
this function, the recloser operation mode with the two breakers can be selected between:
 Both breakers reclose simultaneously.

 Combine the closings following a programmed sequence.
 Automatically, only closes one of the breakers.
In any of those cases, once the security time has passed, both breakers must be closed in
order to finish the reclosing successfully.
After a single phase trip, the recloser waits for the opening of only one pole in both
breakers. If more than one pole opens, it blocks and signalizes definitive trip. If the
tripped pole does not open in both breakers, after waiting a time, it blocks by open
failure. To begin the process, both breakers have to open.
If both breakers open correctly, the reclosing cycle begins after the time set, to close
the breaker selected with the closing sequence. If a single phase fault is detected, it
can evolve to a three phase fault during the ongoing cycle. At this moment, a new three
phase reclosing waiting time begins to give closing permission. If, when giving a
reclosing permission, the breaker is open or tripped, it blocks.
The recloser considers that a breaker is blocked, if a manual opening has been made or if
it is blocked by a digital input or setting. In this case, it does not operate, and will
only be able to operate the other breaker if the setting "Permit closure 52_x with 52_y
blocked" says so.
With manual closing of a breaker, the recloser is blocked by manual closing , counting
the safety time after manual closing.
The "Closing sequence" defines how the recloser acts:
 Brk1. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 1.
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of
them is not open,then it will block by open failure and not continue reclosure
cycle.
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without
synchronism). Breaker 2 is not closed.
 Brk2. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 2.It is same as
above, but breakers are exchanged.
 Brk1 and Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for both breakers
simultaneously.
them is not open,then it will block by open failure and not continue reclosure
cycle.
 Generates close command for both breakers and wait for closure (with or without
separate synchronism) to pass safety time. If one of them gives closure failure,
the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is checked
 NO:The closing sequence continues considering only the other
breaker
 YES: Recloser is locked and it will block by close failure.
 If either closed, it starts counting recloser safety time.

User Manual 304
AUTOMATISMS 
 If recloser safety time ends up without trips and breaker is

closed, it returns to standby.
 If new protection trip is produced, a new closing sequence is
started
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block
and not continue reclosure cycle
 Brk1 then Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 1. When the
reclose cycle has finished successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2
close command is generated, once the sequence time since the breaker 1 close
command has finished
them is not open, then it will block by open failure and not continue reclosure
cycle
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without
synchronism). When recloser safety time ends up without trips and breaker 1 is
closed (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2 close command is generated. If one
of them gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is
checked
 NO: Closing sequence continues considering only the breaker 2
checking synchronism 2.
 YES: Recloser is locked and it will block by close failure.
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block
and not continue reclosure cycle
 Brk2 then Brk1. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 2. When the
reclose cycle has finished successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 1
close command is generated, once the sequence time since the breaker 2 close
command has finished. It is same as above, but breakers are exchanged.
If the close sequence is "Brk1 then Brk2" and breaker 1 is blocked or in manual opening,
the breaker 2 close condition (ReCond2) uses the first breaker´s setting (ReCond1). In
case of "Brk2 then Brk1" and breaker 2 is blocked or in manual opening, the breaker 1
close condition (ReCond1) uses the second breaker´s setting (ReCond2).
It has independent settings and outputs (logical node PROT/SECRREC)
Table 179 shows the settings of this function:
 Select 2 breakers
It allows operating with two breakers (“YES”). In that case, follows the settings
detailed bellow to include a second breaker in the closing scheme.
 Closing sequence
Definition of the breaker or breakers that will reclose automatically. In the case
of having to reclose two breakers, it can be done simultaneously or following a
sequence.
 Sequence time (ms):

Time passed between the first breaker reclosing order and the second, following the
aforementioned closing sequence. Used only by the "Brk1 then Brk2" and "Brk2 then
Brk1" sequences.
 Block by Br2 Close Fail

When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the
breaker 1.
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 1 close failure, it allows following the
sequence selected for closing the breaker 2.
 Block by Br1 Close Fail

User Manual 305
AUTOMATISMS 
When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the
breaker 2.
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 2 close failure, it allows following the
sequence selected for closing the breaker 1
 Br1 Permission if 2 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2 is
blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2
is blocked.
 Br2 Permission if 1 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1 is
blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1
is blocked.
 52_1 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 1.
 52_2 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 2.
 Enable Events record

Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to
“NO”, the function’s protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the
function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 179 Two breaker recloser settings

SelBr2 Select 2 breakers NO/YES Boolean
Brk1 (0)
Brk2 (1)
ClSec Closing sequence Brk1 and Brk2 (2) enum
Brk1 then Brk2 (3)
Brk2 then Brk1 (4)
SecTmms Sequence time (ms): 50 600000 10 Int32
BlkF1 Block by Br2 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
BlkF2 Block by Br1 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
Cl1Br2LcEna Br1 Permission if 2 blocked NO/YES Boolean
Cl2Br1LcEna Br2 Permission if 1 blocked NO/YES Boolean
BlkBr1 52_1 reclosing block Int32
BlkBr2 52_2 reclosing block Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record NO/YES Boolean
Table 180 shows the outputs of the breaker 1:
 Reset sequence.
It stops the closing sequence and is activated in the following situations:
 The recloser is in standby.

 The recloser is blocked. Also if there is a closing failure in any of the
breakers.
 Start of each of the ongoing cycles.
 Signals of the breaker 1:

User Manual 306
AUTOMATISMS 
 52_1 Reclose Command: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order.

 52_1 closure failure: Breaker 1 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_1 Manual opening: Breaker 1 manual opening activation signal.
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle.
Once the opening is detected, waits two cycles before signalling manual opening.
This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_1 blocked. Breaker 1 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_1 reclosing
lock”, the internal signal “Operations Locked - Br.1” or the manual opening of
the breaker.
 52_1 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 1
has properly completed its reclosing cycle.
 Signals of the breaker 2:
 52_2 Reclose Command: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order.
 52_2 closure failure: Breaker 2 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_2 Manual opening: Breaker 2 manual opening activation signal.
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle.
Once the opening is detected, waits two cycles before signalling manual opening.
This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_2 blocked. Breaker 2 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_2 reclosing
lock”, the internal signal “Operations Locked - Br.2” or the manual opening of
the breaker.
 52_2 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 2
has properly completed its reclosing cycle.
Table 180 Two breaker recloser outputs (breaker 1)

Reset sequence ReSec general
52_1 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk1 general
52_1 closure failure RecFailBr1 general
52_1 Manual opening ManOpen1 general
52_1 blocked BlkBrk1 general
52_1 Successful Reclosing RecOK1 general
52_2 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk2 general
52_2 closure failure RecFailBr2 general
52_2 Manual opening ManOpen2 general
52_2 blocked BlkBrk2 general
52_2 Successful Reclosing RecOK2 general

User Manual 307
AUTOMATISMS 
Figura 157 Breakers` blocking type
Figure 158. Autoreclose sequence with 2 breakers

User Manual 308
BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION 
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION

The model LD2 is specific for breaker and a half configurations.
The current inputs are independent for every breaker. There are two inputs for every phase.
The analogue input 7 can be selected with the setting "Current 7 type" of the node TCIN:
 Ipol. The analogue input 7 is used as polarization current.

 In2. The analogue input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.
The polarity of the phases of each of the breaker can be selected as incoming / outgoing, with
the settings of the node TCIN:
 Local End polarity Br1. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents
IA1, IB1, IC1.
 Local End polarity Br2. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents
IA2, IB2, IC2.
Available analogue inputs in model ZT1 are:
Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12

LD2 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 V A V B V C
In topology 52 ½, the total phase current is calculated as the sum of the current of each
breaker, taking into account the polarity. If incoming it´s sum, if outgoing it´s subtraction.
Br1 incoming Br1 incoming Br1 outgoing Br1 outgoing

Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing
Ia = Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = Ia1 - Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 - Ia2
Ib = Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = Ib1 - Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 - Ib2
Ic = Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = Ic1 - Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 - Ic2
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).
The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following points indicate the functions affected by the configuration 52 ½.
The breaker status follows the criteria:
 To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

 To consider open, both breakers must be open.

User Manual 309
Table 181 Available functions
LD2
Differential functions
87: differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)
Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)
87N: Restricted earth
V/f Overexcitation
5º harmonic level Overexcitation
Directional supervisión
Saturation detector
Load compensation
86 function
Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones) 
Mho Characteristic (5 zones) 
21 High Speed 
Zone 1 Extension 
Double Lines  (Note 2)
Lines with Series Compensation 
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers 
Common protection functions
SOFT Switch onto fault 
27 Undervoltage 
59 Overvoltage 
59N Zero sequence overvoltage 
47 V2 overvoltage protection 
Minimun voltage 
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
3x50/51 (67) Solo fasor
50N/51N (67N) Solo I0
50G/51G. Grounding overcurrent  (Note 1)
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q) 
46FA Broken conductor 
50CSC Second harmonic restraint Solo fases
37 Undercurrent 
49 Thermal image  (Note 3)
32 Power units 
Stub bus differential 
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21) 
Teleprotection (67/67Q) 
Monitoring Units
68ZC Load encroachment 
68FF Fuse failure 
78 Power Swing 
Fault locator 
Breaker Monitoring
k12 breaker monitoring per pole 
Closing and trip circuit monitoring 
Excessive number of trips 
Open pole / Faulted line detector 
Breaker status logic 
Pole discordance 
50BF breaker failure two breakers
50BF breaker failure (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Low load breaker failure 
Automatisms two breakers
Synchronism 
Recloser (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Frequency recloser 
Note 1: Available if the analogue input 7 is used as polarization current.
Note 2: Available if the analogue input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.

User Manual 310
Note 3: The phase unit is always available and the neutral is available when the analogue
input 7 is used as polarization current
Table 181 shows the available functions. Some of them that depends on the analogue 7 type.
 Neutral overcurrent. It always uses the zero sequence.

 Directional. If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is
not allowed.
 Distance units. If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used,
independently of the value of the setting "Km Module".
 The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
 Grounding overcurrent. It is only available when analogue input 7 is configured as
 Restricted ground. It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured as
 Neutral 50BF is not available.
 Breaker logic. It uses both breakers independently.
7.1.1 Differential functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both
fundamental and harmonics. They are used in:
 Differential protection (Instantaneous and percentage)

 Second harmonic restraint and blocking (Cross blocking)
 5º harmonic level Overexcitation
 Directional supervision
The measures sent to the remote end are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker.
Restricted ground (87N) is only available when analogue input 7 is configured as

7.1.2 Distance functions

fundamental and harmonics.
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, so the calculations of
the characteristics don´t take into account the settings of the 5 zones:
 Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
 Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
The signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are:
Table 182 Mho characteristic signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized

User Manual 311
The signals used in each phase of the quadrilateral characteristic are:

Table 183 quadrilateral characteristic signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  k0x ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  k0x ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  k0x ] Vc 3I0, 3I2· a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2· a2 or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2 or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2· a or Ica
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, the the calculations
of SIR for CVT is:
Table 184 Calculating the SIR for Different Units
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vnom/((Ia + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Iab·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ib + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ibc·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ic + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ica·Z1)) - 1
7.1.3 General protection functions

fundamental and harmonics.
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).
Phase overcurrent.
The measure can only be phasor.
Neutral overcurrent.
It uses the zero sequence (3·I0). The measure can only be phasor.
If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is not allowed.
Watt-metric and I*cos() / I*sin() directional always use 3·I0.
Grounding overcurrent.
It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization current.
Second and fifth harmonic block
It´s only available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization current; because
it´s used to block Grounding overcurrent.
Thermal image.
It´s only available for phase.
The neutral unit is available when analogue input 7 is configured us polarization

current.
Stub bus differential.
It´s only available in 52 ½ models.
The operation is indicated by the "Stub bus" in chapter "Protection functions".
7.1.4 Breaker
The breaker status uses both breakers:

User Manual 312
 To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

 To consider open, both breakers must be open.
Breaker logic uses both breakers independently (see chapter "Breaker") with nodes:
 Breaker status. Nodes XCBR1 and XCBR2

 Inputs based breaker failure. Nodes RBFS1 and RBFS2.
 Pole discordance. Nodes RPLD1 and RPLD2.
 Breaker operation supervision. Nodes CBOU1 and CBOU2.
7.1.4.1 Breaker failure (50BF)

The operation is indicated by the "Breaker failure" in chapter "Protection functions".
The function is performed independently on each of the breakers.
Neutral 50BF is not available.
There are independent functions (settings, signals, commands…) for every breaker. The
nodes are:
 Node PROT/FRBRF1. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 1, 2 y
3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 Node PROT/FRBRF2. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 4, 5 y
6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2).
7.1.4.2 Open pole detector

The operation is indicated by the "Open pole detector" in chapter "Breaker".
It uses the sum of the current phasor of each breaker.
To consider open, both breakers must be open.
The signals generated by this function are used in other protection functions:
 Distance mho and quadrilateral characteristics

 21 High Speed zone
 Phase selector
 Directional
 Mho and quadrilateral supervision
 Load encroachment
 Power swing
7.1.5 Breaker and a half supervision

It is used to avoid nuisance tripping on near faults but outside the protected area.
In external faults with large current flow, one of the current transformers can saturate
without providing line current to the fault and in this case:
 There is phase current with any direction (as measured current is spurious) and
voltage close to zero, which can generate a trip of the distance unit.
 If it is a phase-phase fault, zero sequence current appears due to saturation and
neutral directional units can act.
An output signal is available.
 Node: PROT/BHPTRC1

User Manual 313
 Output: Table 185 shows the signals of this function.

 Block by External Fault: It is activated when an external fault is detected to
protect the area, which can cause false alarms.
Table 185 52 ½ supervision
Signal Data Atributte

Block by External Fault ExFIBI general
Phase currents of the two breakers are compared (IA1 and IA2, IB1 and IB2, IC1 and IC2).
An external fault is considered when, at least at some phase, the current of the two
breakers exceed 3 times the rated current in rms value.
If the currents are in phase, the fault is internal; while if the current are in opposite
direction (continuous current) the fault is external. There are several factors that make
the currents are not exactly in phase in internal faults and not in opposite phase in
external fault, the following angular criteria is applied:
Figure 159. Angular criteria for external faults
The signal "Block by External Fault" is activated when in some phase the following
conditions are met:
 The current at the same phase of the two breakers exceeds 3 times the nominal
current in rms value.
 The angle difference between the same phase of the two breakers is between 110º and
250º.
In this situation the following units are blocked:
 Distance units, programmed as forward, which have involved the phase that indicates
external fault. And for zone 1 all units programmed as forward are blocked.
 Neutral directional programmed as forward is blocked.

User Manual 314
FAULT LOCATOR 
8. FAULT LOCATOR
The fault locator for single and double lines processes the information collected in relation
to each fault and calculates the estimated distance to the point in which the fault has
occurred, as well as the fault resistance.
The initial data necessary in order to arrive at the final calculation is:
 Sample by sample values of the voltage and current signals collected in the moment in
which the fault is produced.
 The impedance parameters of the line in which the fault has occurred.
 Length of the line.
 The Voltage transformers and Current transformers transformation ratios of the bay that
captured the fault.
The result is the distance to the fault in km or milles, together with the fault resistance
and a locator exit code.
The node corresponding to the locator is PROT/RFLO.
All the settings are in primary values.
The settings necessary for the operation of the distance calculation algorithm are as follows
(see Table 186):
 Enabled. Indicates whether the locator is enabled or not.

 Line length (Kms or miles). Indicates the length of the protected line.
 Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length). The line’s positive sequence impedance module by unit length.
 Z1 angle (º). The line’s positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length). The line’s zero sequence impedance module per unit length.
 Z0 angle (º). The line’s zero sequence impedance angle.
 Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s positive sequence admittance.
 Y0(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s zero sequence admittance.
 Z1 Local Source (Ohm). Local source positive sequence impedance module.
 Z1 Local Source angle (º). Local source positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z0 Local Source (Ohm). Local source zero impedance module. This setting only applies when
the relay is set to receive phase to phase voltages and the fault locator is enabled. The
relay internally calculates the zero sequence voltage from the zero sequence current
(I0=IN/3) and the settled local source zero sequence impedance. With this value and with
the phase to phase voltages is able to calculate the single phase voltages and execute
the calculation like the normal case.
 Z0 Local Source angle (º). Local source zero sequence impedance angle. This setting only
applies when the relay is set to receive phase to phase voltages.
 Z1 Remote Source (ohm). Remote source positive sequence impedance module.
 Z1 Remote Source angle (º). Remote source positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z1eq Parallel (Ohm). Positive sequence impedance module in parallel with the line.
 Z1eq Parallel Angle (º). Positive sequence impedance angle in parallel with the line.
 Phase current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the phase current (in primary
value) for the detection of the fault.
 Ground current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the neutral current (in primary
value) for the detection of the fault.
 Voltage sensitivity (V). Minimum variation threshold in the voltage (in primary value)
for the detection of the fault.

User Manual 315
FAULT LOCATOR 
 Locator output permanent. Indicates whether the distance measurement is maintained until
the next fault (set to “YES”) or only the seconds indicated in the “Locator output
duration(s)” setting (set to “NO”).
 Locator output duration(s). Distance measurement maintenance time (s).
 Line type. Allows the user to select between single line or double line.
 Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length). Mutual impedance module, by unit length. This setting only
applies when the relay is set to double lines.
 Z0M Mutual angle (º). Mutual impedance angle. This setting only applies when the relay is
set to double lines.
 Filter enabled. If set to “YES” and if the fault point is detected during the ten cycles
following a breaker closure, the neutral current is checked to see whether is exceeds the
“I Minimum after close (A)” setting. If it is, inrush is considered to exist and prefault
current values equal to zero are employed in order to avoid the inrush distortion in
these measurements. The neutral current is also checked to see whether it exceeds the
“Ground maximum current (A)” setting. If it is set to “NO”, neither the inrush nor the
neutral current are measured.
 I Minimum after close (A). Current threshold (in primary value) for the detection of
inrush. Only used if the filter setting is enabled. If a switch on to fault is detected
(by the status of the breaker) during the first 10 cycles, single – phase ground faults
that do not go beyond the INmin threshold are blocked. If it is set to 4999A all the
faults (single – phase and polyphase) are blocked. A possible use is when there is a
great distortion in the shape of a wave after a closing. For example, in the case of a
distribution with a lot of transformers hanging from the line, the breaker closing will
cause a high inrush that can make the low current earth faults calculation results
distorted. With the I0min threshold the earth fault calculation is filtered, the I0of
which must be lower than this threshold.
 Ground maximum current (A). Threshold (in primary value) indicating the system’s maximum
neutral current under normal conditions. It is only used if the filter setting is
enabled.
Ohm p.u indicates ohms per unit of length. For a line length of 100 km and a line impedance
of 100 ohm, the setting in ohm p.u is calculated as follows:
Ohm p.u = Line impedance / line length = 100 ohm /100km = 1 ohm p.u,
If the impedances are available in secondary values, these can be converted to primary
values with the following formula:
𝑉_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
𝑍𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑦 = 𝑍𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐼_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
There are independent settings:
 PROT/RFLO node:
 Settings: There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 174.

User Manual 316
FAULT LOCATOR 
Table 186 Locator settings

LocEna Enabled Boolean
LinLenKm Line length (Kms or miles) 0.1 5000 0.1 float
Z1Mod Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
Z1Ang Z1 angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
Z0Mod Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length) 0.01 300 0.01 float
Z0Ang Z0 angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
Y1 Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Y0 Y0(1/Ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Z1LMod Z1 Local Source (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1LAng Z1 Local Source angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
Z0LMod Z0 Local Source (Ohm) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
Z0LAng Z0 Local Source angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
Z1RMod Z1 RemoteSource (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1 Remote Source angle(º) float
Z1RAng 0 359.9 0.1
Z1mMod Z1eq Parallel (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1mAng Z1eq Parallelangle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
PhsASens Phasecurrentsens. (A) 10 5000 0.1 float
NeuSens Groundcurrentsens. (A) 10 5000 0.1 float
PhsVSens Voltagesensitivity (V) 10 100000 0.1 float
PlsTms Locator output duration(s) 0 7200 1 Int32
PlsFEna Locator output permanent 0 1 1 Boolean
Single (0)
enum
Linetype Line type 0 1 1 /Double (1)
ZmMod Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
ZmAng Z0M Mutual angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
FilEna Filter enabled 0 1 1 Boolean
IminAfCl I Minimum after close (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
NMaxVal Groundmaximumcurrent (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
MaskEna EnableEvents Record 0 1 1 Boolean
If any of the following parameters is unknown, the recommended values are:
Admittances (Y1,Y0): 0
Source impedance (Z1R, Z1S):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Parallel impedance (Z1eq):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Sensitivities:
I = 50% pick up 51 (A)
I0 = 50% pick up 51N (A)
V = 5% nominal voltage (V)
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION
The process that follows the locator’s algorithm can be summarized in 4 steps, which are
explained below:
 Fault instant detection

 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering

User Manual 317
FAULT LOCATOR 
 Determination of the fault type

 Localization algorithm
8.1.1 Fault detection

Once the protection has picked up, the fault detection algorithm starts processing the
analogue signals received in search of the exact instant in which a fault has been
produced. This search is made by comparing samples from consecutive cycles.
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering

The distance calculation algorithm uses the fundamental components of the voltage and
current waves. The filtering extracts the components from the signals stored at the pick
up.
The collected signals are processed by a digital filter which provides the fundamental
voltage and current components. A cosine filter is used for this stage.
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type

Before launching the distance calculation algorithm in conjunction with the pre-fault and
fault measurements calculated in the previous step, the fault type must be defined.
The locator includes an algorithm that determines which phases have been affected by the
fault. The algorithm is based on the well-known Girgis method for distance relays. This
procedure, which analyzes the different magnitudes of change between the pre-fault and
post-fault situations in the current’s fundamental component, has demonstrated enviable
precision in its results.
8.1.4 Distance calculation

The distance calculation algorithm has been developed for single (see Figure 160) and
double lines.
When a fault happens in a line corresponding to our relay, the information gathered by
the locator, placed at one extreme of the line, is reduced to the voltage and current
values.
The data necessary to fully determine the system are obtained from the situation existing
in the instant immediately preceding the fault and in the situation of the fault itself.
8.1.4.1 Filtered by the maximum neutral current level

(cross country faults)
In cross country faults (simultaneous faults in different lines or in the same line,
e.g. AN in the protected line and BN in the adjacent line), the zero sequence current
level detected in the system is superior to the maximum zero sequence current level
for single phase faults.
In these situations, the protection locates the fault but indicates that the “Ground
maximum current (A)” setting has been exceeded, as in these situations the voltages
are distorted by the lack of the adjacent line fault and can cause erroneous
calculations in the fault distance.
This mode is only operative if the “Filter enabled” setting is active. In this case,
the result of the localization will be displayed in the fault report, although in the
control measurements it will be reported as invalid.

User Manual 318
FAULT LOCATOR 
Figure 160 Line topology
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS
The presentation of the results is carried out in several ways:
 By display. In the “Fault reports” submenu.

 In the faults report.
 In a control measurement. It remains active during the programmed time or until
another fault is produced.
In addition to the distance calculated, the fault resistance and the locator exit code are
provided both in the display and in the fault report. The locator exit codes are shown
below:
 LOCATED: The fault has been located.

 LITTLE PREFAULT/ LITTLE PRE: There are few pre-fault cycles, pre-fault cycles <3
cycles.
 LITTLE POSTFAULT/ LITTLE POST: There are few post-fault cycles.
 TRUNC: The fault has been processed but the localization algorithm has been
truncated because the high number of iterations.
 IN>I: The neutral current (IN) is greater than the set maximum neutral current.
 IN<I: The neutral current (IN) is lower than the set minimum neutral current
following closure.
 NOT FAULT: The fault instant has not been detected.
 OUT OF LINE: The calculated distance is out of the set line length. If the
calculated distance is greater than 150% of the line length, the distance value is
not shown.
 NOT ENABLED: The locator is not enabled.
 NEGATIVE DISTANCE: The distance calculated is negative. In this case, the distance
value is not displayed.
 NOT LOCATED: The locator algorithm has not run.
For example, a locator result indicating the LITTLE PRE/IN>I/OUT OF LINE code should be
interpreted as follows:
The location algorithm does not have sufficient pre-fault cycles and therefore considers
that the fault sample is in the cycle in which the digital pick up was produced.
Furthermore, the neutral current in the system has exceeded the current value set in the
“Ground maximum current (A)” setting (this check is only carried out when the “Filter

User Manual 319
FAULT LOCATOR 
enabled” setting is set to “YES”). By exceeding this value, the distance calculation may be
erroneous. Therefore, although it is shown in the fault report it is marked as an invalid
control measure. Finally, the distance calculation has returned a value in excess of the
value established in the “Line length” setting. If this result is between 100% and 150% of
the line length, it will be displayed. If it is greater, the distance will appear as NOT
CALCULATED.
The distance is always calculated but it will not be sent to the dispatching centre (61850
nor Procome) if one of the blockings codes of the locator is activated. In the fault
report, the distance is always included with the locator exit code.
The locator blocking causes are:
 Not enough cycles (< 2.5 cycles). In this case, no calculation is done.
 Ineutral is below the setting “I Minimum after close (A)” (resistive or distant
fault). In this case the calculation is done, but it is not sent to the
dispatching centre.
 Ineutral is above the setting “Ground maximum current (A)” (possible cross country
fault). In this case the calculation is done, but it is not sent to the
dispatching centre.
 General block by switch onto fault. In this case the calculation is done, but it
is not sent to the dispatching centre.
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
The model used in the example corresponds to a single distribution line.
The capacity values of the positive, negative and zero sequences are zero, so that these
values do not affect the reach.
Line parameters, in primary values, are the following:
Current and voltage transformers:
Current transformation ratio (CT): 3000/1
Voltage transformation ratio (VT): 360000/100
Line parameters
Line length: 20km
Positive sequence resistance: 0.0315 Ω/km
Positive sequence inductance: 0.312 Ω/km
Zero sequence resistance: 0.269 Ω/km
Zero sequence inductance: 0.766 Ω/km
Local Source parameters:
Impedance: 6 Ω
Angle: 84.2º
For a line with the features described above, fault locator could be adjusted as follows:

User Manual 320
FAULT LOCATOR 
Ajuste Valor
Enabled YES
Line length 20
Z1 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.314
Z1 angle (º) 84.2
Z0 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.81
Z0 angle (º) 70.6
Y1 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Y0 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Z1 Local Source (ohm) 6
Z1 Local Source Angle.(º) 84.2
Z1 Remote Source (ohm) 20000
Z1 Remote Source Angle (º) 45
Z1eq Parallel (ohm) 20000
Z1eq Parallel Angle. (º) 45
Phase Current sensitivity (A) 40% PhaseOverCurr.Setting * CT
Ground Current sensitivity (A) 40% GroundOverCurr.Setting* GCT
Voltage sensitivity (V) 5% Vrated * VT
Locator output duration(s) 7200
Locator output permanent YES
Line type Simple
Filter enabled NO
EnableEvents Record YES
Where:
PhaseOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the phase overcurrent units.
GroundOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the ground overcurrent units.
Vrated: Rated Voltage
CT: Phase current ratio.
GCT: Ground current ratio
VT: Phase voltage ratio.

User Manual 321
MONITORING 
9. MONITORING
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING
This function checks if the external supply voltage is within the set range. It generates
two signals:
 Auxiliary power supply greater than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage
exceeds the set maximum threshold.
 Auxiliary power supply lower than minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is below
the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 187):
 Enabled: Enables the external power supply monitoring function.

 Minimum threshold. Indicates the minimum power supply voltage threshold, below
which an alarm is issued.
 Maximum threshold. Indicates the maximum power supply voltage threshold, above
which an alarm is issued.
Table 187 External power supply monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoSuppV Minimum threshold 10 280 1 float
HiSuppV Maximum threshold 10 280 1 float
MaskEna Enable Events record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
There are two independent functions with settings, commands and outputs:
 Node:
 PROT/CESS1 for power supply 1
 PROT/CESS2 for power supply 2 (only in devices with redundant power supply)
 There are no logical inputs or commands
 Vcc Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 HH Infeed. Indicates that the power supply has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 LL Infeed. Indicates that the power supply is below the minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The external power supply values are available in the node GEN/LLN0
(see Table 189)
Table 188 Power supply monitoring outputs
Signal (CESS1) Signal (CESS2: redundant power supply) Data Attribute

Vcc Supervision Status Vcc 2 Supervision Status StEna stVal
HH Infeed HH Infeed 2 OverVcc general
LL Infeed LL Infeed 2 UnderVcc general

User Manual 322
MONITORING 
Table 189 Power supply measurement
Measurement Data Attribute

Power supply Psup net
Power supply2 Psup2 net
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING
This function checks if the temperature is within the set range. It generates two signals:
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set
maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is below the set
minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 187):
 Enabled: Enables the temperature monitoring function.

 Minimum temperature (ºC). Indicates the minimum temperature threshold, below which
an alarm is issued.
 Maximum temperature (ºC). Indicates the maximum temperature threshold, above which
an alarm is issued.
Table 190 Temperature monitoring settings

TmpSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoTmpVal Minimum temperature (ºC) -40 0 1 float
HiTmpVal Maximum temperature (ºC) 50 100 1 float
 PROT/CTSU1 node
 Outputs: Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 192)
 Table 191 shows the function’s output data.
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. Indicates that the temperature has
exceeded the maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. Indicates that the temperature is
below the minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 192)
Table 191 Temperature monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Power supply greater than maximum OverTemp general
Power supply lower than minimum UnderTemp general

User Manual 323
MONITORING 
Table 192 Temperature measurement

Temperature Temp net
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX
If enabled, it checks that the external power supply exceeds the battery failure threshold,
generating an alarm signal when it is below the threshold.
In devices with redundant power supply, every power supply generates an independent DFFA
signal. With the setting "Power Supply" a general DFFA signal in generated.
The settings for configuring the battery failure monitoring (Table 193)
 Enabled: Enables the battery failure monitoring function.

 Power Supply: In devices with redundant power supply, selects which power supply
generates the DFFA signal:
 PS1. Only Power supply 1 generates DFFA
 PS2. Only Power supply 2 generates DFFA
 PS1 or PS2. Weak Infeed DFFA1 or DFF2 indicates DFFA
 PS1 and PS2. Both power supplies must indicate DFFA.
Table 193 Battery failure monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
PS1
PS2
SrcSpv Power Supply enum
PS1 or PS2
PS1 and PS2
There are independent settings and outputs:
 PROT/CSUS1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 193.
 Weak Infeed DFFA. Indicates that the external power supply is below the minimum
threshold as indicated in the setting "Power supply".
 Weak Infeed DFFA1. Indicates that the external power supply 1 is below the
minimum threshold.
 Weak Infeed DFFA2. Indicates that the external power supply 2 is below the
minimum threshold.
Table 194 Battery failure monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Weak Infeed DFFA DFFA general
Weak Infeed DFFA1 DFFA1 general
Weak Infeed DFFA2 DFFA2 general

User Manual 324
MONITORING 
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING
The internal battery used for data maintenance is checked to ensure that it does not fall
below a security level.
There are independent outputs:
 GEN/LPHD1 node
 It does not use settings.
 There are no logical inputs or commands.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the internal battery level is below the
minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The battery value is available (see Table 196)
Table 195 Internal battery failure outputs

Battery failure BatAlm general
Table 196 Internal battery measurement

internal battery IntBat net
9.5 UNIT CHECKS
The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is
detected in any of the elements or cards, an alarm is generated. If the error affects the
unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on :
 Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general
status. If the LED is green, it indicates that everything is correct, while if it
is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
 CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general
status. If the LED is active (common terminal – NO), it indicates that everything
is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a
critical error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
 The unit's alarm signals are to be found in the LPHD node. The available signals
indicate faults in the card check, in the communications between the cards, in the
unit’s configuration, etc.:
 Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In
addition to this signal, the cause that produced the signal will be indicated.
 CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU. It generates
critical error signal.
 Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card. It generates critical
error signal.
 I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
 Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the
communications between the CPU and the transformers card. It generates critical
error signal.

User Manual 325
MONITORING 
 I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication
between the CPU and an I/O card. It generates critical error signal. Additionally,
it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the
card with the address x.
 Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the
communications between the CPU and the unit’s front card. It generates critical
error signal.
 Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data
exchange memory between the CPU and the transformers card. It generates critical
error signal.
 Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data
exchange memory between the CPU and the I/O cards. It generates critical error
signal.
 RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time
clock.
 Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous
measurement monitoring has been detected in the transformers card.
 Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the
unit’s settings. It generates critical error signal.
 FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
 Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the
unit’s memory. It generates critical error signal.
 Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers
card AD converter. It generates critical error signal.
 Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the
transformers card reference voltages. It generates critical error signal.
 Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation
of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays. It generates critical error signal.
 I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not
coincide with the unit’s correct configuration. It generates critical error signal.
 General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels. It
generates critical error signal.
 Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a
configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency measurement of the signals
being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is
configured as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz;
or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the signals being injected are less
than 55 Hz.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the
security levels and that the data may be lost at shutdown.
 Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are
not correct.
 Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the
configuration of the unit’s time setting.
 For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors.
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but
not detected in the unit. This may be because it is not assembled or because it
has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by
the unit do not coincide.

User Manual 326
MONITORING 
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by
the user has been detected in an address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay
check).
 ICD error. Indicates the last ICD received by the device was wrong and it was
refused by the device. Once activated, this signal is deactivated when a correct
ICD is received.
 Power supply 1 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 1 is turned off. It is only
available in devices with redundant power supply.
 Power supply 2 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 2 is turned off. It is only
available in devices with redundant power supply.
Table 197 Checking signals

Critical hardware error HwCrAlm stVal
CPU error CPUAlm stVal
Analogue error AnaAlm stVal
I/O micro error ESAlm stVal
Analogue connection error AnaComAlm stVal
I/O connection error ESComAlm stVal
Front connection error MMIComAlm stVal
Shared analogue memory error AnDPMAlm stVal
Shared I/O memory error ESDPMAlm stVal
RTC clock error RTCAlm stVal
Continuous component monitoring alarm Harm0Alm stVal
Alarm settings SettingAlm stVal
Firmware alarm FwAlm stVal
Memory check alarm MemAlm stVal
Converter check alarm ADCAlm stVal
Converter voltage level alarm VRefAlm stVal
Relay activation alarm DOAlm stVal
I/O configuration error IOCnfError stVal
Card address error 1 GGIO1Alm stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Card address error x (x from 2 to 8) GGIOxAlm stVal
General Vdc error VccError stVal
Frequency configuration error FrConfAl stVal
Internal battery failure BatAlm stVal
Version compatibility error VerAlm stVal
Time setting configuration alarm HSetAlm stVal
ICD error FailICD stVal
Card 1 ok GGIO1Ok stVal
Card 1 ConfiguredYNo_detected GGIO1Nodet stVal
Card 1 Different configuration GGIO1Dif stVal
Card 1 No_configured Y Detected GGIO1NConf stVal
Card 1 Internal card error GGIO1HwErr stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Front ok FRONTOk stVal
Front Configured Y No_detected FRONTNodet stVal
Different front configuration FRONTDif stVal
Front No_configured Y Detected FRONTNConf stVal
Front Internal card error FRONTHwErr stVal
Power supply 1 OFF FailSup1 stVal
Power supply 2 OFF FailSup2 stVal

User Manual 327
CONFIGURATION 
10. CONFIGURATION
10.1 CID
10.1.1 Data Storage

The unit has a CID file that follows the format defined in section 6 of the IEC 61850
standard. It is available via the following path by FTP “SCL/validated”, in which all the
unit’s configuration information is saved, either structured in nodes that follow the IEC
61850 format or in private parts.
10.1.2 Updating CID.ParamRev

There are different ways to change the settings. They are listed below:
 Using MMS in IEC 61850

 Using local display
 Using the pacFactory (PC tool)
 By sending the CID by FTP to the “SCL/notvalidated” directory
Independently of the form used from among those listed above, the changes to the affected
setting are stored in the unit’s CID file. When any setting is changed, the NamPlt field
in the node in which the new setting has been written, as well as the LLN0 node of the
device to which the node belongs, are updated in the CID file.
The format of the NamPlt data is as follows:
XXX year.month.day.time.minute.second [paramRev origin text]
 Where “XXX” is an integer counter that is incremented each time paramRev is

updated by a setting change.
 "paramRev origin text“depends on the origin of the setting change:
Origin of settings change paramRev text origin

MMS IEC 61850 client BROWSER IP
Local display USER DISPLAY
pacFactory USER TOOL
New CID CID UPDATE
In the case of “New CID”, only those settings in the CID sent to the unit and which are
out of range will be updated in paramRev.
10.2 GENERAL
Two nodes are used for the general configuration of the unit
 GEN/LLN0. Includes the unit’s generic configuration settings

 PROT/LLN0. Includes the protection units’ generic configuration settings
The settings available in the GEN/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enabling.
Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the
function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's specific
mask is contemplated:

User Manual 328
CONFIGURATION 
 Language. Indicates the unit’s language. Affects the display, reports, etc.
 Functional key block
 Command key block
 Remote functional key mode
 LED block. Allows the activation of the LEDs to be blocked.
 Blocks from commands
 The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. It select
whether the year is taken into account in the synchronization by IRIG. The options
are:
 “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are
admitted.
 “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into
account. It cannot be used with formats B002 and B003 because they set the year
to zero value.
 “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are
admitted.
 “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken
into account. It cannot be used with formats B002 and B003 because they set the
year to zero value.
 Local/remote mode change
 Queue deletion logical input. Indicates the logic input that, when activated,
deletes the unit’s report queues. Affects protection events, faults, disturbance
reports, historical measurement reports, etc.
 CID load mode
 CID validation type
 Remote/ Local type. It indicates how the unit will behave when it has to block the
commands it is sent. See 17.2.1
 Flicker Enable. Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.See 10.4.3
 Protection events mask enabled. Allows the generation of protection events
associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection events are
not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 198 General settings

Lang Language Spanish (0) / English (1) Boolean
BlkFKeys Functional key block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkOKeys Command key block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
FKeysRem Remote functional key mode Boolean
BlkFrCom LED block NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkComm Blocks from commands Boolean
UTC without year /
UTC with year /
IrgType IRIG-B format enum
Local without year /
Local with year
LogInLR Local/remote mode change Int32
LogInDelRe Queue deletion logical input Int32
LoadMod CID load mode enum
ValActAuto CID validation type Boolean
Not treated (0)
Iberdrola (1)
LRmode Remote/Local Type 0 3 1 enum
Exclusive (2)
No frame (3)
FlickerEna Flicker Enable 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
MaskEna Protection event recordign enabled NO (0) / YES (1)

User Manual 329
CONFIGURATION 
The settings available in the PROT/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enablind.
Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the
function's protection events are not generated. If set to "YES", the function's specific
mask is contemplated:
 Relay ON. Indicates whether the relay in service or not. If it is out of service,
the protection functions do not act.
 Phase order. Selects the phase sequence ABC/CBA. Affects the direct and inverse
sequences and, therefore, the functions that use them. To check whether the order
corresponds to wiring, check that the values expected for the indicated
configuration are obtained in the sequence measurements and that the phase current
arguments (as seen in the status screen) match selected sequence.
 Select Setting group 1. Indicates the logic input which, when activated, selects
the settings table 1 as active.
 Fault reports (Prim./sec.). Select the measurements of the display fault reports
between primary and secondary.
Table 199 General protection settings

OnLine Relay ON NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
PhsOrd Phase order ABC (0) /CBA (1) enum
LogInSet1 Select Setting group 1 Int32
LogInSet6 Setting change table 6 Int32
FaRepTy Fault reports (Prim./sec.) Secondary (0) / Primary (1) enum
10.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS
The current and voltage transformers are configured in the Differential General settings
(PDIF node).
10.3.1 Current
The rated current and the transformation ratios are configured in the Differential
General settings (PDIF node).

User Manual 330
CONFIGURATION 
10.3.2 Frequency and voltage

The rated voltage are configured in the Differential General settings (PDIF node).
The PROT/TVTR node is used for the voltage transformation ratios (see Table 200).
 Phase transformation ratio. Indicates the phase voltage transformation ratio.

 Voltage phases used. Selects the voltage phases used in the protection
functions. Different phase combinations (both earth to phase and phase to
phase) can be selected:
 None. No voltage is enabled
 A. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase A
 B. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase B
 A-B. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and B
 C. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase C
 A-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and C
 B-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases B and C
 A-B-C. The three earth-phase voltage operate
 Frequency. Selects the unit’s rated operating frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
 VN transformation ratio. Indicates the neutral voltage transformer ratio.
Table 200 Voltage characteristics

VRat Phase transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VSel Voltage phases used 0 8 1 enum
HzRtg Frequency 50Hz (0) /60Hz (1) enum
VNRat VN transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
10.3.3 Power and energy

The PROT/MPWE node, which indicates the conditions for the power calculation, is used
(see Table 201):
 Change sign P. Indicates if the sign change in the real power calculation is
enabled.
 Change sign Q. Indicates if the sign change in the reactive calculation is
enabled.
 Real energy constant. Indicates the real energy impulse factor, i.e., the
number of kWh by virtue of which the counter is incremented by one unit.
 Reactive energy constant. Indicates the reactive energy impulse factor, i.e.,
the number of kWh by virtue of which the counter is incremented by one unit.
The energy counters value is available in the PROT/MMTR node, with the data:
 Positive real energy counter: SupWh.

 Negative real energy counter: DmdWh.
 Positive reactive energy counter: SupVArh.
 Negative reactive energy counter: DmdVArh.
Table 201 Power characteristics

PSiCh Sign change P NO (0) / YES (1) float
QSiCh Sing change Q NO (0) / YES (1) float
CorWh Constant real power (kWh) 1 1000 1 enum
CorVArh Constant reactive power 1 1000 1 enum

User Manual 331
CONFIGURATION 
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The unit can host a variable number of input-output cards variable (from 1 to 7). Each card
is configured with an internal address from 2 to 7. The power supply is assigned address 1,
which is not configurable.
Each card is represented in the IEC 61850 data model as an instance of the GGIO node in the
Logical Device called “GEN”. Each GGIO has the internal address of the physical card as an
instance. Thus, for example, if a unit has two input-output cards with internal addresses 1
and 4, the GEN/GGIO1 and GEN/GGIO4 nodes will exist in the data model.
The number of digital input settings and signals present in each GGIO depends on the type
of card used. Continuing the example, if the card with the internal address 1 has 6 digital
inputs and 4 digital outputs, the GGIO1 node will have 6 digital input signals and 4
digital output signals, as well as the settings corresponding to each digital input and
output available.
The data model associated to the GGIOs is common to all and has 32 digital inputs and 16
digital outputs. Nevertheless, in each card only the data associated with its own inputs
and outputs are updated.
For each GGIO there is a boolean setting called MaskEna (event record enabled). If set to
“YES”, the activation/deactivation of the digital inputs and outputs will generate
protection events. To the contrary, they will not be stored as event records.
10.4.1 Inputs
There are 2 settings available for each digital input:
 DIxTmms: Digital input time x (ms). This is a software filter for the
activation/deactivation of digital inputs. It indicates the milliseconds
(range 0 to 20 ms) which a digital input must be seen to be active in order to
be considered active. In order to calculate an input's total activation time,
the input’s hardware filter delay – which is approximately 1ms – must be added
to this time.
 DIxType: Digital input type x. Defines whether the input is to be interpreted
as active when it is seen as closed (NO) or when it is seen as open (NC)
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table
202). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital inputs (up to 32).
Table 202 Digital input signals

Digital input 1 Ind1 stVal
Remaining inputs
10.4.2 Outputs
There are 3 settings available for each digital output:
 DOxSig: Assignment digital output x. Assigns the activation of the digital

output. There are several assignment possibilities:
 Signals: They can be signals generated by the unit (trips, logics, hw
check, digital inputs and outputs)
 Commands: All of the commands available in the unit can be directly
programmed to a physical output

User Manual 332
CONFIGURATION 
 DOxTmms: Digital output time x (ms). The output activation time defines the
minimum operational time of each physical output following activation (in
milliseconds). The range is 0.05 to 5000 ms. The output remains active in
accordance with this time setting or the duration of the associated signal,
whichever is greater.
 DOxTyp: Digital output type. Each output’s type is defined from among the
options:
 “Not”. The output follows the assigned signal, i.e., the output is activate
when the signal is active. When the signal is deactivated, the output will
deactivate if the digital output time has elapsed. To the contrary, the
output will remain active until this time elapses.
 “Stored”. Once activated, the output remains active until the relay
deactivation command is issued, with the signal assigned to the output
deactivated. The command can be issued by the action of a digital input
programmed as “Local reset”, a command or by keyboard/display.
 “Trip”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following
conditions are met: the signal assigned to the output is deactivated and
the breaker is open.
 “Close”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following
conditions are met: the signal assigned to the output is deactivated and
the breaker is closed.
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table
204Table 204). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital outputs (up to 16).
Table 203 Input/output settings

Protection event recording NO (0) / YES
MaskEna Boolean
enabled (1)
OscTms Input oscillation time (s) 1 60 1 Int32
Nchanges Number of changes 0 255 1 Int32
DI1Tmms Digital Input Time 1 (ms) 0 20 1 Int32
DI1Type Digital Input Type 1 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
DI2Tmms Digital Input Time 2 (ms) 0 20 1 Int32
DI2Type Digital Input Type 2 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
DO1Sig Digital Output Assignment 1 Int32
DO1Tmms Minimum Output Time 1 (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
DO1Ty Digital Output Type 1 enum
DO2Sig Digital Output Assignment 2 enum
DO2Tmms Minimum Output Time 2 (ms) 0 5000 1 enum
DO2Ty Digital Output Type 2 Int32
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
Table 204 Digital output signals

Digital output 1 SPCSO1 stVal
Remaining outputs
10.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker

Flicker consists of a fast and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated
with a failure in the input’s contact. The function allows a control to be performed to
disable the flickering digital inputs or signals in order to prevent them from
interfering with the control system, as a disabled digital does not generate status
changes.

User Manual 333
CONFIGURATION 
The supervising of the swing in the digital inputs or the supervising of the flicker is
conducted in accordance with certain user-configurable settings.
On the one hand, there is a general setting that allows this function to be enabled or
disabled. If this setting is disabled, not flicker treatment is performed.
General setting for the configuration of the flicker treatment (Table 205):
 FlickerEna: Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.

Table 205 General flicker treatment setting

FlickerEna Flicker enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
 GEN/LLN0 node
Once the general flicker setting has been enabled (Table 205), there are two more
setting per card for treating the swing. They are “OscTms” and “Nchanges” which can
be seen in Table 203:
 OscTms: The time between changes in the same direction in order for a signal to be
deemed to be swinging. When a signal is swinging a swinging signal is produced. The
unit is seconds.
 Nchanges: The number of changes that must be produced in a swinging signal in order
for the signal to become invalid and cease from sending changes. If this setting is
set to zero, it disables the swing treatment for this card, i.e., the flicker
treatment is not performed for this card.
 GEN/GGIOx node, in which x depends on the card’s internal address (see section
10.4)
Once a signal has been detected as swinging, it becomes questionable and oscillatory.
If this situation continues and the number of set changes (“Nchanges” setting) is exceed,
the signal becomes invalid and oscillatory. It ceases to send the changes and sends the
signal's last known valid status.
When the time difference between two changes is greater than the inputs’ swing time
(“OscTms” setting), the signal changes to valid.
10.5 LEDS
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node

The LEDs are programmed within the IHMI node located in the “GEN” logical device. There
are 2 settings available for each LED:
 LexSig: Assignment led x. Assigns the activation of LED x using any of the signals
generated by the unit
 LExTyp: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case,
the activation of the LED follows the activation of the signal programmed in the
setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”, the LED’s activation will
remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal
programmed in the LogInReLed setting available in the IHMI node is activated.
There is a general setting for all the LEDs that indicates the logic signal used to
switch of the LEDs:
 LED reset. Selects the signal which, when active, switches off the LEDs.
The LEDs are updated every 200ms. Thus, for the correct activation of the LEDs, the
assigned signal must remain active for at least 150 ms. To the contrary, the LED cannot
be activated.

User Manual 334
CONFIGURATION 
Table 206 LED settings

LogInReLed LED reset Int32
Le1Sig Led 1 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le1Ty Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Le2Sig Led 2 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le2Ty Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node

If the unit, in addition to the “GEN” logical device’s IHMI node defined in the previous
section, has an IHMI node located in “CTRL” logical device, the unit’s treatment in
relation to the configuration of the LEDs differs as follows:
 The parameterization of the assignment of LEDs is carried out by the settings

present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
 The parameterization of the LEDs type is carried out by the settings present
in the CTRL/IHMI node.
The settings present in this node are detailed below

InRef1 Led 1 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe1 Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
InRef2 Led 2 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe2 Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
There are 2 settings available for each LED:
 InRefx: Assignment led x. Assigns the activation of LED x using any of the
signals generated by the unit. The assignment is carried out by means of a
character string (see next section “Configuration with InRef”)
 LEDSex: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first
case, the activation of the LED follows the activation of the signal
programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”,
the LED’s activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its
activation drops out, until the signal programmed in the LogInReLed setting
available in the GEN/IHMI node (defined in the previous section) is activated.
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF
The InRef type settings are programmed by a string of characters in which the reference of
the IEC 61850 object containing the value to be employed as an input is indicated. The
following format, as defined in the part 7.2 of the IEC 61850 standard, is employed:
LDName/LNName.DataObjectName[.SubDataObjectName[. ...]].DataAttributeName
For example,
 In order to program InRef1 with the GGIO1 input signal 1, the reference to be
written in the InRef is:
GEN/GGIO1.Ind1.stVal
 In order to program the PTOC 1 phase A trip, the reference is:
PROT/PTOC1.Op.phsA

User Manual 335
CONFIGURATION 
10.7 NAMES
The PROT/LPHD node is used for the general configuration of the units’ names and the
installation.
Short names are used for the generation of the disturbance recorder and fault file names.
The settings for this node are shown in Table 207:
 Installation name: Full name of the installation.

 Short name of the installation. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10
characters, this is used in the generation of disturbance recorder and fault files.
Neither spaces nor commas are permitted in the name.
 Relay name. Full name of the relay.
 Short relay name. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is
used in the generation of disturbance recorder and fault files. Neither spaces nor
commas are permitted in the name.
 Name of breaker 1. Full name of breaker 1.
 Name of breaker 2. Full name of breaker 1.
Table 207 Name settings

InstNam Installation name string
Short name of the
10 characters String
InstShNam installation
RelNam Relay name. String
RelShNam Short relay name 10 characters String
BkrNam1 Name of breaker 1 String
BkrNam2 Name of breaker 2 String
10.8 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION
10.8.1 General IPRV settings

The device has several settings (included in the GEN/genIPRV logical node) to set certain
operating modes.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850
connection or sending the CID file after editing the values from pacFactory tool (menu
Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection
settings.
The settings included in this logical node are:
 LocalTim: Allows to force sending local time in IEC 61850 timestamps. It is

important to know that this is not normative because IEC 61850 standard defines
that the timestamps must be sent in UTC format. However, with this option the
device is adapted to systems that only use local time. The default value is 0,
which indicates the use of UTC. The value 1 indicates the use of local time.
 MaxConn: Sets the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections that are accepted.
Limited to a maximum value of 16.
 AplicTms: Defines the disconnection timeout at the application level. After this
time (in seconds) without receiving any IEC 61850 messages the server automatically
closes the connection.
 TipoServ: Defines some operation modes of the device.
 Value 0: Default operation mode.

User Manual 336
CONFIGURATION 
 Value 1: Special operation mode that includes:

 Enable IP checking to validate a new ICD/CID file. If the IP address
indicated in the communications section of the ICD/CID file does not match
the address of the device the file is not validated. If the IP address of
the device is changed once the file has been validated, the IEC 61850
server is disabled and waits for the change of the IP address of the device
with the one in the file or to receive a new CID file with the correct IP.
 When a command is received, the value that the device saves in "orIdent"
attribute is the IP address from which the command was sent, regardless of
the value that the client sent in the message.
 AuthReq: Allows activating the authentication in the IEC 61850 connection. The
password string is based on the ftp user password and the format must be:
 "user:xxxxx pass:yyyyy"
 DevGoose: Selects the ethernet port to be used for goose messages. Any change in
this value causes the activation of the signal ResetDev.
 NoGsVlan: Defines the use of the VLAN tag in Goose messages. Any change in this
value causes the activation of the signal ResetDev. Default value is 0.
 Value 0: Goose messages are sent with VLAN TAG and are received with or
without VLAN TAG.
 Value 1: Goose messages are sent and received only without VLAN TAG.
 IprvMod: Sets the access level to reports, commands and logs from the different IP
addresses configured in the IPRV logical nodes defined in the following paragraph:
 Permissive: By default all IP addresses not configured in the IPRV logical
nodes have access to reports, commands and logs. The IP addresses included
in the IPRV logical nodes will have the configured access level.
 Restrictive: Only IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical nodes have
access to reports, commands and logs. The access level is configured
individually for each IP address. Other IP addresses do not have access.
 IprvConn: The value 1 limits the IEC 61850 connections only to IP addresses
configured on IPRV logical nodes and any connection from other IP address will be
rejected. The value 0 allows the connection from any IP address.
Only the settings that indicate the activation of the signal ResetDev require a restart
of the device to be effective.
10.8.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings

There are 8 instances of this logical node (GEN/IPRVx) to configure the level access to
reports, commands and logs of up to 8 IEC 61850 clients. Each client is identify by its
IP address. The available settings for each logical node are:
 Addr: IP address of the client.

 EnaRpt: Enumerated value to configure the access level to reports from the defined
IP address.
 [0] All: Allows access to all reports.
 [1] Yes: Allows access only to the reports defined in RptNam fields.
 [2] No: Not allowed access to any report.
 CmdEna: Boolean setting that with value 1 allows the execution of commands from the
defined IP address.
 enalog: Enumerated value to configure the access level to logs from the defined IP
address.
 [0] Read only: Only read access to the logs.
 [1] Read/write: Read and write access to the logs.

User Manual 337
CONFIGURATION 
The signal GEN/IPRVx.St.stVal indicates whether the address configured on that node is in
communication with the device. In case of multiple connections from the same IP, the
signal is 0 when all are closed.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850
connection or sending the CID file after editing the values from pacFactory tool (menu
Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section pacFactory protection
settings.

User Manual 338
SYNCHRONIZATION
11. SYNCHRONIZATION
Several synchronization sources are permitted, with the following priority:
 IRIG-B
 SNTP
 Communication protocols
 pacFactory (see specific user manual)
 Local display
In case of active synchronization with any of the sources, the sources of lower priority are
blocked. Some examples:
 If there is synchronization by IRIG, synchronization for any other cause is not

permitted. In order to consider the absence of IRIG synchronization and to allow
other sources, 1,5 minutes must elapse without the reception of correct IRIG
frames.
 If there SNTP synchronization, the synchronization of protocols is not permitted,
nor pacFactory nor display. However, if IRIG synchronization is received, the SNTP
is blocked and IRIG is synchronized.
 Synchronization by pacFactory and by display have the same priority and can be run
simultaneously.
11.1 GENERAL SETTINGS
The unit’s data model has a GEN/LTIM node for the configuring the summer/winter time
change. The node has the following settings (see Table 208):
 Offset Local Time-UTC (min): Offset Local Time-UTC (min). A setting that indicates
the number of minutes by which the time setting must be put forward/put back when
changing between summer/winter time. Range between -720 and 720 minutes (-12 to +
12 hours)
 Summer-winter time change enabled: Time change enabled. A boolean setting that
allows the time setting to be changed
 Summer Calendar Pattern: Summer Calendar Pattern. Three selectable values:
 Last of month: Last week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 First of month: First week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Second of month: Second week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Third of month: Third week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Fourth of month: Fourth week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Day of month: Selects the day of the month indicated in DayD
 Day Week Summer: Indicates the day of the week for the change to summer time
(Monday.. Sunday)
 Month Summer: Indicates the month in which the change to summer time occurs
(January.. December)
 Day Summer: Indicates the day in which the change to summer time occurs (1.. 31)
 Time Summer: Indicates the time at which the time changes to summer time
 Minute Summer: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrD) when the time
changes to summer time

User Manual 339
SYNCHRONIZATION
 Winter Calendar Pattern: Winter Calendar Pattern. Equivalent to OccD but from
winter to summer
 Day Week Winter: Indicates the day of the week for the change to winter time
(Monday.. Sunday)
 Month Winter: Indicates the month in which the change to winter time occurs
(January.. December)
 Day Winter: Indicates the day in which the change to winter time occurs (1.. 31)
 Time Winter: Indicates the time at which the time changes to winter time
 Minute Winter: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrS) when the time
changes to winter time
 Not Synchro Time (min): Timeout to activate synchronization alarm.
Table 208 Synchronization settings

TmOfsTmm Offset Local Time-UTC (min) -720 720 1 Int32
Summer-winter time change
NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
TmUseDT enabled
OccD Summer Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayD Day Week Summer 0 6 1 enum
MthD Month Summer 1 12 1 enum
DayD Day Summer 1 31 1 Int32
HrD Time Summer 0 23 1 Int32
MnD Minute Summer 0 59 1 Int32
OccS Winter Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayS Day Week Winter 0 6 1 enum
Mths Month Winter 1 12 1 enum
DayS Day Winter 1 31 1 Int32
HrS Time Winter 0 23 1 Int32
MnS Minute Winter 0 59 1 Int32
SyncAlmTm Not Synchro Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
They are signals indicating the synchronization source (Table 209):
 Synchronization by IRIG-B: Active when the device is synchronized by IRIG-B.

 SNTP synchronization: Active when the device is synchronized by SNTP.
 Synchronization by protocols: Active if the last synchronization was been received
by communications protocols.
 Synchronization by display: Active if the last synchronization was been received by
the front keyboard.
 Synchronization by console: Active if the last synchronization has been received
from the PacFactory console.
 Device not synchronized: Synchronization alarm. Active if a valid synchronization
has not been received during the configured setting (SyncAlmTm).
 Daylight saving time: Active if the local time has summer correction.
Table 209 Synchronization source

Synchronization by IRIG-B SyncIRIGB stVal
Synchronization by SNTP SyncSNTP stVal
Synchronization by protocols SyncProt stVal
Synchronization by display SyncDispl stVal
Synchronization by console SyncCons stVal
Device not synchronized SyncAlm stVal
Daylight saving time TmDT stVal

User Manual 340
SYNCHRONIZATION
11.2 IRIG-B
The device is equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes
(consult chapter 2 for more details about the input).
The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. The configuration is
with the IrgType setting in the GEN\LLN0 logical node (General configuration). The
different options are (depending on whether the GPS send UTC or local time):
 “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are
admitted.
 “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into
account. It cannot be used with formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to
zero value.
 “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are
admitted.
 “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into
account. It cannot be used with formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to
zero value.
11.3 SNTP
The SNPT (Simple Network Time Protocol) settings are included in the LTMS logical node.
Note: There is an optional configuration mode with the SNTP-IP value in the communications
section of the ICD file, which is maintained for backward compatibility with previous
configuration files. The IED only uses that option if no configuration is included in the
LTMS node. The recommended configuration option is the LTMS node settings.
11.3.1 Settings
The SNTP settings are in the GEN/LTMS logical node:
 Main Time Source: IP address of the main NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not
allowed. Value 0.0.0.0 disables the main source.
 Secondary Time Source: IP address of the secondary NTP server. Broadcast addresses
are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0 disables the secondary source.
 Main Time Source Gateway:
 Secondary Time Source Gateway:
 Not Synchro T. SNTP (min): Elapsed time in which it has not been received any
correct SNTP response (Leap Indicator different from 0) from any of the sources
configured for SNTP synchronization to consider the SNTP as not synchronized.
 SNTP Polling Time (seg): Time interval between synchronization requests to the NTP
servers. Range value is 10 to 3600 seconds. If the configured time is less than the
real polling communication process (requests and retries in case of failure) the
synchronization active request will finish normally and a new polling timer will be
started.
 SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg): Waiting time for the response to an unicast
synchronization request. If no response is received in that time interval a unicast
request retry cycle will be started. Range value is 1 to 60 seg.

User Manual 341
SYNCHRONIZATION
 Retry number: Number of unicast request retries in case there is no response from
the NTP server to a request. If the configured number of retries finishes without
response with the main source the device tries to synchronize with the secondary
source. If the configured number of retries finishes without response with the
secondary source that synchronization process is finished and the device waits the
polling period to send a new request. Range value is 0 to 9.
Table 210 SNTP settings LTMS node

TmSrcSet1 Main Time Source IP address VisString255
TmSrcSet2 Secondary Time Source IP address VisString255
TmSrcGtw1 Main Time Source Gateway IP address VisString255
TmSrcGtw2 Secondary Time Source Gateway IP address VisString255
ValTm Not Synchro T. SNTP (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
PollTms SNTP Polling Time (seg) 10 3600 1 Int32
SNTP Time delay Unicast message
EspTms 1 60 1 Int32
(seg)
NRetry Retry number 0 9 1 Int32
The following diagram details the synchronization process:

User Manual 342
SYNCHRONIZATION
The following values are checked in the synchronization responses to consider them valid
and apply the time to the internal clock:
 Message length.
 Flags mode: Server.
 Flags version number: NTP version 4.
 Flags leap indicator: Different from 3.
11.4 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850
In the IEC 61850 data there are quality flags which detail the validity of the time in a
timestamp sent by communications. These are the used quality flags:
 Clock Not Syncronized: It has the same value as the synchronization failure alarm.
 Leap Second: It has the value received from the synchronization source.
 Clock Failure: It has the failure in the internal RTC clock.

User Manual 343
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 
12. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS

The information generated by the unit is stored in xml format files, except the format of the
oscillography, which is stored in comtrade format.
12.1 STATUS REPORT
The status report indicates the current status of the protection, showing instantaneous
values. This report is updated approximately every 1 second.
The information available in the status message is:
 Version. Indicates the unit version:

 CPU: Shows the CPU’s main firmware version.
 CPU2: Displays the firmware version of the FPGA and interface with I/O modules.
 OTHER: Displays the analogue card's firmware and I/O modules.
 General. Displays the unit’s general data:
 Relay date and time. Within the <Date> tag, the date (Date) and time (Time) are
shown.
 Active table. Within the <Setting Group> tag, the active table number is shown.
 Measurements: Within the Measurements tag, the unit’s measurements are shown. The
measurements correspond to the fundamental frequency.
 <Analog>: Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 <Sequence>: Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module
and angle).
 <Power>: Total real, reactive and apparent power.
 <Frequency>. Frequency value.
 <Battery> External power supply battery voltage.
 <InternalBattery> Internal battery voltage for maintenance of Data.
 <Maximeter>. Indicates the maximeter value for each current and voltage phase.
It has a “Reset” button.
 <Thermal>. Phase and neutral thermal image value. It also has a “Reset” button.
 <Temperature> Indicates the unit’s temperature.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases.
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the
total currents (module and angle) of the three phases.
 Total current. Indicates the total current of the three phases. Only in 52 ½
configurations.
 Input and output status. The status of the digital inputs and outputs is indicated
in each of the cards available in the unit. Each card is distinguished by its
address, indicated in GGIO1 to GGIO8.
 Digital inputs. Ind1.stVal to Ind32.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if
not. There are as many values as there are inputs in the card.
 Digital outputs. SPCSO1.stVal to SPCSO16.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N”
if not. There are as many values as there are outputs in the card.

User Manual 344
 Protection units. Indicates the current status of each of the functions: enabled,
pick up, trip and last trip. In each of the functions the data available in each
node are indicated.
 Status. In <StEna.stVal>, the function is indicated as active and not blocked
with “Y”. “N” is used to indicate that the function is not enabled or blocked or
in operation
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The
data depends on the unit, for example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The
data depends on the unit, for example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Last trip. Indicated within <l>. “Y” is used to indicate if the last trip was
due to this cause, whilst "N" is used to indicate otherwise.
 Recloser status: Indicates the current status of the recloser. The signals are in
<RREC1>. “Y” is used to indicate active signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate
inactive signals. The available signals and their references are indicated in the
recloser section. These include:
 in service/blocked.
 in stand-by.
 ongoing cycle, indicating the closure cycle that is currently active.
 definitive trip.
 internal block, distinguishing different causes.
 External block.
 “Put Into Service and “Put Out of Service” buttons
 Frequency recloser status: Indicates the current status of the frequency recloser.
The signals are in <FRREC1>. “Y” is used to indicate active signals, whereas "N"
is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references
are indicated in the frequency recloser section.
 Synchronism check unit status. The general status of the synchronism is displayed
in RSYN1 and the presence of voltage in RVRS1. “Y” is used indicated active
signals and "N" for inactive signals. The available signals and their references
are indicated in the synchronism section.
 Protection status. With the “PROT” data in LLN0, “Y” indicates whether the relay
is in service, “N” indicates if the relay is out of service.
 General status. Indicated in LLN0 with the “GEN” data, in which the following is
indicated:
 Unit hw status. Indicating if there is failure "Y" or "N".
 Local/remote mode. Indicating if it is local, "Y" or "N".
 Events pending dispatch. Indicating if there is an event pending dispatch, "Y"
or "N".
 Failure in IRIG synchronization. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 V2 and Vn voltage monitoring. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 Check on internal communication between cards. Indicating if there is failure,
"Y" or "N".
 Open pole logic status. Shown in POPD1, indicating:
 StEna.stVal. Indicates whether the function is enabled, “Y” or “N”.
 OpenPole. For each pole and general, indicating whether open “Y” or closed “N”
 Number of open poles. One (OneOpPole), two (TwoOpPole), three (ThreeOpPol) or at
least one (OpenPole)
 Broken conductor. Indicating whether the phase is broken for each of the poles,
“Y” or “N”.

User Manual 345
 Deal line. Indicating whether there is a dead line for each of the poles, “Y” or
“N”.
 Breaker status. Shown in XCBR, indicating:
 BrDISt. For each pole and general, the status of the associated digital input:
closed “Y”, open “N”.
 CloseOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the closure command: active
“Y”, inactive “N”.
 OpenOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the opening command: active
“Y”, inactive “N”.
 ClsFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a
failure in the closure command, “Y” or “N”
 OpenFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a
failure in the opening command, “Y” or “N”
 Breaker monitoring status. Shown in CBOU1, indicating the value of the ki2 sum for
each pole.
 Monitoring units.
 CCTS1. CT monitoring. There is function enabled data (StEna.stVal) and CT
monitoring activation data (CTSpv.general)
 CTSU1. Temperature monitoring. There is a function enabling data (StEna.stVal)
and an indication of the temperature above (OverTemp) and below (UnderTemp) the
threshold.
 CESS1. External power supply monitoring. Indication of external power supply
above (OverVcc) or below (UnderVcc) the threshold. Also indicates whether the
function is enabled or not (StEna.stVal).
 CSUS1. Indicates battery failure status (DFFA), if it is activated “Y" or
deactivated “N”.
The status data are displayed on the PacFactory console and in the unit's display:
 PacFactory. All the status message information is displayed, grouped in tabs

according to the information:
 General. The date, active table, versions and measurements are displayed.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
 Enabled. Indicates whether the units are operative (enabled and not blocked) or
not.
 Protection status. The status of the protection units is displayed, i.e., if
they are picked up and/or tripped.
 Breaker and monitoring. The breaker, breaker monitoring and circuits statuses
are displayed.
 Recloser and synchronism. The status of the recloser and synchronism units is
displayed.
 Check. The results of the various checks that are carried out in the unit are
displayed.
 Display. Grouped into several screens and displaying:
 General: Date and active table.
 Transformer measurements and configuration.
 Current and voltage maximeters.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.

User Manual 346
Figure 161 PacFactory status screen
12.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT
This report indicates the measurement transformers’ primary measurements, applying the
transformer ratio. The maximeter information is used for the maximeter reports.
The information available in the measurements message is:
 Distance. In the <Distance> tag, indicating the distance of the last fault.
 Currents. Within the <Currents> tag, showing the rms current measurements in
primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 The average current module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 Thermal image <Thermal>. Value of phase and neutral thermal image.
 Sequences <Sequence>. Current sequences module (I0, I1, I2)
 Voltages Within the <Voltage> tag, showing the rms voltage measurements in
primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase and neutral.
 The average voltage module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase and neutral.
 Phase-phase <Phase>.
 Phase pair module (AB, BC and CA) and average.
 Sequences. Voltage sequences module (V0, V1, V2)
 Frequency. Frequency value.

User Manual 347
 Powers. Within the <Power> tag, showing the rms measurements for each phase and
total:
 Real power. Per phase and total.
 Reactive power. Per phase and total.
 Apparent power. Per phase and total.
 Power factor <Power Factor>. Per phase and average.
 Energy counters <Energy>. There is a reset button for the energy counters.
 Last reset command date
 Positive and negative real energy counter value
 Positive and negative reactive energy counter value
 Maximeters. Shows the maximum value and the date on which it was produced. There
is a reset button for the maximeter.
 Current. For each phase.
 Voltage. For each phase.
 Real power. For phase and total.
 Reactive power. For phase and total.
 Apparent power. For phase and total.
Figure 162 PacFactory measurements screen
12.3 FAULT REPORT
The fault reports include information about the unit’s data during the fault, as well as
the active settings during the fault. The last 20 faults are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name

User Manual 348
For example, “100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
 Start Date: Trip date with a 2-character format for the year, the month and the day. For
example, 26/june/2010 would be 100626.
 Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds as of 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds as
of midnight.
 Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary.
For example, “t +2” indicates time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone
is 2 hours 30 minutes.
 Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name
(InsShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
 Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the
“PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
 Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
The information available in the fault is :
 Date and time: <Fecha>. Indicates the date as a string in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms”
format, i.e., “23/04/09 10_41_30_256”. There are three dates available
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up): <Inicio>
 Trip (first unit tripped): <Disparo>.
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears): <Fin>
 Configuration: <Config>. Indicates the configuration of each of the 12 transformers: type
and scale range.
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault.
They are grouped into “Pre-fault” and “Fault”, and the same data is available in both
cases:
 Transformer measurements <Analog>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the
angle of each transformer.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current
sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Powers. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the
total currents (module and angle) of the three phases.
 Distance to fault.
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault.
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Fault and trip type <Tipo/Type>: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by
combinations of the characters A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral,
sensitive neutral or ground), RTP (teleprotection), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral
overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), IT
(thermal image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Fault type: Indicates the pick up type.
 Trip type: Indicates the trip type.

User Manual 349
 Details of units. Indicates the picked up and tripped units. Indicates whether the unit
is active “Y” or not “N” for each logical node available in the unit.
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data
depends on the unit, for example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data
depends on the unit, for example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Active settings. Active settings in the moment of the fault. Indicates the setting file
name. It can be accessed to consult the settings.
Figure 163 PacFactory fault screen
12.4 INCIDENT REPORT
The unit stores in a queue of 1000 non-simultaneous protection events in a non-volatile

memory. Each protection event is recorded with its date and time, as well as the current
and voltage measurements of all the transformers and the frequency.
The protection events can be masked individually, so that only protection events configured
by the user are generated. These enablings are available in the GEN/RSUC node.
The information available in each record is:
 Date: With millisecond precision.

 Information. Within the <Inf> tag the protection event signal number and its
status 0 (Deactivation) / 1 (Activation) are indicated. Each protection event
record can have up to 16 simultaneous signals.
 Measurements. The trafo measurements at the time of the protection event (module
and angle) and frequency measurement are shown for each of the unit’s
transformers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.

User Manual 350
Figure 164 Example of protection event record
<Reg Fecha="15-06-10 21:50:38:792">

<Inf Sen="8426" Status="1"/>
<Inf Sen="8433" Status="0"/>
<Med>
<T1 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T2 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T3 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T4 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T5 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T6 Mod="0.00" Arg="38.10"/>
<T7 Mod="31.68" Arg="58.53"/>
<T8 Mod="99.94" Arg="-62.01"/>
<T9 Mod="99.95" Arg="178.00"/>
<T10 Mod="31.67" Arg="58.54"/>
<T11 Mod="99.98" Arg="-62.02"/>
<T12 Mod="99.94" Arg="178.00"/>
<FRE Hz="50.00"/>
</Med>
</Reg>
Figure 165 PacFactory protection event screen
12.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT
The unit saves a queue of 4000 historical measurement reports the non-volatile memory.
Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents, the maximum and minimum
average phase to earth voltages and the maximum and minimum real, reactive and apparent
power (calculated within a programmable time window) detected during a programmable
recording period. The measurements are secondary.
The historical measurement report is grouped into records in which the first corresponds to
the oldest and the last to most recent, so that when the file is opened, the first item we
see is the oldest.
 The format of this file for each record is:

 Record number

User Manual 351
 Date: With second precision: Day and Time

 Measurements: Maximum/minimum/average magnitude values:
 Current. The units are secondary amps.
 Voltage. The units are secondary volts.
 Real power. The units are secondary watts.
 Reactive power. The units are secondary VAR.
 Apparent power. The units are secondary VA.
 Frequency. Units are Hz.
 External power supply. The units are volts.
Figure 166 Example of records
<REG Num="0" Day="18/04/10" Time="00:00:37">
<I_A Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<V_V Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<P_W Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<Q_VAR Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<S_VA Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<f_Hz Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<Batery_V Max="120.51" Min="120.51" Media="120.51"/>
</REG>
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/MHRE node:
 Sample time window. Indicates the time in minutes during which the average is
calculated
 Record interval. Indicates the time in minutes in which each record is created
 Start time. Indicates the time after which the historical measurement record is
started
 End time. Indicating the time up to which the historical measurements record is
carried out
 Calendar mask. Indicates whether the historical measurements record is created
every day (YES) or if it is only created on the days indicated in the day
selection mask.
 Day selection. It indicated, for each day of the week, whether the record was
created.
Table 211 Historical measurement settings

SmTmm Sample time window 1 15 1 minutes uint32
RegIntTmm Record interval 1 1440 minutes uint32
StH Start time 0 23 1 uint32
EndH End time 0 23 1 uint32
DayEna Calendar mask YES/NO Boolean
SunEna Selection Sunday YES/NO Boolean
MonEna Selection Monday YES/NO Boolean
TueEna Selection Tuesday YES/NO Boolean
WedEna Selection Wednesday YES/NO Boolean
ThuEna Selection Thursday YES/NO Boolean
FriEna Selection Friday YES/NO Boolean
SatEna Selection Saturday YES/NO Boolean

User Manual 352
12.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT
Displays the statistical data calculated in the unit: currents, action times and counters.
It has reset buttons.
The values available are:
 The current statistics are grouped in the <Current> tag and include:
 <ki2> Ki2 accumulated by each of the 3 phases. Each phase can be independently
reset to the initial value.
 <Cut> Opened current. Indicates the last (Last) and maximum (Maximum) open
current per phase
 <Time> Indicates the time in seconds during which the current has been within
specific ranges.
 From 2 to 5 times In
 From 5 to 12.5 times In
 From 12.5 to 20 times In
 From 20 to 40 times In
 The counters are grouped in the <Counters> tag and include:
 <Reclose> Reclosure counter. Indicates the number of reclosures effected,
separating them according to first, second, third and fourth reclosure. There is
a command for resetting the counter.
 <Openings>. Opening counter for each of the 3 phases, includes trips and manual
openings. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global
counter for all the phases.
 <Trip>. Trip counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting
each phase's counter and a global counter for all the phases.
 <Close>. Closure counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for
resetting each phase's counter and a global counter for all the phases.
 The timers are grouped in the <Timers> tag and include:
 <Opening>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical)
opening times in milliseconds per phase and the dispersion for each pair of
phases.
 <Close>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) closure
times in milliseconds per phase and the dispersion for each pair of phases.
 <Inactivity> Indicates the days of breaker inactivity for each phase.
 Models with two breakers, current, counters and times are independent for each
breaker.
 There is a command for the complete reset of each breaker: opening, trip and close
counters, ki2, cut current and times. The reclose counter is not reset.

User Manual 353
Figure 167 PacFactory statistics screen
12.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT
Displays the maximum and minimum values integrated in the time. It has buttons to
individually reset the maximeters and/or minimeters.
The Data displayed are:
 Each phase’s current

 Each phase’s voltage
 Real power per phase and total
 Reactive power per phase and total
 Apparent power per phase and total
 Frequency
 External battery measurement

User Manual 354
Figure 168 PacFactory maximeter/minimeter screen
12.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography is stored in binary comtrade format. There is a CFG config file and a DAT
data file for each.
For additional information see on “IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
(COMTRADE) for Power Systems”.
It allows 16 analog signals:
 12 analog inputs from the transformers (current and voltages)

 3 frequency measurements (V phase B, V synchronism, frequency 2Va-Vb-Vc)
 External battery used as the power supply of the equipment
 LD models show the differential and restraint currents of the three phases.
It allows up to 100 digital signals, selected among all the signal of the equipment.
The trigger signals are selected among the registered signals, when the set “Trigger
Signal” is set to “YES”. If it is set to “NO”, that signal is registered but does not start
the oscillography.
The length is set in cycles (Total Duration), from 20 up to 420 cycles (8,4 seconds for
50Hz and 7 seconds for 60Hz).
The number of samples can be selected among 16, 24, 36, 48, 72 or 144.
The continuous mode allows increasing the length if at the end of the register, there is a
trigger signal activated. In that case, the register continues the number of cycles set in
the “Total Duration”, checking again the trigger signals at the end of the new register.
The total register is limited to 5Mb or 3 times the setting “Total Duration” (the most
restrictive of both).

User Manual 355
To increase the length, the trigger signal has to change the status, that is, it has to
pass from deactivated to activated. If one trigger signal is continuously activated, it
does not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The digital signals set to “NO” are displayed, but do not start, nor extend the
oscillography register.
The oscillography allows to display signals that do not start the register. For example,
the protection trip signal can inicialize an oscillography register, where the start
signals are displayed. Table 212 shows an example of an oscillography configuration, with
11 digital signals registered but only three signals start the register (General trip, 51
trip and GGIO1Digital input 1). At the end of the register, if one of these three signals,
continues activated, the oscillography is extended the cycles set in “Total Duration”;
otherwise the oscillography is finished.
Table 212 Oscillography configuration example
Ajustes Valor
Recorded signal 01 General trip
Trigger Signal 01 YES
Recorded signal 02 General start
Trigger Signal 02 NO
Recorded signal 03 51 start
Recorded signal 04 51 trip
Señal registrada oscilo 05 IOC1 Trip phase A
Recorded signal 06 IOC1 Trip phase B
Recorded signal 07 IOC1 Trip phase C
Recorded signal 08 IOC1 Start phase A
Recorded signal 09 IOC1 Start phase B
Recorded signal 10 IOC1 Start phase C
Recorded signal 11 GGIO1Digital input 1
10Mb of non volatile memory is available to store oscillography registers. The total number
of registers depends on the settings. Table 213 shows some examples of the capacity (with
the continuous mode set to “NO”), where the most influential settings are the length and
the number of samples.
Table 213 Oscillography capacity
Total
Number of Number of digital
Duration Number of oscillographys
samples/cycle signals
(cycles)
420 144 100 3
420 144 32 3
420 36 100 13
420 36 32 15
50 144 100 27
50 144 32 32
50 36 100 98
50 36 32 121
20 144 100 34
20 144 32 78
20 36 100 206
20 36 32 271
20 16 100 350
20 16 32 499
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/RDRE node:

User Manual 356
 Total Duration (cycles). Indicates the total duration of disturbance recorder (in
cycles).
 Pre-fault duration (cycles). Indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in
each disturbance recorder
 Number of samples/cycle. Indicates the samples per cycle stored in the disturbance
recorder.
 Recorded signal X. Indicates the signal that is stored in record position X. If
programmed as -1, no signals are recorded.
 Trigger X signal. If the signal is configured, it indicates whether it provokes a
disturbance recorder pick up (1) or not (0). If set to “No”, it is only displayed.
The trigger and recorded signals are repeated up to 100 possible signals.
Table 214 Oscillography settings

OscCyc Total Duration (cycles) 20 420 1 cycles Int32
PreCyc Prefault duration (cycles) 1 415 1 cycles Int32
NuSaCy Number of samples/cycle enum
OscReg1 Recorded signal 1 Int32
OscTrg1 Trigger 1 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
OscReg2 Recorded signal 2 Int32
OscTrg2 Trigger 2 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
Recorded signal and trigger
0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
up to 100
The disturbance record configuration file (CFG) contains the general disturbance recorder
information (Figure 169):
 Total number of analogue and digital channels available in the disturbance recorder.
 Analogue channel data: bay, identification, measurements scaled and limits.
 Digital input data: bay and identification.
 Sample data: signal frequency, sampling frequency, number of the last sample.
 Disturbance recorder start and end dates.
 Data file format
The disturbance recorder data file (DAT) includes the information captured in the disturbance
recorder, with the following available for each sample:
 Sample number
 Sample time
 Analogue samples values
 Digital signals values

User Manual 357
Figure 169 Configuration file
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “20100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
 Start Date: Trip date with a 4-character format for the year, the month and the
day. For example, 26/june/2010 would be 20100626.
 Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds since 00:00 of the day, that is,
milliseconds since midnight.
 Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if
necessary. For example, “t +2” indicates time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates
that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
 Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name
(InsShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used".
 Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam)
from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used".
 Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
USB ACCESS 
13. USB ACCESS

The unit can be accessed via the front USB to retrieve reports and CID from the device and to
load a new CID.
The USB port can be configured from the local HMI (Menu: Password -> USB Configuration).
The configuration options are:
 Without password: No password is needed.

 With password: The local HMI password must be entered before any USB operation.
 Disabled: The USB port is disabled.
13.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS
When a pendrive is inserted, the following appears in the front above the current screen,
indicating that the device has been detected:
USB Detected
The unit’s reports are automatically dumped onto the pendrive.
While the data is being downloaded, the following appears in the front above the current
screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
Just in case there is a CID, an ICD or and IID in the pendrive, the user will be asked for
a confirmation to load this file into the unit.
WANT TO START
THE CID UPDATE
CANCEL
ACCEPT
PRESS ENTER: RUN

OPTION
If accepted, the following appears on the screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
If canceled, downloading is assumed to be complete, and the following appears on the screen
for 5 seconds:

User Manual 359
USB ACCESS 
REMOVE THE
USB DEVICE
As of this moment, the pendrive can be removed.
Only the reports existent in the unit at the time of the download will appear in the
pendrive, with the data structure:
 Root with the short installation and relay name (PROT/LPHD node), and the iedName,
separated by “_”·, i.e., “Instalacion_Rele_iedName”
 COMTRADE. This directory contains the disturbance recorders generated in the unit
 FAULT RECORDS. This directory contains the fault records generated in the unit.
 The rest of the unit’s reports are dependent on the root:
 Maximetro.xml
 Sucesos.xml
 Informe_Estadisticos.xml
 Registro.xml
 CID
For detailed information about these reports, see Chapter 10, “DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
”.
Figure 170 USB Tree
13.2 LOADING CID
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if an ICD
exists. If there is an ICD, it is copied into the directory “public/SCL/notvalidated” in
order that it may be operative in the unit.
Suring the search for the ICD, the existence of a file with an ICD, icd, CID, cid, IID or
iid extension is checked. The file name need not be specific as only the extension is
checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the ICD is considered
invalid and not ICD is captured.

User Manual 360
FTP ACCESS
14. FTP ACCESS

The public user for ftp access is as follows:
 User: ftpuser
 Password: ftpuser
The user profile allows direct access to the LD and SCL directories.

User Manual 361
MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND
METERS
15. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND

METERS
All the signals (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs-outputs, etc.), measurements and
meters that are generated in the unit are identified by a number that appears in the sAddress
of each of these elements.
15.1 SIGNALS
The distribution of the unit’s signals is effected using four numbers as a base: 0, 8192,
16384, 24576. All the unit’s signals are divided into four types, taking these four digits
as references:
15.1.1 Type A signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers
between digits 0 and 8191.
These signals include digital inputs and Goose signals.
 Digital Inputs
 Identification number between 0 and 287.
Example: sAddr="S,0,5,0;TX1:GGIO1.Digital input 6,TX2:GGIO1.Digital Input
6,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of digital input
number six from the first card in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
 Goose Signals
 In turn, the Goose signals are divided into RIO modules and LGOS nodes.
 RIO modules
Example: sAddr="GS,0,288,0;TX1:RIO1.St,TX2:RIO1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal
from the first RIO module in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/RIO node
 LGOS nodes
Example: sAddr="GS,0,608,0;TX1:LGOS1.St,TX2:LGOS1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal
from the first LGOS node in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
Therefore, the distribution of these signals based on their identification number is as
follows:

User Manual 362
METERS
Table 215 Type A signal mapping
DIGITAL
INPUTS
(0 - 287)
GOOSE
SIGNALS
(288 - 1695)
The number of this type of signal reserved in the unit is 1696.
15.1.2 Type B signals

This type of signal includes type B protection signals, fast protection logic signals and
fast control logic signals.
 Type B protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,9091,0;TX1:TOC1 Phase trip,TX2:TOC1 Phase
Trip,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a type B protection
signal in the ICD sAddress.
 PROT node
 Fast protection logics
Example: sAddr="PS,0,9216,0;TX1:Protection logic 1,TX2:Protection logic
1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
 n the example, we can see the identification number of the first
protection logic in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/pGGIO node
 Fast control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,9344,0;TX1:Fst logic 1,TX2:Fast logic
1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first fast
control logic in the ICD sAddress.
 CTRL/AutGGIO2 node
 Additional type B protection signals
 PROT node

User Manual 363
METERS

follows:
Table 216.Type B signal mapping
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(8192 - 9215)
FAST PROTECTION LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9216 - 9343)
FAST CONTROL LOGIC

SIGNALS
.
(9344 - 9471)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(9472 -10367)
15.1.3 Type C signals

These signals include the type C protection signals.
 Type C protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,16384,0;TX1:Recloser in
service,TX2:,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type C
protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
 PROT node

User Manual 364
METERS

follows:
Table 217.Type C signal mapping
TYPE C
PROTECTION
SIGNALS
(16384 -
16799)
15.1.4 Type D signals

between digits 24576 and higher.
This type of signal includes the type D protection signals, the communication failure
signals for all the bays that are connected to the unit, the slow logic control signals
and signals resulting from orders.
 Type D protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,24576,0;TX1:Relay in
service,TX2:OnLine,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type D
protection signal in the ICD sAddress.
 PROT node
 Communication failure control signals
 Slow control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,25120,0;TX1:Slow logic 1,TX2:Slow logic
1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first slow
control logic in the ICD sAddress.
 Signals resulting from orders
 Example: sAddr=" RS,0,26908,4;TX1:CSWI4
opClsOr,TX2:,AC:3.7.8.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:0.0.0.0"
follows:

User Manual 365
METERS
Table 218 Type D signal mapping
TYPE D PROTECTION SIGNALS

(24576 - 24991)
CONTROL SIGNALS (COM FAILURE)

(24992 - 25119)
SLOW LOGIC CONTROL SIGNALS

(25120 - 26399)
SIGNALS RESULTING FROM

ORDERS
(26400 - 26911)
15.2 MEASUREMENTS
All the unit's measurements are divided into four types:
 Protection measurements.
Example: sAddr="M,0,124,1;TX1:I average,TX2: AVERAGE I"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a protection measurement
in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional measurements: Identification number between 744 and 948.
 PROT node
 Goose Measurements
Example: sAddr="GM,0,300,0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first Goose
measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
 Measurements resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LM,0,556,0;TX1:Logic measurement 1,TX2:Logic analog 1"

User Manual 366
METERS
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic
measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 Measurements resulting from analogical input boards
Example: sAddr="M,0,688,0;TX1:Measure 1,TX2:Measure 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first measurement in
the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
Therefore, the distribution of these measurements based on their identification number is
as follows:
Table 219 Measurement mapping
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(0 - 299)
GOOSE MEASUREMENTS
(300 - 555)
MEASURERMENTS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(556 - 687)
MEASURERMENTS RESULTING FROM ANALOGICAL

INPUT BOARDS
(688 - 743)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(744 - 948)
The number of measurements reserved in the unit is 949.
15.3 COUNTERS
All the unit's counters are divided into two types:
 Protection counters
Example: sAddr="C,0,0;TX1:Active energy out,TX2:Active Energy Out"

User Manual 367
METERS
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection
counter in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional protection counters: Identification number between 150 and 176.
 PROT node
 Counters resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LC,0,32;TX1:Logic counter 1,TX2:Logic counter 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic counter
in the ICD sAddress.
Therefore, the distribution of these counters based on their identification number is as

follows:
Table 220 Counter mapping
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(0 - 31)
COUNTERS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(32 - 149)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(150 - 176)
The number of counters reserved in the unit is 177.

User Manual 368
LOGICS
16. LOGICS
This document explains the operating mode of the logics generation tool of logic devices.
The EF family’s logics are fragments of executable code generated by the user using a PC tool,
both in text and graphic formats. These logics can be defined in an IED’s data model (using
iedFactory) or in a particular instance (using substationFactory or the pacFactory settings
tool).
There are two different types of logics: control logics and protection logics.
In this chapter the device logics are defined and an introduction to the configuration options
is presented. For more details about the logics configuration consult the user manual of the
software configuration tool (pacFactory / energyFactorySuite).
16.1 CONTROL LOGICS
The logics can be used to customize the behaviour of an IED. For example, automatism can be
added or calculations between different magnitudes can be carried out.
The logics are run in two different tasks, each with different priorities: one for fast
logics and one for slow logics.
The running time for the fast logics is 2 milliseconds. The running time for the slow
logics is approximately 10 milliseconds, although given that this is a lower priority task
it may occasionally be affected by other higher priority tasks.
Each configured logic must be included in one of these two tasks, in accordance with the
manner in which they are to be run – fast logics or slow logics.
To edit a control logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding IED
and click on the editor icon. To edit the control logic from pacFactory, click on the
"Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
The logics are defined in program blocks called POU (program organization unit). Two of the
languages defined in the IEC-61131-3 standard are offered for the creation of each POU: one
textual (ST) and one graphic (FBD).
The POUs can be defined at different levels, both in the model and in an instantiation: at
the IED level, at the logical device (LD) level or at the logical node (LN) level.
There are three types of POU, as defined in the IEC-61131-3 standard: PROGRAM,
FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. The programs are the senior hierarchy POUs, with each one
corresponding to a task to be run on the device. Each PROGRAM can refer to several
FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. In turn, a FUNCTION_BLOCK can refer to one or more FUNCTION.
At the IED level, two PROGRAM corresponding to the two above tasks are automatically
defined: one for the fast logics (FastLog) and the other for the slow logics (SlowLog).
These PROGRAM cannot be deleted nor can their names be modified. New PROGRAM cannot be
created at any level, either.
All the new signals, measurements and counters that are created in the data model must be
assigned a number that appears in the sAddress of each of these elements.
The range values are:
 Fast control logics signals: Value between 9344 and 9471.

 Slow control logics signals: Value between 25120 and 26399.
 Measurements: Value between 556 and 687.
 Counters: Value between 32 and 149.

User Manual 369
LOGICS
16.2 PROTECTION LOGICS
The various protection functions can be configured by means of settings associated to the
unit’s internal signals, vg enablings or blocks. The protection functions treat these
signals as inputs, although they do not modify their value. In order to assign them a
value, the protection logics are used.
The protection logics have two main differences in relation to the control logics:
 The result of a protection logic is always a Boolean value, to be assigned in one

of the protection function's settings.
 The protection logic editor has been simplified to facilitate the programming of
this type of logic.
The number of available logics is defined by the unit’s data model.
Each logic signal has a value obtained from an associated logic. These logics are fragments
of code created in one of the two possible languages - ST (text) or FBD (graphic). The
corresponding language must be selected when a logic corresponding to a signal is edited
for the first time.
Each protection logic is independent from the rest and need not be included in a POU in
order to be run. When a protection logic is saved in the editor, an attempt is made to
compile the information. If no error is found, a call to the logic in question is
automatically generated so that the logic is run when a CID (configured IED description)
message is sent to the device or sent from pacFactory.
The protection logics are run every 2 milliseconds, as are the fast control logics.
To edit a protection logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding
logic signal and click on the editor icon. This icon has three statuses to indicate the
status of the corresponding logic:
Icon Logic statuses:

No logic has been edited for this signal. The value of
the signal will be 0 (false).
Logic edited and ready to be run.
Logic edited, but with errors. Logic will not be run.
The following image shows a detail of the expander with four signals with logic signals of
different statuses:
Details of the expander with protection logic signals
To edit a protection logic from pacFactory, click on the "Protection Logics" option in the
“Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
A screen with a list of the available protection logic signals, along with the logic’s
status icon and an access button for each logic’s editor, will be shown.

User Manual 370
LOGICS
Details of the protection logics list in pacFactory
16.3 DATABASE SIGNALS
All of the IED’s database signals, measurements, meters and commands can be accessed as
readings from the logics (the data model’s basic data with valid sAddress). There is a set
of data within this database that can be modified from the control logics:
Signal type Description

Critical Digital signals that can be modified from the
signals fast task (FastLog)
Non-critical Digital signals that can be modified from the
signals slow task (SlowLog)
Floating point data that can be modified from
Measurements
both tasks
Meters Whole numbers that can modified from both tasks
Commands can only be generated from the slow
Commands
task (SlowLog)
Both the data’s value and its quality can be accessed. If data is modifiable from the
logic, the same will apply to the value and the quality.
The data that can be modified from the logic may be preset in the unit's data model or they
can be configured in the engineering phase.
Only the status of the signal to which the logic in question is associated can be modified
from the protection logics.

User Manual 371
IEC 61850 COMMANDS
17. IEC 61850 COMMANDS
17.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS
Commands can be issued for controllable elements (elements whose functional constraint is
“CO”) that may belong to different Data classes (detailed in IEC 61850-7-3) and, as defined
in IEC 61850-7-2, paragraph 17 Control class model, may be:
 Controllable single point (SPC)

 Controllable double point (DPC)
 Controllable integer status (INC)
 Binary controlled step position information (BSC)
 Integer controlled step position information (ISC)
 Controllable analogue set point (APC)
The control model established by the standard consists of a series of services and an
operational specification to be followed in accordance with the type of command.
The IEC 61850 standard defines the following services:
 Select (Sel) / SelectWithValue (SelVal)

 Cancel
 Operate (Oper) / TimeActivatedOperate (TimOper)
 CommandTermination (CmdTerm)
The operating model of a specific command is defined in the Ct1Model configuration

parameter associated to the command, in accordance with the following table:
Table 221 Possible ctlModel
Value Explanation enum

The object is not controllable, only the services that apply to a status object
status-only 0
are supported. The attribute ctlVal does not exist.
direct-with-normal-
Direct control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 1
security
sbo-with-normal-
SBO control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 2
security
direct-with-
Direct control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 3
enhanced-security
sbo-with-enhanced-
SBO control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 4
security
Furthermore, a series of parameters are defined for the command (IEC 61850-7-3-7.5),
including the following fields:
 CtlVal. Command value. The type will be different, in accordance with element’s the
CDC (Common Data Class). Nevertheless, it is obligatory in all cases.
 Origin. Origin of the command, divided into two fields:
 orCat. Origin category. Indicates the type of client that issues the command
(local, substation, remote command, etc.)
 orIdent. For commands sent through IEC 61850 communications, this Data will
include the client’s IP address, according to which the unit is able to decide
whether to block the command or not, in accordance with its authorization.

User Manual 372
 PulseConfig. This Data is a structure that defines the command’s output pulse
type (pulse, duration, pulse train)
 OperTimeOut. Maximum switching time following which a failure is recorded if
the command has not been successfully run.
 sboTimeout. The time which the command selection remains active.
Thus, the operation of a specific command will depend on its configuration and ctlModel, as
established by the IEC 61850-7-2-17 standard. If the command’s ctlModel is
DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1), the process to follow will be as shown in the following
figure:
Figure 171 Direct command process with normal security
Operate
IEC 61850 ctlVal IEC 61850 Process
Client (operTm) Server
origin
ctlNum
Checking for
operation
Origin,
blocks…
Operate
Respons
e
Upon receiving a request to run a command by means of an operate request, the unit analyses
the validity of the request, checking the client’s authorization and any possible blocks,
and responds positively or negatively by means of an operate request to the client. If the
response is negative, the AddCause field informs the client of the reason for the failure
of the command. If the response is positive, the command is sent to the device.
If the command’s ctlModel is SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2), the process is similar and

includes a selection prior to running:
Figure 172 Command process with prior selection and normal security
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 Process

Client Server
Select
Checking for
selection
Origin,select
ion…
Select
Respons
e
Operate Checking for

operation
Origin,
blocks…
Operate
Respons
e

User Manual 373
In this case, upon receiving a selection request the selection's permission is checked and,
when applicable, a positive response is sent. A timer then starts which, upon the elapse of
the sboTimeOut timeout, cancels the selection. If a run request is received before the
conclusion of the timeout, the same process as that described for the direct commands with
normal security is followed.
If the selection is not been accepted, the response will be negative and the process is
concluded. Similarly, if a run request is not received before the conclusion of the
sboTimeOut, the selection is cancelled and the command process is concluded.
When the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3), the process starts

exactly as with the direct commands with normal security, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 173 Direct command process with enhanced security
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 Process

Client Operate Server
ctlVal
(operTm)
origin
ctlNum
Checking for
operation
Origin,
Operate blocks…
Respons
e
Command
Terminati
onn
Due to the enhanced security, and after sending the run command to the device, there is a
timeout for the reception of the return information from the element on which the command
is to be run. The unit can thus inform the client by means of a Command termination whether
the operation has been run successfully before the conclusion of the period set in
operTimeout.
If the device’s return information is received before the conclusion of the maximum run
time and the position in question has been reached, the client is sent a positive Command
Termination.
If the operTimeout time is exceeded without having received the information from the
device, or if it is received but the position in question has not been reached, the Command
Termination will be negative. As with the rest of the negative responses sent to the
client, the cause of the failure of the command will be included in the AddCause field.
The ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) includes, in addition to the enhanced security

process of the commands modelled as DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY, the selection process
described above for the SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY commands, and as such the scheme to be
followed is a as follows:

User Manual 374
Figure 174 Command process with prior selection and enhanced security
IEC 61850 61850 Server Process

Client Select
Checking for
selection
Origin,select
Select ion…
Respons
e
Operate
Checking for
operation
Operate Origin,
Respons blocks…
e
Command
Terminati
onn
Independently of CtlModel that is configured for the commands, or of the rest of the
configuration parameters, the corresponding reports are generated whenever a change occurs,
providing the report configuration allows this.
In addition to informing of the changes in the status signals of the elements on which the
commands are to be run, the reports also provide information on the changes in the status
of the two data associated with the command process itself: OpOpnOr and OpClsOr.
These data have four possible statuses:
Table 222 OpOpnOr and OpClsOr statuses
Value Explanation enum

STANDBY Command in standby 0
IN PROGRESS Command in process 1
SUCCESSFUL Command run successfully 2
UNSUCCESSFUL Failure in running of command 3
For opening commands in general, OpClsOr remains in STANDBY, the sequence for OpOpnOr would
be STANDBY - IN PROGRESS - SUCCESSFUL / UNSUCCESSFUL – STANDBY. In the case of a closure
command, OpOpnOr would remain in standby and OpClsOr would continue the complete sequence.
If the command’s CtlModel indicates that the command has normal security, no return
information is available from the device and, therefore, the sequence would be STANDBY - IN
PROGRESS – STANDY.
17.2 COMMAND BLOCKS
The commands sent to the unit can be blocked in specific cases in which the running must
not be allowed. In part 7-2, paragraph 17.5.2.6 of the IEC 61850 standard, the possible
reasons for failure of a command are detailed.

User Manual 375
Table 223 Possible AddCause
Value Cause Explanation enum

Command
Unknown 0
accepted
Not-Supported Not configured 1
Blocked-by-
Blocked by Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like in
switching- 2
hierarchy CSWI has the value TRUE
hierarchy
Selection
Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) 3
failure
Invalid Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in
Invalid-position 4
position XCBR or XSWI)
Position
Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or XSWI) 5
reached
Parameter
Parameter-change-
change in Control action is blocked due to running parameter change 6
in-execution
execution
Control action is blocked, because tap changer has reached the
Step-limit 7
limit (EndPosR or EndposL in YLTC)
Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/XSWI) is
Blocked-by-Mode 8
in a mode (Mod) which does not allow any switching
Control action is blocked due to some external even at process
Blocked-by-
level that prevents a successful operation, for example, blocking 9
process
indication (EEHealth in XCBR or XSWI)
Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching
Blocked-by- Block signal
devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=“FALSE” or 10
interlocking activated
EnaCls.stVal=“FALSE”
Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to the exceeding
11
synchrocheck of the time limit and missing synchronism condition
Command-already- Command in Control service or cancel is rejected, because control action is
12
in-execution execution already running
Health signal Control action is blocked due to some internal event that
Blocked-by-health 13
activated prevents a successful operation (Health)
Control action is blocked, because another control action in a
1-of-n-control 1 of n block domain (for example, substation) is already running (in any XCBR 14
or XSWI, the DPC.stSeld=“TRUE”).
Abortion-by- Command
Control action is aborted due to cancel service 15
cancel cancelled
Time-limit-over Time exceeded Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit 16
Cancelled by Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with
Abortion-by-trip 17
trip ACT.general=“TRUE”)
Object not Object not
Operation can not be executed, since object is not selected 18
selected selected
Due to the variety of situations in which a specific command might fail due to a block by
hierarchy, and depending on the specific configuration of unit, as well as invalid position
or unknown blocks, both cases are explained below in greater detail.
17.2.1 Command blocks by command hierarchies

Pursuant to the IEC 61850 standard, one of the possible causes of a command block is
hierarchy (Part 7-2, section 17.5.2.6 AddCause - additional cause diagnosis), and
therefore a command hierarchy that involves the blocking of commands in accordance with
their origin and the unit's configuration is defined.
The “Local/Remote Type” setting indicates how the unit will behave when it has to block
the commands it is sent. It is located in the cid in "GEN/LLN0/LRmode" or in the display
in "protection/ general basic configuration/local type - Remote" settings and can accept
the four possible values established in the following table:
Table 224 Possible values for Local/Remote Type
LOCAL/REMOTE TYPE LRmode NUMERIC VALUE

Not treated Not treated 0
Iberdrola Iberdrola 1
Exclusive Exclusive 2
No frame No frame 3

User Manual 376
If Local/Remote Type is "Not treated”, no block by hierarchy is applied to the commands.

In the remaining cases, the status of the frame signals will be taken into account
("GEN/LLN0/Lockey"), as well as the unit’s remote command (“GEN/LLN0/RemCtlBlk”) and the
commands origin.
The IEC 61850 standard, Part 7-3, section 6.8, defines the potential origins, three of
which are affected by blockages due to the command hierarchy: "remote control", which
corresponds to a remote command, "station-control", which corresponds to a console, and
"bay-control" which corresponds to a bay-level console or to the display. Blocks by
hierarchy will not be applied to any command from any other origin.
 If the Local/Remote Type is configured as "Iberdrola", the three cases will be

distinguished in accordance with the origin of the command.
 For commands originating from a remote control (remote control):
Table 225 Blocks for “Iberdrola” Local/Remote Type from remote control
Frame signal Remote control signal Command to Command to modify

Commands
status (Lockey) status (RemctlBlk) modify frame remote control
(0) frame (0) remote control permitted blocked blocked
(0) frame (1) local blocked blocked blocked
(1) no frame (0) remote control permitted blocked blocked
(1) no frame (1) local blocked blocked blocked
 For commands originating from a console (station-control):
Table 226 Blocks for “Iberdrola” Local/Remote Type from console

Commands
(0) frame (0) remote control blocked blocked permitted
(0) frame (1) local permitted blocked permitted
(1) no frame (0) remote control blocked blocked blocked
 For orders originating in the display or a bay-level console (bay-control):
Table 227 Blocks for “Iberdrola” Local/Remote Type from bay

Commands
(0) frame (1) local permitted permitted permitted
(1) no frame (0) remote control blocked blocked permitted
(1) no frame (1) local permitted permitted permitted
 If the Local/Remote Type is configured as "Exclusive", the three cases will be

distinguished in accordance with the origin of the command.
Table 228 Blocks for “Exclusive” Local/Remote Type from remote control

Commands
(0) frame (0) remote control blocked blocked blocked
(1) no frame (0) remote control permitted blocked blocked

User Manual 377
Table 229 Blocks for “Exclusive” Local/Remote Type from console

Commands
(0) frame (0) remote control permitted permitted blocked
(1) no frame (0) remote control blocked permitted blocked
Table 230 Blocks for “Exclusive” Local/Remote Type from bay

Commands
(0) frame (1) local permitted blocked permitted
(1) no frame (0) remote control blocked blocked permitted
(1) no frame (1) local permitted blocked permitted
 If the Local/Remote Type is configured as "No frame", there is no frame signal

and, therefore, the behaviour will depend exclusively on the status of the
remote control signal and the command origin.
Table 231 Blocks for “No frame” Local/Remote Type from remote control
Remote control signal status (RemctlBlk) Commands Command to modify remote control
(0) remote control permitted blocked
(1) local blocked blocked
Table 232 Blocks for “No frame” Local/Remote Type from console
(0) remote control permitted blocked
(1) local blocked blocked
Table 233 Blocks for “No frame” Local/Remote Type from bay
(0) remote control blocked permitted
(1) local permitted permitted
17.2.2 Blocks due to invalid/unknown/reached bay

There is a “command mode” field in the sAddr associated to each command indicating the
operating mode of the blocks due to the status of the element to which the command is to
be issued.
The commands will be blocked in accordance with the following table:

User Manual 378
Table 234 Blocks in accordance with the command mode
Command Mode (in sAddr) Element Status Opening command Closure command
Open Permitted Permitted
0 / -1 Closed Permitted Permitted
Invalid Permitted Permitted
Unknown Permitted Permitted
Open Blocked (1) Permitted
Closed Permitted Blocked (1)
1
Invalid Blocked (2) Blocked (2)
Unknown Blocked (2) Blocked (2)
2
Invalid Permitted Blocked (2)
Unknown Permitted Blocked (2)
3
Thus, the blocks marked with (1) are blocks by "position reached" and those marked with
(2) are by "invalid position".
17.3 COMMANDS FOR OTHER POSITIONS
When the command is configured as a command for another positions, thee command will be
sent to the corresponding device directly, behaving as a direct control with normal
security (ctlModel=1). Checking the device’s return information, PulseConfig, timeouts and
blocks will be done in the device to which the command belongs.
17.4 COMMAND SADDRESS
The sAddr associated with each command in the CID file has the following format:
sAddr = "a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l;TX1:Language 1 text,TX2: Language 2 text "
 a:= O (letter corresponding to the command)

 b:= Command UCL number. (Value 0 for internal Ucl). Maximum 4 characters.
 c:= Command number. Maximum 4 characters. Number of the first associated internal
command. Each element with control two internal commands associated. The first
corresponds to the “ON” command (ctlVal = 1) and the second to the “OFF” command
(ctlVal = 0). The number of the first command, corresponding to the “ON” command,
is always configured in the sAddress-
 d:= Off enabling signal number. Maximum 5 characters. This is the number of the
signal that permits the OFF command or opening in the case of being active and
which blocks when deactivated.
 e:= On enabling signal number. Maximum 5 characters. This is the number of the
signal that permits the ON command or closure in the case of being active and which
blocks when deactivated.
 f:= Expected status (0=Direct, 1=Inverted) (1 character)
 g:= Element Health signal number (Obtained from the Data Attribute “ST” of the Data
Object “EEHealth” of the element on which the command is to be run).
 h:= Command Mode: in accordance with this field and the different situations, the
unknown or unreached invalid position commands will be blocked or not. The absence
of this field gives rise to the same functioning as when the field contains a 0 or

User Manual 379
a -1. It can accept four possible values (0-3), will determine whether or not each
command by "invalid position" or "position reached" is blocked or not.
Table 235 Blocks in accordance with the command mode
Command Mode (in sAddr) Element Status Opening command Closure command
0 / -1 Closed Permitted Permitted
Invalid Permitted Permitted
Unknown Permitted Permitted
1
Invalid Blocked (2) Blocked (2)
Unknown Blocked (2) Blocked (2)
2
3
(1) blocks by position reached / (2) blocks by invalid position.
 i:= Automh signal number. Maximum 5 characters. If it is set to -1, it makes no

change, and automatic origins will be treated as before when checking command
hierarchies. If it is set to a valid signal number, the actual value of the signal
will be checked in order to know if it is in automatic or not:
 If signal value is '1', automh is activated, and command requests upon this
element from any origin that is not “automatic” will be blocked
 If signal value is '0', automh is not activated, and command requests upon
this element from any “automatic” origin will be blocked
 j:= Off enabling UCL number. (Value 0 for internal Ucl). Maximum 4 characters. If
it is left blank, the command ucl number will be used.
 k:= On enabling UCL number. (Value 0 for internal Ucl). Maximum 4 characters. If it
is left blank, the command ucl number will be used.
 l:= Automh UCL number. (Value 0 for internal Ucl). Maximum 4 characters. If it is
left blank, the command ucl number will be used.
 TX1:= Command text language1. Maximum 16 characters.
 TX2:= Command text language2. Maximum 16 characters.

User Manual 380
RIO MODULES
18. RIO MODULES
18.1 CONFIGURATION
The RIO modules are configured using the RIOGGIO logic nodes A maximum of 8 nodes of this
type is contemplated.
Each node has series of attributes that allow us to select the RIO modules with which we
are to communicate and to configure the outputs to be published:
Table 236 RIO module configuration attributes
ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node.
NumRIO.setVal
It is a configurable value between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the
1 (12 inputs / 4 outputs) or 2 (8 inputs / 2 outputs). The
TypeRIO.setVal
value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is not
configured.
InRef1.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
18.2 OPERATION
When we have configured a RIOGGIO logical node correctly, the expected performance in the
different attributes is as follows:
Table 237 Operation of RIO module attributes
Status of the communication with the associated RIO module. The
St.stVal
value 1 indicates that it is correct.
Indicates that the configured RIO type does not match that
CfgErr.stVal which is being received. This value is only displayed in IEC
61850, it has no associated signal in the internal data base.
Ind[1..17].stVal The values received from the RIO module.
The values sent to the RIO module. The value always coincides
SPSCO[1..4].stVal
with the signals configured in the InRefs in the same index.
Both the elements received and the communication status has associated signals with fixed
position in the internal database. The signals are distributed as follows:

User Manual 381
RIO MODULES
Table 238 Internal signals associated with RIO modules
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASSOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNALS
Communication status 288

RIOGGIO1
Values received in command From 289 to 305.

RIOGGIO2

RIOGGIO3

RIOGGIO4

RIOGGIO5

RIOGGIO6

RIOGGIO7

RIOGGIO8

User Manual 382
CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE
19. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE

The modification of the value of certain attributes requires the resetting of the device in
order for the modification to have effect. In order to inform of the need to manually reset of
the device, the ResetDev.stVal signal has been defined within the GEN node’s LLN0. In some
cases, it is enough to send a new ICD / CID file.
For the LGOS logical node settings, the server does not require a reset after a settings
change only if the LGOS was completely configured when the server started. In other case, the
change of any of the settings will activate the reset required signal.
The following table details the possible causes to activate of this signal:
Table 239 Setting changes that require the manual reset of the device
LOGICAL NODE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEACTIVATION WITH ICD FILE

The multicast reception MAC
MAC.setVal YES
associated to the goose
GoCBRef.setRef Goose control block reference YES
LGOS GoDatSetRef.setRef Dataset reference YES

(Only if not
completely
configured at
start-up) GoID.setVal Goose identifier YES
ConfRev.setVal Configuration revision YES
LGOS data attribute assigned to

InRef_.intAddr YES
one goose data value
RIO module Type. Involves
RIOGGIO TypeRIO.setVal modifying the structure of the YES
goose.
Network interface associated to
genIPRV DevGoose.setVal YES
the Goose messages.
genIPRV NoGsVlan.setVal VLAN use in Goose messages YES
YES, it is also deactivated

LLN0 IRMod.setVal InRefs mode after the modification of
an InRef data
Change of the I/O cards
configuration from the local
- Codigo comercíal NO
HMI (change in the commercial
code)

User Manual 383
RECEPTION GOOSES
20. RECEPTION GOOSES
20.1 LGOS MODEL
This model makes it possible to configure and supervise the complete status of each
reception goose within a single logical node.
Each goose subscription is associated with one LGOS logical node wich contains the
configuration for that subscription, so there can be as many subscriptions as LGOS logical
nodes in the data model. The factory CID file contains up to 32 LGOS logical nodes that
allow the subcription to up to 32 goose messages.
To use the received data in the goose message they must be mapped to LGOS data. Each LGOS
has:
 17 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind17 data)

 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
 8 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn8 data)
20.1.1 Configuration values

Used to establish the desired subscription parameters for each goose.
To create a subscription it must be configured:
 Configuration data of the Goose message to subscribe.

 Data assignment: Each data from the received Goose message can be assigned to
one data in the LGOS logical node in which the received value will be copied.
Table 240 LGOS model configuration values
ConfRev.setVal Must match the value received in the goose.
GoCBRef.setRef The goose reference to which we subscribe.
GoDatSetRef.setRef The reference of the dataset to which we subscribe.
GoID.setVal The identifier of the goose to which we subscribe.
The reference to the signal in which the goose element

InRef[..].intAddr established by the InRef index is received. It must be a mapped
signal within the goose signals range.
MAC.setVal The multicast MAC to which we subscribe.
These values, apart from the “intAddr” for the internal data assignement, must be the
same ones received in the Goose message.
The data mapping is configured with the InRef data (InRef1 to InRef34). The InRef index
indicates the reception goose data position associated with that InRef (InRef1 associated
to first goose data, InRef2 associated to second goose data, etc.)

User Manual 384
RECEPTION GOOSES
In the InRefx.intAddr attibute must be configured the LGOS data in which the value will
be copied. The value must be:
 Boolean signals: Indx.stVal / Indx.q

 Dbpos signals: DPSIndx.stVal / DPSIndx.q
 Float values: AnInx.mag.f / AnInx.q
If in the Goose message the qualities of the data are also received they must be assigned
to a “q” data of one of the LGOS node data, like the rest of the Goose data.
To configure this assignment the user must know the format of the data of the Goose
message because the selected data in the LGOS node to copy the received value must have
the same format.
Each LGOS logical node in the the factory CID data model has 34 InRef data so the device
can subscribe to Gooses with up to 34 elements.
For example if the configured value is InRef3.intAddr = Ind2.stVal this means that the
third value in the received goose (that must be a boolean value) will be copied to the
LGOSx.Ind2.stVal data.
The software tool allows configuring these goose subscritpions manually or automatically
(for more information consult the pacFactory software tool manual).
20.1.2 Supervision values

They indicate information about the status of the goose subscription at all times. The
status signal conditions the updating of the rest of the Data. If the status is
incorrect, the rest of the signals will not be updated with the values received.
Table 241 LGOS model supervision values
Subscription status. Value “1” indicates that the subscription
St.stVal
was successful.
Sim.stVal Activated when the subscription is received in test mode.
Activated when the subscription has the “Needs Commissioning”

NdsCom.stVal
flag activated.
LastStNum.stVal The last status number received.
ConfRevNum.stVal The configuration revision received.
Note: Only the St data is mapped to the internal database to be used in for example
logics or local display. The other values are only available through the IEC 61850
communication.
20.1.3 Checked values

The following values are checked to decide if the goose message is valid:
 TAL (Time Allowed to Live) not zero

 MAC multicast
 Dataset

User Manual 385
RECEPTION GOOSES
 GoCBRef
 GoID
It is also checked that the types of each goose data mach the types of the LGOS data in
which they will be copied.

User Manual 386
TCP/IP NETWORK CONFIGURATION
21. TCP/IP NETWORK CONFIGURATION
21.1 DESCRIPTION
In the device has a front Ethernet interface and may have up to two rear Ethernet
interfaces. Each of which can be configured to belong to the network that the user wants,
as seen in the figure below:
 eth 0, frontal Ethernet.

 eth1, rear Ethernet.
 eth2, rear Ethernet.
The configuration of each network can be made:
 From the device Display (see section of the display).

 From PacFactory configuration tool (see user manual pacFactory).
21.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION
When configuring the network of the device it must be taken into account the following
considerations:
 Basic concepta about networks:

 The format of the IP address or mask have the dotted decimal notation. The
checks are performed according to this standard.
 Addresses ending in 0 correspond to networks, not devices. For example :
192.168.200.0
 Addresses ending in 255 correspond to broadcast messages. For example :
192.168.200.255
 All network traffic for an IP address that is not included in the configured
networks, will be redirected to the default gateway configured.
 It is not allowed the IP address or mask 0.0.0.0.
 It is not allowed the IP address or mask 255.255.255.255.
 It is not allowed to configure several IP addresses in the same ethernet interface.

User Manual 387
TCP/IP NETWORK CONFIGURATION
 Gateways configuration:
 There can be only one default Gateway in the devices and it will be associated
to a specific Ethernet interface.
 If a Gateway is configurec, the static routes for the ethernet traffic will be
determined by up to 10 groups or three parameters:
 IP address of the network or destination host. This IP address indicates
the network or the device you want to connect to.
 Network mask or destination host mask.
 Gateway IP address. It must be in the same net segment than the IP
address configured in that ethernet port; because in another way the
device will not access to the gateway.
 If the IP address of the network or destination host or the mask of the network
or destination host are not configured, the default values are:
 IP address: 0.0.0.0, it will be all the networks or default gateway.
 Network Mask: 255.255.255.255, it will be all networks or default
gateway.
 The configuration of gateways can only be done from the Display.
 When changing the IP address, the gateways that are no longer accessible by the new
IP will be removed permanently.
 The IP change command keeps the mask that was associated with that Ethernet
interface.
 Do not configure two different Ethernet interfaces within the same network segment.
When you configure two interfaces within the same network segment, the device will
use only one of them.
21.3 GOOSES
GOOSE messages (IEC 61850 peer-to-peer communications) are not on the TCP/IP layer, they
are Ethernet packets and are configured at the MAC level.
The devices subscribes to multicast MAC addresses for receiving messages and transmit to a
specific Multicast MAC address.
Ethernet interface eth0 is not ready to receive / transmit packets GOOSE.

User Manual 388
KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
22. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
22.1 GENERAL OPERATION
22.1.1 Display structure

The screens are grouped into the following types:
 Graphic pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".

 I/O pages
 Secuence of Events (SOE)
 Protection events pages
 Alarm pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".
 Device status pages
 Fault pages. Not available in CDx models.
 Measurements pages. Only available in CD1 y CD2 models
 Grouping of other screens
Each display type has its own treatment.
There are also menu pages (which include the protection, control and general settings,
such as the date and time, password, FW versions, etc.), which are treated differently to
those mentioned above.
22.1.2 Organization of the pages

The pages are organized into screen types, whose order of presentation is configurable
using an external tool. The tool also enables the unit’s start page to be assigned. The
keys “(Left), (Right)” allow the user to scroll through the different screen types
defined as main screens. The screens can be scrolled in both directions: upon reaching
the last screen type the display returns to the first screen, and vice-versa.
By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys in any screen, the screens belonging to the
same type are shown. The I/O, SOE, protection events and fault pages are presented in a
preconfigured order. However, in the graphic and alarm screens the presentation order is
defined using an external tool.
If, when in any screen belonging to specific type, we press “(Left), (Right)”, the
following screen type is displayed whilst the screen position remains within the type in
question. Thus, when scrolling through the screen types the last screen types selected
when exiting a specific type are shown.
If no keys are pressed within a period greater than 5 minutes, the unit returns to the
start page and the first page of each type is selected.
By pressing on <ESC> from any screen we return to the start page, whilst the current page
of each screen type is maintained.
There is a special screen type called “Menu to Other Screens” that contains an index of
screens not considered important enough to have been defined as main screens and which
enables access to the same. This screen is configurable via a PC tool.
By pressing <MENU> from within any screen, the first page of the settings menus is
displayed.
The possibility of multi-language is available.

User Manual 389
Device with IP protection covers
If the unit is fitted with an IP protection cover, only certain buttons will be
accessible from the front, depending on the model in question:
 Preset Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, SEL, INF and DES.
The INF button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst
the order is configurable via a PC tool.
 Functional Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 and the DOT key.
The DOT button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst
the order is configurable via a PC tool.
22.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys

The functional keys are configured with the PC tool, with the control and associated
status being configured for each key.
The operation of the functional keys is as follows:
 The possible values of the status signal associated to the functional key and
its corresponding representation via the LEDs is:
 Unprogrammed: the 2 LEDs at OFF.
 Unknown Status: the 2 LEDs at ON.
 Open Status: upper LED OFF and lower LED ON.
 Closed Status: upper LED ON and lower LED OFF.
 Invalid Status: the 2 LEDs at ON.
 The operation of these keys is as follows:
 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding
LED or LEDs flash.
 Once the item has been selected, the associated command can be run by
pressing the “I” or “O” keys.
 Once the above-mentioned key has been pressed, the unit runs the command
and the lit LED or LEDs cease to flash.
 Once a command has been run, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is
updated. In the event of a failure, a window indicating the cause of the
same will appear in the display.
22.1.4 Graphics pages

The maximum number of graphic screens is 9.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one group of graphic screens to another.
The order of the “live points” that have commands and the sequence of the graphic screens
can be modified using the PC tool.

User Manual 390
Figure 175. Single Line diagram
The treatment of controls WITH Preset Keys:
 To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once
we have selected the screen containing the item to be sent, we must press
“SEL”. The symbol of the item that has been configured to priority 1 and which
has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
 By pressing “SEL” we scroll through the different “live points” with commands,
in accordance with the preset order.
 Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in service, automatic,
remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual,
local, etc.
 By pressing the key “DES” (if the item has maintenance configured), the
command will be run, in accordance with the item's status – if it is set to
maintenance, the command will be “remove maintenance”, if it is not in
maintenance, the command will be “set to maintenance”.
 If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen
indicating the reason for the failure will be displayed.

User Manual 391
Figure 176. Single Line diagram with indication of non-run command
This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on
the item.
 If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the

item's status will be refreshed.
If it is in the control selection, only the “SEL”, <ESC> and “I, O, DES” keys are
allowed.
The treatment of controls WITHOUT Preset Keys:
 To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once
we have selected the screen containing the item to be sent, we must press 
(Enter). The symbol of the item that has been configured to priority 1 and
which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
 By pressing the “(Left), (Right)” keys, we scroll through the different
“live points” with commands, in accordance with the preset order.
 Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in services,
automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual,
local, etc.
 If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen
indicating the reason for the failure will be displayed. This indication
appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried out on the
item.
 If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the
item's status will be refreshed to show "normal".
By pressing <ESC>, we exit the control selection, as we also do if we refrain from
pressing any keys for a period of more than “10 sec”.
If it is in the control selection, only the <ESC>, (Left), (Right) and “I, O” keys
are allowed.
The measurements are displayed with the number of decimal points and digits preset with
the configuration tool. The possible situations that are covered when viewing a
measurement are:

User Manual 392
 Invalid: An '*' is placed in front of the measurement, there is no associated

flashing. E.g.: * 25.3
 Outside range: '####' is displayed without flashing when the measurement’s
value exceeds the maximum value for the specified nº of digits and decimal
points. E.g.: measurement value = 100 and number of digits = 2.
 Alarm: An 'A' is displayed in front of the measurement, with flashing, when
the measurement exceeds the set range. There is an upper and a lower limit.
E.g.: If an alarm is activated when the upper limit is greater than 200 A, the
measurement will be displayed as follows: A 202.
Each of the measurements displayed in the graphic screens can be configured so that their
values are referred to the primary or the secondary.
22.1.5 I/O pages

The device may be equipped with different types of cards, which are distinguished by the
combination of inputs and outputs grouped in 2 columns. Each card’s information is
grouped in a page.
At the head of the displays text indicating the type of terminal followed by screen printing texts, which are configurable
(maximum 4 characters) it is displayed. If no default configuration values (XA and XB) will be displayed followed by the
module address of each card.
An indication of a card failure is shown in the lower part of the screen. If the circle
is filled, the card is in failure, whereas if it is empty, the card is functioning
correctly (Figure 177).The order of this type of screen is defined by the different
card’s addresses – the card with the lowest address is displayed first and the pages can
be scrolled using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys.
Representation of the digital I/Os
The digital I/O data are listed in 2 columns. Each column contains a graphic symbol (a
circle), followed by the input or output text and the corresponding number of terminals:
Figure 177. I/O Screen and Figure 178. I/O Screen with card failure
The digital signals are displayed as an empty circle, when disabled, or a filled circle,
when enabled. In the event of an invalid signal, an empty circle with a cross is

User Manual 393
displayed to represent a disabled status and a filled circle with an inverted cross is
displayed to represent an enabled status (Figure 178).
The analog inputs are presented with the measured value in percent.
22.1.6 Event pages

The event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in
the signals that have been configured as events in the display.
Each event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character
text and a 7 character acronym.
The texts to be displayed, as well as the signals’ identification, are set in attributes
of the CID and may be modified using an external tool.
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the newest to
the oldest. Within each screen, the most recent are shown at the top of the page and the
oldest at the bottom.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last
page to the first, and vice-versa. The page order runs from the first page, which has the
most recent events, to the last page, which has the oldest events. The “ (Down)” key is
used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “
(Up)” key is used to scroll from the last page to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 events are displayed in these pages.
The total number of pages and the number of the page currently displayed, as well as the
number of events in the display, is shown in the last row.
Figure 179 Event Screen
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent events are displayed. The
“ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated above.
If new changes are registered whilst we are viewing the 1st page of this type of screen,
the Display is refreshed accordingly and the older changes are moved downwards.
When viewing any page other than the 1st page if new changes are registered, the Display
will not be refreshed and the previous data is shown. In such a case, a flashing,
inverted video “NEW CHANGES” message is shown at the top of the page.

User Manual 394
This indication is cleared when the most recent changes are viewed. To do so, we must go
to the first screen.
22.1.7 Protection event pages

The protection event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take
place in the signals that have been set as such. Each protection event’s presentation
includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character
acronym.
The texts to be displayed are defined in attributes of the CID. Signals are identified as
protection events by means of the corresponding enabling function in the corresponding
settings node and by configuring the event masks. They can be modified using the PC tool.
Figure 180 Protection event Screen
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the most
recent to the oldest. Within each screen, the most recent are shown at the top of the
page and the oldest at the bottom (Figure 180). If the protection event list is empty, a
text indicating that the protection event queue is empty will appear.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last
page to the first, and vice-versa. The page order runs from the first page, which has the
most recent protection events, to the last page, which has the oldest protection events.
The “ (Down)” key is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing
order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is used to scroll from the last page to the previous
pages.
Only the last 160 protection events are displayed in these pages.
The  (Enter) key is used to select the first protection event from the screen being
viewed, whilst the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys are used to scroll to the next protection
event, with the following treatments:
 If, whilst at the bottom of the page, we press “ (Down)”, we are taken to the
next page with the first selected protection event, unless we are already
viewing the last page, which case the display will not be changed.
 If we are in the protection event selected and we press “ (Up)” key, we are
taken to the previous page, although the last protection event remains
activated, unless we are in the first page and in which case the display will
remain unchanged.
Once this protection event has been selected, we can press  (Enter) to view the page
with the measurements associated to the protection event. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys
to switch from one page to another if there is more than one measurements page per

User Manual 395
protection event. These pages are browsed in a cyclical manner, going from the first to
the last, and vice-versa, as corresponds.
Use <ESC> to exit the screen displaying the measurements associated to the protection
event. Within the protection events’ screen, the change is deselected by clicking on
<ESC> once again.
The total number of pages and the number of the page is currently displayed, as well as
the number of protection events in the display’s queue, is shown in the last row.
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent protection events are
displayed.
The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated
above
If the appearance of new protection events is detected, a flashing, inverted video “NEW
INC” (new protection event) message is shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the latest protection events are viewed. To do so, no
protection events must be selected and we must go to the first screen. Once we have
arrived at this screen, if we scroll back the first screen with the most recent
protection events to have been registered will be displayed.
22.1.8 Alarm pages

These screens emulate an alarm panel, displaying each alarm as a rectangle with a text
inside. The page format is set and includes 2 columns containing 6 rectangles each. There
will be a maximum of 15 alarm pages, i.e., a maximum of 180 alarms.
2 lines of 12 characters can be displayed within each rectangle.
Each alarm’s texts, identification and the number of alarms are configured using an
external tool.
When in standby status, the text is displayed in a normal video with white background
and, when enabled, in an inverted video with a dark background.
When the alarm changes status, the signal’s text begins to flash and appears and
disappears within the new status.
If the signal is invalid, the text will be displayed with a cross covering the entire
rectangle. If the signal does not exist, the corresponding alarm's gap will be displayed.
Figure 181 Alarm panel

User Manual 396
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from page to another.
Individual acknowledgements of receipt are not issued for the alarms. Instead, it is
possible to issue acknowledgement for all the alarms displayed in the page that is being
viewed. To do so, we must press  (Enter) in an active alarm page and the following
message will appear in a small screen:
Confirm receipt of all alarms of the page?
If we then press <ESC>, the message is cleared and no acknowledgment of the alarms is
issued. If we press  (Enter), the message disappears and an acknowledgment is issued for
all the alarms displayed on the page.
An indication of the total pages and the number of the page displayed will appear at the
top of the page.
22.1.9 Device status pages

The device status displays may differ depending on the model. Values may be referred to the
primary or secondary.
NOTE: The measurements correspond to the fundamental frequency.
The different screens depending on the model samples of the device:
22.1.9.1 MDx, CDx, ZTx y CB Models

There are 3 pages which describe the device status.
 General data screen

 Relay date and time.
 Frequency value.
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 External power supply battery voltage.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model)..
 Device temperature.
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
 Measurements screen (I): Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12
transformers.
 Measurements screen (II)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and
angle).
 Total real, reactive and apparent power.
NOTE: The measurement screens I and II are not available on the CD0 model.

User Manual 397
Figure 182 Protection Status page 1, Figure 183 Protection Status page 2 and Figure 184 Protection
Status page 3
22.1.9.2 TDx Models


 Active table number.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value for each winding.
 Measurements screen (2)
 Maximeter value for each current phase of each winding
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage in TD0 model
 Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 Diferenttial measures
 Restraint measures
 Diferenttial 2º harmonics measures
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents (module and angle) of each
winding.
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of voltages (module and angle) in TD0
model.

User Manual 398
Figure A Protection Status page 1, Figure B Protection Status page 2 and Figure C Protection Status
page 3
Figure D Protection Status page 4 and Figure E Protection Status page 5
22.1.9.3 LDx Models


 Active table number.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value.
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase.

User Manual 399
 Measurements screen (I): Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12
transformers (Figure C).
angle).
 Measurements screen (4) (Figure D)
 Diferenttial measures
 Restraint measures
 Diferenttial 2º harmonics measures
 Terminal Measurements screen (5)
 Synchronized measurements all terminals.
22.1.10 Fault pages

These pages display the last 20 fault reports filed by the protection.
These screens are divided into two levels. The first level displays a list of the most
recent faults, as well as the fault number and the fault trip date for each case (Figure
185). The total number of pages and the number of the page being displayed is shown at
the top, whilst the number of faults stored in the unit is shown in the last row.
If the fault list is empty, a text indicating that the fault queue is empty will appear.
The faults are ordered from the most recent or latest (Fault nº 1) to the oldest.
Figure 185 1st level Fault Screens
The second level displays all the information related to the fault, organized in several
pages. The page is displayed with the number of the fault being displayed, as well as an
indication of the number of the current page and the total number of pages per fault.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to navigate through the first level screen. The page
scroll is cyclical - when the end of the page is reached we are taken to the next first
level page and we are taken from the first page to the last page and vice-versa in
accordance with the key we press.

User Manual 400
By pressing  (Enter), we access the second level of the selected fault. Use the “ (Up),
 (Down)” keys to move between the second level screens pertaining to a single fault. Use
<ESC> to return to the first level page.
The values can refer to the primary or to the secondary.
The contents of each screen may differ depending on the model, then the different possibilities:
22.1.10.1 MDx, ZT y BC Models

There are 4 screens with data for each fault:
 Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

 Date and time: Indicates the date in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format.
There are three dates:
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up).
 Trip (first unit tripped).
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears).
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.
 Pick up and trip types: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed
by combinations of the characters A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a
phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), RTP (teleprotection), IF
(phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO
(zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), RTP
(teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), IT (thermal
image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases
and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the
trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”.

User Manual 401
Figure 186 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1 and Figure 187 2nd level Fault Screens, page 2
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and
upon the fault. This screen displays the following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in
the module and the angle of each transformer.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (II)”.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle
of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1
and V2).
 Power. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and
apparent powers.
 Tripped units screen, displays the picked up and the tripped units.

User Manual 402
NOTE: only the first 7 picked up and tripped units are displayed. If the number is
greater than 7, a text appears at the bottom of the screen indicating that there are
more picked up units.
22.1.10.2 TDx Models


phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG
(restricted earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D
(current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC
is a two-phase fault in phases A and C..
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
and neutral of each winding.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

 Breaker. Indicates breakers monitoring data upon the fault of each winding:
trip.

User Manual 403

 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in
the module and the angle of each transformer.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.
 Diferenttial current measure
 Restraint current measure
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (IV)”.

of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) of each winding.
of the voltage (V0, V1 and V2) in TD0 model.
apparent powers.

User Manual 404
22.1.10.3 LDx Models


phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF (differential), RG
(restricted earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D
(current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC
is a two-phase fault in phases A and C..
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
trip.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

User Manual 405
upon the fault. This screen displays the Transformer measurements <Trafos>.
It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each
transformer.
of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1
and V2).
apparent powers.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.
upon the fault. This screen displays the following values:Diferenttial
current measure and Restraint current measure.
22.1.11 Measurement pages

There are 5 screens displaying the unit’s rms measurements referred to the primary (only
available for devices with Multitrans measure module).
NOTE: Certain wiring diagrams have invalid measurements that do not exist. They are
represented by “---“.
 Measurements screen (I)

 Module and angle of each of the unit’s 8 transformers and phase to phase
voltages.
angle).
 Measurements screen (III)
 Power by real and reactive phase and apparent rms.
 Power factor per phase.
 Measurements screen (IV)
 Total real, reactive and apparent rms power.
 Total power factor.
 Real and Reactive Energy.
 Measurements screen (V)
 The harmonic distortion (%) of the 8 transformers’ measurements.

User Manual 406
Figure 194 Measurements screen (I), Figure 195 Measurements screen (II) and Figure 196 Measurements
screen (III)
Figure 197 Measurements screen (IV) and Figure 198 Measurements screen (V)
22.1.12 Menu to other screens page

This screen allows an access menu for the other types of screen that have not been given
the consideration of main screens to be displayed. We can group little-used screens
within this screen and thus reduce the size of the main loop, making the movement between
those screens that are considered the most important quicker.
The content of this screen is set using the external configuration tool. Screens that are
included in the main screen list cannot be included in this menu.
The image below shows the following types of screen grouped in this screen: Alarm panel,
Protection events and Protection status.

User Manual 407
Figure 199 Other screens
22.1.13 Shortcut menu page

This screen appears when we press “R”.
It contains those commands that can be given to the unit without having to enter a
Password. The commands will vary in accordance with the unit’s family.
Some examples are given below.

 Recloser command.
 Bank automatism command (for unit’s with a capacitor bank).
 .....
By pressing “R”, this page appears showing the first selected command. By clicking on the
“ (Up),  (Down)” keys we can move between the commands. By pressing “ (Enter)”, the
selected command is run.
Figure 200 Quick access menu

User Manual 408
22.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES
22.2.1 Operation of the menus

These screens enable us to view and modify the control and protection settings values.
They consist of several levels of menus and sub-menus.
22.2.1.1 Access to settings Menus

By pressing <MENU> from any of the other types of screen, a screen such as the one
shown in Figure 201 will appear and request that a password be entered.
Figure 201 Password request screen
We can access the menu pages with either viewing or modification permissions.
If we enter the correct password and press  (Enter), we will have permission to
change settings. The “♦” symbol will appear in the bottom left of the screen, as will
the text “CHANGE SETTINGS”. However, if we press <ESC>, we will only be permitted to
consult the settings. Further more, a text indicating “VIEW SETTINGS” will be shown.
The <ESC> key will function even when some of the password’s numbers have been
entered.
For more information, consult the point 4.2 of the Password Management section in this
manual.
22.2.1.2 General operation

We can access the start menu screen by pressing <MENU> from any of the other pages
described in the preceding paragraphs. To exit the menus pages from the start page we
must press <MENU> or <ESC>.
To move from a menu to a submenu we must select the menu that we want to explore and
press  (Enter). To return to the previous menu, we must press <ESC>. The <MENU> key
enables us to return to the start menu from any submenu.
The  (Up),  (Down) keys can be used to change a menu's active line. If all the
menu’s options can be displayed on the screen, only the active line is changed when we
change line. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on

User Manual 409
the screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the first or the last of
the screen's menus, the menu will scroll up or down, in accordance with the key used.
An indication of the number of the item selected from the total number of items in the
menu on the screen currently displayed is shown in the bottom right of the screen.
Figure 202 Initial Settings Menu
22.2.1.3 Settings change operation

By pressing  (Enter) on an item from a settings menu screen that has no submenus, the
settings changes screen will appear (Figure 203). This screen displays the data
corresponding to the first 6 settings. The selected setting can be modified using 
(Up),  (Down).
If all the node’s settings can be displayed on the screen, only the selected setting
is changed when we change setting. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options
can be displayed on the screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the
first or the last of the screen's settings, the settings will scroll up or down, in
accordance with the key used. To return to the menu screen, we must press <ESC>.
The following data can be seen on this screen:
 The following will appear at the top of the screen:

 Description of the settings node.
 Name of the settings node in IEC 61850.
 Current table (for settings which have the possibility of multiple
tables).
 The number of the selected setting and the total number of the node’s
settings.
 There are 3 lines for each setting, indicating the following:
 Description of the setting.
 Name of the setting in IEC 61850 and its corresponding value.
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first
time, the current value and the new value coincide.
 The “VALIDATE PARAMETERS?” text appears in the last line. When selected
and after pressing  (Enter), all the changes to the screen's settings

User Manual 410
are validated. Until we press  (Enter) with the last line selected the
changed settings will not be validated.
 WARNING: If the user only has viewing permissions, the last line will
not appear on the settings change screens.
Figure 203 Settings change screen and Figure 204 Setting Validated
By pressing <ESC> after modifying a setting in the page, a confirmation message

indicating that the user is about exit without saving the settings in the CID appears:
Exit without changing settings?
Thus, by pressing  (Enter) we exit the screen and all the changes made so far in that
menu are cleared. If we press <ESC> when the message appears, we remain where we were.
By pressing  (Enter) after having modified one of the page's settings, another window
appears. At this point, the user has 2 options:
 Wait until the CID modification process is completed with the new
settings. At this point there are 3 possible situations:
 If the modification is carried out successfully, a “Changing the
settings OK” text will appear (Figure 204).
 If an error occurs during the CID modification process, an “Error in
changing settings” text will appear.
 If a time out failure occurs whilst saving the modified settings, a
“Time out in changing settings " message will appear.
 Press  (Enter) and return to the settings change screen without the
assurance of having modified the CID.
22.2.1.4 Settings Types

By pressing  (Enter) on one of the items that enables settings to be changed, and
providing that the user has modification permissions, one of different types of small
window will appear:
22.2.1.4.1 Option Type

By pressing  (Enter) on a setting of this type, a small window (Figure 205)
displaying the following data appears:
 Setting name in IEC 61850.

User Manual 411
 Setting description.
 Current setting value.
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first
time, the current value and the new value coincide.
 The number of the current option from among the options available
Using the  (Up),  (Down) keys, we can move through the different options in a
circular manner, that is, when we reach the last option we are returned to the
first option. The selection option is chosen by pressing  (Enter). To exit without
selecting, press <ESC>.
Figure 205 Small screen for modifying OPTION type setting
22.2.1.4.2 Numeric Type

These can be changed using the numeric keys. The number is validated by pressing 
(Enter), whilst <ESC> is used to cancel and start again. The following data is
displayed in each small window:
 Setting name in IEC 61850.

 Setting description.
 Current setting value.
 The setting’s new value. This field, which is empty, is where the
value of the new setting entered via the keyboard will be displayed.
 Maximum setting value.
 Minimum setting value.
 Setting step or increase.
There are 2 possibilities within this type, depending on the number, decimal or
integer format.
Decimal
The valid keys are numbers and dot. The desired value is entered directly. Each
digit pressed is captured, followed by the selection of the next digit, until we
press  (Enter). The decimal point is entered by pressing “.”“·”. The digits are
entered from left to right. For example, to enter the number 123.45, we must
successively press 1, 2, 3, “.”, 4“·”44, 5,  (Enter).

User Manual 412
The entered value is checked in order to ensure that it meets the maximum, minimum
and step restrictions. Should it fail to meet any of these restrictions, the
“INVALID VALUE” text is shown. This text disappears when a number key is pressed.
Figure 206 Small screen for modifying DECIMAL type setting
Integer
The valid keys are numbers. The desired value is entered directly. Each digit
pressed is captured, followed by the selection of the next digit, until we press 
(Enter). The decimal point is not allowed in such settings. The digits are entered
from left to right. For example, to enter the number 2345, we must successively
press 2, 3, 4, 5,  (Enter).
Figure 207 Small screen for modifying INTEGER type setting

User Manual 413
The entered value is checked in order to ensure that it meets the maximum, minimum
and step restrictions. Should it fail to meet any of these restrictions, the
“INVALID VALUE” text is shown. This text disappears when a number key is pressed.
There are some integer type settings whose value is a signal number. In such cases,
the “NOT DEFINED” text (Figure 208) indicates that this setting has no associated
signal. If we wish to associate a signal, we must enter the desired signal number
with numeric keypad and press  (Enter).
On the other hand, if we wish to assign the undefined value to a setting, we must
press “R” and the “NOT DEFINED” text will appear in the New field.
Figure 208 Small screen for modifying INTEGER type setting
22.2.1.4.3 Unit Network Parameters Type

Ethernet interface
The unit’s network parameters can also be viewed and modified from the display: IP
address, mask, gateway and enable status of the Ethernet. Figure 209 shows how the network
1 interface, IP address, network mask and MAC address parameters, as well as the
link status indicating if the network cable is connected and enable status of the Ethernet,
would be viewed via the display.
Figure 209 Screen with Ethernet parameters

User Manual 414
If we press  (Enter) in the previous screen and we have permission to change

settings, the screen shown in Figure 210 will appear with the current data and a
second row into which the new values can be entered. Using the  (Up),  (Down)
keys, we can navigate through the IP, MASK and ENABLED fields in a circular manner,
that is, when we reach the last option we are returned to the first option.
To exit, press <ESC>.
If we want to modify the IP, select the IP field and then enter the values. For
example, to enter the IP address 192.168.182.1, we must press 1, 9, 2,”.”, 1, 6, 8,
“.”, 1, 8, 2, “.”,1  (Enter).
Only the IP, MASK and ENABLED fields can be modified.
If the user enters an incorrect value, the last character entered can be deleted
with the “” (Left) key.
To modify the enable of Ethernet, press the  (Right) key and the status will enable to NO. If you press the 
(Right) key is again set to YES.
Once the correct data have been entered, press  (Enter) to check that the values
entered are valid. In the event of an error, a small screen displaying the cause of
the error will be shown.
Figure 210 Ethernet parameters setting changes screen and Figure 211 Network configuration screen
Gateway
The Gateway’s that are configured in the unit can also be viewed, added, modified
and deleted from the display. Up to 10 gateways can be configured, ONLY 1 of which
can be a default gateway.
Figure 211 shows the screen with the different interfaces for the unit’s network
and gateways. We can see that a default gateway with IP address 192.169.182.254 and
a gateway with IP address 192.168.182.253 have been configured. The remaining
gateways have not been configured.
Viewing a Gateway
If we select Gateway 1 and press  (Enter), the following screen appears (Figure
212) showing the Gateway’s data values and a legend at the bottom with the
different options available to the user.

User Manual 415
Figure 212 Gateway display screen and Figure 213 Default Gateway edition screen
Editing or creating a Gateway
If we press  (Enter) in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission

to change settings (having entered the correct password into the password screen),
the Gateway edition and creation screen will appear with the current data and a
second row into which the new values can be entered.
The following situations may arise when configuring a Gateway:
 Gateway Not Configured

 To add a default Gateway, we only have to complete the GATEWAY
field (the Gateway IP address) and press  (Enter). If not, an
error will occur.
 To add a Gateway with a specific network destination, we must
complete the 3 fields and press  (Enter). If not, an error will
occur.
 Gateway Configured
 To edit a default Gateway (Figure 213), we only have to modify
the GATEWAY field (the Gateway’s IP address) and, once the
desired value has been entered, press  (Enter) for the change
to become effective.
 To edit a Gateway with a specific network destination, we change
the desired parameter(s) and press  (Enter). Any parameters
that are not modified will retain the current values.
To add a new Gateway, select a non-configured gateway, for example Gateway 3, and
press  (Enter).
This screen shows the values of the Gateway’s 3 fields as non-configured. In such a
case, we can only exit or edit (add) the Gateway. By pressing  (Enter) again, the
Gateway edition/creation screen will be displayed.
The  (Up),  (Down) keys are used to move between destination IP address,
destination network mask and the Gateway IP address fields in a circular manner.
This is not possible in the default Gateway, which has a single editable field.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.

User Manual 416
If we want to enter the Gateway with the destination IP 10.15.1.6, Gateway mask
255.255.255.255 and Gateway IP address 192.168.182.252, we must press
1,0,”.”,1,5,”.”,1,”.”,6 and then  (Down) to complete the Gateway mask by pressing
2,5,5,”.”,2,5,5,”.”,2,5,5,”.”,2,5,5. Next, we must use  (Down) and complete the
Gateway ip address by entering 1, 9, 2,”.”, 1, 6, 8, “.”, 1, 8,2, “.”, 2, 5, 2.
entered are valid. In the event of an error, a small screen displaying the cause of
the error will be shown.
The screen will display the new configuration and the new Gateway introduced.
NOTE: If a default Gateway is configured, the last Gateway will ALWAYS be

displayed, even if more gateways with a specific network destination are added.
Figure 214 Gateway parameters setting changes screen
Deleting a Gateway
If we press “R” in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to

change settings (having entered the correct password into the password screen), the
Gateway that is being displayed will be deleted.
Network Configuration Restrictions
 The IP address and mask formats follow the dot-decimal notation. Checks
are to be carried out following this standard.
 IP addresses or masks equal to 0 are not permitted.
 The ip address 255.255.255.255 is not permitted.
 The mask address 255.255.255.255 is not permitted.
 When changing the ip address, the route table is recalculated with the
new ip value and previously configured GWs. If the mentioned
configuration is possible it is to be carried out both running and
permanently. However, if it not possible these GWs are to be removed
permanently.

User Manual 417
22.2.1.4.4 Date Type

Equivalent to a numeric, although the numeric data entered are successively
allocated in blocks of two to Day, month, year, hour, minute, second. When the
seconds have been entered, no further data can be entered until we have press 
(Enter) or <ESC> (the latter key deletes the data entered. If no data has been
entered, we exit the settings modification). The format displayed on the screen is:
Day/Month/Year Hour:Min:sec
2 digits must always be entered for year, month and date. This means that in order
to enter “1” we must enter “01”.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
entered are valid. In the event of an error, an “INCORRECT DATE” text will be
shown. If the data are valid, no windows will be shown.
Figure 215 Unit date and time setting screen
22.2.2 Password management

22.2.2.1 Changing the Settings Menu Password
The password may contain between 4 and 8 digits. The password is 1357 by default.
When we press a numeric key within the password screen, each keystroke will be
considered part of the password and will be indicated in the display with “*”. When we
have entered between 4 and 8 characters and pressed "Enter", the data entered will be
validated against the unit’s password. If the password entered is incorrect, a warning
text will be displayed.
Pressing <ESC> enables us to access the settings menus with viewing only permissions.
If we enter the correct password we will be able to view and modify. <ESC> will
function even when certain of the password’s numbers have been entered, i.e., if we
press <ESC> while we are entering the password we will access the menu with viewing
only permission.

User Manual 418
The user can change the password, providing that he or she knows the former password.
You will be asked to type the password twice before changing it. The password numbers
will appear hidden as they are entered (the “*” will appear for each number entered).
Once the first password has been entered, press  (Enter) and enter the second
password. Once the second password has been entered, press  (Enter) and the password
will be changed (providing the two passwords entered are the same). As with the
numbers, they are entered from left to right.
Figure 216 Password modification screen
22.2.2.2 Changing FTP Passwords

The FTP password modification screen is accessed via the settings menu. This screen
shows a virtual keyboard with numbers from 0 to 9, the alphabet in uppercase and in
lowercase.
Operation
 We must use the  (Up),  (Down),  (Left) and  (Right) keys to

navigate around the virtual keyboard, whilst  (Enter) is used to
confirm the selected keyboard field.
 We must enter the old password and select the "Validate" field before
finally pressing  (Enter).
 We must then enter the new password and select the "Validate" field
before finally pressing  (Enter).
 A small window showing the result of the password modification (OK or
the cause of the failure) will be displayed.
If the user enters an incorrect value, the last character entered can be deleted with
the “R” key.

User Manual 419
Figure 217 FTP Password modification screen
22.3 OTHER SCREENS
22.3.1 Contrast setting

To access the contrast setting screen we must press “0” and “9” at the same time in a
screen that is not within the unit's settings menu. Once we have pressed these two keys,
the following image will appear in the display:
Figure 218 Contrast setting screen
If we then press  (Up) the contrast’s intensity will increase, and if we press  (Down),
the intensity will decrease. To exit this screen, press  (Enter). (Enter)
22.3.2 USB treatment

When the user inserts a USB key, a small window will appear in the display indicating
that a USB device has been detected and the USB treatment will begin.

User Manual 420
Figure 219 USB detected y Figure 220 Remove the USB device
Once the treatment has terminated, the following window will appear in the display
indicating that we can remove the USB device.
NOTE: If the USB device is not removed within 5 seconds, the small screen will disappear
and the display will return to the previous screen.
Added a new menu of settings in the Password screen to set the USB treatment, this
setting can only be changed from the display. The setting will have 3 possible values:
 Disabled: The USB treatment is not available.

 With password: The USB treatment is available but needs the introduction of the key
settings menu.
 Without password: The USB treatment is available without having to enter the
password.
22.3.3 System Information

This menu is detailed device information:

User Manual 421
The content of each submenu is:
 Product information: commercial computer code and the serial number of the CPU is displayed.
 Device versions: Versions of the CPU and the various cards forming equipment are displayed.
 Last updates: last 12 updates are shown, for each update there is a record with the following data:
 Date and time of the update.
 Filename update.
 Result of the update.
 Last CIDs loaded: The display will show the latest cids loaded from the device boots where the following
information is displayed:
 Date and time.
 Cid name.
 Result validation.
22.3.4 CID validation

Messages relating to the receipt and processing of a new CID in the device are displayed
in a small window, the operation is as follows:
 After a new CID give the device a small window indicating that it is validating the
CID is displayed. During the validation process if any key is pressed, the window
disappears and you can access the different menus display.
 Once the validation process the result CID (CID Validated / not validated CID) is displayed in a new window,
which will remain on display until the user press a key or two minutes have elapsed.
The new messages will be visualized display configuration between windows and window CID
validating the result.
22.3.5 Security Logs

Are available which record user actions from the keyboard / display, such as:
 if the password setting menu or the key is modified FTP

User Manual 422
 If the password is correct or incorrect

 Whether to enable / disable Enabling Ethernet ports
 If there is a change in the network configuration
22.3.6 Network Configuration

When there is a fault in the configuration of the display, it is possible to see the
computer's network settings, if  (Enter) key will alternately display the error message
and display the network configuration.
Then the network configuration screen is displayed:

User Manual 423
DNP PROTOCOL 
23. DNP PROTOCOL
23.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides a DNP interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a DNP master (for
example a remote control station).
The communication can be selected for a serial line or via Ethernet, using encapsulation by
means of the TCP/IP protocol.
Below are described the following topics:
 Protocol configuration settings

 Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements, counters and
commands (which are configured with the software configuration tool)
 Implemented Device Profile and object table.
23.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
The protocol has the following configuration settings:
 Enable protocol:
 Yes
 No
 Slave address: DNP slave address of the device. Value between 0 and 65532.
 Master address: DNP master address of the master device. Value between 0 and 65532.
 Port Number: This setting enables the selection between the available communication
channels:
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet2
 Comm speed (bauds): This setting enables the selection of the serial baud rate.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

User Manual 424
DNP PROTOCOL 
 Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission. The
recommended default value is 0 (without parity), as indicated by the DNP protocol.
 Without parity
 Even
 Odd
 Number of Stop bits: Enables the selection of the number of stop bits.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
 Communication control: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Normal
 Fixed + DCD
 RTS
 RTS+CTS
 RTS+CTS+DCD
 RS485
 Min. respond delay (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the
transmission of a message after the reception of a message. Value between 0 and
1000.
 CTS max delay (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation.
Value between 0 and 1000.
 Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time for the transmission of the message after
the CTS detection in order to allow the carrier stabilization. Value between 0 and
1000.
 RTS drop-off time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message
last byte transmission.
 ACK delay time(ms): Timeout for Link Confirm. Value between 0 and 1000.
 Need time delay (m): Waiting time in minutes that must elapse before the validity
of the clock is checked after receiving a synchronization or start up message. If
it is invalid, synchronization is requested to the master. Value between 0 and 10.
 Permission to synchronize: Synchronization permission from control centre.
 Yes
 No
It is used to configure the synchronization source when there are several
available.
 Local time offset (h): Local offset for the time.

 Communication fail T.(min): Waiting time in minutes without receiving any valid
measure before indicate communication failure. Value between 0 and 10000 minutes.
 Data link confirm: Indicates if confirm is requested at the connection level. The
value must be set to NO for TCP/IP.
 NO
 YES
 Max. App Fragment Size: Maximum number of bytes in an application message. Value
between 512 and 3072.
 Freeze time counters: : Indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time.
Only acts when zero variation is requested.
 NO
 YES

User Manual 425
DNP PROTOCOL 
 Default Status: Indicates whether the digital signal objects, measurements and
counters are sent with status or without status in messages sent in response to
requests in which variation is not specified. Also valid for responses to class 0
requests. The bits have the following meanings:
Bit Value
0 Send all with status
1 Send digitals with status
2 Send measurements with status
3 Send counters with status
4 Send frozen counters with status
 Bin. output status default: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data
request also includes the object corresponding to the binary outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
 Analog output status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data
request also includes the object corresponding to the analog outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
 Frozen Counters status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data
request also includes the object corresponding to the frozen counters with status.

 NO
 SI
 Analog input bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the
analog objects when no variation is requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Short floating point
 Normalized: Indicates the analog format.
 Internal account.
 Normalized.
 Counter bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the
counter objects when no variation is requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Enable unsolicited: Enables the use of unsolicited responses with class 1, 2 o 3.
 NO
 YES
 Enable collision avoidance: Enables the collision avoidance detection with DCD
method.
 NO
 YES
 Fixed Unsolicited T.out (ms): Fixed waiting time before transmitting an unsolicited
response. Value between 0 and 5000.
 Variable Unsolicited T.out (ms): Variable waiting time additional to the previous
setting of fixed time. The value options are :

User Manual 426
DNP PROTOCOL 
Setting Value Time in ms

0 255
1 127
2 63
3 31
4 15
5 7
6 3
7 1
 Unsolicited Repeat T.out (s): Waiting time in seconds before a retransmission of an

unsolicited response when there is not a link or application acknowledge to the
previous message. Value between 0 and 630 seconds.
 Max.number rep. without solic.: Maximum number of retransmission of an unsolicited

response. Value between 0 and 65535. Infinite for value 0.
 Special operations: Enables the activation of certain operational characteristics.
Bit Bit indication at 1

0 Dispatch of current counters with OBJ = 21
1 Reserve
Dispatch of unsolicited responses up to the IIN
2
included each 10 seconds
3 Reserve
4 Reserve
5 Reserve
6 Restart message not sent on start up
 Change wait time (s): Waiting time for the SOE in the internal queue before
processing the events. It is only necessary if there are data from different IEDs
in order to sort them chronologically.
 TCP Listen Port: TCP port used as server.
Table 242 DNP protocol settings

ProtEna Enable protocol NO/YES Boolean
Slave Slave address 0 65532 1 Int32
Master Master address 0 65532 1 Int32
Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet2
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
None
Parity Parity Even Enum
Odd
1Bit
Stopbit Number of Stop bits Enum
2 Bit

User Manual 427
DNP PROTOCOL 
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RTS
RtsType Communication control Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RS485
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
AckTmms ACK delay time(ms) 100 10000 10 Int32
SynDl Need time delay(m) 0 10 1 Int32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
SynOfs Local time offset(h) -12 12 1 Int32
ComFailTm Communication fail T.(min) 0 10000 1 Int32
LinkAck Data link confirm NO/YES Boolean
MaxAppSize Max. App Fragment Size 512 3072 256 Int32
FrzCnt Freeze time counters NO/YES Boolean
Meaning of bits
StDefault Default status 0 31 1 Int32
(1)
BinOutSt Bin. output status default NO/YES Boolean
AnOutSt Analog output status def. NO/YES Boolean
FrCntSt Frozen Counters status def. NO/YES Boolean
16 Bits
32 Bits
AnInBits Analog input bits default Enum
Short floating
point
Internal
Normalized Normalized account Enum
Normalized
16 Bits
CntBits Counter bits default Enum
32 Bits
UnSolEna Enable unsolicited NO/YES Boolean
CollEna Enable collision avoidance NO/YES Boolean
FixedTmms Fixed Unsolicited T.out (ms) 0 5000 10 Int32
255
127
63
Variable Unsolicited T.out 31
VarTmms Enum
(ms) 15
7
3
1
UnSolTmms Unsolicited Repeat T.out (s) 0 630 1 Int32
Max.number rep. without
UnSolMaxR 0 65535 1 Int32
solic.
SpecialBeh Special operations 0 255 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Int32
Where:
Meaning of bits (1) Bit Value

Send all with status 0 SI/NO
Send digitals with status 1 SI/NO
Send measurements with status 2 SI/NO
Send counters with status 3 SI/NO
Send frozen counters with status 4 SI/NO
23.3 TABLES
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs,
counters and commands.

User Manual 428
DNP PROTOCOL 
23.3.1 Digital status table

For each element the following fields must be configured:
 Type, (Tipo): Type of signal. In this version only value Simple, (1), is
available.
 (num): Index for each type of signals. Values between 0 and 4093.
 DNP Signal, (nP): DNP signal number. Values between 0 and 4093. Gaps are not
allowed.
 IED, (UCL): IED of the signal. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal signal, (nUCL): Internal signal number that identifies the element
inside the device.
 Class, (Class): Default class assigned to the signal. With value 0 the signal
does not cause changes.
 Class 0, (0)
 Class 1, (1)
 Class 2, (2)
 Class 3, (3)
 Time, (Time): Time format for changes.

 Without time, (1)
 Absolute time, (2)
 Relative time, (3)
 Inverted, (Inv): Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not
inverted.
 Not inverted (0)
 Inverted (1)
23.3.2 Analog values table

 DNP signal, (nP): DNP analog number. Values between 0 and 1023. Gaps are
allowed.
 Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the analog value. Value 0 corresponds to the
device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal analog number that identifies the element inside
the device.
 Class, (Class): Class assigned to the analog value. With value 0 the analog
value does not cause changes.
 Class 0, (0)
 Class 1, (1)
 Class 2, (2)
 Class 3, (3)
 Dead Band, (DeadBand): Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values
 Dec, (Dec): Number of decimal places for the analog value when the setting
“Normalizado” takes the Internal Account value, (factor of 10 to the number of
decimal places). Values between 0 and 3.

User Manual 429
DNP PROTOCOL 
 Limit scale, (fondo): Full scale used when the setting “Normalizado” takes the
Normalized value.
The deadband is defined as the value that the analog value must vary to be sent as
a change.
When the analog values are to be sent, the current value is compared to the last
sent value and if the difference is greater than the DeadBand the current value is
transmitted. A zero value does not generate any events.
23.3.3 Counters table

 DNP signal, (nP): DNP counter number. Values between 0 and 63. Gaps are
allowed.
 Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the counter value. Value 0 corresponds to the
device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal counter number that identifies the element
inside the device.
 Class, (Class): Class assigned to the counter. With value 0 the counter value
does not cause changes.
 Class 0, (0)
 Class 1, (1)
 Class 2, (2)
 Class 3, (3)
 Dead band, (DeadBand): Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values
23.3.4 Commands table

 DNP command, (nP): DNP command number. Values between 0 and 255.
 Op type, (ON_OFF_nP): DNP command value.
 Trip, (129)
 Close, (65)
 Latch ON, (3)
 Latch OFF, (4)
 Pulse ON, (1)
 Internal IED: IED of the command. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal counter number that identifies the element
inside the device. The internal value is affected by the next field.
 ON_OFF: Internal command value (ON or OFF). Use to select Internal ID.
 Comand type, (Command_Type):
 All, (0), All types supported.
 SBO, (1). Only Selec Before Operate supported.
 DO, (2). OnlyDirect operate supported.

User Manual 430
DNP PROTOCOL 
23.4 DEVICE PROFILE
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

Vendor Name: INGETEAM S.A.
Device Name: INGEPAC EF
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
 Master  Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024< >3072( configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None
 None
 Fixed at 1
 Configurable, range ____ to ____
 Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm  None  Fixed at __10 sg____  Variable 
Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes 
Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no

Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
specific variation requested:
when no specific variation requested:
 Never
 Never
 Only time-tagged
 Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged
 Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable to send both, one or the other
 Configurable (attach explanation)
(attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
 Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Never
 Only certain objects  When Device Restarts
 Sometimes (attach explanation)  When Status Flags Change
 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD

User Manual 431
DNP PROTOCOL 
Counters Roll Over at:

Default Counter Object/Variation:
 No Counters Reported
 No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 16 Bits
 Default Object _________
 32 Bits
Default Variation ______
 Other Value _____________
 Point-by-point list attached
 Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No
23.5 OBJECT TABLE
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func
Qual Codes Func Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes
(hex) Codes (hex)
(dec)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1,22 00,01,06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Binary Input Change - All
2 0 1 06,07,08
Variations
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Binary Input Change with
2 3 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Relative Time
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
3, 4, 5, Echo of
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 17, 28 129
6 request
1, 7, 8,
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 00,01,06
9, 10,22
1, 7, 8,
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
9, 10
1, 7, 8,
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
9, 10
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
32-Bit Binary Counter without
20 5 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without
20 6 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
Flag
32-Bit Delta Counter without
20 7 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Flag
16-Bit Delta Counter without
20 8 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Flag
Frozen Counters - All
21 0 1, 22 00,01,06
Variations
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time
21 5 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
of Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time
21 6 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
of Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
21 7 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
with Time of Freeze
21 8 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
with Time of Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Counter without
21 9 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Flag
16-Bit Frozen Counter without
21 10 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Flag
21 11 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
without Flag
21 12 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
without Flag

User Manual 432
DNP PROTOCOL 
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
Func
(hex) Codes (hex)
(dec)
Counter Change Event – All
22 0 1 06,07,08
Variations
32-Bit Counter Change Event

22 1 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
without Time
16-Bit Counter Change Event

22 2 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
without Time
32-Bit Delta Counter Change
22 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Event without Time
16-Bit Delta Counter Change
22 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Event without Time
Frozen Counter Events – All
23 0 1 06, 07, 08 129
Variations
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
23 1 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
without Time
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
23 2 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
without Time
23 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Event without Time
23 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Event without Time
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
Analog Input — Single-prec flt-
30 5 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
pt with flag
Analog Change Event - All
32 0 1 06,07,08
Variations
32-Bit Analog Change Event
32 1 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
without Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event
32 2 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
without Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event with
32 4 1 06,07,08 129,130 28
Time 2
Analog Input Event — Single-prec
32 5 1 06,07,08 129,130 28
flt-pt without time
Analog Output Status - All
40 0 1 00, 01, 06
Variations
40 1 32-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
40 2 16-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
3, 4, 5, Echo of
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 17, 28 129
6 request
07,
2
quantity=1
50 1 Time and Date
07, 07,
1 129
quantity=1 quantity=1
07,
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129
quantity=1
07,
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129
quantity=1
07,
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129
quantity=1
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data 20,
06
21,22
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data 20, 21,
06
22
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data 20, 21,
06
22

User Manual 433
DNP PROTOCOL 
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
Func
(hex) Codes (hex)
(dec)
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications 00,
2
index=7
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23

User Manual 434
CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS 
24. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
24.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the
following types:
 Inverse or Normal Inverse Characteristic.

 Very Inverse Characteristic.
 Extremely Inverse Characteristic.
 User Curve.
These curves comply with the general formula
k tr
T  M  TRECAIDA  M 
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
In which:
 T : trip time (sec)

 TDROP : drop time (sec)
 M: multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.05 to 1.09, in steps of 0.01
 I: Measured current
 Io: Pickup current setting
 K, , tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Inverse /
Constants Short inverse Long inverse Very inverse Extreme. inverse MIEspecial
Normal inverse
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
 0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
tr 9.7 0.5 120 43.2 58.2 21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there
are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except between 0.05 and
0.1, between which there are another 4.

User Manual 435
Inverse or normal inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0,14,  = 0,02 tr = 9.7
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.214 0.149 0.113 0.091
0.06 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.257 0.178 0.136 0.110
0.07 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.300 0.208 0.159 0.128
0.08 0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.342 0.238 0.181 0.146
0.09 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.385 0.267 0.204 0.165
0.10 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.428 0.297 0.227 0.183
0.11 1.067 1.138 1.423 2.439 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.471 0.327 0.249 0.201
0.12 1.164 1.242 1.552 2.661 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.514 0.356 0.272 0.219
0.13 1.261 1.345 1.681 2.882 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.556 0.386 0.295 0.238
0.14 1.358 1.449 1.811 3.104 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.599 0.416 0.317 0.256
0.15 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.642 0.446 0.340 0.274
0.16 1.552 1.655 2.069 3.547 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.685 0.475 0.363 0.293
0.17 1.649 1.759 2.199 3.769 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.728 0.505 0.385 0.311
0.18 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.770 0.535 0.408 0.329
0.19 1.843 1.966 2.457 4.213 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.813 0.564 0.431 0.347
0.20 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.856 0.594 0.453 0.366
0.25 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.070 0.743 0.567 0.457
0.30 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.284 0.891 0.680 0.549
0.35 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.498 1.040 0.794 0.640
0.40 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.712 1.188 0.907 0.731
0.45 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 1.926 1.337 1.020 0.823
0.50 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.140 1.485 1.134 0.914
0.55 5.335 5.691 7.113 12.194 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.354 1.634 1.247 1.006
0.60 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.568 1.782 1.360 1.097
0.65 6.305 6.725 8.407 14.411 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 2.782 1.931 1.474 1.188
0.70 6.790 7.243 9.053 15.520 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 2.996 2.079 1.587 1.280
0.75 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.210 2.228 1.701 1.371
0.80 7.760 8.277 10.347 17.737 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.424 2.376 1.814 1.463
0.85 8.245 8.795 10.993 18.846 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 3.638 2.525 1.927 1.554
0.90 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 3.852 2.674 2.041 1.646
0.95 9.215 9.829 12.287 21.063 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.066 2.822 2.154 1.737
1.00 9.700 10.347 12.933 22.171 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.280 2.971 2.267 1.828
1.05 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 4.494 3.119 2.381 1.920

User Manual 436

User Manual 437
Long duration curve (IEC)
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
@Fig.160.png-H:61,65-W:103,7@ @Fig.161.png-H:62,2-W:145,75@
K = 120,  = 1 tr = 120
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 42.000 44.800 56.000 96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 48.000 51.200 64.000 109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 60.000 64.000 80.000 137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 66.000 70.400 88.000 150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 72.000 76.800 96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 78.000 83.200 104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 84.000 89.600 112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 90.000 96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 96.000 102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231

User Manual 438

User Manual 439
Short duration curve IEC
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0.05,  = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.025 0.027 0.033 0.057 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 0.030 0.032 0.040 0.069 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 0.035 0.037 0.047 0.080 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 0.040 0.043 0.053 0.091 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 0.045 0.048 0.060 0.103 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 0.050 0.053 0.067 0.114 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 0.055 0.059 0.073 0.126 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 0.060 0.064 0.080 0.137 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 0.065 0.069 0.087 0.149 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 0.070 0.075 0.093 0.160 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 0.075 0.080 0.100 0.171 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 0.080 0.085 0.107 0.183 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 0.085 0.091 0.113 0.194 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 0.090 0.096 0.120 0.206 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 0.095 0.101 0.127 0.217 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 0.100 0.107 0.133 0.229 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 0.125 0.133 0.167 0.286 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 0.150 0.160 0.200 0.343 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 0.175 0.187 0.233 0.400 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 0.200 0.213 0.267 0.457 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 0.225 0.240 0.300 0.514 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 0.250 0.267 0.333 0.571 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 0.275 0.293 0.367 0.629 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 0.300 0.320 0.400 0.686 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 0.325 0.347 0.433 0.743 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 0.350 0.373 0.467 0.800 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 0.375 0.400 0.500 0.857 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 0.400 0.427 0.533 0.914 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 0.425 0.453 0.567 0.971 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 0.450 0.480 0.600 1.029 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 0.475 0.507 0.633 1.086 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 0.500 0.533 0.667 1.143 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 0.525 0.560 0.700 1.200 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330

User Manual 440

User Manual 441
Very inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 13,5,  = 1 tr = 43.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.169 0.075 0.036 0.017
0.06 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.203 0.090 0.043 0.021
0.07 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.236 0.105 0.050 0.024
0.08 3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.270 0.120 0.057 0.028
0.09 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.304 0.135 0.064 0.031
0.10 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.337 0.150 0.071 0.035
0.11 4.752 5.069 6.336 10.862 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.371 0.165 0.078 0.038
0.12 5.184 5.530 6.912 11.849 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.405 0.180 0.085 0.042
0.13 5.616 5.990 7.488 12.837 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.439 0.195 0.092 0.045
0.14 6.048 6.451 8.064 13.824 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.472 0.210 0.099 0.048
0.15 6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.506 0.225 0.107 0.052
0.16 6.912 7.373 9.216 15.799 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.540 0.240 0.114 0.055
0.17 7.344 7.834 9.792 16.786 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.574 0.255 0.121 0.059
0.18 7.776 8.294 10.368 17.774 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.608 0.270 0.128 0.062
0.19 8.208 8.755 10.944 18.761 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.641 0.285 0.135 0.066
0.20 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.675 0.300 0.142 0.069
0.25 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 0.844 0.375 0.178 0.087
0.30 12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.013 0.450 0.213 0.104
0.35 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.181 0.525 0.249 0.121
0.40 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.350 0.600 0.284 0.138
0.45 19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 1.519 0.675 0.320 0.156
0.50 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 1.688 0.750 0.355 0.173
0.55 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 1.856 0.825 0.391 0.190
0.60 25.920 27.648 34.560 59.246 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.025 0.900 0.426 0.208
0.65 28.080 29.952 37.440 64.183 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.194 0.975 0.462 0.225
0.70 30.240 32.256 40.320 69.120 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 2.363 1.050 0.497 0.242
0.75 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 202.500 101.25 50.625 33.750 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 2.531 1.125 0.533 0.260
0.80 34.560 36.864 46.080 78.994 216.000 108.00 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.85 36.720 39.168 48.960 83.931 229.500 114.75 57.375 38.250 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 2.869 1.275 0.604 0.294
0.90 38.880 41.472 51.840 88.869 243.000 121.50 60.750 40.500 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 3.038 1.350 0.639 0.312
0.95 41.040 43.776 54.720 93.806 256.500 128.25 64.125 42.750 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 3.206 1.425 0.675 0.329
1.00 43.200 46.080 57.600 98.743 270.000 135.00 67.500 45.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 3.375 1.500 0.711 0.346
1.05 45.360 48.384 60.480 103.68 283.500 141.75 70.875 47.250 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 3.544 1.575 0.746 0.363

User Manual 442

User Manual 443
Extremely inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 80,  = 2 tr =58.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.167 0.040 0.010 0.003
0.06 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.200 0.048 0.012 0.003
0.07 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.233 0.057 0.014 0.004
0.08 4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.267 0.065 0.016 0.004
0.09 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.300 0.073 0.018 0.005
0.10 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.333 0.081 0.020 0.005
0.11 6.402 6.829 8.536 14.633 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.367 0.089 0.022 0.006
0.12 6.984 7.450 9.312 15.963 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.400 0.097 0.024 0.006
0.13 7.566 8.070 10.088 17.294 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.433 0.105 0.026 0.007
0.14 8.148 8.691 10.864 18.624 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.467 0.113 0.028 0.007
0.15 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.500 0.121 0.030 0.008
0.16 9.312 9.933 12.416 21.285 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.533 0.129 0.032 0.008
0.17 9.894 10.554 13.192 22.615 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.567 0.137 0.034 0.009
0.18 10.476 11.174 13.968 23.945 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.600 0.145 0.036 0.009
0.19 11.058 11.795 14.744 25.275 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 0.633 0.154 0.038 0.010
0.20 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 0.667 0.162 0.040 0.010
0.25 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 0.833 0.202 0.050 0.013
0.30 17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.000 0.242 0.060 0.015
0.35 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.167 0.283 0.070 0.018
0.40 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 1.333 0.323 0.080 0.020
0.45 26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 1.500 0.364 0.090 0.023
0.50 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 1.667 0.404 0.100 0.025
0.55 32.010 34.144 42.680 73.166 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 1.833 0.444 0.110 0.028
0.60 34.920 37.248 46.560 79.817 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 2.000 0.485 0.120 0.030
0.65 37.830 40.352 50.440 86.469 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 2.167 0.525 0.130 0.033
0.70 40.740 43.456 54.320 93.120 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 2.333 0.566 0.140 0.035
0.75 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 2.500 0.606 0.150 0.038
0.80 46.560 49.664 62.080 106.423 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 2.667 0.646 0.160 0.040
0.85 49.470 52.768 65.960 113.074 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 2.833 0.687 0.170 0.043
0.90 52.380 55.872 69.840 119.726 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 3.000 0.727 0.180 0.045
0.95 55.290 58.976 73.720 126.377 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 3.167 0.768 0.190 0.048
1.00 58.200 62.080 77.600 133.029 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 3.333 0.808 0.201 0.050
1.05 61.110 65.184 81.480 139.680 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 3.500 0.848 0.211 0.053

User Manual 444

User Manual 445
Very Inverse Special Curve
k tr
 2
 I 1  I 1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 2,6  = 1
M \
1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
I/Io
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070

User Manual 446

User Manual 447
24.2 ANSI CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the
following types:
 Normal Inverse Characteristic.

 Very Inverse Characteristic.
 Extremely Inverse Characteristic.
 Moderately Inverse Characteristic.
These curves comply with the general formula
T  M   A  
B D E tr
  TRECAIDA  M 
   C
I 2 3 
 I   I  C  I  C   I 1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
in which:
 T : trip time (sec)

 TDROP : drop time (sec)
 M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.05 to 30.0, in steps of 0.1
 I: Measured current
 Io: Pickup current setting
 A, B, C, D, E, tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse character. Very inverse Extreme. inverse Moder. inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
tr 0.99 4.678 6.008 1.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0,
6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 for each type of characteristic. Take into account that
between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are another 9 curves.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.

User Manual 448
Normal inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
   C
I 2 3 
 I   I  C  I  C   I 1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.174.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.175.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272 tr = 0.99
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 0.495 0.528 0.660 1.131 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.203 0.113 0.066 0.041
1.0 0.990 1.056 1.320 2.263 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.407 0.226 0.133 0.082
2.0 1.980 2.112 2.640 4.526 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 0.814 0.452 0.265 0.164
3.0 2.970 3.168 3.960 6.789 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.220 0.678 0.398 0.246
4.0 3.960 4.224 5.280 9.051 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 1.627 0.904 0.530 0.327
5.0 4.950 5.280 6.600 11.314 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.034 1.130 0.663 0.409
6.0 5.940 6.336 7.920 13.577 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 2.441 1.356 0.796 0.491
7.0 6.930 7.392 9.240 15.840 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 2.848 1.582 0.928 0.573
8.0 7.920 8.448 10.560 18.103 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 3.254 1.808 1.061 0.655
9.0 8.910 9.504 11.880 20.366 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 3.661 2.034 1.193 0.737
10.0 9.900 10.560 13.200 22.629 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 4.068 2.260 1.326 0.818
11.0 10.890 11.616 14.520 24.891 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 4.475 2.486 1.458 0.900
12.0 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 4.881 2.712 1.591 0.982
13.0 12.870 13.728 17.160 29.417 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 5.288 2.938 1.724 1.064
14.0 13.860 14.784 18.480 31.680 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 5.695 3.164 1.856 1.146
15.0 14.850 15.840 19.800 33.943 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 6.102 3.390 1.989 1.228
16.0 15.840 16.896 21.120 36.206 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 6.509 3.616 2.121 1.310
17.0 16.830 17.952 22.440 38.469 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 6.915 3.842 2.254 1.391
18.0 17.820 19.008 23.760 40.731 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 7.322 4.068 2.387 1.473
19.0 18.810 20.064 25.080 42.994 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 7.729 4.294 2.519 1.555
20.0 19.800 21.120 26.400 45.257 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 8.136 4.520 2.652 1.637
21.0 20.790 22.176 27.720 47.520 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 8.543 4.746 2.784 1.719
22.0 21.780 23.232 29.040 49.783 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 8.949 4.972 2.917 1.801
23.0 22.770 24.288 30.360 52.046 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 9.356 5.198 3.050 1.883
24.0 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 9.763 5.424 3.182 1.964
25.0 24.750 26.400 33.000 56.571 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 10.170 5.650 3.315 2.046
26.0 25.740 27.456 34.320 58.834 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 10.576 5.876 3.447 2.128
27.0 26.730 28.512 35.640 61.097 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 10.983 6.102 3.580 2.210
28.0 27.720 29.568 36.960 63.360 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 11.390 6.328 3.713 2.292
29.0 28.710 30.624 38.280 65.623 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 11.797 6.554 3.845 2.374
30.0 29.700 31.680 39.600 67.886 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 12.204 6.780 3.978 2.455

User Manual 449

User Manual 450
Very inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
   C
I 2 3 
 I   I  C  I  C   I 1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.176.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.177.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505 tr = 4.678
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 2.339 2.495 3.119 5.346 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.130 0.073 0.051 0.041
1.0 4.678 4.990 6.237 10.693 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.260 0.146 0.102 0.082
2.0 9.356 9.980 12.475 21.385 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.520 0.291 0.204 0.163
3.0 14.034 14.970 18.712 32.078 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 0.780 0.437 0.306 0.245
4.0 18.712 19.959 24.949 42.770 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.040 0.583 0.408 0.326
5.0 23.390 24.949 31.187 53.463 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.299 0.728 0.510 0.408
6.0 28.068 29.939 37.424 64.155 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 1.559 0.874 0.612 0.489
7.0 32.746 34.929 43.661 74.848 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 1.819 1.020 0.714 0.571
8.0 37.424 39.919 49.899 85.541 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.079 1.165 0.815 0.652
9.0 42.102 44.909 56.136 96.233 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 2.339 1.311 0.917 0.734
10.0 46.780 49.899 62.373 106.926 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 2.599 1.457 1.019 0.815
11.0 51.458 54.889 68.611 117.618 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 2.859 1.602 1.121 0.897
12.0 56.136 59.878 74.848 128.311 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 3.119 1.748 1.223 0.978
13.0 60.814 64.868 81.085 139.003 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 3.379 1.893 1.325 1.060
14.0 65.492 69.858 87.323 149.696 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 3.638 2.039 1.427 1.141
15.0 70.170 74.848 93.560 160.389 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 3.898 2.185 1.529 1.223
16.0 74.848 79.838 99.797 171.081 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 4.158 2.330 1.631 1.304
17.0 79.526 84.828 106.035 181.774 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 4.418 2.476 1.733 1.386
18.0 84.204 89.818 112.272 192.466 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 4.678 2.622 1.835 1.468
19.0 88.882 94.807 118.509 203.159 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 4.938 2.767 1.937 1.549
20.0 93.560 99.797 124.747 213.851 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 5.198 2.913 2.039 1.631
21.0 98.238 104.787 130.984 224.544 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 5.458 3.059 2.141 1.712
22.0 102.916 109.777 137.221 235.237 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 5.718 3.204 2.243 1.794
23.0 107.594 114.767 143.459 245.929 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 5.977 3.350 2.344 1.875
24.0 112.272 119.757 149.696 256.622 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 6.237 3.496 2.446 1.957
25.0 116.950 124.747 155.933 267.314 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 6.497 3.641 2.548 2.038
26.0 121.628 129.737 162.171 278.007 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 6.757 3.787 2.650 2.120
27.0 126.306 134.726 168.408 288.699 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 7.017 3.933 2.752 2.201
28.0 130.984 139.716 174.645 299.392 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 7.277 4.078 2.854 2.283
29.0 135.662 144.706 180.883 310.085 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 7.537 4.224 2.956 2.364
30.0 140.340 149.696 187.120 320.777 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 7.797 4.370 3.058 2.446

User Manual 451

User Manual 452
Extremely inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
  I  C 2 3 
 I   I  C  I  C   I 1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 3.004 3.204 4.005 6.866 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.124 0.049 0.030 0.024
1.0 6.008 6.409 8.011 13.733 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.247 0.098 0.060 0.048
2.0 12.016 12.817 16.021 27.465 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.495 0.196 0.119 0.095
3.0 18.024 19.226 24.032 41.198 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 0.742 0.295 0.179 0.143
4.0 24.032 25.634 32.043 54.930 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 0.990 0.393 0.239 0.191
5.0 30.040 32.043 40.053 68.663 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.237 0.491 0.298 0.238
6.0 36.048 38.451 48.064 82.395 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 1.484 0.589 0.358 0.286
7.0 42.056 44.860 56.075 96.128 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 1.732 0.688 0.418 0.334
8.0 48.064 51.268 64.085 109.861 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 1.979 0.786 0.477 0.381
9.0 54.072 57.677 72.096 123.593 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 2.227 0.884 0.537 0.429
10.0 60.080 64.085 80.107 137.326 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 2.474 0.982 0.597 0.476
11.0 66.088 70.494 88.117 151.058 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 2.722 1.081 0.656 0.524
12.0 72.096 76.902 96.128 164.791 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 2.969 1.179 0.716 0.572
13.0 78.104 83.311 104.139 178.523 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 3.216 1.277 0.776 0.619
14.0 84.112 89.719 112.149 192.256 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 3.464 1.375 0.835 0.667
15.0 90.120 96.128 120.160 205.989 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 3.711 1.474 0.895 0.715
16.0 96.128 102.537 128.171 219.721 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 3.959 1.572 0.955 0.762
17.0 102.136 108.945 136.181 233.454 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 4.206 1.670 1.014 0.810
18.0 108.144 115.354 144.192 247.186 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 4.453 1.768 1.074 0.858
19.0 114.152 121.762 152.203 260.919 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 4.701 1.866 1.134 0.905
20.0 120.160 128.171 160.213 274.651 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 4.948 1.965 1.194 0.953
21.0 126.168 134.579 168.224 288.384 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 5.196 2.063 1.253 1.001
22.0 132.176 140.988 176.235 302.117 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 5.443 2.161 1.313 1.048
23.0 138.184 147.396 184.245 315.849 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 5.691 2.259 1.373 1.096
24.0 144.192 153.805 192.256 329.582 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 5.938 2.358 1.432 1.144
25.0 150.200 160.213 200.267 343.314 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 6.185 2.456 1.492 1.191
26.0 156.208 166.622 208.277 357.047 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 6.433 2.554 1.552 1.239
27.0 162.216 173.030 216.288 370.779 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 6.680 2.652 1.611 1.286
28.0 168.224 179.439 224.299 384.512 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 6.928 2.751 1.671 1.334
29.0 174.232 185.847 232.309 398.245 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 7.175 2.849 1.731 1.382
30.0 180.240 192.256 240.320 411.977 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 7.422 2.947 1.790 1.429

User Manual 453

User Manual 454
Moderately inverse curve
T  M  A  B

D

E  tr
 3
TRECAIDA  M 
 I  C  I  C
2
 I  C  2
 I  I  I   I 1
  0   0   0   I 
 0
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271 tr = 1.2
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 0.600 0.640 0.800 1.371 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.166 0.123 0.104 0.095
1.0 1.200 1.280 1.600 2.743 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.332 0.247 0.209 0.191
2.0 2.400 2.560 3.200 5.486 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.665 0.493 0.417 0.382
3.0 3.600 3.840 4.800 8.229 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 0.997 0.740 0.626 0.572
4.0 4.800 5.120 6.400 10.971 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.329 0.986 0.835 0.763
5.0 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.662 1.233 1.043 0.954
6.0 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 1.994 1.479 1.252 1.145
7.0 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.327 1.726 1.461 1.335
8.0 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 2.659 1.972 1.669 1.526
9.0 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 2.991 2.219 1.878 1.717
10.0 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.324 2.465 2.087 1.908
11.0 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 3.656 2.712 2.295 2.099
12.0 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 3.988 2.958 2.504 2.289
13.0 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.321 3.205 2.713 2.480
14.0 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 4.653 3.451 2.921 2.671
15.0 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 4.986 3.698 3.130 2.862
16.0 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 5.318 3.945 3.339 3.052
17.0 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 5.650 4.191 3.547 3.243
18.0 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 5.983 4.438 3.756 3.434
19.0 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 6.315 4.684 3.965 3.625
20.0 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 6.647 4.931 4.173 3.815
21.0 25.200 26.880 33.600 57.600 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 6.980 5.177 4.382 4.006
22.0 26.400 28.160 35.200 60.343 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 7.312 5.424 4.591 4.197
23.0 27.600 29.440 36.800 63.086 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 7.645 5.670 4.799 4.388
24.0 28.800 30.720 38.400 65.829 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 7.977 5.917 5.008 4.579
25.0 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 8.309 6.163 5.217 4.769
26.0 31.200 33.280 41.600 71.314 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 8.642 6.410 5.425 4.960
27.0 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 8.974 6.656 5.634 5.151
28.0 33.600 35.840 44.800 76.800 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 9.306 6.903 5.843 5.342
29.0 34.800 37.120 46.400 79.543 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 9.639 7.149 6.051 5.532
30.0 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 9.971 7.396 6.260 5.723

User Manual 455

User Manual 456
24.3 USER CURVES
The user can programme FOUR curves by entering the desired points into the “User curve 1”
to “User curve 4” user curve nodes.
The time corresponding to each I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020
seconds. These times correspond to the curve of index 1, but as in curves IEC, the user can
programme a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the overcurrent protection settings.
It is not necessary to programme all the points on the curve, the unit will assign the time
of the first programmed point to all those I/Ia of a lower value and the last programmed
time to all those of a higher I/Ia, that is to say, the graph will generally start and
finish with straight, horizontal lines. The points between the two programmed points will
be calculated by the console as a lineal interpolation.
I/Ia values for times which are superior to that which corresponds to an inferior I/Ia are
not admitted, that is to say, ascendant straight lines are not allowed.
The nodes for the configuration of the curves are:
 PROT/RUSC1 user curve 1

Each node uses 3 settings frames, into which the milliseconds of activation for each I/IAJ
are entered, with a range of 20 to 600,000 milliseconds.
 Crv0 (Low Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.03
and 1.05 I/IAJ ratios.
 Crv1 (Medium Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.1
and 4 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.1.
 Crv1 (High Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 4 and
20 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of 0.5.
The programming carried out via PacFactory is done using the programming screen shown in
Figure 221, in which:
 The times of the curves different points are entered (left table) and the curve’s
graph is displayed (right table).
 Interpolate points of the curve and enter the known points. By clicking on
“Calculate Curve Values”, the missing values are calculated for the curve.
 Reset the curve values “Reset PC column”.
 “Save values”. Saves the values entered in order to send them to unit.
 “Close”. Returns to the general settings screen, from where they can be sent to the
unit.

User Manual 457
Figure 221. User curve configuration screen
An example is shown below
I/Ia 2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

User Manual 458
MEASUREMENT LIST 
25. MEASUREMENT LIST

The following tables show the list of available measurements. If the model doesn´t have a
function, the measurements of that unit are no available.
Table 243. ki2 accumulatede
Measurement Node Instance Data Attribute Refresh (ms)

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsC 1000
Table 244. Temperature

Temperature CTSU 1 Temp net 1000
Table 245. Power supply

Power Supply GENLLN0 1 PSup net 1000
Table 246. Internal battery

Internal battery LPHD 1 IntBat net 1000
Table 247. THD

THD phase A Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsA 100
THD phase B Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsB 100
THD phase C Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsC 100
THD Neutral Current MHAI 1 ThdA neut 100
THDAverage Current MHAI 1 ThdA net 100
THD phase A Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsA 100
THD phase B Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsB 100
THD phase C Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsC 100
THD Neutral Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV neut 100
THD Averagel Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV net 100
Table 248. Energy counter

Active Energy Out MMTR 1 SupWh actVal 100
Active Energy In MMTR 1 DmdWh actVal 100
Reactive Energy Out MMTR 1 SupVArh actVal 100
Reactive Energy In MMTR 1 DmdVArh actVal 100

Manual de usuario 459
Table 249. General measurements

VA MMXU 1 PhV phsA 100
VB MMXU 1 PhV phsB 100
VC MMXU 1 PhV phsC 100
VN MMXU 1 PhV neut 100
AVERAGE V MMXU 1 PhV net 100
VAB MMXU 1 PPV phsAB 100
VBC MMXU 1 PPV phsBC 100
VCA MMXU 1 PPV phsCA 100
AVERAGE U MMXU 1 PPV net 100
IN MMXU 1 A neut 100
IA MMXU 1 A phsA 100
IB MMXU 1 A phsB 100
IC MMXU 1 A phsC 100
INS MMXU 1 A sneut 100
AVERAGE I MMXU 1 A net 100
ACTIVE POWER P MMXU 1 TotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q MMXU 1 TotVAr mag 100
POWER S MMXU 1 TotVA mag 100
Frequency MMXU 1 Hz net 2
Phase A Active Power MMXU 1 W phsA 100
Phase B Active Power MMXU 1 W phsB 100
Phase C Active Power MMXU 1 W phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsC 100
Phase A S Power MMXU 1 VA phsA 100
Phase B S Power MMXU 1 VA phsB 100
Phase C S Power MMXU 1 VA phsC 100
Fault phase A Current MMXU 1 FltA phsA 1000
Fault phase B Current MMXU 1 FltA phsB 1000
Fault phase C Current MMXU 1 FltA phsC 1000
Fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 FltA neut 1000
Cosine phi rms phase A MMXU 1 PF phsA 100
Cosine phi rms phase B MMXU 1 PF phsB 100
Cosine phi rms phase C MMXU 1 PF phsC 100
Cosine phi rms average MMXU 1 PF net 100
Average Power Factor MMXU 1 TotPF mag 100
Max. fault phase A Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsC 1000
Max. fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA neut 1000

Tabla 250. Breaker 2 measurements (Only LD2)
Medida Nodo Instancia Dato Atributo Refresco (ms)

IA2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsA 2
IB2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsB 2
IC2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsC 2
IA2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsA 2
IB2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsB 2
IC2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsC 2
Fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsA 2
Fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsB 2
Fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsC 2
THD phase A2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsA 2
THD phase B2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsB 2
THD phase C2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsC 2
Max. fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsC 1000
Table 251. Fundamental measurements

IA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsA 100
IB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsB 100
IC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsC 100
IN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA neut 100
VA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsA 100
VB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsB 100
VC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsC 100
VN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV neut 100
Cosine phi phase A (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsA 100
Cosine phi phase B (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsB 100
Cosine phi phase C (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsC 100
Cosine phi average (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF net 100
ACTIVE POWER P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVAr mag 100
POWER S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVA mag 100
Phase A Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsA 100
Phase B Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsB 100
Phase C Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsC 100
Phase A S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsA 100
Phase B S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsB 100
Phase C S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsC 100

Table 252. Sequences

I0 MSQI 1 SeqA c1 2
V0 MSQI 1 SeqV c1 2
I1 MSQI 1 SeqA c2 2
V1 MSQI 1 SeqV c2 2
I2 MSQI 1 SeqA c3 2
V2 MSQI 1 SeqV c3 2
Table 253. Differential

Diff. Current phase A PDIF 1 DifAClc phsA 2
Diff. Current phase B PDIF 1 DifAClc phsB 2
Diff. Current phase C PDIF 1 DifAClc phsC 2
Restr. Current phase A PDIF 1 RstA phsA 2
Restr. Current phase B PDIF 1 RstA phsB 2
Restr. Current phase C PDIF 1 RstA phsC 2
Diff. Current Fault A PDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsA 1000
Diff. Current Fault B PDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsB 1000
Diff. Current Fault C PDIF 1 FltDifAClc phsC 1000
Restr. Current Fault A PDIF 1 FltRstA phsA 1000
Restr. Current Fault B PDIF 1 FltRstA phsB 1000
Restr. Current Fault C PDIF 1 FltRstA phsC 1000
2nd Harm. Diff. Current A DFPHAR 1 RstA phsA 2
2nd Harm. Diff. Current B DFPHAR 1 RstA phsB 2
2nd Harm. Diff. Current C DFPHAR 1 RstA phsC 2
Table 254. Historic

Imax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsA 1000
Imin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinAmps phsA 1000
Imax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsB 1000
Imin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinAmps phsB 1000
Imax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsC 1000
Imin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinAmps phsC 1000
Vmax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsA 1000
Vmin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinVolts phsA 1000
Vmax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsB 1000
Vmin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinVolts phsB 1000
Vmax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsC 1000
Vmin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinVolts phsC 1000
VAmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxVA net 1000
VAmin Historic MSTA 1 MinVA net 1000
Wmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxW net 1000
Wmin Historic MSTA 1 MinW net 1000
VAr max Historic MSTA 1 MaxVAr net 1000
VAr min Historic MSTA 1 MinVAr net 1000

Table 255. Locator

Fault Distance RFLO 1 FltDiskm net 100
Table 256. Recloser

Total Reclose Counter RREC 1 RecCnt actVal 100
1st 3phase Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec1P3Cnt actVal 100
Second Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec2Cnt actVal 100
Third Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec3Cnt actVal 100
Fourth Reclose Counter RREC 1 Rec4Cnt actVal 100
Table 257. Synchronism

V synchro RSYN 1 PhV net 100
Sychro Frequency RSYN 1 Hz mag 2
V synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifVClc mag 2
Ang synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifAngClc mag 2
Hz synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifHzClc mag 2
Table 258. Breaker

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 1 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsC 100

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
26. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is
detected in any of the elements or cards, an alarm is generated.
The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the communications between the
cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.
The detected errors are shown in:
 Status report
 Incident report
 Sequence of events (SOE)
 Digital outputs and CPU hardware alarm output.
 IHMI leds and status leds
The errors can be critical and non critical, depending on the effect they have in the
device.
Critical errors
Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to
this signal, the cause that produced the signal will be indicated.
If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition
to the signal acts on:
 Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general
status. If the LED is green, it indicates that everything is correct, while if it
is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
 CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general
status. If the LED is active (common terminal – NO), it indicates that everything
is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it indicates a
critical error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
The causes that produce errors are:
 CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU
 Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card.
 I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
 Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the
communications between the CPU and the transformers card.
 I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication
between the CPU and an I/O card. Additionally, it will indicate the card which has
suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with
the card with the address x.
 Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the
communications between the CPU and the unit’s front card.
 Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data
exchange memory between the CPU and the transformers card.
 Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data
exchange memory between the CPU and the I/O cards.
 Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the
unit’s settings.
 FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
 Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the
unit’s memory.

 Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers
card AD converter.
 Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the
transformers card reference voltages..
 Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation
of at least one of the I/O cards’ relays.
 I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not
coincide with the unit’s correct configuration.
 General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels.
 For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but
not detected in the unit. This may be because it is not assembled or because it
has an error. Equivalent to the current communication error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by
the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by
the user has been detected in an address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay
check).
Non critical errors
These errors have a limited effect on the device.
 RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time
clock.
 Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous
measurement monitoring has been detected in the transformers card.
 Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a
configuration failure. Indicates that the frequency measurement of the signals
being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the unit is
configured as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz;
or that the unit is configured as 60 Hz and the signals being injected are less
than 55 Hz.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the
security levels and that the data may be lost at shutdown.
 Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are
not correct.
 Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the
configuration of the unit’s time setting.
26.1 ERROR DETECTION
The error detection can be made by any of the indicated ways.
Status report:
Figure 222 shows the screen of the PacFactory that show the available check signals.
The example screen shows activation of critical error (HW error), generated by I/O
configuration error (card 2 is not detected). It also indicates Internal battery failure.
On the other hand, it shows I/O card 1 is correct.
Incident reports and sequence of events:

The available check signals are shown in both messages.

Led and digital outputs:

The leds and digital output can be configured with any of the error signals
Status Led and critical error output:

Colour front LED and CPU relay are activated when a critical error is detected. They are
not configurable.
Figure 222 Device checks screen
26.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the device status.
 If the device is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the device is well
supplied, contact the technical service
 If the device is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check
which type of error it is
 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error
persists after turning the unit off and on, contact the technical service.
 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements,
and if they are correct, turn off and on the unit; if the error does not
disappear, contact the technical service.
 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists,
contact the technical service.
 If error in the setting is shown, send the settings again. If error
persists contact the technical service

Parque Tecnológico de Bizkaia • Edificio 110
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944 039 345
technology@ingeteam.com
Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A.

www.ingeteam.com

UME INGEPAC EF LD Eng PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

UME INGEPAC EF LD Eng PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

© All rights reserved. No part of

Ingeteam Power Technology reserves

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................... 9

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

3.2.2 Quadrilateral ......................................................... 80

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

4. BREAKER ............................................................. 240

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

10. CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 328

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

17. IEC 61850 COMMANDS ................................................ 372

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

23.4 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................... 431

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Table 1 shows the features available in each of the different models.

LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Breaker status logic    

(1) In LD3 model, these units are not directional.

Available analog inputs in models

The LD0 and LD3 models only operate on a breaker.

The LD1 and LD2 models operate on two breakers.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.2 MODEL ENCODING

EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis

Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”

1.3 USER INTERFACE

Local. The front board is equipped with:

 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

 5 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF)

1.4 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

The PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is a redundancy communication protocol defined in

1.5 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.6 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

1.7.2 Power supply

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 7 Double power supply

1.7.3 Input/output cards

Figure 8 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs

Figure 9 Module 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs

Figure 10 Module 16 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

 Module 4 (Figure 11): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

Figure 11 Module 32 inputs

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Standard configuration of analogue inputs

Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Figure 13 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 14 Módule 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) y 4 digital outputs

Figure 15 Módule 8 inputs, 8 outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.